HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller

V900R008C12

BSS Feature Configuration Guide
(Based on MML)
Issue

02

Date

2010-09-20

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address:

Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

support@huawei.com

Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

About This Document

About This Document

Purpose
This document provides the information on how to configure, modify, and verify the features
on the Local Maintenance Terminal and the BSC6000 Local Maintenance Terminal.

Product Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

Product Name

Product Model

Product Version

BSC

BSC6000

V900R008C12

BTS

BTS3012

V300R008

BTS3012AE

V300R008

BTS3006C

V300R008

BTS3002E

V300R008

DBS3036

V300R008

BTS3036

V300R008

BTS3036A

V300R008

DBS3900 GSM

V300R008

BTS3900 GSM

V300R008

BTS3900A GSM

V300R008

BTS3900B GSM

V300R008

BTS3900E GSM

V300R008

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

About This Document

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l

Technical support engineers

l

Maintenance engineers

Organization
1 Changes in BSS Feature Configuration Guide (Based on MML)
This describes the changes in the various versions of BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based
on MML).
2 Configuring the Multiband Network
A multiband network consists of multiple frequency bands. The combined multiband network
can increase the utilization of frequency resources on the radio network.
3 Configuring the Speech Version
This describes how to configure the speech version on the Local Maintenance Terminal.
4 Configuring ALC
Automatic level control (ALC) adjusts the gain of digital voice signals on the uplink and
downlink every 20 ms and changes the amplitude of digital voice signals in static or dynamic
mode. This keeps the voice level of the entire network in a predefined state, prevents the volume
fluctuation of the two parties during a call, and reduces interference among the normal calls.
5 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation
Acoustic echo cancellation (AEC) can decrease acoustic echo caused by the MS, thus improving
the network quality and voice quality.
6 Configuring Cell Broadcast
Cell broadcast is a teleservice that periodically broadcasts messages to all the MSs in a specified
area. With cell broadcast, the mobile network operators can provide special services for users.
7 Configuring Ciphering
The ciphering algorithm encrypts the subscriber information such as the voice and data so that
the information is securely transmitted on the Um interface.
8 Configuring Frequency Hopping
With this feature, wanted signals are transmitted by switching a carrier among many frequencies
according to the specified sequences. Frequency hopping involves RF hopping and baseband
hopping.Frequency hopping is a spread-spectrum technology, which has the features such as
resistance to interference, anti-attenuation, and high security. The application of frequency
hopping in the GSM supresses the interference and increases the system capacity.
9 Configuring eMLPP
The eMLPP is a supplementary service offered by the GSM system. The eMLPP service allows
a subscriber to initiate calls with different priorities. The network side employs different channel
iv

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

About This Document

assignment strategies for the subscribers according to the priorities. If the network is congested,
the call with higher priority is served preferably.
10 Configuring Priority-Based Resource Reservation
With priority-based resource reservation, the system reserves a certain number of TCHFs for
the high-priority users to ensure their QoS. By using this function, operators can provide services
of different levels for users with different priorities, thus increasing the operators' revenues.
11 Configuring Network Support SAIC
This describes how to configure the Network Support SAIC. The Single Antenna Interference
Cancellation (SAIC) is a technique for restraining the co-channel interference and adjacentchannel interference. This technique is especially adopted in the single antenna scenario to
reduce the interference on the reception of downlink signals.
12 Configuring Active Power Control
This describes how to configure the active power control. After an MS accesses the network or
an intra-BSC handover is performed successfully, the BSC controls the uplink and downlink
power so that the MS and the BTS transmit signals at the proper power. In this way, power
control can be performed in time. Through the active power control, the system interference is
reduced, the QoS is improved, and the power consumption of the BTS and the MS is decreased.
13 Configuring Robust Air Interface Signalling
With the robust air interface signalling function, when the radio quality is poor, the antiinterference capability of the FACCH and SACCH is improved through repeated sending of the
FACCH and SACCH frames. In this manner, the MS and BSC can receive the signaling
messages more successfully. The robust air interface signalling function includes repeated
sending of the FACCH frames in the downlink and the repeated sending of the SACCH frames
in the uplink and downlink.
14 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination
With the BSS paging coordination function, the network can send the CS domain paging message
to an MS in the packet transfer state on the PACCH if the Gs interface is not configured between
the MSC/VLR and the SGSN. In this manner, the MS in the packet transfer state can respond
to the CS domain paging.
15 Configuring a Co-BCCH Cell
Co-BCCH cell is realized on the basis of the principles of the concentric cell. The TRXs on the
GSM900M (or GSM850M) are configured in the underlaid subcell, which is used to expand the
coverage area; and the TRXs on the DCS1800M (or PCS1900M) are configured in the overlaid
subcell, which is used to absorb the traffic. The TRXs on two bands are distributed in the overlaid
subcell and underlaid subcell that share one BCCH TRX. Co-BCCH cell increases the traffic
capacity of a cell, decreases handovers and interference, and improves the continuous coverage
and sparse coverage in hot spots.
16 Configuring 2G/3G Interoperability
The 2G/3G interoperability feature enables an MS to be handed over to or reselected to the GSM
network if the serving cell of the MS is not covered by the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA network or
if the serving WCDMA/TD-SCDMA cell is in a weak coverage area. In addition, an MS can be
handed over to or reselected to the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA network if the MS requires the PS
services. When a dual-mode MS enters the coverage of the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA network
again, or the MS detects that the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA cell is better than the serving GSM cell,
Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

v

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

About This Document

the MS can be handed over to or reselected to the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA network if the handover
or cell reselection conditions are met. Then, the MS can use the abundant services provided by
the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA network.
17 Configuring TRX Cooperation
With this feature, when the BCCH TRX or the TRX involved in baseband FH is faulty, the cell
automatically rectifies the faults. Thus, the services in the cell are not affected before the faulty
TRX is replaced. Based on the type of faulty TRXs and the handling method, the TRX
cooperation is classified into BCCH TRX cooperation and baseband FH TRX cooperation. For
the non-baseband FH cell, only the BCCH TRX cooperation occurs. For the baseband FH cell,
both BCCH TRX cooperation and baseband FH TRX cooperation are likely to occur.
18 Configuring Cell Frequency Scan
The cell frequency scan function enables the scanning of the levels of the uplink signals at
specific frequencies on a specific channel of a cell. The scanned results of the signal levels
provides references for engineers to select proper operating frequencies.
19 Configuring High-Speed Signaling Links
The BSC uses the high-speed signaling when the 64 kbit/s signaling fail to meet the signaling
requirements on the A interface due to high traffic volume. With this feature, the N timeslots in
an E1 are bound for the physical transmission of the SS7 signaling. Therefore, the bandwidth
of a signaling link is extended to N x 64 kit/s and a maximum of 2 Mbit/s E1 bandwidth (N =
31) can be used.
20 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points
With this feature, a physical node is logically classified into multiple signaling points. Each
signaling point can be independently connected to other signaling points and thus meets the
signaling link requirements for large capacity processing of the BSC6000. In addition, the
requirements for the signaling networking capability of the MSC are reduced because the highspeed signaling technology is not used. Thus, the operators' investment is saved.
21 Configuring DTX and DRX
Discontinuous transmission (DTX) and discontinuous reception (DRX) increases the standby
time and call duration of an MS.
22 Configuring Location Service
Location sevice (LCS) enables the network to provide various services for an MS based on the
location of the MS. These services include weather forecasts, trip scheduling, emergency
assistance, stock information, business planning, and transportation conditions. The simple
location service can locate an MS based on the information obtained during single-user message
tracing.
23 Configuring TFO
The TFO feature can reduce the speech signal degradation caused by tandem operation, thus
improving the voice quality. When the calling MS and the called MS use the same speech version,
the TFO link is established through the in-band signaling negotiation. In addition, the least
significant bit (or the second least significant bit) is stolen to seize the 8 kbit/s (or 16 kbit/s)
sublink of the PCM transmission link for transparent transmission of TFO frames and bypass
TC encoding/decoding. In this manner, the speech signal is encoded at the MS initiating the call
and decoded at the MS terminating the call for only once. Thus, the degradation of the speech
signals due to tandem operation is reduced and the voice quality is improved. This process is
called tandem free operation (TFO).
vi

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

Ltd. Then. and the receive effect is much better than that of none receiver diversity and that of two-way receiver diversity. To implement rapid PS access after cell reselection. With this feature. the BTS can enable this feature through data configuration. 28 Configuring NACC NACC refers to network-assisted cell reselection. and thus improves the resource utilization. and the cells configured Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. This describes how to configure NACC on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 30 Configuring Packet Performance Improvement This describes how to configure packet performance improvement on the external PCU maintenance console or Local Maintenance Terminal. the downlink coverage is improved. the 4-way receiver diversity technology allows one TRX module to receive the uplink signals from four RX channels and then combine the uplink signals to achieve better signal quality and demodulation performance. two TRXs are integrated into one TRX module.. This provides two independent multi-path signals for the downlink. That is. Especially when Flex Abis is enabled in multi-cell large capacity BTSs. Thus. the service interruption time due to the cell reselection is minimized. and the quality of the receive signal is improved. 26 Configuring 4-Way Receive Diversity With appropriate design. the diversity gain is obtained. In this way. In this way. vii . and radio resources are fully utilized. cells. 27 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment SDCCH dynamic adjustment is to dynamically adjust the number of SDCCHs according to the load of the TCHs and SDCCHs. The combiner combines the radio signals of the same frequency and same phrase from two TRXs. cascading BTSs. Therefore. 29 Configuring NC2 The network-controlled cell reselection (NC2) refers to the situation that the MS in packet transfer mode can be controlled by the network to reselect a cell according to the measurement report. When the DTRU works in single TRX mode. the BSC sends the system information about the target cell to the MS before cell reselection. and services.This describes how to configure SDCCH dynamic adjustment on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Therefore.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) About This Document 24 Configuring PBT In the DTRU. the two TRXs on the DTRU transmit the correlated signals of the same carrier. 25 Configuring Transmit Diversity In the DTRU.This describes how to configure NC2 on the Local Maintenance Terminal. the effect of the initial configuration of the SDCCH on the system is minimized. the receive sensitivity is improved. two TRXs are integrated into a TRX module that is configured with a combiner. Flex Abis is an allocation mode of the transmission resources on the Abis interface. and the transmit power with high gain is achieved and the downlink coverage is extended. the downlink transmit power is higher than the transmit power of the original signals. 31 Configuring Flex Abis Flex Abis implements the sharing of the transmission resources on the Abis interface between different BTSs. In this way. the two independent multi-path signals are processed by the equalizer of the MS. the transmission resources on the Abis interface form a resource pool to share resources between CS services and PS services (including idle timeslots) and also between different cells or BTSs. and then transmits the combined signals.

the BSC performs the loopback on the cabinet group of the convergent BTS. the BSC negotiates with the optical transmission equipment on the protection channel through the APS to switch traffic signals onto the protection channel. 39 Configuring Voice Quality Index viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 37 Configuring Dynamic MAIO Under the BTSs with large capacity. Through the MSC pool. 32 Configuring the MSC Pool With this feature.reduces the adjacentchannel and co-channel interference in the GSM system. the speech coding schemes of the calling MS and called MS are the same and thus no coding conversion is required. the BTSs that precede the breakpoint remain unchanged in networking mode whereas the BTSs that follow the breakpoint form a new chain connection in the reverse direction. The BTS ring topology is categorized into two types: Huawei BTS ring topology I and Huawei BTS ring topology II. the speech signals on the Abis interface are looped back to the MS without traveling around the NSS. a maximum of 32 MSCs form a resource pool to provide services for the subscribers under one group of BSCs. thus improving network performance. 38 Configuring Antenna Hopping This describes how to configure antenna hopping. the TC resources involved in the BSC local switch can be released. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . This optimizes the data reception of the MS from the main BCCH TRX and the data transmission of the main BCCH TRX. in the BSC local switch.With the dynamic MAIO. the transmission resources on the Abis interface can be used in an efficient way.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) About This Document with the EGPRS function. In addition. 33 Configuring BTS Ring Topology The ring networking mode is a special chain networking mode.. If there is a breakpoint on the ring. the downlink data on each TRX can be randomly transmitted on other TRXs. If a fault occurs on the working channel. if the calling MS and called MS are within the coverage of the same BTS or BTS group. and the lowest-level BTS is connected to the BSC through the transmission link. adjacent-channel or co-channel interference are likely to occur among channels because the frequency resources are insufficient and the tight frequency reuse is adopted. if the calling MS and called MS are under the same BSC. Several BTSs form a chain. the MAIO value is dynamically adjusted according to the current interference and the MAIO value with the minimum interference is assigned to the channel. Ltd. 36 Configuring BTS Local Switching With this feature. and thus the speech quality is improved. Therefore. With antenna hopping. when an MAIO is assigned to a channel under activation. the traffic on the BSC is evenly distributed to the MSCs in the pool according to the NRI or load balancing principle. In addition. APS can improve the stability and maintainability of the entire system. 34 Configuring APS The automatic protection switching (APS) function applies to optical port backup. one BSC can be connected to multiple MSCs at the same time. thus forming a ring. The APS configuration consists of configuring and verifying APS. 35 Configuring BSC Local Switching With this feature.

The networking reliability can be guaranteed by the active/standby mode. all the BTSs under one BSC synchronize with each other by adjusting the frame number. 43 Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP This describes how to configuring Inter-BSC signaling links on the current BSC and external BSC on the Local Maintenance Terminal. timeslot number. Power Optimization Based on Channel Type. thus improving the system capacity. ix . Therefore. The technologies such as channel assignment algorithm. It statistically multiplexes the traffic data. and power control also help to decrease the power consumption. It increases the reusability of BCCH frequencies and reduces the number of frequencies used by the BCCHs. different networking modes can be used on each interface in the BSS as required. DTX. PSU Smart Control. Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation and TRX Working Voltage Adjustment. Thus. 41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease This describes how to decrease the power consumption of various BTS parts through the use of a technology to decrease the overall BTS power consumption. the speech signals are received clearly at the peer end. 42 Configuring Tight BCCH Frequency Reuse The tight BCCH frequency reuse technology is applicable to the network with insufficient frequency resources. and bit offset in the timeslot to be the same through software. 45 Configuring Entire Network Synchronization This describes how to configure the DGPS in the BTS3012 or configure the USCU in the 3900 series base station or 3036 series base station to support the GPS function so that the entire network is synchronized. and Gb over IP.. 40 Configuring ANR Automatic noise restraint (ANR) reduces the background noise in the uplink speech signals and improves the signal noise ratio (SNR) and speech intelligibility. 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission This describes three types of IP transmission in the BSS: A over IP. 44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task The Soft-Synchronized Network feature realizes the synchronization through software. Abis over IP. dynamic frequency allocation and dynamic channel assignment can be adopted to minimize inter-cell co-channel and adjacent-channel collision. According to the network planning. Ltd. and link detection. By measuring the uplink VQI and downlink VQI. In a synchronous network. This greatly improves the frequency usage and increases the network capacity. load sharing. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. With this feature. the voice quality of the network is quantified. more frequencies can be used at the FH layer.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) About This Document The voice quality index (VQI) feature provides a direct method to measure the voice quality of the radio network. 47 Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization or HubBTS The Abis Transmission Optimization feature introduces the HDLC frame and HDLC channel without changing the physical transmission mode. Active Backup Power Control. The technologies used for intelligent power consumption decrease are as follows: TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown. the quality of IP transmission can be guaranteed by various QoS mechanisms. Meanwhile. Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization. which provides a reference for future network optimization. Intelligent Combiner Bypass. Timeslot-level Shutdown of the Power Amplifier.

In addition. or indoor coverage. the traffic on the BSC is evenly distributed to the SGSNs in the pool according to the network resource identifier (NRI) or load balancing principle. This feature implements the simplified operation function of the class A mobile phone. analyze the data. A subsite refers to a certain area physically covered by multiple RRU/RFUs that belong to the same BBU. a subscriber can send photos or browse websites during a call. or locate the fault on the M2000 client. subscribers can use the services that are similar to 3G services through the 2G network. 48 Configuring SGSN Pool This feature enables a maximum of 32 SGSNs to form a resource pool to provide services for the subscribers belonging to one group of BSCs. improve the coverage efficiency. one BSC can be connected to multiple SGSNs at the same time. 52 Configuring BTS in automatic planning mode Before the automatic planning of the BTS. which is also called a cascading cell. antenna system. a cascading cell can reduce handovers. such as the Voice Group Call Service (VGCS). RAN Sharing supports a maximum of four operators. the subscribers in a GSM network can enjoy services similar to those provided in a 3G network. Each operator has an independent CN (MSC and SGSN). and so on) in the GBSS network simultaneously. you need to preconfigure some parameters used by the algorithm on the M2000 client. 50 Configuring Multi-site Cell This feature enables the subsites in different physical sites to be set to a logical cell. The 3G network provides concurrent CS service and PS service. 51 Configuring IBCA IBCA algorithm is a channel assignment algorithm. the GSM-R has new features. tunnel. In addition. Compared with the original GSM system. 49 Configuring RAN Sharing On the condition that independency of CNs of multiple operators is maintained. in areas with insufficient 3G coverage. For details. Configuring BTS in automatic planning mode includes Configuring a BTS3900B GSM in automatic planning mode and Configuring a BTS3900E GSM in automatic planning mode 53 Configure DTM Dual Transfer Mode (DTM) is a 3GPP-defined standard function. the inter-site Um interface software synchronization or GPS synchronization should be enabled. DTM allows simultaneous transfer of CS service and PS service. Ltd.. the GPS synchronization requires the support from the hardware configuration. that is. To use the IBCA algorithm. and enhance the user experience. In the scenarios such as railway. see M2000 Operator Guide. which implements comprehensive management of all the resources in the GBSS. You can also query the progress and result of the automatic planning of the BTS. Voice Broadcast x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 54 Configuring VGCS/VBS This describes how to configure the VGCS/VBS. which has a remarkable effect on improving the utilization of frequency resources and expanding the network capacity. transmission. With DTM. concurrent CS services and PS services. In addition. and OM data on the HDLC channel to obtain a higher transmission gain through voice frame compression and multiplexing. The shared GBSS uses a uniform network management system. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . That is. BTS. With this feature.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) About This Document signaling data. RAN Sharing enables multiple operators to share one GBSS network so that they can use the resources (including the BSC.

In this way. 60 Configuring Half-Rate Half-rate indicates that the voice coding rate decreases by half based on the new coding algorithm. maximum bit rate (MBR). allocation/retention priority (ARP). 63 Configuring CS-3/CS-4 The CS-3/CS-4 function enables the BSC to automatically adjust the coding scheme to a higher one in the area with a low bit error rate based on the existing coding scheme of a GPRS MS and the transmission quality of the MS. a higher throughput is provided. The BSC dynamically adjusts the codec scheme adopted by the PDCH according to the uplink measurement report reported by the BTS.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) About This Document Service (VBS). and then adjust the voice encoding rate accordingly. The GSM-R can provide diversified voice dispatch services required in the private network. 62 Configuring Extended Dynamic Allocation(EDA) The EDA function enables the allocation of more uplink timeslots to an MS. and enhanced Multi-Level Precedence and Pre-emption (eMLPP) service. that is. In this manner. traffic handling priority (THP). transfer delay. The requirements for PS QoS are defined by QoS attributes. In this manner. which can be adjusted between full-rate speech version 3 and half-rate speech version 3 specified by the protocol. both the antiinterference capability of the radio communications system and the voice quality are improved. the codec scheme of the PDCH changes with the radio environment where the MS locates. In this way. and reliability. including the traffic class. xi . the quality of GPRS/EGPRS services on radio access network. the uplink rate of an EGPRS user can be dynamically adjusted according to the actual network status. 56 Configuring Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding The BSS supports nine codec schemes: MCS-1 to MCS-9. and carrier-to-interference (C/I) ratio. receive quality. 64 Configuring Network Operation Mode I Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 57 Configuring Concentric Cell A concentric cell is divided into an overlaid subcell and an underlaid subcell. 58 Configuring Extended Cell The application of extended cell breaks the coverage limit of 35 km of a GSM cell. Different frequency reuse patterns can be applied to the overlaid and underlaid subcells. Ltd.. thus improving the uplink throughput. 55 Configuring AMR The adaptive multi rate (AMR) is a speech encoding and decoding algorithm. the BTS and the MS can evaluate the interference on the radio network according to the measurements such as receive level. a physical channel can carry the services of two half-rate MSs instead of the services of a full-rate MS. With AMR. With the Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding function. 61 Configuring MS High Multislot Classes The function of MS high multislot classes enables the allocation of a maximum of five uplink/ downlink timeslots to an MS. thus increasing the uplink throughput. 59 PS QoS PS QoS refers to GPRS/EGPRS QoS. guaranteed bit rate (GBR). This helps operators to provide wider coverage in special areas. thus increasing the uplink/downlink throughput of an MS.

If half-rate channels are used over the Um interface. 73 Configuring 14.4 Kbps Circuit Switched Data Huawei GBSS supports the use of a single CS channel for transmitting PS services. 66 Configuring Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR) The EMR is the downlink measurement report (MR) of a new type introduced in R99. The AFC estimates the frequency offset between the frequency of each received burst and the standard frequency in real time. thus reducing the load of the BSC.. In this manner. In this manner.4 kbps CSD services. CCCHs. more measurement objects such as bit error probability (BEP) and frame erase ratio (FER) are included. the GBSS automatically switches the terrestrial TDM transmission link on the Abis interface to a backup satellite transmission link. Compared with the common MR. or PACCHs on the network side. the 8 kbit/s Ater resources are allocated. To enable the subscribers to communicate without interruption and to optimize the network performance. the handover technique is introduced to the GSM system.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) About This Document The function of network operation mode I enables the sending of the CS paging messages over PCCCHs. the BSC does not need to process the MRs. 68 Configuring Handover The service area of the GSM is composed of the cells with continuous coverage. 69 Configuring Flex Ater With the Flex Ater function. the performance of the power control algorithm and handover algorithm is improved. Then. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . If full-rate channels are used over the Um interface. the Ater resources are allocated according to the service type during a call connection. xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 71 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing The function of end-to-end MS signaling tracing enables the tracing of faults of an NE based on the collected information about specified users with only a small number of resources occupied. thus facilitating fault rectification. 72 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment The function of PDCH dynamic adjustment enables the automatic conversion between TCHs and PDCHs as required instead of configuring fixed PDCHs. thus maintaining the normal operation of the network. The MS monitors only one paging channel. Ltd. including the 14. 65 Configuring Pre-Processing of Measurement Report The function of pre-processing of measurement report enables the BTS to interpolate and filter measurement reports (MRs) and then report the results of the processed MRs to the BSC. 67 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction(AFC) The automatic frequency correction (AFC) function uses a special balancing algorithm to estimate the difference between the standard frequency and the frequency of the GMSK signal sent from the fast-moving MS to the BTS. the 16 kbit/s Ater resources are allocated. 70 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup When the active SDH transmission link is faulty due to a natural disaster. the estimated frequency offset is used to correct the RX working frequency of the BTS.

data loss. General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. For example. log in as user root. xiii . Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk. Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text. could result in minor or moderate injury..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) About This Document Conventions Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk. Italic Book titles are in italics.will result in death or serious injury.could result in equipment damage. Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. which if not avoided. Convention Description Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. and users are in boldface. folders. which if not avoided. performance degradation. Ltd. or unexpected results. Italic Command arguments are in italics. directories. which if not avoided. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Convention Description Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Boldface Names of files. [] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

. Key 2 Press the keys in turn. [ x | y | . GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.. Key 1... A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected. } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. For example.. For example. For example. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . [ x | y | . Convention Description Boldface Buttons. One item is selected. pressing Alt. click OK. Ltd. pressing Ctrl+Alt +A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently. A means the two keys should be pressed in turn. ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. For example. xiv Action Description Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer. tabs. Format Description Key Press the key. press Enter and press Tab.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) About This Document Convention Description { x | y | . Several items or no item can be selected. ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. parameters. { x | y | . window. > Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example.. choose File > Create > Folder. Keyboard Operations The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.. One item is selected or no item is selected... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. and dialog titles are in boldface. Mouse Operations The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. menus.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Issue 02 (2010-09-20) About This Document Action Description Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer.. Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position. xv . Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.

.

.................8-10 8.................................................................................................................................................................................13-1 Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..........................................................................................................................................8-6 8.............................................................................................................9-1 10 Configuring Priority-Based Resource Reservation.............................................................................................................................6 Changing RF FH to None FH...1 Configuring Cell Broadcast..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Contents Contents About This Document.....................2 Configuring an Enhanced Dual-Band Network.................................................................11-1 12 Configuring Active Power Control..............7-1 8 Configuring Frequency Hopping.....................................2 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast..................8-9 8...................8-8 8.........................3-1 4 Configuring ALC....10-1 11 Configuring Network Support SAIC.............................................................................2 Changing None FH to RF FH.......................................................5-1 6 Configuring Cell Broadcast..........4-1 5 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation........................1 Principles of Configuring the FH Cell...............8 Setting FH Mode to Hybrid FH...........................................................................................................................................................................2-2 2...........................8-10 8.......................................................................................................................................................................5 Changing Baseband FH to RF FH................7 Changing Baseband FH to None FH.....................................................................................................10 Configuring MA Group..........................................8-1 8..................................................................................................................................3 Changing None FH to Baseband FH................................................2-6 3 Configuring the Speech Version.......................... xvii ....................................................................................................................................................................................................8-3 8................ Ltd.................................................4 Changing RF FH to Baseband FH............................................................................................6-2 6....................................................1 Configuring a Multiband Network..............6-7 7 Configuring Ciphering..........................................8-12 8..........................................................................................................................................8-5 8........8-7 8......................................................................8-13 9 Configuring eMLPP........................................................................................iii 1 Changes in BSS Feature Configuration Guide (Based on MML)......2-1 2.......6-1 6..................................................1-1 2 Configuring the Multiband Network...............................9 Changing Hybrid FH to None FH....................12-1 13 Configuring Robust Air Interface Signalling........................................

..........................................................................15-2 15................................................................................................21-7 22 Configuring Location Service..........................................................1 Configuring Flex Abis........................................1 Co-BCCH Cell Configuration Principles.................................................................................22-2 22..............................................................................................................................................25-2 25.....................23-1 24 Configuring PBT........19-1 20 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points......................................................................................................................................................................................................Contents HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 14 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination.................................................................................18-1 19 Configuring High-Speed Signaling Links.............................................................................31-2 31..................................................3 Configuring a Co-BCCH Cell....................................................................................................................................................3 Configuring Dynamic PBT............. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) ..................22-1 22............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................24-3 24..............................................................................................................3 Configuring Dynamic Transmit Diversity........21-2 21..........................................2 Configuring DRX..................24-1 24.29-1 30 Configuring Packet Performance Improvement..........................15-2 15......................2 Configuring Transmit Diversity..................................................24-2 24.....................................................................................................28-1 29 Configuring NC2....27-1 28 Configuring NACC..................................................................................................................................................................15-3 16 Configuring 2G/3G Interoperability...............................1 Configuring Location Service...................31-1 31.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................2 Configuring Exclusive Timeslot................................25-6 25............................................................16-1 17 Configuring TRX Cooperation......................................................30-1 31 Configuring Flex Abis..............................................15-1 15.......2 Configuring Simple Location Service.....................................25-1 25......................................................................................................24-5 25 Configuring Transmit Diversity......................................................31-7 xviii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co...................21-1 21.................26-5 27 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment...........................20-1 21 Configuring DTX and DRX.................................................................................................................26-2 26...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1 Configuring DTX...........2 Preparations for the Co-BCCH Cell Configuration.................................................................. Ltd.....................................25-8 26 Configuring 4-Way Receive Diversity................................................................1 Installing Hardware (4-Way Receive Diversity)....................................................................2 Configuring 4-Way Receive Diversity.22-3 23 Configuring TFO..........1 Installing Hardware (Transmit Diversity).17-1 18 Configuring Cell Frequency Scan.....................14-1 15 Configuring a Co-BCCH Cell...................................26-1 26...........................................1 Installing Hardware (PBT).............2 Configuring PBT.................................

.........43-1 44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task...................2 Configuring the MSC Pool (A over IP)...........................................39-1 40 Configuring ANR.................. 32-4 33 Configuring BTS Ring Topology....................................32-1 32..........................................................................2 Changing Non-Ring Topology to Ring Topology.....................................................................................................41-3 41...............44-1 44................................................37-2 37..............................44-5 44....................................7 Collecting the Offset Information Between BTSs........................6 Verifying an Inter-BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task..........................................................................................................1 Precautions for Configuring Dynamic MAIO.............HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Contents 32 Configuring the MSC Pool...................................................................................................................33-2 33.......................................................................................................41-1 41..........44-12 44...............................................41-10 41..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................1 Configuring MSC Pool (A over TDM)........................................3 Querying BTS Ring Topology.............................................1 Configuring BTS Ring Topology............................6 Configuring Active Backup Power Control...44-3 44...............41-14 41.5 Creating an Inter-BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task......................................................1 Concepts Related to the Soft-Synchronized Network....................................................................................................................................... Ltd..............................................................................................................44-7 44............3 Configuring PSU Smart Control...............................................................................................................................................................................................5 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization....35-1 36 Configuring BTS Local Switching..............................................44-3 44.................................................. 33-5 33........................... 44-7 44...............................................................................................32-2 32........1 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown................................................................40-1 41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease...............................3 Configuring a Pair of Neighboring Cells of Intra-BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task......................33-1 33..................34-1 35 Configuring BSC Local Switching.............................................. 41-5 41..............................................................................4 Deleting a BTS from the Ring Topology..........................................................................................................33-7 33........................................................................................................................................................................44-11 44......... xix ..............................................................................................................................................................................................37-2 38 Configuring Antenna Hopping..............................................................41-7 41.........44-15 Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.....33-6 33.................................2 Configuring Intelligent Combiner Bypass........4 Configuring Power Optimization Based on Channel Type.....................................38-1 39 Configuring Voice Quality Index..........................................41-12 41....2 Configuring Dynamic MAIO.......................................................36-1 37 Configuring Dynamic MAIO...................8 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment...................................................41-9 41..............................................8 Synchronizing BTSs..........................................5 Manually Switching over BTS Ring Topology.....2 Creating an Intra-BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task..........................................................................................................7 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation............................42-1 43 Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP.41-15 42 Configuring Tight BCCH Frequency Reuse.....33-8 34 Configuring APS..........................................37-1 37.....4 Verifying an Intra-BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task.........................................................................................

.......................47-1 48 Configuring SGSN Pool..........................................................................................................................4 Configuring A over IP........................................................................................................................................................................................................................9 Deleting a Soft-Synchronized Network Task.........................46-2 46..........................5 Configuring the Cell that Enables the IBCA Algorithm Switch......................................................................49-7 49....................................................8 Configuring External Attributes of the BSC.......................................................48-1 49 Configuring RAN Sharing.........................................................................................................46-6 46..............................................................................................................................................51-14 51..4 Deleting a Location Group....51-13 51.................6 Binding the PCU and Operator...........................................................................................51-15 51...2 Configuring BTS Sharing..................................................................................................1 Adding a Location Group.............5 Binding the SGSN and Operator.......46-12 46.......................................................................51-4 51................................3 Binding the Cell and the Operator.......................................................................................................................................6 Configuring Gb over IP.........................................................................................................................................50-3 50.............................................1 Configuration Principles of IBCA...........................46-1 46.......44-16 45 Configuring Entire Network Synchronization........................9 Binding the external BSC and the External Cell.....5 Setting Binding Relations of Location Groups......Contents HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 44.5 Configuring Abis over IP.............................................................................................................................................................4 Binding the MSC and Operator.................................51-4 51.................51-10 51..50-4 50........................................................................................51-1 51...................49-11 50 Configuring Multi-site Cell.................... Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .............................................................................................1 Configuring Operator Information........2 Data Negotiated and Planned for Configuring IBCA..........50-7 51 Configuring IBCA..........49-8 49..........................49-1 49..............45-1 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission.................................................51-11 51.....9 Verifying and Deactivating RAN Sharing.......................................................................49-7 49.......................................................................8 Configuring the Distributed BTS TRX to Support RAN Sharing......50-5 50..51-12 51......................1 A over IP Configuration Data................................................50-5 50..........................................................................46-16 46........................................................................................................................................................................50-1 50.............................2 Configuring Parameters of Location Groups.......................................................................51-16 xx Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..............4 Configuring the IBCA Cell that Supports HWIII Power Control Algorithm.................. Ltd......3 Configuring IBCA...................................................................49-6 49.............................................................................................................................................7 Configuring RAN Sharing to Support Multiple CBCs...3 Verifying Configuration Information About Location Group............................................................................................................................................49-10 49................................................................................46-27 47 Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization or HubBTS...............................................................................7 Configuring the BTS Synchronization Mode............................10 Deactivating IBCA...3 Gb over IP Configuration Data...........................................................49-4 49.........................................................................6 Deleting Binding Relations of Location Groups..................................................................................................51-8 51................................................................................49-3 49...........................................49-5 49........................................................................................................2 Abis over IP Configuration Data....46-21 46......50-2 50..................................................................................................................6 Configuring an IBCA Neighboring Cell..............................................................

....................1 Configuring Streaming QoS(GBR).............................................55-1 56 Configuring Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding........................................7 Configuring Directed Retry........................................................68-3 68..............68-1 68..........................................................66-1 67 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction(AFC).........................................................................4 Configuring Load Handover...........................62-1 63 Configuring CS-3/CS-4............53-1 54 Configuring VGCS/VBS......................................................................................60-1 61 Configuring MS High Multislot Classes............................................................. xxi ....................................64-1 65 Configuring Pre-Processing of Measurement Report.................................................................................................................................................................................................1 Adding the BTS3900B GSM...................................... Ltd...................... 68-7 68............................................................68-15 68........................2 Adding the BTS3900E GSM..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................9 Configuring Better Cell Handover........................................................................65-1 66 Configuring Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR).........54-1 55 Configuring AMR........................................................................8 Configuring Chain Cell Handover............68-17 69 Configuring Flex Ater........................59-2 59.........................................................2 Configuring QoS ARP and THP......................63-1 64 Configuring Network Operation Mode I.............61-1 62 Configuring Extended Dynamic Allocation(EDA)....1 Configuring Basic Handover.........................................................................................................................................4 Configuring PoC QoS.....................................................................................................................................................................71-1 Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.........52-1 52.......................................................................................................................56-1 57 Configuring Concentric Cell.........................57-1 58 Configuring Extended Cell...................................................68-11 68...................................................................70-1 71 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing..................................... 52-2 52..68-10 68...............................................................5 Configuring Layered and Hierarchical Handover............................................69-1 70 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup...................................................................................................................................................................................................59-3 59.................................................3 Configuring PS Active Package Management...................................................................................................59-1 59..........................................................................58-1 59 PS QoS..................2 Configuring PBGT Handover..................................................................................................................................................................68-13 68................................68-14 68......... 68-8 68..........................HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Contents 52 Configuring BTS in automatic planning mode........................................52-4 53 Configure DTM...................................................................................................................................... 59-6 60 Configuring Half-Rate.........................6 Configuring Speed-Sensitive Handover..........................................................67-1 68 Configuring Handover...3 Configuring Signal Level Rapid Fall Handover...........................................59-5 59....................................................................................................................................................................................

................................................4 Kbps Circuit Switched Data......Contents HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 72 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment....72-1 73 Configuring 14...... Issue 02 (2010-09-20) ............................... Ltd.............................73-1 xxii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..................

.............................................24-3 Figure 25-1 Cable connections between the DTRU and the DDPU in the BTS3012/BTS3012AE in transmit diversity mode..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................39-2 Figure 39-2 Result of the user message tracing........................................................................6-6 Figure 6-2 Tracing the RSL Message at Abis Interface..........................................39-3 Figure 39-3 Message Browser window.................................... Ltd........................................................................................................................................................................................................HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Figures Figures Figure 6-1 Trace RSL Message on the Abis Interface dialog box.....................26-3 Figure 31-1 Configuration of BTS combined cabinets and cabinet groups....................................................6-6 Figure 6-3 Trace RSL Message on the Abis Interface dialog box............................................ ...............25-3 Figure 25-2 Cable connections between the DDPM and the DDRM in the BTS3006C in transmit diversity mode............................31-4 Figure 39-1 Trace User Message dialog box............................................................................. xxiii ...........................................................................6-11 Figure 6-4 Trace the RSL Message at Abis Interface dialog box..25-4 Figure 25-3 Cable connections between the DDPM and the DDRM in the BTS3002E in transmit diversity mode .........................................................25-5 Figure 25-4 Cable connections in the DBS3900 GSM in transmit diversity mode..........25-6 Figure 26-1 Connection between the DTRU and the DDPU in 4-way receive diversity mode..................................................39-4 Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co...................................................................................................................................6-11 Figure 24-1 Connections between the DTRU and the DDPU in PBT mode....................................................................

.

............................................16-2 Table 17-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a BTS....................................................................................................................................... Ltd....................................................2-4 Table 2-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring an enhanced dual-band network............................................13-1 Table 14-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BSS paging coordination function ................................2-2 Table 2-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding the GSM900 cell or GSM1800 cell.............................6-2 Table 6-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring simplified cell broadcast............2-3 Table 2-3 Example of the data configuring cell idle parameters or cell handover parameters...................11-2 Table 12-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the active power control..............2-6 Table 3-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the EFR/AMR/HR...............................................8-5 Table 8-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for changing none FH to baseband FH.........................................................................................................................................................12-1 Table 13-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the robust air interface signalling function ...........................HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Tables Tables Table 2-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a multiband network.........................8-14 Table 9-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a BTS.............................................................................................................18-1 Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co...........................................................9-1 Table 9-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring eMLPP..............................................8-13 Table 8-7 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the MA group...........................................................................................8-9 Table 8-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for changing baseband FH to none FH.................17-3 Table 18-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring cell frequency scan...................9-3 Table 10-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring priority-based resource reservation .................................................................8-11 Table 8-6 Example of the data negotiated and planned for changing hybrid FH to none FH.....................................17-1 Table 17-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring TRX Cooperation.......3-1 Table 4-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring ALC...................................7-1 Table 8-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for changing none FH to RF FH.....................................6-7 Table 7-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring ciphering....................................8-6 Table 8-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for changing RF FH to none FH.........................................15-4 Table 16-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability .. xxv ..........................................................................................14-1 Table 15-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a co-BCCH cell........................................................................................................................................................................................8-10 Table 8-5 Example of the data negotiated and planned for changing the FH mode of a cell from none FH to hybrid FH..................................................................................10-1 Table 11-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the Network Support SAIC.......4-1 Table 5-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring AEC....................................5-1 Table 6-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring cell broadcast....................

...................................................................................................... Ltd..............22-2 Table 22-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring simple location service....................................................................................................24-5 Table 25-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring transmit diversity..................................................................................................37-3 Table 38-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring antenna hopping..........................................38-2 Table 39-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring VQI..................................................................................................33-6 Table 34-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring APS........................................................................................26-4 Table 26-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring 4-way receive diversity................................................................................................................28-1 Table 29-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring NC2......................................................21-4 Table 21-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a BTS..........................................................................................................................................................................23-2 Table 24-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring PBT...........26-3 Table 26-2 Description of ports on the DDPU...............................32-5 Table 32-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring MSC Pool in A over IP..................................................................20-1 Table 20-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the mapping between the Second OPC and the subrack.............................................31-7 Table 32-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring MSC Pool in A over TDM...................................................................................................................32-6 Table 33-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring BTS ring topology..................25-7 Table 25-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring transmit diversity..................40-1 Table 41-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring intelligent power consumption reduction ..35-2 Table 36-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a BTS...........................32-2 Table 32-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring links on the A interface............................Tables HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Table 19-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring high-speed signaling links in BM/TC combined mode................................................41-4 xxvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co........................21-9 Table 22-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring LCS.........25-8 Table 26-1 Description of ports on the DTRU.....................................31-4 Table 31-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring exclusive timeslots..............34-2 Table 35-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring BSC local switching........................................................................................................................26-5 Table 27-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring SDCCH dynamic adjustment...................................20-2 Table 21-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a BTS......................27-1 Table 28-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring NACC..................................... Issue 02 (2010-09-20) ..................19-2 Table 20-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the mapping between the first OPC and the subrack..........21-2 Table 21-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring DTX...............................................................................................................................29-1 Table 31-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring Flex Abis..........................36-3 Table 37-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring dynamic MAIO........................21-7 Table 21-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring DTX................19-1 Table 19-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring high-speed signaling links in BM/TC separate mode........................................36-2 Table 36-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring BTS local switching..............................................................33-3 Table 33-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for changing non-ring topology to ring topology ....................................................................................24-4 Table 24-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring dynamic PBT............................................39-1 Table 40-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring ANR......................................22-4 Table 23-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring TFO.............................................................................................................................................................................................20-2 Table 20-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring DPC......

.........................................................................................43-1 Table 44-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for setting the BTS synchronization zone.......................46-3 Table 46-6 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the A interface link....................................................................................................... Ltd.....................................................42-1 Table 42-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring tight BCCH frequency reuse.............................................................46-3 Table 46-5 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GFGUA........................................46-2 Table 46-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the M3AU entity........................................................................................................................................44-8 Table 44-6 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the cell that creates the inter-BSC softsynchronized network task....................................................................................................................................................................................41-12 Table 41-7 Example of the configuring the Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation...................................................................................................................................44-4 Table 44-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for creating an intra-BSC soft-synchronized network task ....................................................................................42-3 Table 43-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for Configuring Inter-BSC Signaling Links........46-2 Table 46-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the signaling point for the GMPS .................................................................................................................................................44-14 Table 44-9 Example of the data negotiated and planned for synchronizing the BTSs.46-5 Table 46-9 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GFGUB...............................................44-13 Table 44-8 Example of the data negotiated and planned for collecting the inter-BSC offset information between BTSs................................................................................................................................................................................41-10 Table 41-6 Example of the configuring the Active Backup Power Control.................................................46-8 Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co...............................................................................................46-4 Table 46-7 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BFD detection over the A interface ................................................46-4 Table 46-8 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the QoS mechanism over the A interface ..................................................................................................................41-6 Table 41-3 Example of configuring PSU Smart Control...........................................................................41-14 Table 41-8 Example of the TRX Working Voltage Adjustment........46-2 Table 46-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring 8K reference clock for the GMPS and GEPS..............45-1 Table 45-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the system clock source.............................................46-6 Table 46-10 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BFD link detection over the Abis interface.....................44-9 Table 44-7 Example of the data negotiated and planned for collecting the intra-BSC offset information between BTSs...............46-7 Table 46-11 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring Clock over IP...........................................................................................44-15 Table 45-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the USCU..............................................................................................................44-6 Table 44-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for setting the BTS synchronization zone...................................................................................................................................................HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Tables Table 41-2 Example of Configuring the Intelligent Combiner Bypass..........................................................................44-4 Table 44-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for creating an intra-BSC soft-synchronized network task .............................41-8 Table 41-4 Example of the configuring the Power Optimization Based on Channel Type......41-9 Table 41-5 Example of the configuring the Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization............................................................................................................................................................................ xxvii ..................................41-16 Table 42-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a BTS..................................................................................44-8 Table 44-5 Example of the data negotiated and planned for creating an inter-BSC soft-synchronized network .........46-8 Table 46-12 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring QoS for the Abis interface.................................................................45-2 Table 46-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring system clock...........

Tables

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)
Table 46-13 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring IP PATH for the Abis interface
...........................................................................................................................................................................46-10
Table 46-14 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring ABIS MUX..................................46-11
Table 46-15 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring LAPD...........................................46-11
Table 46-16 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring IP PM...........................................46-12
Table 46-17 Example of the data negotiated and planned for setting the BTS Ping Switch to Off.................46-12
Table 46-18 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GDPUP..................................46-12
Table 46-19 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GFGUG..................................46-13
Table 46-20 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the SGSN.....................................46-14
Table 46-21 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BFD link detection over the Gb
interface.............................................................................................................................................................46-15
Table 46-22 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring traffic shaping over the Gb interface and
congestion management....................................................................................................................................46-15
Table 47-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring HDLC_HubBTS service mode for
BTS3012..............................................................................................................................................................47-2
Table 48-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring SGSN pool.......................................48-1
Table 48-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding the first SGSN..........................................48-2
Table 48-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding the second SGSN.....................................48-3
Table 49-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the primary operator information
.............................................................................................................................................................................49-3
Table 49-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the secondary operator information
.............................................................................................................................................................................49-3
Table 49-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring BTS sharing.....................................49-4
Table 49-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for binding the cell and operator...............................49-5
Table 49-5 Example of the data negotiated and planned for binding the MSC and operator............................49-6
Table 49-6 Example of the data negotiated and planned for binding the PCU and operator.............................49-8
Table 49-7 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring RAN sharing to support multiple CBCs
.............................................................................................................................................................................49-9
Table 49-8 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the distributed BTS TRX to support RAN
sharing...............................................................................................................................................................49-10
Table 50-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a location group.......................................50-2
Table 50-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring parameters of the BTS.....................50-3
Table 50-3 Example of data negotiated and planned for setting binding relations of location groups..............50-6
Table 51-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GXPUI.......................................51-5
Table 51-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GFGUB......................................51-5
Table 51-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring an FH cell.........................................51-5
Table 51-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for enabling Huawei III power control algorithm in a cell
.............................................................................................................................................................................51-6
Table 51-5 Example of the data negotiated and planned for enabling the IBCA algorithm in a cell.................51-7
Table 51-6 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring an internal IBCA neighboring cell
.............................................................................................................................................................................51-7
Table 51-7 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BTS synchronization method
.............................................................................................................................................................................51-7
Table 51-8 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring an external IBCA neighboring cell
.............................................................................................................................................................................51-8

xxviii

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

Tables

Table 51-9 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the cell that supports HWIII power control
algorithm...........................................................................................................................................................51-11
Table 51-10 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the cell that enables the IBCA algorithm
switch................................................................................................................................................................ 51-12
Table 51-11 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring an IBCA neighboring cell............51-13
Table 51-12 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BTS synchronization mode
...........................................................................................................................................................................51-14
Table 51-13 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding external attributes of the BSC..............51-15
Table 52-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding the BTS3900B GSM................................52-2
Table 52-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding the BTS3900E GSM in TDM networking mode
.............................................................................................................................................................................52-5
Table 52-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding the BTS3900E GSM in HDLC/HUB networking
mode....................................................................................................................................................................52-6
Table 52-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding the BTS3900E GSM in IP networking mode
.............................................................................................................................................................................52-6
Table 53-1 Example of the negotiated and planned data for configuring the DTM...........................................53-2
Table 54-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the VGCS/VBS................................54-1
Table 55-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring AMR...............................................55-1
Table 56-1 Example of the configuring dynamically adjusting the uplink MCS coding...................................56-1
Table 57-1 Example of the configuring concentric cell.....................................................................................57-1
Table 58-1 Example of the configuring extended cell........................................................................................58-1
Table 59-1 Example of the configuring streaming QoS(GBR)..........................................................................59-2
Table 59-2 Example of the configuring QoS ARP and THP.............................................................................59-4
Table 59-3 Example of the configuring PS active package management..........................................................59-5
Table 59-4 Example of the configuring PoC QoS..............................................................................................59-7
Table 60-1 Example of the configuring Half-Rate.............................................................................................60-1
Table 61-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring MS high multislot classes................61-1
Table 62-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring EDA.................................................62-1
Table 63-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring CS-3/CS-4........................................63-1
Table 64-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring network operation mode I................64-1
Table 65-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the function of pre-processing of
measurement report.............................................................................................................................................65-1
Table 66-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring EMR.................................................66-1
Table 67-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring AFC..................................................67-1
Table 68-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring basic handover.................................68-3
Table 68-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring PBGT handover...............................68-7
Table 68-3 Example of data negotiated and planned for configuring signal level rapid fall handover.............68-9
Table 68-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring load handover.................................68-10
Table 68-5 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring layered and hierarchical handover
...........................................................................................................................................................................68-12
Table 68-6 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring speed-sensitive handover...............68-13
Table 68-7 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring directed retry..................................68-15
Table 68-8 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring chain cell handover........................68-16
Table 68-9 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring better cell handover........................68-18
Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxix

Tables

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)
Table 69-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring Flex Ater..........................................69-1
Table 70-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring Abis transmission backup................70-1
Table 71-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring end-to-end MS signaling tracing
.............................................................................................................................................................................71-1
Table 72-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring PDCH dynamic adjustment.............72-1
Table 73-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring 14.4 Kbps circuit switched data.......73-1

xxx

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

1

1 Changes in BSS Feature Configuration Guide (Based on
MML)

Changes in BSS Feature Configuration
Guide (Based on MML)

This describes the changes in the various versions of BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based
on MML).

02(2010-09-20) of V900R008C12
This is the second commercial release.
Compared with issue 01(2010-05-20) of V900R008C12, the following information is added:
Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level
Compared with issue 01(2010-05-20) of V900R008C12, the following information is modified:
Item

Change Description

61 Configuring MS High Multislot Classes

The description of configuring MS high
multislot classes is modified.

Compared with issue 01(2010-05-20) of V900R008C12, no information is removed.

01(2010-05-20) of V900R008C12
This is the initial commercial release.

Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-1

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

2

2 Configuring the Multiband Network

Configuring the Multiband Network

About This Chapter
A multiband network consists of multiple frequency bands. The combined multiband network
can increase the utilization of frequency resources on the radio network.

Context
l

Huawei GSM BSS supports the following types of multiband networks:
– GSM850 + GSM900 + DCS1800
– GSM850 + GSM900 + PCS1900

l

The most common combination is GSM900 with DCS1800 and GSM850 with PCS1900.

l

Huawei GSM BSS supports GSM900/DCS1800 co-BCCH cells, and does not support
GSM850/PCS1900 co-BCCH cells.

l

Huawei GSM BSS supports GSM900, DCS1800, PCS1900, and GSM850, and does not
support GSM450 or GSM480.

2.1 Configuring a Multiband Network
This describes how to configure a multiband network on the Local Maintenance Terminal.
2.2 Configuring an Enhanced Dual-Band Network
The enhanced dual-band network is an improvement on the existing dual-band network. In the
enhanced dual-band network, two co-sited cells with different coverage areas are logically
formed into a cell group. One is an overlaid subcell, and the other is an underlaid subcell. The
enhanced dual-band network algorithm enables channel sharing and load balancing between the
two cells in a cell group. .

Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-1

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

2 Configuring the Multiband Network

2.1 Configuring a Multiband Network
This describes how to configure a multiband network on the Local Maintenance Terminal.
Scenario

A multiband network is configured to increase the utilization of frequency
resources on the radio network.

Impact

None.

NEs Involved MS, BTS, BSC, and MSC.

Prerequisite
l

The TRXs in the BTS must support the corresponding frequency bands.

Preparation
Table 2-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a multiband network

2-2

Data
Type

Parameter
ID

Parameter Name

Example

Source

Adding
BTS

BTSNAM
E

BTS Name

BTS3012

Network planning

TYPE

BTS Type

BTS3012

Network planning

UPNODE

Up Node Type

BSC

Network planning

SRN

Subrack No.

0

Network planning

SN

Slot No.

14

Network planning

PN

Port No.

0

Network planning

MPMODE

Multiplexing Mode

MODE4_1

Network planning

AST

Activity state

ACTIVATED
(Activated)

Network planning

ServiceMo
de

Service Type

TDM

Network planning

DCELLNA
ME

Source Cell Name

cell

Network planning

DCTYPE

Cell type

GSM900

Network planning

DCMCC

Cell MCC

400

Network planning

DCMNC

Cell MNC

00

Network planning

DCLAC

Cell LAC

1

Network planning

DCCI

Cell CI

2

Network planning

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

Data
Type

2 Configuring the Multiband Network

Parameter
ID

Parameter Name

Example

Source

CPLMode

Separate Mode

SUPPORT
(Support)

Network planning

TRXBN

TRX Board No.

0

Network planning

TRXTP

TRX Board Type

QTRU

Network planning

TRXPN

TRX Board Path
No.

0

Network planning

FREQ

TRX Freq.

12

Network planning

Table 2-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding the GSM900 cell or GSM1800
cell
Data
Type

Parameter
ID

Parameter Name

Example

Source

GSM900
CELL

IDXTYPE

Index Type

BYIDX(By
Index)

Network planning

BTSIDX

BTS Index

0

Network planning

CELLNA
ME

Source Cell Name

Cell_900

Network planning

CTYPE

Freq. Band

GSM900

Network planning

AST

Activity state

ACTIVATED
(Activated)

Network planning

MCC

MCC

460

Network planning

MNC

MNC

00

Network planning

LAC

LAC

1

Network planning

CI

CI

1

Network planning

TRXBN

TRX Board No.

0

Network planning

TRXTP

TRX Board Type

QTRU(QTRU)

Network planning

TRXPN2

TRX Board Path
No.

0

Network planning

TRXFREQ

TRX Freq.

70

Network planning

IDXTYPE

Index Type

BYIDX(By
Index)

Network planning

BTSIDX

BTS Index

0

Network planning

GSM1800

Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-3

Band DCS1800 Network planning AST Activity state ACTIVATED (Activated) Network planning MCC MCC 460 Network planning MNC MNC 00 Network planning LAC LAC 2 Network planning CI CI 3 Network planning TRXBN TRX Board No.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 2 Configuring the Multiband Network Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source CELLNA ME Source Cell Name Cell_1800 Network planning CTYPE Freq. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .. Ltd. 512 Network planning Table 2-3 Example of the data configuring cell idle parameters or cell handover parameters Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source Cell idle parameter s IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning ATT Attach-detach Allowed YES(Yes) Network planning CBA Cell Bar Access YES(Yes) Network planning CBQ Cell bar qualify NO(NO) Network planning PI Cell reselect parameters indication YES(Yes) Network planning IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning HOCTRLS WITCH HO Control Switch HOALGORITH M2(HO Algorithm II) Network planning Cell basic Handover Parameter s 2-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1 Network planning TRXFREQ TRX Freq.

Deactivating a multiband network 1. TRXPN2=0. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to configure cell basic handover parameters. TRXFREQ=512. 2-5 . CTYPE=DCS1800. 3. TRXPN=0. ATT=YES. The call is normal. TYPE=BTS3012. and set Activity state to ACTIVATED(Activated). The call is normal. CELLNAME="Cell_900". PI=YES. This section takes the reservation of a 900 MHz cell as an example. MCC="460". run the MOD CELLIDLEBASIC command to configure cell idle parameters. Ltd. SN=14. AST=ACTIVATED. AST=ACTIVATED. CI=1. ----End Example An example script for configuring a multiband network is as follows: /*Add a BTS*/ ADD BTS: BTSNAME="bts3012". TRXBN=0. PN=0. TRXBN=0. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. LAC=1 . SRN=0. BTSIDX=0. run the RMV CELL command to delete other cells except for the 900 MHz cell. Band to GSM900. run the ADD BTS command to add a BTS. The MS is handed over to the 1800 MHz cell. Perform the dialing test. MCC="460". On the Local Maintenance Terminal. DCCI=2. 2. DCMNC="00". BTSIDX=0. MPMODE=MODE4_1. CBQ=NO. Use an MS supporting the GSM900 frequency band to camp on a 900 MHz cell. Use an MS supporting the GSM900 and DCS1800 frequency bands to camp on a 900 MHz cell. TRXTP=QTRU. observe the window displaying the monitored channel status. MNC="00". Then. FREQ=12. DCMCC="460". run the ADD CELL command to add a GSM900 cell. and the call is still normal. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Band to DCS1800. DCELLNAME="cell". Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Set Freq.. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. TRXBN=1. Perform the dialing test. LAC=2. DCTYPE=GSM900. TRXFREQ=70. Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. /*Configure cell idle parameters*/ MOD CELLIDLEBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. MNC="00". Postrequisite l l Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Verifying multiband network 1. DCLAC=1. /*Configure cell basic handover parameters*/ SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. 2. CBA=YES. /*Add a GSM900 cell*/ ADD CELL: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. CTYPE=GSM900. /*Add a DCS1800 cell*/ ADD CELL: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. AST=ACTIVATED. CELLIDX=0. and set Activity state to ACTIVATED(Activated). After the call is set up. run the ADD CELL command to add a GSM1800 cell. CELLNAME="Cell_1800". Perform the dialing test. move the MS towards the centre of the 1800 MHz cell. UPNODE=BSC. CI=3. TRXTP=QTRU.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 2 Configuring the Multiband Network Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Set Freq. CPLMode=SUPPORT. ServiceMode=TDM. Use an MS supporting the DCS1800 frequency band to camp on a 1800 MHz cell. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2. CELLIDX=0.

One is an overlaid subcell. modify the attributes of the enhanced dual-band network and change the relation between the cell and the operator. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . Ltd. Prerequisite l The enhanced dual-band network is not license-controlled. Use an MS supporting the DCS1800 frequency band to camp on the 900 MHz cell. two co-sited cells with different coverage areas are logically formed into a cell group. GSM850_1800. or GSM850_1900 cannot be used in the cell. The enhanced dual-band network algorithm enables channel sharing and load balancing between the two cells in a cell group. The call is normal. The call cannot be set up. Preparation Table 2-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring an enhanced dual-band network 2-6 Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source GSM900 cell configuration IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning BTSIDX BTS Index 0 Network planning CELLNAME Cell Name Cell1 Network planning CTYPE Freq. That is..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 2 Configuring the Multiband Network 3. Scenario On condition that the KPIs are acceptable. and the other is an underlaid subcell. l When changing the relation between the cell and the operator. Impact None. 2. the resource sharing of the overlaid and underlaid subcells expands the system capacity. In the enhanced dual-band network. If yes. the enhanced dual-band network cannot be configured. Band GSM900 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. . check whether the enhanced dual-band network is configured. l When two cells belong to different operators.2 Configuring an Enhanced Dual-Band Network The enhanced dual-band network is an improvement on the existing dual-band network. Use an MS supporting the GSM900 frequency band to camp on the 900 MHz cell. BSC. NEs Involved MS. BTS. l The BTS must support the frequency band to be configured. and MSC. 4. Perform the dialing test. l The cell must be a single band cell. the frequency bands GSM900_DCS1800.

0 Network planning TRXFREQ TRX Freq. Ltd.. 2-7 . 1 Network planning IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME (By Name) Network planning SRCCELLN AME Source Cell Name Cell1 Network planning NBRCELLN AME Neighbor Cell Name Cell2 Network planning HOCTRLSW ITCH Current HO Control Algorithm in Source Cell HOALGORITH M1(HO Algorithm I) Network planning IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME (By Name) Network planning SRCCELLN AME Source Cell Name Cell2 Network planning NBRCELLN AME Neighbor Cell Name Cell1 Network planning HOCTRLSW ITCH Current HO Control Algorithm in Source Cell HOALGORITH M1(HO Algorithm I) Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 0 Network planning TRXTP TRX Board Type QTRU(QTRU) Network planning TRXPN2 TRX Board Path No.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type Adding Cell2 to be the neighboring cell of Cell1 Adding Cell1 to be the neighboring cell of Cell2 Issue 02 (2010-09-20) 2 Configuring the Multiband Network Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source AST Activity state ACTIVATED (Activated) Network planning MCC MCC 460 Network planning MNC MNC 00 Network planning LAC LAC 1 Network planning CI CI 1 Network planning TRXBN TRX Board No.

NBRCELLNAME="Cell1". CELLNAME="Cell1". 2-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. CTYPE=GSM900. run the ADD CELL2GNC command to add a 2G unidirectional neighboring cell for the source cell.. TRXTP=QTRU. SRCCELLNAME="Cell2". Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. /*Add Cell2 to be the neighboring cell of Cell1*/ ADD CELL2GNC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. CELLINEXTP=Inner. CELLIDX=0. MCC="460". BTSIDX=0. run the MOD CELLIUO command to set Cell IUO Type to EDB_cell(Enhanced double freq cell). /*Add Cell1 to be the neighboring cell of Cell2*/ ADD CELL2GNC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. AST=ACTIVATED. TRXBN=0. ----End Example An example script for adding a single band cell is as follows: /*Add a GSM900 cell*/ ADD CELL: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. SRCCELLNAME="Cell1". IUOTP=EDB_cell. NBRCELLNAME="Cell2". run the SET CELLHOEDBPARA command to Set the parameters that affect overlaid/underlaid subcell handover in enhanced dual-band network. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. TRXFREQ=1. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. /*Set the concentric type of the cell to be an enhanced dual-band cell*/ MOD CELLIUO: IDXTYPE=BYIDX.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 2 Configuring the Multiband Network Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source Concentric cell type IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning IUOTP Cell IUO Type EDB_cell (Enhanced double freq cell) Network planning CELLINEXT P Cell Inner/Extra Property Inner(Inner) Network planning DBLFREQA DJIDXTYPE Same Group Cell Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning DBLFREQA DJCIDX Same Group Cell Index 1 Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. CI=1. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. LAC=1. Ltd. MNC="00". run the ADD CELL2GNC command to add the source cell to be the neighboring cell of the 2G unidirectional neighboring cell so that the two cells are bidirectional neighboring cells with each other. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . TRXPN2=0. run the ADD CELL command to add a single band cell.

run the SET CELLHOEDBPARA command to set the parameters of the DCS1800 cell as follows: set UL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No). 2. Deactivating an enhanced dual-band network 1. Maintain the call of MS 1 and use MS 2 to call the fixed-line phone in the GSM900 cell. run the MOD CELLHOCTRL command to set Min Power Level For Directed Retry of the DCS1800 cell to 0. 7. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD CELLCCBASIC command to set ECSC of the two cells to YES. On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. Make MS 1 and MS 2 (both supporting GSM900 and DCS1800 frequency bands) camp on the GSM900 cell. Then. Distance Between Boudaries of Subcells [dB] to 0. 6. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. MS 1 is assigned to the underlaid GSM900 cell because the load of the underlaid cell is not higher than UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold(%). On the Local Maintenance Terminal. use MS 1 to call a fixed-line phone. DBLFREQADJCIDX=1. Ltd. Make MS 1 camp on the DCS1800 cell and initiate a call. run the MOD CELLIUO command to set Cell IUO Type to Normal_cell(Normal cell). On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the SET CELLHOEDBPARA command to set the parameters of the GSM900 cell as follows: set UL Subcell Assignment Optimization to YES. MS 2 is assigned to a channel of the DCS1800 cell because the load of the underlaid subcell is higher than UL Subcell General Overload Threshold[%]. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 0. The adjustment of the reserved cell is complete. l Issue 02 (2010-09-20) 1. and then run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set Directed Retry of the two cells to YES. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 4. 3. run the RMV CELL command to delete the cell on the other frequency band. OL Subcell Assignment Optimization to YES(Yes). 5. This indicates that the call in the overlaid cell can be assigned to the underlaid cell when the traffic in the underlaid cell is light. Set Load HO Allowed and Load HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell to NO(No). UL Subcell General Overload Threshold[%] to 1. UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 50. 2. 2-9 .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 2 Configuring the Multiband Network DBLFREQADJIDXTYPE=BYIDX. MS 1 is assigned to a channel of the GSM900 cell. and Distance Hysteresis Between Boudaries[dB] to 0. Postrequisite l Verifying an enhanced dual-band network NOTE After the verification. and UL Subcell General Overload Threshold[%] to 80. Stop all the calls. the data must be restored because the data needs to be modified. This indicates that the call in the underlaid cell can be assigned to the overlaid cell when the traffic in the underlaid cell is heavy and the signals in the overlaid cell are strong enough.

.

l In A over IP mode. half-rate speech version 3. Ltd.95 kbit/s coding scheme only when Service Type of the Abis interface is IP or HDLC. Preparation Table 3-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the EFR/AMR/HR Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. BSC. the EFR function cannot be enabled forcibly.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 3 3 Configuring the Speech Version Configuring the Speech Version This describes how to configure the speech version on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 3-1 . l The half rate function is license-controlled. Scenario The speech version is configured to improve the speech quality. or both. see Activate BSC License. see the user manuals related to Huawei MSC. Impact None. NEs Involved MS. Prerequisite l The AMR function is license-controlled. l For Huawei MSC. For details.. l The AMR HR supports the 7. For details. l The license is activated on the Local Maintenance Terminal. and MSC. BTS. the BSC should be configured with full-rate speech version 3. l The EFR function is not license-controlled.

NOTE Configure AMR ACS[F] and AMR ACS[H] to select different coding rates. 3-2 4. One to four coding rates can be selected.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 3 Configuring the Speech Version Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source VOICEVER Speech Version Configuring EFR: FULL_rate_Ver2 (Full-rate Ver 2) Network planning Configuring AMR: Full_rate_Ver3(Full-rate Ver 3). 1. l Configure EFR forcibly On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Half_rate_Ver3(Half-rate Ver 3) Configuring HR: FULL_rate_Ver1 (Full-rate Ver 1) AVer A Interface Tag GSM_PHASE_2 Network planning Procedure l Configure the EFR. Set Intracell F-H HO Allowed to YES(YES). If the cell supports the HR services. run the MOD CELLPWRHW2 or MOD CELLPWRHW3 command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to configure the parameters related to the AMR power control. run the MOD BSCBASIC command to change A Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2. 2. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Run the MOD CELLCCAMR command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to configure AMR FR and AMR HR. 5. Run the MOD CELLPWRBASIC command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to configure AMR power control parameters of the cell. run the SET CELLSOFT command to change Cell EFR Forced Switch to YES(YES). 7. 6. 3. select Half_rate_Ver3(Half-rate Ver 3) simultaneously. Run the MOD CELLCCBASIC command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to configure AFR Radio Link Timeout and AHR Radio Link Timeout to configure the timeout period of radio link. l Configure the AMR. According to the value of Power Control Switch. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . Ltd. run the MOD CELLCCACCESS command to change Speech Version to FULL_rate_Ver3 (Full-rate Ver 3). On the Local Maintenance Terminal. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Set Power Control Switch to HW2(HW2 Power Control) or HW3(HW3 Power Control).. run the MOD CELLCCACCESS command to change Speech Version to FULL_rate_Ver2 (Full-rate Ver 2). Run the SET CELLHOBASIC command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to configure the AMR intra-cell TCHF-TCHH handover parameters. Configure AMR rate control switch to select different rate adjustment algorithms.

AFRDSBLCNT=20. ----End Example An example script for configuring the EFR is as follows: MOD CELLCCACCESS: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. AMRTCHHPRIORLOAD=50. Run the MOD CELLCHMGAD command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to configure TCH Traffic Busy Threshold. CELLIDX=0. Configure the HR. run the MOD TRXDEV command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to set TCH Rate Adjust Allow to YES(YES). ULADJPRD=15. To configure a channel as a TCHF fixedly or as a dynamically adjusted channel. CELLIDX=0. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 4. /*Configure AMR FR and AMR HR*/ MOD CELLCCAMR: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. /*Configure the AMR intra-cell TCHF-TCHH parameters*/ SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Set Multiplexing Mode to MODE1_1 or MODE2_1. /*Configure the parameters related to the AMR power control*/ MOD CELLPWRHW3: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. VOICEVER=Full_rate_Ver1-0&Full_rate_Ver2-1&Full_rate_Ver3-0&Half_rate_Ver1-0&Half_ rate_Ver2-0&Half_rate_Ver3-0. Run the MOD BTSMPMODE command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to change the multiplexing mode of the Abis interface. AHRDSBLCNT=20. VOICEVER=Full_rate_Ver2-0. set its Channel Type to TCHHR(TCH Half Rate). ACTCDSETH=4_75Kbps-1&5_15Kbps-1&5_90Kbps-1&6_70Kbps-1. CELLIDX=0. 1. Currently. TCHBUSYTHRES=0. CELLNAME="0". ACTCDSETF=4_75Kbps-1&5_15Kbps-1&5_90Kbps-1&6_70Kbps-1. CELLIDX=0. /*Configure the AMR call parameters of the cell*/ MOD CELLCHMGAD: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. NOTE To configure a channel as a TCHH fixedly. RATECTRLSW=ALG1. Half_rate_Ver2 (Half-rate Ver 2) under Speech Version is reserved. CELLIDX=0. /*Configure the timeout period of radio link*/ MOD CELLCCBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. An example script for configuring the HR is as follows: Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. CELLIDX=0. PWRCTRLSW=HW3. To enable the HR services of the TRX that is not configured with TCHHs. /*Change the speech version to be full-rate version 2*/ MOD CELLCCACCESS: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. DLADJPRD=15. 2. Run the MOD CHAN command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to change the channel type. run the MOD CELLCCACCESS command to change Speech Version to FULL_rate_Ver1 (Full-rate Ver 1). CELLIDX=0. An example script for configuring the AMR is as follows: /*Change the A interface tag to be GSM_PHASE_2*/ MOD BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 8. l 3 Configuring the Speech Version Run the MOD CELLCHMGAD command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to configure AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed and AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold. 3-3 . set its Channel Type to TCHFR(TCH Full Rate). AMRTCHHPRIORALLOW=YES. Ltd. /*Configure the AMR power control parameters of the cell*/ MOD CELLPWRBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Set Channel Type to TCHHR(TCH Half Rate). INTRACELLFHHOEN=YES. no service of halfrate version 2 is available.. 3.

run the LST CELLCCACCESS command to query the speech version of the cell. 2. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . BTSIDX=1.. CELLIDX=0. run the DSP CALLRES command to query the call resources of a user.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 3 Configuring the Speech Version /*Change the multiplexing mode of the Abis interface*/ MOD BTSMPMODE: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Postrequisite l Verifying the speech version – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Verify that the corresponding speech version is deactivated. l 3-4 Deactivating the speech version 1. FAMR. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. TCHBUSYTHRES=50. /*Configure TCH Traffic Busy Threshold*/ MOD CELLCHMGAD: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. VOICEVER=Full_rate_Ver1-1. MPMODE=MODE1_1. run the MOD CELLCCACCESS command to modify the setting of Speech Version and clear the unnecessary speech versions. EFR. CELLIDX=0. or HAMR. Verify that the speech version in the query result is FR. /*Change the speech version*/ MOD CELLCCACCESS: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. HR. Ltd.

Impact None NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite l ALC is not restricted by the license. Preparation Table 4-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring ALC Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source SRN Subrack No. and reduces interference among the normal calls. Ltd. 0 Network planning ALCSWITH ALC Switch OPEN(Open) Network planning ALCADAPTMODE ALC Mode FIXEDLEVEL(Fixed Level Mode) Network planning FIXEDGAIN(Fixed Gain Mode) Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. 4-1 . l ALC and TFO cannot be enabled at the same time. 5 Network planning SN Slot No. This keeps the voice level of the entire network in a predefined state. Scenario ALC is configured to keep the voice level of the entire network in a predefined state and avoid the volume fluctuation of two parties during a call.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 4 Configuring ALC 4 Configuring ALC Automatic level control (ALC) adjusts the gain of digital voice signals on the uplink and downlink every 20 ms and changes the amplitude of digital voice signals in static or dynamic mode. prevents the volume fluctuation of the two parties during a call. l The GDPUC or GDPUX is already configured.

If you need to reduce the voice. For ALC Max Target Level[dBm0] and ALC Min Target Level[dBm0]. retain the default value -18. NOTE If you need to raise the voice.. use the default values -4 and -23 respectively. ALCSWITH=OPEN. all the parameters related to the DSP TC are configured. NOTE If you need to raise the voice. SN=0. Set ALC Switch to OPEN(Open). NOTE The value of the adaptive level should be between ALC Min Target Level[dBm0] and ALC Max Target Level[dBm0].. /*Configure adaptive mode*/ MOD DSPTC: SRN=5. On the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 4 Configuring ALC Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source ADAPTIVE (Adaptive Mode) Network planning Procedure l Set FIXEDLEVEL(Fixed Level Mode). Ltd. l Set ADAPTIVE(Adaptive Mode). On the Local Maintenance Terminal. set ALC Fix Gain[dB] to 12. SN=0. 1. set ALC Fix Gain[dB] to 3. SN=0. run the MOD DSPTC command. ALCSWITH=OPEN. run the MOD DSPTC command. run the MOD DSPTC command. For ALC Fix Gain[dB]. Set ALC Switch to OPEN(Open). ALCADAPTMODE=FIXEDLEVEL. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. For ALC Fix Target Level [dBm0].. ALCADAPTMODE=ADAPTIVE. all the parameters related to the DSP TC are configured. set ALC Fix Target Level [dBm0] to -23. and ALC Mode to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed Gain Mode). Postrequisite l 4-2 Verifying ALC Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . set ALC Fix Target Level [dBm0] to -4. all the parameters related to the DSP TC are configured. Set ALC Switch to OPEN(Open). If you need to reduce the voice. l Set FIXEDGAIN(Fixed Gain Mode). and ALC Mode to FIXEDLEVEL(Fixed Level Mode). use the default value 6. ALCSWITH=OPEN.. and ALC Mode to ADAPTIVE(Adaptive Mode). If you do not set DSP No. /*Configure fixed gain mode*/ MOD DSPTC: SRN=5. 1. ALCADAPTMODE=FIXEDGAIN. If you do not set DSP No. 1. If you do not set DSP No. ----End Example An example script for configuring ALC is as follows: /*Configure fixed level mode*/ MOD DSPTC: SRN=5.

On the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 4 Configuring ALC NOTE This section takes the verification of the FIXEDGAIN(Fixed Gain Mode) mode as an example. The method of verifying the FIXEDLEVEL(Fixed Level Mode) or ADAPTIVE(Adaptive Mode) mode is similar. ALC Mode to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed Gain Mode). Deactivating ALC 1. hang up the phone. run the MOD DSPTC command to set ALC Switch to OPEN(Open). The volume of the heard voice increases. Ltd. run the MOD DSPTC command to set ALC Switch to OPEN(Open). ALC Mode to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed Gain Mode). l Issue 02 (2010-09-20) 1. Use MS1 to call MS2 again with a normal voice. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 4-3 . 3. Then. run the LST DSPTC command to verify that ALC Switch is set to OPEN. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Verifying deactivation of ALC: In the same cell. 4. and ALC Fix Gain[dB] to 0. use MS 1 to call MS 2 with a normal voice. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and ALC Fix Gain[dB] to 12. 2. use MS 1 to call MS 2 with a normal voice. 2. run the MOD DSPTC command to set ALC Switch to CLOSE(Close). Verify that the voice volume is restored to that before the ALC function is enabled.. 5. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. In the same cell.

.

Impact None NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite l The GDPUC or GDPUX is already configured. Scenario AEC is configured to reduce or cancel the acoustic echo during the call.. l AEC and TFO cannot be enabled at the same time.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 5 5 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation Acoustic echo cancellation (AEC) can decrease acoustic echo caused by the MS. Preparation Table 5-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring AEC Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source TC DSP attributes SRN Subrack No. 5-1 . 0 Network planning AECSWITH AEC Switch OPEN(Open) Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. thus improving the network quality and voice quality. thus improving the voice quality. Ltd. 5 Network planning SN Slot No.

l 5-2 Deactivating AEC 1. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . NOTE l The echo is easily generated when a common MS is enabled with the handsfree function and placed in a sealing box. If you do not set DSP No. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd. SN=0. l The acoustic echo is generated between MSs. The echo generated between an MS and a fixed-line phone is termed as electric echo.. The electric echo problem needs to be solved by the CN side. Verifying deactivation of AEC: Verify that an acoustic echo exists or becomes higher. you need to set AEC Path Delay[ms] to eliminate the extra delay due to satellite transmission. 2. Set AEC Switch to OPEN (Open) and retain the default values of other related parameters. run the MOD DSPTC command to set AEC Switch to CLOSE(Close). all the parameters related to the DSP TC are configured. run the MOD DSPTC command.5 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. AECSWITCH=OPEN. ----End Example An example script for configuring AEC is as follows: MOD DSPTC: SRN=5. l When the satellite transmission is used over the Abis interface or Ater interface. Check whether the acoustic echo is eliminated or becomes lower and whether the call is normal.. Postrequisite l Verifying AEC 1.

2 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast This describes how to configure simplified cell broadcast on the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 6 6 Configuring Cell Broadcast Configuring Cell Broadcast About This Chapter Cell broadcast is a teleservice that periodically broadcasts messages to all the MSs in a specified area.. 6. 6. the mobile network operators can provide special services for users. 6-1 .1 Configuring Cell Broadcast This describes how to configure cell broadcast on the Local Maintenance Terminal with the cooperation of the server and CBC operating system. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. With cell broadcast.

the network sends messages to the MS and does not require any response from the MS. Ltd. 0 Network planning PN Port No. Scenario With cell broadcast. 0 Network planning SN Slot No. refer to Activate BSC License. 0 Network planning SN Slot No. 0 Network planning PortSwitch Panel Port Switch OPEN(Open) Network planning SRN Subrack No. 0 Network planning AddrValid VLAN Port Valid Switch VALID (Valid) Network planning MAC MAC Address H'DF Network planning GXPUM port attributes GXPUM VLAN parameters 6-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Impact None. Prerequisite l Cell broadcast is restricted by the license.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 6 Configuring Cell Broadcast 6. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. and CBC. 0 Network planning SN Slot No.. NEs Involved MS. 0 Network planning BT Board Type GXPUM Network planning BackType Back Type NONE (Independent Mode) Network planning SRN Subrack No. For details. BSC.1 Configuring Cell Broadcast This describes how to configure cell broadcast on the Local Maintenance Terminal with the cooperation of the server and CBC operating system. BTS. Preparation Table 6-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring cell broadcast Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source GXPUM SRN Subrack No.

.101.168. 0 Network planning CHNO Channel No.101.255.6 6 Network planning CBCPRT CBC port 0 Network planning OPNAME Owned Operator 46000 Network planning IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning TRXBN TRX Board No.255. 6-3 . Ltd. 0 Network planning CB interface CBIPPRT parameters CBC parameters TRX channel attributes Issue 02 (2010-09-20) 6 Configuring Cell Broadcast Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type BSC attributes Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IP Ip Address 192.0 Network planning Name BSC name bsc Network planning AreaCode Area Code 10 Network planning CC CC 086 Network planning MCC MCC 460 Network planning MNC MNC 00 Network planning SpprtCB Support Cell Broadcast SPPRTSTAN DARD (SupportStand ard CB) Network planning CBC interface port 60000 Network planning IFCBSHAKE HAND CB interface handshake YES(Yes) Network planning BSCGATEW AYIP BSC Gateway 192.100.1 Network planning CBCItfPara CBC Interface Param PHASE_FLA G-1 Network planning CBCNAME CBC Name cbc Network planning CBCIP CBC IP 192. 0 Network planning TRXPN TRX Board Path No.168.160.1 1 Network planning NETMASK Net Mask 255.

6-4 3.xxx. l If the channel is the SDCCH8. Specify the IP address for the CBC. The Run text box is displayed. 5. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the ADD CBC command to add the parameters related to the CBC. run the MOD CHAN command to change the corresponding channel type. the following operations need not be performed.255. run the LST CHAN command to check whether Channel Type is set to MBCCH(Main BCCH) or SDCCH8(SDCCH8). 1. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. enter ping xxx. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.xxx.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 6 Configuring Cell Broadcast Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source CHTYPE Channel Type BCCH_CBC H(BCCH +CBCH) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. the following operations must be performed. Ltd. xxx. the setting succeeds. l If the channel is the main BCCH.255. Type cmd to display the command line window.xxx. run the MOD XPUVLAN command to configure the VLAN parameters of the GXPUM.255 yyy. run the MOD XPUPORT command to configure the attributes of the port on the GXPUM.yyy. 2. Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD CBPARA command to change CB interface handshake to YES(Yes).yyy. Step 8 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.yyy. 4.yyy indicates the IP address for the router.xxx.xxx indicates the external IP address for the cell broadcast service.yyy. Step 6 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. change SDCCH8(SDCCH8) to SDCCH_CBCH(SDCCH +CBCH). yyy. change MBCCH(Main BCCH) to BCCH_CBCH(BCCH +CBCH). Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . enter route add xxx. run the ADD BRD command to add a GXPUM. Log in to the CBC operating system as the system administrator. If the communication is normal.xxx. After the setting is complete. Otherwise.yyy. run the MOD BSCBASIC command to change Support Cell Broadcast to SPPRTSTANDARD(SupportStandard CB). Step 9 Configure the route of the CBC server..xxx mask 255. 6. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.xxx to check whether the communication between the CBC and the BSC is normal. Step 7 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. In the displayed window.xxx. NOTE If the CBC and server are in different network segments. Choose Start > Run.

CHTYPE=BCCH_CBCH. IFCBSHAKEHAND=YES. /*Change "Support Cell Broadcast" to "SPPRTSTANDARD(SupportStandard CB)"*/ MOD BSCBASIC: Name="bsc". CELLIDX=0. BackType=NONE. CHNO=0. AreaCode=10.101.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 6 Configuring Cell Broadcast NOTE The ping command is used to check the communication between the CBC and the BSC rather than the CBC services. SpprtCB=SPPRTSTANDARD.. A dialog box is displayed. MCC="460". NETMASK="255.168.255. /*Modify the VLAN parameters of the GXPUM*/ MOD XPUVLAN: SRN=0. /*Modify the attributes of the TRX channel*/ MOD CHAN: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. CBCPRT=0. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.100. MNC="00". CELLIDX=0. /*Add the parameters related to the CBC*/ ADD CBC: CBCNAME="cbc". SN=0. CBCIP="192. Postrequisite l Verifying cell broadcast 1. TRXBN=0. PortSwitch=OPEN.168. BT=GXPUM. /*Configure the attributes of the port on the GXPUM*/ MOD XPUPORT: SRN=0. /*Modify the parameters related to the CB interface*/ MOD CBPARA: CBIPPRT=60000. as shown in Figure 6-1. PN=0. SN=0.0".160. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) On the Trace & Monitor tab page. 6-5 .255.101. CC=086. OPNAME="46000". TRXBN=0. SN=0.11". MAC=H'DF. BSCGATEWAYIP="192. AddrValid=VALID. choose Trace > Trace Message on the Abis Interface > RSL Message. CBCItfPara=PHASE_FLAG-0. /*Query the attributes of the TRX channel*/ LST CHAN: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Ltd.66". IP="192. ----End Example An example script for configuring cell broadcast is as follows: /*Add a GXPUM*/ ADD BRD: SRN=0.1". TRXPN=0.

In the displayed dialog box shown in Figure 6-2. Ltd. and click OK. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .. if SMS Broadcast Command exists in Message Type. you can infer that the cell broadcast function operates normally.6 Configuring Cell Broadcast HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Figure 6-1 Trace RSL Message on the Abis Interface dialog box 2. Set Tracing Mode to Report. 3. Figure 6-2 Tracing the RSL Message at Abis Interface 6-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

2 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast This describes how to configure simplified cell broadcast on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 0 Network planning BT Board Type GXPUM Network planning BackType Back Type NONE (Independent Mode) Network planning SRN Subrack No.. Preparation Table 6-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring simplified cell broadcast Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source GXPUM SRN Subrack No. 2. Scenario Simplified cell broadcast provides the simplified cell broadcast services without the CBC system. 6-7 . 0 Network planning GXPUM port attributes Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 0 Network planning PN Port No. NEs Involved MS. Ltd. Impact None. run the MOD BSCBASIC command to set Support Cell Broadcast to NOTSPPRTBC(NotSupport CB). l Simplified cell broadcast feature cannot be used in combination with the cell broadcast function provided by the CBC. The simplified cell broadcast and the cell broadcast provided by the CBC cannot be used at the same time. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. BTS. Verifying deactivation of cell broadcast: The method of verifying the deactivation of the cell broadcast function is identical to that of verifying the cell broadcast function. If SMS Broadcast Command does not exist in Message Type. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. and BSC. 0 Network planning SN Slot No. 6. For details. refer to Activate BSC License.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) l 6 Configuring Cell Broadcast Deactivating cell broadcast 1. you can infer that the cell broadcast function is deactivated successfully. Prerequisite l Simplified cell broadcast is restricted by the license. 0 Network planning SN Slot No.

0 Network planning AddrValid VLAN Port Valid Switch VALID(Valid) Network planning MAC MAC Address H'DF Network planning IP Ip Address 192.11 Network planning NETMASK Net Mask 255.1 Network planning CBCItfPara CBC Interface Param PHASE_FLAG -1 Network planning IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning TRXBN TRX Board No..168. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 6 Configuring Cell Broadcast Data Type GXPUM VLAN parameters BSC attributes CB interface parameters TRX channel attributes 6-8 Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source PortSwitch Panel Port Switch OPEN(Open) Network planning SRN Subrack No.168. 0 Network planning CHNO Channel No.255. 0 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 0 Network planning SN Slot No.101. Ltd.101.255. 0 Network planning TRXPN TRX Board Path No.0 Network planning Name BSC name bsc Network planning AreaCode Area Code 10 Network planning CC CC 086 Network planning MCC MCC 460 Network planning MNC MNC 00 Network planning SpprtCB Support Cell Broadcast SPPRTSIMPL E (SupportSimpl e CB) Network planning CBIPPRT CBC interface port 60000 Network planning IFCBSHAKEH AND CB interface handshake YES(Yes) Network planning BSCGATEWA YIP BSC Gateway 192.

run the ADD BRD command to add the GXPUM. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd.. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 6-9 .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type Source Cell Name Simplified cell broadcast message 6 Configuring Cell Broadcast Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source CHTYPE Channel Type BCCH_CBCH (BCCH +CBCH) Network planning IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning SUPPORTCEL LBROADCAS T Support cell broadcast name YES(YES) Network planning IDXTYPE Index type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLINDEX Cell Index 0 Network planning GS Geography scope LAC(LAC) Network planning CODE Code 3 Network planning UPDATE Update 0 Network planning CHANID Chan ID 1 Network planning SCHEME Coding scheme GB2312 (GB2312) Network planning TEXT Content of message test Network planning REP Repeat 1 Network planning INT Interval 2 Network planning ST Start time 08-12-19 17:55:50 Network planning ET End time 08-12-19 17:55:51 Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD XPUVLAN command to configure the VLAN parameters of the GXPUM. run the MOD XPUPORT command to configure the attributes of the port on the GXPUM. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

Step 8 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ----End Example An example script for configuring simplified cell broadcast is as follows: /*Add a GXPUM*/ ADD BRD: SRN=0. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . MCC="460". /*Modify the VLAN parameters of the GXPUM*/ MOD XPUVLAN: SRN=0. MNC="00". choose Trace > Trace Message on the Abis Interface > RSL Message. /*Add the simplified cell broadcast message*/ ADD SMSCB: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. TEXT="test". BSCGATEWAYIP="192.11". CODE=3. CHTYPE=BCCH_CBCH. change SDCCH8(SDCCH8) to SDCCH_CBCH(SDCCH +CBCH). run the MOD CHAN command to change the corresponding channel type. UPDATE=0. IFCBSHAKEHAND=YES. CBCItfPara=PHASE_FLAG-0. SCHEME=GB2312. Step 6 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. A dialog box is displayed. CELLIDX=0. Step 7 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. SN=0. CHANID=1. /*Change "Support cell broadcast name" to "YES(YES)"*/ MOD CELLSBC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. /*Modify the attributes of the TRX channel*/ MOD CHAN: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. SN=0. SpprtCB=SPPRTSIMPLE. Ltd. CHNO=0. run the MOD CELLSBC command to change Support cell broadcast name to YES(YES). run the MOD CBPARA command to change CB interface handshake to YES(Yes).0". run the LST CHAN command to check whether Channel Type is set to MBCCH(Main BCCH) or SDCCH8(SDCCH8). TRXBN=0.168. ST=2008&11&15&15&46&13. /*Configure the attributes of the port on the GXPUM*/ MOD XPUPORT: SRN=0. GS=LAC. BT=GXPUM.168. AreaCode=10. REP=1.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 6 Configuring Cell Broadcast Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. /*Change "Support Cell Broadcast" to "SPPRTSIMPLE(SupportSimple CB)"*/ MOD BSCBASIC: Name="bsc". TRXBN=0. SUPPORTCELLBROADCAST=YES. l If the channel is the main BCCH. MAC=H'DF. run the ADD SMSCB command to add the simplified cell broadcast message for the cell. l If the channel is the SDCCH8. /*Query the attributes of the TRX channel*/ LST CHAN: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. 6-10 On the Trace & Monitor tab page. Step 9 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.101.101. TRXPN=0.. Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. CELLINDEX=0.1". PortSwitch=OPEN. /*Modify the parameters related to the CB interface*/ MOD CBPARA: CBIPPRT=60000. CELLIDX=0. run the MOD BSCBASIC command to change Support Cell Broadcast to SPPRTSIMPLE(SupportSimple CB). BackType=NONE. CC=086. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. as shown in Figure 6-3. INT=2.255. SN=0. AddrValid=VALID.255. PN=0. CELLIDX=0. IP="192. Postrequisite l Verifying simple cell broadcast 1. NETMASK="255. change MBCCH(Main BCCH) to BCCH_CBCH(BCCH +CBCH). ET=2008&11&15&15&00&13.

Set Tracing Mode to Report.. 6-11 . Ltd. In the displayed dialog box shown in Figure 6-4. Figure 6-4 Trace the RSL Message at Abis Interface dialog box Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and click OK.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 6 Configuring Cell Broadcast Figure 6-3 Trace RSL Message on the Abis Interface dialog box 2. you can infer that the simple cell broadcast runs normally. 3. if SMS Broadcast Command exists in Message Type.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . Ltd. Verifying deactivation of simple cell broadcast: The method of verifying the deactivation of the simple cell broadcast function is identical to that of verifying the simple cell broadcast function. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 2. If SMS Broadcast Command does not exist in Message Type. run the MOD BSCBASIC command to set Support Cell Broadcast to NOTSPPRTBC(NotSupport CB). you can infer that the simple cell broadcast function is deactivated successfully.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 6 Configuring Cell Broadcast l 6-12 Deactivating simplified cell broadcast 1.

Ltd. BSC. BTS.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 7 Configuring Ciphering 7 Configuring Ciphering The ciphering algorithm encrypts the subscriber information such as the voice and data so that the information is securely transmitted on the Um interface. and HLR Prerequisite l Ciphering is license-controlled. For details.. 7-1 . Impact None NEs Involved MS. MSC/VLR. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. AUC. Preparation Table 7-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring ciphering Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source Basic call control attributes of the cell IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning RACHBUSYTH RED RACH Busy Threshold 16 Network planning PAGTIMES Paging Times 4 Network planning ASSLOADJUDG EEN Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable DISABLE (DISABLE) Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Scenario Ciphering is configured to ensure the information security. see Activate BSC License.

Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . A5/3 Network planning BSC basic attributes Name BSC name bsc Network planning AreaCode Area Code 12 Network planning CC CC 086 Network planning MCC MCC 460 Network planning MNC MNC 00 Network planning AVer A Interface Tag GSM_PHASE_ 2Plus Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 7 Configuring Ciphering Data Type 7-2 Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source DTLOADTHRE D Directed Retry Load Access Threshold 85 Network planning MSMAXRETRA N MS MAX Retrans 4_Times (4_Times) Network planning ERGCALLDIS Emergent Call Disable YES(YES) Network planning ECSC ECSC YES(YES) Network planning MBR Multi-band report 2 Network planning REASSEN Allow Reassign YES(YES) Network planning EMLPPEN Allow EMLPP YES(YES) Network planning Cell software parameters SDFASTHOSWI TCH SD Fast Ho ON(ON) Network planning Cell timer WAITRESVCHA NREFRESHTIM ER Timer of Reserved TCH for EMC[s] 10 Network planning WTSDFASTHOTRIGTMR Timer For SD Fast Ho trig 5 Network planning Cell basic attributes ENCRY Encryption Algorithm A5/0. Ltd..

WTSDFASTHOTRIGTMR=5. run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to modify the setting of the Encryption Algorithm parameter by clearing the unnecessary ciphering algorithms. 2. CELLIDX=0. NOTE A5/0 must be included in the encryption algorithm. run the MOD BSCBASIC command to set A Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2 or GSM_PHASE_2Plus. MSMAXRETRAN=4_Times. For details. MBR=2.. see Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. MCC="460". CELLIDX=0. initiate a call in the test cell. Deactivating ciphering 1. DTLOADTHRED=85. WAITRESVCHANREFRESHTIMER=10. 7-3 . PAGTIMES=4. AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus. Postrequisite l l Verifying ciphering 1. ENCRY=A5/0-1&A5/3-1. /*Set "A Interface Tag"*/ MOD BSCBASIC: Name="bsc". /*Set "Timer For SD Fast Ho trig"*/ SET CELLTMR: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD CELLCCBASIC command to configure the basic call parameters of the cell. When the call is set up. run the SET CELLTMR command to set Timer For SD Fast Ho trig. CC=086. EMLPPEN=YES. ECSC=YES. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. RACHBUSYTHRED=16. run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to configure the ciphering algorithm. ASSLOADJUDGEEN=DISABLE. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. MNC="00". verify that the Cipher Mode CMD message is present. For details. run the SET CELLSOFT command to set SD Fast Ho. /*Set "SD Fast Ho"*/ SET CELLSOFT: SDFASTHOSWITCH=ON.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 7 Configuring Ciphering Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ----End Example An example script for configuring ciphering is as follows: /*Modify the basic call parameters of the cell*/ MOD CELLCCBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. After the window for tracing the BSSAP messages on the A interface is opened. REASSEN=YES. Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. AreaCode=12. Start the tracing of the BSSAP messages on the A interface. CELLIDX=0. Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) On the Local Maintenance Terminal. see the related configuration manual. Step 6 Enable the A5/0 and A5/3 ciphering algorithms on the MSC side. ERGCALLDIS=YES. /*Set "Encryption Algorithm"*/ MOD CELLBASICPARA: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. NOTE SD Fast Ho is configured to improve the security of the A5 ciphering algorithm.

7-4 Verifying deactivation of ciphering: The method of verifying the deactivation of the ciphering function is identical to that of verifying the ciphering function.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 7 Configuring Ciphering 2. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .. Ltd. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Verify that the Cipher Mode CMD message does not exist in the queried result.

wanted signals are transmitted by switching a carrier among many frequencies according to the specified sequences. 8-1 . Therefore.2 Changing None FH to RF FH This describes how to change the FH mode of a cell from none FH to RF FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal. it may have negative impact on the network. 8. however.Frequency hopping is a spread-spectrum technology.5 Changing Baseband FH to RF FH This describes how to change the FH mode of a cell from baseband FH to RF FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal. it has negative impact on PS services. which has the features such as resistance to interference. 8.4 Changing RF FH to Baseband FH This describes how to change the FH mode of a cell from RF FH to baseband FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal.6 Changing RF FH to None FH This describes how to change the FH mode of a cell from RF FH to none FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd. The application of frequency hopping in the GSM supresses the interference and increases the system capacity. 8. 8. 8. anti-attenuation. and high security. you are advised not to enable frequency hopping in this case.3 Changing None FH to Baseband FH This describes how to change the FH mode of a cell from none FH to baseband FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Frequency hopping involves RF hopping and baseband hopping.1 Principles of Configuring the FH Cell This describes the principles of configuring the frequency hopping (FH) cell. 8. Context The frequency hopping improves the speech quality. 8. Especially in high data rate coding schemes such as CS3-CS4.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 8 8 Configuring Frequency Hopping Configuring Frequency Hopping About This Chapter With this feature.7 Changing Baseband FH to None FH Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. MCS5-MCS9.

10 Configuring MA Group This describes how to configure a MA group for the cell on the Local Maintenance Terminal.8 Setting FH Mode to Hybrid FH This describes how to set the FH mode of a cell to hybrid FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd.9 Changing Hybrid FH to None FH This describes how to change the FH mode of a cell from hybrid FH to none FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .8 Configuring Frequency Hopping HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) This describes how to change the FH mode of a cell from baseband FH to none FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 8. 8-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 8. 8..

The PDCH can configured only on the TRX of compatible main BCCH frequency. l In a double-timeslot cell. the base station color code (BCC) of a cell must be different from the training sequence code (TSC) in the FH data table. the frequencies from the 900P and 900E bands are called compatible frequencies while those from the 900R and 1800M bands are called incompatible frequencies.. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the E-GSM (900E) provides the frequencies numbered 0 and those numbered from 975 to 1023.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 8 Configuring Frequency Hopping 8. the TRX carrying the main BCCH must be configured in the underlaid subcell. the frequencies from the 900P. the frequencies in a FH group must be on the same frequency band. 900E. l In initial configuration. adhere to the following principles: l The GSM900 is classified into sub frequency bands: P-GSM. the cell should not be configured as an FH cell. the frequency band where the TRX with the SDCCH operates should not be higher than that where the TRX with the main BCCH operates. and 900R bands are called compatible frequencies while the frequencies from the 1800M band are called incompatible frequencies. the cells cannot contain the frequencies from the incompatible EGSM or 1800M band. If the main BCCH frequency belongs to the 900R band. l If the baseband FH and the EDGE functionality conflict. l In RF FH. the base station color code (BCC) of a cell must be the same as the training sequence code (TSC) in the FH data table. Ltd. the TRXs in the underlaid subcell should not be in the same FH group with other TRXs. l When a double-timeslot cell is also a concentric cell. the frequencies from the 900P band are called compatible frequencies while those from the 900E and 1800M bands are called incompatible frequencies. For frequency hopping in non co-BCCH cells. E-GSM. l When the cell software parameter TSC Plan Enable is set to the ON state. If the main BCCH frequency belongs to the 900E band. l If baseband FH is configured in a COBCCH cell. When the cell software parameter TSC Plan Enable is set to the OFF state. l If a double-timeslot cell is configured with baseband FH. the odd-numbered channels on the TRXs in the underlaid subcell must be SDCCHs. the first channel to be configured is the BCCH by default. and the RGSM band provides the frequencies numbered from 955 to 974. If the main BCCH frequency belongs to the 900P band. at least one static PDCH should be configured in the overlaid subcell. The P-GSM (900P) band provides the frequencies numbered from 1 to 124. and R-GSM. if the main BCCH frequency belongs to the 900P band. l In a double-timeslot cell. 8-3 . When configuring an FH cell. they cannot be configured simultaneously.1 Principles of Configuring the FH Cell This describes the principles of configuring the frequency hopping (FH) cell. If the frequency of the TRX that carries the SDCCH and the main BCCH frequency belong to the same frequency band. the TRX carrying the main BCCH must be set to No FH. l If a cell is configured with less than two TRXs. l The frequency of the TRX that carries the SDCCH can be compatible or incompatible with the main BCCH frequency.

the TRXs whose frequencies are in one FH group must be configured in the same cabinet. the carriers compatible with the BCCH carrier should be configured with PDCHs. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . – The carriers compatible with the BCCH carrier and those incompatible with the BCCH carrier should not be configured in the same MA list. the TCHs on the carriers incompatible with the BCCH carrier can be converted into PDCHs if the MS supports the related frequency bands. at least one non-FH TRX should be configured in the cell. the TRXs whose frequencies are in one FH group must be configured in the same cabinet group. the parameter Dynamic Channel Conversion Parameter of Concentric Cell of GPRS Attributes should be set to Convert dynamic channel in both subcells and underlaid subcell preferred. If the number of carriers compatible with the BCCH carrier in a cell is greater than 32. the number of carriers compatible with the BCCH carrier can be greater than 24 in a GPRS cell or greater than 16 in an EGPRS cell. l For the FH TRXs. the TRX is configured with static PDCHs or channels that can be converted into PDCHs. you are advised to enable a TRX (the BCCH TRX is preferred) to meet one of the following conditions to ensure the initial access of the MS: – The TRX does not participate in FH and is compatible with the BCCH. In addition.8 Configuring Frequency Hopping HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) l In the baseband FH. l When the long-range FH switch is turned on.. the TRX carrying the main BCCH must be set to No FH. l In a cell. the FH group of non-main BCCH frequencies in timeslot 0 is exclusive to the main BCCH frequencies. l In a concentric cell. the TRX is configured with static PDCHs or channels that can be converted into PDCHs. l If there is an MA containing a BCCH-compatible frequency and a non-BCCH-compatible frequency in the configured FH cell. In addition. If a single-transceiver BTS is configured with baseband FH. the MS cannot access the network. the same timeslots should not have the same FH group number and the same Mobile Allocation Index Offset (MAIO) simultaneously. l In RF FH. if the BCCH carrier is located in the OL subcell. Otherwise.If the number of carriers compatible with the BCCH carrier in a GPRS cell is greater than 24 but smaller than or equal to 32. The carriers incompatible with the BCCH carrier can be configured with PDCHs or the channels on these carriers can be converted into PDCHs so that the MS can be assigned these carriers through the Packet Timeslot Reconfigure procedure. but the following conditions must be met: – At least one static PDCH should be configured on the BCCH carrier. but all the frequencies in the MA are compatible with the BCCH. l In a concentric cell. the carrier assigned to the MS accessing the network for the first time should meet the following conditions: It should be located in the UL subcell and be compatible with the BCCH carrier. Ltd. – The TRX participates in FH. if the BCCH carrier is located in the UL subcell. If all the traffic channels in a concentric cell are configured as dynamic PDTCHs. or the number of carriers compatible with the BCCH carrier in an EGPRS cell is greater than 16 but smaller than or equal to 32. a maximum of one MA list in which the carriers are compatible with the BCCH carrier can be configured. the TCHs on only the carriers compatible with the BCCH carrier can be converted into PDCHs if the MS does not support the related frequency band. 8-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and PDCH should be configured on the carrier. and the carriers incompatible with the BCCH carrier can be configured with PDCHs or the channels on these carriers can be converted into PDCHs. l If a double-transceiver BTS is configured with baseband FH.

the system automatically changes the FH attributes of all TRXs in a cell to RF FH. NEs Involved MS.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 8 Configuring Frequency Hopping 8. Impact The frequency hopping improves the speech quality. Preparation Table 8-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for changing none FH to RF FH Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME Network planning CELLNAME Cell Name Cell_1 Network planning FHMODE Frequency hopping mode RF_FH(RF FH) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. and BSC NOTE When the FH mode of a cell is changed from none FH to RF HP. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. and increases the capacity of the system. Prerequisite The number of TRXs in a cell must be greater than or equal to two. BTS. Scenario The frequency hopping simplifies frequency planning. and then set the Frequency hopping mode to RF_FH(RF FH). however. ----End Example An example script of changing the FH mode of a cell from none FH to RF FH is as follows: MOD CELLHOPTP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. Select the target cell according to the Cell Index or Cell Name. Ltd. FHMODE=RF_FH.2 Changing None FH to RF FH This describes how to change the FH mode of a cell from none FH to RF FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal. improves the antiinterference capability. run the MOD CELLHOPTP command. 8-5 . CELLNAME="Cell_1". it has negative impact on PS services.

Ltd. Select the target cell according to the Cell Index or Cell Name. observe the Abis signaling tracing window.3 Changing None FH to Baseband FH This describes how to change the FH mode of a cell from none FH to baseband FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal. and BSC Prerequisite l The number of TRXs in a cell must be greater than or equal to two. improves the antiinterference capability. Verify that that the call is normal and the voice quality is good. Impact The frequency hopping improves the speech quality. Select the Frequency hopping mode to BaseBand_FH (BaseBand FH) and then Select the Frequency hopping mode of BCCH TRX to Hop. Then.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 8 Configuring Frequency Hopping Postrequisite l Verifying FH 1. 8. and increases the capacity of the system. NEs Involved MS. see Tracing RSL Messages on the Abis Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. it has negative impact on PS services. For details. Preparation Table 8-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for changing none FH to baseband FH Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME Network planning CELLNAME Cell Name Cell_1 Network planning FHMODE Frequency hopping mode BaseBand_FH (BaseBand FH) Network planning BCCHTRXHP Frequency hopping mode of BCCH TRX Hop(Hop) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. l The BTS supports baseband FH. Use the MS to make a call in the cell to be verified. Scenario The frequency hopping simplifies frequency planning. however. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . Start the tracing of the RSL messages on the Abis interface. run the MOD CELLHOPTP command. BTS.. 8-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. set the BCCH carrier frequency hopping. The result shows that the Assignment Command message is traced and the information element h:rf-hoppingchannel in the message is 1.

4 Changing RF FH to Baseband FH This describes how to change the FH mode of a cell from RF FH to baseband FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal. it has negative impact on PS services. see 8. CELLNAME="Cell_1". Start the tracing of RSL messages on the Abis interface. 8.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 8 Configuring Frequency Hopping NOTE For the FH that the BCCH carrier participates in. see Tracing RSL Messages on the Abis Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. For how to change the FH mode of a cell from RF FH to none FH. and BSC NOTE The BSC does not allow the direct switch from RF FH to baseband FH. see 8. NEs Involved MS. Scenario The frequency hopping simplifies frequency planning. For details. Therefore. Impact The frequency hopping improves the speech quality.3 Changing None FH to Baseband FH. The Assignment Command message is traced and the information element h:rf-hopping-channel in the message is 1. and then from none FH to baseband FH. Use the MS to make a call in the cell to be verified. Postrequisite l Verifying FH 1. the BCCH timeslot is not involved. observe the Abis signaling tracing window. BCCHTRXHP=Hop. but the rest timeslots can participate in the baseband hopping. BTS. Then. This feature depends on baseband hopping and mutually exclusive RF hopping. l The BTS supports baseband FH.. and increases the capacity of the system. however. 8-7 . Verify that that the call is normal and the voice quality is good. ----End Example An example script of changing the FH mode of a cell from none FH to baseband FH with the BCCH TRX involving in FH is as follows: MOD CELLHOPTP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. FHMODE=BaseBand_FH. Prerequisite l The number of TRXs in a cell must be greater than or equal to two. change the FH mode of a cell from RH FH to none FH.6 Changing RF FH to None FH. For how to change the FH mode of a cell from none FH to baseband FH . Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. improves the antiinterference capability.

see 8. 8.5 Changing Baseband FH to RF FH This describes how to change the FH mode of a cell from baseband FH to RF FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. and increases the capacity of the system. run the MOD CELLHOPTP command and set the Frequency hopping mode to BaseBand_FH(BaseBand FH). run the MOD CELLHOPTP command and set the Frequency hopping mode to RF_FH(RF FH). from none FH to baseband FH*/ CELLNAME="Cell_1". and then change baseband FH to none FH. from RF FH to none FH*/ CELLNAME="Cell_1". For change the FH mode of a cell from baseband FH to none FH . Impact The frequency hopping improves the speech quality. improves the antiinterference capability. Therefore. NEs Involved MS.2 Changing None FH to RF FH. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . run the MOD CELLHOPTP command and set the Frequency hopping mode to NO_FH(NO FH). Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.7 Changing Baseband FH to None FH.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 8 Configuring Frequency Hopping Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. FHMODE=BaseBand_FH. Change the FH mode of a cell from none FH to RF FH. Ltd. BTS. ----End 8-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. and BSC NOTE The BSC does not allow the direct switch from baseband FH to RF FH. however. Scenario The frequency hopping simplifies frequency planning. run the MOD CELLHOPTP command and set the Frequency hopping mode to NO_FH(NO FH).. change the FH mode of a cell from baseband FH to RF FH. FHMODE=NO_FH. Prerequisite The number of TRXs in a cell must be greater than or equal to two. ----End Example An example script of changing RF FH to baseband FH is as follows: /*Change the FH mode of a cell MOD CELLHOPTP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. it has negative impact on PS services. see 8. BCCHTRXHP=Hop. /*Change the FH mode of a cell MOD CELLHOPTP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME.

FHMODE=RF_FH. Impact The frequency hopping improves the speech quality. Scenario In high data rate coding schemes of PS services. ----End Example An example script of changing the FH mode of a cell from RF FH to none FH is as follows: Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the frequency hopping may have negative impact on the network. Select the target cell according to the Cell Index or Cell Name and set the Frequency hopping mode to NO_FH (NO FH). from baseband FH to none FH*/ CELLNAME="Cell_1". 8-9 . however. BTS. NEs Involved MS. /*Change the FH mode of a cell MOD CELLHOPTP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 8 Configuring Frequency Hopping Example An example script of changing baseband FH to RF FH is as follows: /*Change the FH mode of a cell MOD CELLHOPTP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. it has negative impact on PS services. and BSC Prerequisite The number of TRXs in a cell must be greater than or equal to two.6 Changing RF FH to None FH This describes how to change the FH mode of a cell from RF FH to none FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Preparation Table 8-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for changing RF FH to none FH Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME Network planning CELLNAME Cell Name Cell_1 Network planning FHMODE Frequency hopping mode NO_FH(NO FH) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD CELLHOPTP command. BCCHTRXHP=Hop. 8. from none FH to RF FH*/ CELLNAME="Cell_1".. Ltd. FHMODE=NO_FH.

. CELLNAME="Cell_1". it has negative impact on PS services. Select the target cell according to the Cell Index or Cell Name and set the Frequency hopping mode to NO_FH (NO FH). the frequency hopping may have negative impact on the network. run the MOD CELLHOPTP command. CELLNAME="Cell". ----End Example An example script of changing the FH mode of a cell from baseband FH to none FH is as follows: MOD CELLHOPTP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. 8-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 8 Configuring Frequency Hopping MOD CELLHOPTP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. Preparation Table 8-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for changing baseband FH to none FH Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME Network planning CELLNAME Cell Name Cell_1 Network planning FHMODE Frequency hopping mode NO_FH(NO FH) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. FHMODE=NO_FH. however. and BSC Prerequisite The number of TRXs in a cell must be greater than or equal to two. NEs Involved MS. Ltd. Impact The frequency hopping improves the speech quality. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . 8. FHMODE=NO_FH. 8.7 Changing Baseband FH to None FH This describes how to change the FH mode of a cell from baseband FH to none FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Scenario In high data rate coding schemes of PS services.8 Setting FH Mode to Hybrid FH This describes how to set the FH mode of a cell to hybrid FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal. BTS.

Select the target cell according to the Cell Index or Cell Name and set the Frequency hopping mode to Hybrid_FH(Hybrid FH). and BSC NOTE The BSC does not allow the direct switch from baseband FH/RF FH to hybrid FH. however. Table 8-5 Example of the data negotiated and planned for changing the FH mode of a cell from none FH to hybrid FH Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME Network planning CELLNAME Cell Name Cell_1 Network planning FHMODE Frequency hopping mode Hybrid_FH(Hybrid FH) Network planning BCCHTRXHP Frequency hopping mode of BCCH TRX Hop(Hop) Network planning Procedure l If the FH mode of a cell is none FH. l If the FH mode of a cell is baseband FH or RF FH. 8-11 . Issue 02 (2010-09-20) On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD CELLHOPTP command. NEs Involved MS. l For how to change the FH mode of a cell from RF FH to none FH. Ltd. BTS. do as follows: 1. l If the FH mode of a cell is none FH. improves the antiinterference capability.7 Changing Baseband FH to None FH. Prerequisite The number of TRXs in a cell must be greater than or equal to two. Impact The frequency hopping improves the speech quality. see 8.. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Preparation The configuration parameters of changing the FH mode from none FH to hybrid FH or from baseband FH or RF FH to hybrid FH are almost the same. The following is an example of the parameters planned for changing the FH mode of a cell from none FH to hybrid FH. it has negative impact on PS services.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 8 Configuring Frequency Hopping Scenario The frequency hopping simplifies frequency planning. set the FH mode to hybrid FH directly. change the FH mode from baseband or RF FH to none FH.6 Changing RF FH to None FH. and increases the capacity of the system. see 8. l For how to change the FH mode of a cell from baseband FH to none FH . and then from none FH to hybrid FH.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 8 Configuring Frequency Hopping l If the FH mode of a cell is baseband FH or RF FH. however. do as follows: 1. the frequency hopping may have negative impact on the network. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . Scenario In high data rate coding schemes of PS services. Verify that that the call is normal and the voice quality is good. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. NEs Involved MS. Then. it has negative impact on PS services. Prerequisite The number of TRXs in a cell must be greater than or equal to two. Postrequisite l Verifying FH 1. first change hybrid FH to none FH. and BSC NOTE To change the FH mode of a cell from hybrid FH to baseband FH or RF FH. Ltd. Select the target cell according to the Cell Index or Cell Name and set the Frequency hopping mode to Hybrid_FH(Hybrid FH). BCCHTRXHP=Hop. Use the MS to make a call in the cell to be verified. see Tracing RSL Messages on the Abis Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. observe the Abis signaling tracing window. ----End Example An example script of changing the FH mode of a cell from none FH to hybrid FH is as follows: MOD CELLHOPTP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. An example script of changing the FH mode of a cell from baseband FH/RF FH to hybrid FH is as follows: /*Change the FH mode of a cell MOD CELLHOPTP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. from none FH to hybrid FH*/ CELLNAME="Cell_1". Start the tracing of RSL messages on the Abis interface. FHMODE=NO_FH.. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD CELLHOPTP command to select the target cell according to the Cell Index or Cell Name. FHMODE=Hybrid_FH. The Assignment Command message is traced and the information element h:rf-hopping-channel in the message is 1. BCCHTRXHP=Hop. and then change none FH to baseband FH or RF FH. FHMODE=Hybrid_FH. run the MOD CELLHOPTP command. BTS. 2. For details. /*Change the FH mode of a cell MOD CELLHOPTP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. to none FH*/ CELLNAME="Cell_1". and then set the Frequency hopping mode to NO_FH(NO FH). 8-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.9 Changing Hybrid FH to None FH This describes how to change the FH mode of a cell from hybrid FH to none FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Impact The frequency hopping improves the speech quality. CELLNAME="Cell_1". 8.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 8 Configuring Frequency Hopping Preparation Table 8-6 Example of the data negotiated and planned for changing hybrid FH to none FH Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME Network planning CELLNAME Cell Name Cell_1 Network planning FHMODE Frequency hopping mode NO_FH(NO FH) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ----End Example An example script of changing the FH mode of a cell from hybrid FH to none FH is as follows: MOD CELLHOPTP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. NEs Involved MS. and increase the system capacity. Ltd. it affects the PS services. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 8. Select the target cell according to the Cell Index or Cell Name and set the Frequency hopping mode to NO_FH (NO FH). – The difference between the maximum ARFCN and the minimum ARFCN is not greater than 111. improve the anti-interference capability. FHMODE=NO_FH. BTS.. 8-13 . – The interval between two adjacent frequencies is not less than 913. run the MOD CELLHOPTP command. CELLNAME="Cell_1". and BSC Prerequisite l The current cell is configured with FH mode. Impact The frequency hopping improves the speech quality.10 Configuring MA Group This describes how to configure a MA group for the cell on the Local Maintenance Terminal. however. l The frequencies of cells must meet at least one of the following conditions: – The ARFCN is greater than 0 but not greater than 124. Scenario The MA group is configured to simplify the frequency planning.

Ltd. – The number of frequencies is not greater than 29 and the maximum interval between two frequencies (or minimum frequency . – The number of frequencies is not greater than 18 and the maximum interval between two frequencies (or minimum frequency .maximum frequency + 1024) is greater than 786. Preparation Table 8-7 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the MA group Parameter Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source Cell frequency IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME Network planning CELLNAME Cell Name Cell_1 Network planning FREQ1 frequency 1 30 Network planning FREQ2 frequency 2 35 Network planning FREQ3 frequency 3 40 Network planning IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME Network planning CELLNAME Cell Name Cell_1 Network planning HSN HSN 0 Network planning TSC TSC 0 Network planning HOPMODE Frequency hopping mode BaseBand_FH (BaseBand FH) Network planning FREQ1 frequency 1 30 Network planning FREQ2 frequency 2 35 Network planning MA group 8-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. – The number of frequencies is not greater than 22 and the maximum interval between two frequencies (or minimum frequency .maximum frequency + 1024) is greater than 512..maximum frequency + 1024) is greater than 896. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 8 Configuring Frequency Hopping – The number of frequencies is not greater than 16. – The number of frequencies is 17 and the minimum ARFCN is 0.

skip this step. Ltd. 2 Network planning TRXPN1 No. CELLNAME="Cell_1". run the ADD CELLMAGRP command to add MA groups for the cell. run the MML command MOD CELLMAGRP. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the LST CELLMAGRP command to query the configuration information about the MA group of the cell. HSN should be the same as the corresponding BCC.. 8-15 . run the ADD CELLFREQ command to add frequencies for the cell. 1 Network planning TRXBN1 No. /*Add frequencies*/ Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the MOD CELLCHANHOP command to configure the FH index and MAIO for the added MA groups. Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.1 TRX Board Pass No. If the frequencies configured for the cell are sufficient.1 TRX Board No. ----End Example An example script for configuring the MA group is as follows: /*Query the configuration information about the MA group of the cell*/ LST CELLMAGRP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. run the LST CELLCHANHOP command to query the configuration information about the FH index and MAIO of the cell. NOTE If the original MA groups need to be modified. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 0 Network planning TRX1HOPIND EX Trx1 Hop Index 5 Network planning TRX1MAIO Trx1 Maio 11 Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Parameter Type FH index and MAIO 8 Configuring Frequency Hopping Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source FREQ3 frequency 3 40 Network planning IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME Network planning CELLNAME Cell Name Cell_1 Network planning CHANNO Channel No.

. /*Add MA groups*/ ADD CELLMAGRP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. FREQ2=35. TRX1HOPINDEX=5. HOPMODE=BaseBand_FH. TRX1MAIO=11. FREQ3=40.8 Configuring Frequency Hopping HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) ADD CELLFREQ: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. FREQ3=40. CHANNO=1. TSC=0. CELLNAME="Cell_1". FREQ1=30. /*Configure the FH index and MAIO*/ MOD CELLCHANHOP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. HSN=0. TRXBN1=2. CELLNAME="Cell_1". CELLNAME="Cell_1". /*Query the FH index and MAIO*/ LST CELLCHANHOP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. 8-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . FREQ1=30. CELLNAME="Cell_1". FREQ2=35. TRXPN1=0. Ltd.

Preparation Take the configuration of BTS3012 in TDM transmission mode as an example. The network side employs different channel assignment strategies for the subscribers according to the priorities. Table 9-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a BTS Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name BTS basic attributes BTSNAME BTS Name BTS3012 Network planning TYPE BTS Type BTS3012 Network planning UPNODE Up Node Type BSC Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l The GXPUM and Abis interface board are configured on the GMPS or GEPS. Ltd. BSC. Scenario The eMLPP function is configured to ensure normal conversation of the MS with higher priority if the network resources are insufficient. HLR. Example Source 9-1 . and MS Prerequisite l The eMLPP function is restricted by the license. The eMLPP service allows a subscriber to initiate calls with different priorities. see Activate BSC License. BTS. If the network is congested. l The eMLPP feature should be supported by the MSC. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. For details. and MS. and there is idle port on the Abis interface board..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 9 Configuring eMLPP 9 Configuring eMLPP The eMLPP is a supplementary service offered by the GSM system. MSC. the call with higher priority is served preferably. Impact None NEs Involved HLR.

Ltd. 0 Network planning SN Slot No. 0 Network planning BTSDESC BTS Description TDM BTS3012 Network planning MPMODE Multiplexing Mode MODE4_1 Network planning FlexAbisMode Flex Abis Mode FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis) Network planning AbisByPassMod e Abis By Pass Mode FALSE(Not Support) Network planning ServiceMode Service Type TDM Network planning DCELLNAME Cell Name TDMCELL Network planning DCTYPE Cell type GSM900 Network planning DCMCC Cell MCC 460 Network planning DCMNC Cell MNC 34 Network planning DCLAC Cell LAC 62 Network planning DCCI Cell CI 98 Network planning CPLMode Separate Mode UNSUPPORT(Not Support) Network planning TRXBN TRX Board No. 26 Network planning PN Port No. 5 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 9 Configuring eMLPP Data Type 9-2 Parameter ID Parameter Name SRN Subrack No.. Example Source Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . 0 Network planning FREQ TRX Freq.

BTSDESC = "TDM BTS3012" . 9-3 . TYPE = BTS3012. CELLNAME="TDMCELL". SN=26. TRXBN = 0. Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 9 Configuring eMLPP Table 9-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring eMLPP Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source GSM-R Parameters of the cell IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME (By Name) Network planning CELLNAME Cell Name TDMCELL Network planning EMLPPPRIORIT Y eMLPP Priority Priority2 (Priority 2) Network planning EMLPPEN Allow EMLPP YES(YES) Network planning Basic call control parameters of the cell Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. NOTE Priority4(Priority 4) is the highest priority whereas PriorityB(Priority B) is the lowest priority. PN = 10. CPLMode = UNSUPPORT. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) The priorities of the MSs in the HLR are as follows: MS 1 > MS 2 > MS 3. Postrequisite l Verifying eMLPP 1. MPMODE = MODE4_1. run the MOD CELLGSMR command to configure eMLPP priority. FREQ = 5. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.DCELLNAME = "TDMCELL ". DCLAC = 62. ----End Example An example script for configuring eMLPP for a BTS3012 in TDM transmission mode is as follows: /*Add a BTS3012*/ ADD BTS: BTSNAME = "BTS3012". run the ADD BTS command to add a BTS. EMLPPEN=YES. AbisByPassMode = False. DCTYPE = GSM900. SRN = 0. DCCI = 98. EMLPPPRIORITY = Priority2. DCMNC = "34". /*Configure eMLPP*/ MOD CELLGSMR: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. /*Enable the eMLPP function*/ MOD CELLGSMR: IDXTYPE=BYNAME.. FlexAbisMode = FLEX_ABIS. UPNODE = BSC. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD CELLCCBASIC command to set Allow EMLPP to YES(YES) to enable the eMLPP function. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ServiceMode = TDM. CELLNAME="TDMCELL". DCMCC = "460".

On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Use MS 1 to make a call to the PSTN. 4. The assignment request message can be viewed in the A interface tracing window. 3. run the MOD CELLCCBASIC command to set Allow EMLPP to NO(NO). The channel used by MS 3 is released (no handover attempt) and then occupied by MS 1. must comply with the priorities. 6. Ensure that a higher-priority MS can preempt the channel used by a lower-priority MS by configuring the data on the MSC side. Verifying deactivation of eMLPP: The method of verifying the deactivation of the eMLPP function is identical to that of verifying the eMLPP function. Use MS 1 to make a call to the PSTN. l 9-4 Deactivating eMLPP 1. the data configuration on the CN side must be correct. In the test cell. MS 3 is found to be handed over to other cells. The call initiated by MS 2 is not affected. run the SET BTSOBJ command to block the remaining idle TCHs in the cell. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. the channel used by MS 3 is released and then occupied by MS 1. and the configuration relations included in the Priority information element (IE) of the assignment request message. whether an MS with a lower priority can be handed over to another cell is determined by whether the neighboring cell relations is configured correctly (the configuration of the neighboring cell relations is not involved in the configuration of the eMLPP function). For details.. If the handover fails. use MS 2 and MS 3 separately to make a call to the PSTN. NOTE When the eMLPP function is enabled. see Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface and Tracing RSL Messages on the Abis Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. which indicates the MS that can be preempted.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 9 Configuring eMLPP 2. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . The call initiated by MS 2 is not affected. Choose Trace Message on the A Interface > BSSAP Message and Trace Message on the Abis Interface > RSL Message. In addition. 2. Ltd. when the eMLPP function is enabled. 5. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Impact The priority-based resource reservation function can be combined with the eMLPP function to guarantee the benefits of users and improve the users' satisfaction. and MS Prerequisite l The priority-based resource reservation function is license-controlled. Scenario The priority-based resource reservation function is configured to provide services of different levels for users with different priorities. For details. thus increasing the operators' revenues. operators can provide services of different levels for users with different priorities. NEs Involved BSC. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. the system reserves a certain number of TCHFs for the high-priority users to ensure their QoS. By using this function. see Activate BSC License. Ltd. BTS. 10-1 . Preparation Table 10-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring priority-based resource reservation Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME(By Name) Network planning CELLNAME Cell Name CELL01 Network planning GRADEACCALLO W Grade Access Allow YES(YES) Network planning HPRIOR Highest Priority 2 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 10 10 Configuring Priority-Based Resource Reservation Configuring Priority-Based Resource Reservation With priority-based resource reservation..

MINRESTIMETCH=60. HPRIOR=2. In addition. it indicates that the function of priority-based resource reservation is deactivated. ----End Example An example script for configuring priority-based resource reservation is as follows: /*Configure priority-based resource reservation*/ SET CELLCHMGBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. run the SET CELLCHMGBASIC command to set Grade Access Allow to NO(NO). On the Local Maintenance Terminal. set Highest Priority and Reserved Channel Number based on the actual network conditions. 2. Ltd. run the LST CELLCHMGBASIC command to check the setting of Grade Access Allow. If the parameter is set to NO. If the parameter is set to YES. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . run the SET CELLCHMGBASIC command to set Grade Access Allow to YES(YES). l 10-2 Deactivating priority-based resource reservation 1. run the LST CELLCHMGBASIC command to check the setting of Grade Access Allow. On the Local Maintenance Terminal.10 Configuring Priority-Based Resource Reservation HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source REVCHANNUM Reserved Channel Number 50 Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Postrequisite l Verifying priority-based resource reservation – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. REVCHANNUM=50. it indicates that the function of priority-based resource reservation is activated. CELLNAME="CELL01". GRADEACCALLOW=YES..

Upper Threshold and DL Qual. half-rate services (HS). For details. l When Huawei II power control algorithm is applied. Impact None. 11-1 . AMR full-rate services (AFS). In this way.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 11 11 Configuring Network Support SAIC Configuring Network Support SAIC This describes how to configure the Network Support SAIC. NEs Involved BSC. Therefore. the range of the power control threshold can be adjusted according to the following policies during the power control of the BSC or the BTS. Lower Threshold. l When Huawei III power control algorithm is applied. ** indicates full-rate services (FS). the interference on the entire network is reduced. BTS. This technique is especially adopted in the single antenna scenario to reduce the interference on the reception of downlink signals. or AMR half-rate services (AHS) in different situations. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Preparation The MS supporting the SAIC function has a stronger anti-interference capability. see Activate BSC License. and MS Prerequisite l The Network Support SAIC function is license-controlled. the value of HW3 threshold Adjust for SAIC should be subtracted from that of HW3DL**RexQualHighThred[dB] and HW3DL**RexQualLowThred[dB].. Scenario The transmit power of the BTS that serves the MS supporting the SAIC can be reduced on the network side. l The MS supports the SAIC function. the value of Power Control threshold Adjust for SAIC should be added to that of DL Qual. Ltd. The Single Antenna Interference Cancellation (SAIC) is a technique for restraining the co-channel interference and adjacentchannel interference.

run the MML command MOD CELLPWRHW2. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. DLAFSREXQUALLOWTHRED=14. SAICALLOWED=YES.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 11 Configuring Network Support SAIC Table 11-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the Network Support SAIC Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME(By Name) Network planning CELLNAME Cell Name CELL01 Network planning BTSSAICPCADJSWITCH Switch for BTS Supporting SAIC Power Control Adjustment ON(ON) Network planning PWRCTRLSW Power Control Switch HW3(HW3 Power Control) Network planning SAICALLOWED Saic Allowed YES(YES) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. NOTE l When Huawei III power control algorithm is applied. MOD CELLPWRHW3: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. and then set Power Control Switch to HW3(HW3 Power Control) and set Saic Allowed to YES (YES). ----End Example An example script for configuring the Network Support SAIC is as follows: /*Configure Network Support SAIC*/ SET CELLSOFT: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . DLFSREXQUALHIGHTHRED=18. and then set HW3 threshold Adjust for SAIC to 2. run the MOD CELLPWRHW3 command. HW3SAICTHREDAPDTVALUE=2. run the SET CELLSOFT command. CELLNAME="CELL01". and then set Switch for BTS Supporting SAIC Power Control Adjustment to ON(ON). Postrequisite l 11-2 Verifying network support SAIC Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. DLHSREXQUALHIGHTHRED=18. Ltd. DLAHSREXQUALHIGHTHRED=16.. DLAHSREXQUALLOWTHRED=16. PWRCTRLSW=HW3. MOD CELLPWRBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. DLHSREXQUALLOWTHRED=18. DLAFSREXQUALHIGHTHRED=14. CELLNAME="CELL01".run the MOD CELLPWRBASIC command. DLFSREXQUALLOWTHRED=14. BTSSAICPCADJSWITCH=ON. CELLNAME="CELL01". and then set Power Control threshold Adjust for SAIC.

Verify that the value of the SAIC information element in the MS capability field carried in the Channel Activation message is 1. and set Saic Allowed to NO(NO). 2. Verifying the deactivation of network support SAIC: The operations are the same as those for Verifying Network Support SAIC. 2. Deactivating network support SAIC 1. 11-3 . For details. Start the tracing of RSL messages on the Abis interface. Use an MS occupying the non-BCCH to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the test cell. 3.run the MOD CELLPWRBASIC command.. Ltd. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Verify that the value of the SAIC information element in the MS capability field carried in the Channel Activation message is 0. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. see Tracing RSL Messages on the Abis Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) l Issue 02 (2010-09-20) 11 Configuring Network Support SAIC 1.

.

1dB) 150 Network planning EXPDLRXLEV Expected DL RX_LEV 20 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 12 12 Configuring Active Power Control Configuring Active Power Control This describes how to configure the active power control. Impact None. 12-1 .. power control can be performed in time. the QoS is improved. NEs Involved BSC. and MS Preparation Table 12-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the active power control Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME(By Name) Network planning CELLNAME Cell Name CELL01 Network planning PWRBCDALLOW D Power Forecast Allowed YES(YES) Network planning COMBINERLOSS Combiner Loss (0.1dB) 50 Network planning DOUBLEANTENN AGAIN Double Antenna Gain(0. In this way. Ltd. Scenario The active power control is enabled to control the transmit power of the BTS and the MS so that the system interference is reduced and the QoS is improved. After an MS accesses the network or an intra-BSC handover is performed successfully. BTS.1dB) 200 Network planning PATHLOSS Path Loss of Different Frequency Band(0. the system interference is reduced. and the power consumption of the BTS and the MS is decreased. Through the active power control. the BSC controls the uplink and downlink power so that the MS and the BTS transmit signals at the proper power.

CELLNAME="CELL01". Postrequisite l l 12-2 Verifying active power control 1. For details.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 12 Configuring Active Power Control Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source EXPULRXLEV Expected UL RX_LEV 30 Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Double Antenna Gain(0. Deactivating active power control 1. PWRBCDALLOWD=YES. COMBINERLOSS=50.1dB). see Tracing RSL Messages on the Abis Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. PATHLOSS=150.1dB). Start the tracing of RSL messages on the Abis interface. 2.. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Expected DL RX_LEV. run the LST CELLPWRBASIC command to check the setting of Power Forecast Allowed. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Verify that the values of power-level in the ms-power and bs-power information elements in the Channel Activation messages are greater than those when the active power control function is disabled. ----End Example An example script for configuring the active power control is as follows: /*Configure the active power control*/ MOD CELLPWRBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. it indicates that the function of active power control is deactivated. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . Ltd.1dB). 2. run the MOD CELLPWRBASIC command to set Power Forecast Allowed to NO(NO). DOUBLEANTENNAGAIN=200. Path Loss of Different Frequency Band(0. Then. EXPDLRXLEV=20. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. EXPULRXLEV=30. set Power Forecast Allowed to YES(YES) and set the following parameters according to the actual conditions of the existing network: Combiner Loss(0. and Expected UL RX_LEV. If the parameter is set to NO. run the MOD CELLPWRBASIC command.

13-1 . In this manner.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 13 13 Configuring Robust Air Interface Signalling Configuring Robust Air Interface Signalling With the robust air interface signalling function. Scenario The robust air interface signalling function helps to improve the performance of the FACCH and SACCH . Impact The speech quality is slightly affected because the signaling messages are repeatedly sent through frame stealing. when the radio quality is poor. thus reducing the call drop rate of the MS and improving the accuracy of the BSC handover and power control decision.. The robust air interface signalling function includes repeated sending of the FACCH frames in the downlink and the repeated sending of the SACCH frames in the uplink and downlink. Preparation Table 13-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the robust air interface signalling function Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME(By Name) Network planning CELLNAME Cell Name CELL01 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. and MS Prerequisite l The robust air interface signalling function is license-controlled. BTS. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. the antiinterference capability of the FACCH and SACCH is improved through repeated sending of the FACCH and SACCH frames. NEs Involved BSC. see Activate BSC License. the MS and BSC can receive the signaling messages more successfully. For details.

Postrequisite l Verifying robust air interface signalling – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 2. it indicates that the function of robust air interface signalling is activated. run the LST CELLCCBASIC command to check the setting of Repeated Downlink FACCH and Repeated SACCH. run the MOD CELLCCBASIC command to set Repeated Downlink FACCH and Repeated SACCH to NO(NO). CELLNAME="CELL01". In addition. REPEATDLFATHRED=5. run the LST CELLCCBASIC command to check the settings of Repeated Downlink FACCH and Repeated SACCH. and Repeated SACCH to YES(YES). l 13-2 Deactivating robust air interface signalling 1. If the two parameters are set to YES. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . it indicates that the function of robust air interface signalling is deactivated. Ltd. REPEATDLFASET=YES.13 Configuring Robust Air Interface Signalling HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source REPEATDLFASET Repeated Downlink FACCH YES(YES) Network planning REPEATDLFATHR ED Repeated Downlink FACCH Threshold 5 Network planning REPEATSASET Repeated SACCH YES(YES) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. ----End Example An example script for configuring the robust air interface signalling function is as follows: /*Configure robust air interface signalling*/ MOD CELLCCBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. set Repeated Downlink FACCH Threshold based on the actual conditions of the network. If the two parameters are set to NO. run the MOD CELLCCBASIC command to set Repeated Downlink FACCH to YES(YES). On the Local Maintenance Terminal. REPEATSASET=YES.

In this manner. Preparation Table 14-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BSS paging coordination function Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source ACOOPERATPAGINGSWITCH A Interface Collaboration Paging Switch OPEN(Open) Network planning IDXTYPE Index Type BYCELLNAME(By Cell Name) Network planning CELLNAME Cell Name CELL01 Network planning BSSPAGINGCOOR DINATION BSS Paging Coordination YES(YES) Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the MS in the packet transfer state can respond to the CS domain paging..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 14 14 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination Configuring BSS Paging Coordination With the BSS paging coordination function. l This function is implemented in built-in PCU mode. 14-1 . Ltd. Impact None. Scenario In the network with a lot of PS services. the network can send the CS domain paging message to an MS in the packet transfer state on the PACCH if the Gs interface is not configured between the MSC/VLR and the SGSN. NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite l The BSS paging coordination function is not license-controlled. the BSS paging coordination function helps to increase the paging success rate if no Gs interface is configured.

run the SET PSBASE command to set BSS Paging Coordination to NO(NO).14 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ----End Example An example script for configuring the BSS paging coordination function is as follows: /*Configure BSS paging coordination*/ SET PSSOFTPARA: ACOOPERATPAGINGSWITCH=OPEN. SET PSBASE: IDXTYPE=BYCELLNAME. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . 2. Ltd. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. l 14-2 Deactivating BSS paging coordination 1.. If BSS Paging Coordination is set to NO. it indicates that the function of BSS paging coordination is deactivated. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the LST PSBASE command. it indicates that the function of BSS paging coordination is activated. If BSS Paging Coordination is set to YES. BSSPAGINGCOORDINATION=YES. CELLNAME="CELL01". Postrequisite l Verifying BSS paging coordination – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the LST PSBASE command. run the SET PSBASE command to set BSS Paging Coordination to YES(YES). On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the SET PSSOFTPARA command to set A Interface Collaboration Paging Switch to OPEN(Open). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 15 15 Configuring a Co-BCCH Cell Configuring a Co-BCCH Cell About This Chapter Co-BCCH cell is realized on the basis of the principles of the concentric cell. and improves the continuous coverage and sparse coverage in hot spots. and the TRXs on the DCS1800M (or PCS1900M) are configured in the overlaid subcell. which is used to absorb the traffic. Ltd. 15. The TRXs on the GSM900M (or GSM850M) are configured in the underlaid subcell.1 Co-BCCH Cell Configuration Principles This describes the configuration principles of the co-BCCH cell. 15-1 . get familiar with the related information based on which the parameters are set. The TRXs on two bands are distributed in the overlaid subcell and underlaid subcell that share one BCCH TRX. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3 Configuring a Co-BCCH Cell This describes how to configure a co-BCCH cell on the Local Maintenance Terminal.2 Preparations for the Co-BCCH Cell Configuration Before configuring a co-BCCH cell. decreases handovers and interference. 15. 15.. Co-BCCH cell increases the traffic capacity of a cell. which is used to expand the coverage area.

such as handover success rate and assignment success rate. the underlaid subcell is configured in the GSM850M.2 Preparations for the Co-BCCH Cell Configuration Before configuring a co-BCCH cell.1 Co-BCCH Cell Configuration Principles This describes the configuration principles of the co-BCCH cell. get familiar with the related information based on which the parameters are set. l Generally. whether the frequency reuse on the GSM900/GSM850 is tight and whether interference exists During network planning. the GSM900M or GSM850M is configured in the underlaid cell to expand the coverage. Configure the BCCH in the GSM900M TRX. l Avoid a multi-layer concentric cell due to inconsistent combination mode of the TRXs on the same frequency band. Ltd. and BCCH on the same TRX. A co-BCCH cell consists of an overlaid subcell and an underlaid subcell. 15. the following restrictions apply: 15-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the signal power of the DCS1800M is about 15 dB less than the signal power of the GSM900M. NOTE The signal loss of the DCS1800M is faster with the transmission distance. and a call beyond the coverage of the DCS1800M TRX is not forcibly assigned to the overlaid subcell. The priorities of different types of TRXs are: P-GSM > E-GSM > R-GSM. At the distance of 0. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . PDCH. l The frequency hopping between the GSM900M and the DCS1800M is not allowed. The configuration of the co-BCCH cell should comply with the following principles: l Generally.. The frequency hopping within the same frequency band is allowed. The specific band configuration is as follows: l If the overlaid subcell is configured in the DCS1800M. l If the overlaid subcell is configured in the PCS1900M. whereas the DCS1800M or PCS1900M is configured in the overlaid cell to absorb the traffic.5-1 km. l Configure the SDCCH. the incoming intercell handover request is not directly assigned to the overlaid subcell.15 Configuring a Co-BCCH Cell HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 15. the overlaid subcell channel is not directly assigned to a call. including the following items: l Subscriber distribution and traffic volume in the coverage of the site l Ratio of the coverage of the DCS1800/PCS1900 to that of the entire cell l Ratio of the coverage of the GSM900/GSM850 to that of the entire cell l Whether the TRXs in the GSM900/GSM850 can carry all the traffic in the cell l Number of the TRXs in the GSM900/GSM850 and DCS1800/PCS1900 in the co-BCCH cell. the underlaid subcell is configured in the GSM900M or GSM850M. A multi-layer concentric cell affects the network KPIs. Get familiar with the status of the current cell. l The traffic in the underlaid subcell and the overlaid subcell should be properly assigned to maintain the traffic balance between the overlaid subcell and the underlaid subcell.

Therefore.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) l 15 Configuring a Co-BCCH Cell Number of TRXs – If the traffic is distributed mainly in the overlaid subcell. you should analyze the traffic distribution based on the congestion conditions in the underlaid subcell and then adjust the handover parameters of related cells. – If the co-BCCH cell has a high priority. you should consider the traffic load of the neighboring cells. this factor is negligible. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the congestion is likely to occur in a fully-loaded cell at high traffic hours. l The BTS and MS should support the co-BCCH cell. Scenario Co-BCCH cell improves the traffic capacity of a cell. l The serving BSC has enabled the concentric cell function. – If the co-BCCH cell has to be used. Ltd. In such a case. the underlaid subcell in the co-BCCH cell is likely to be congested and the network KPIs such as TCH Seizure Success Rate and Handover Success Rate deteriorate. – If the traffic volume in the underlaid subcell is high. – If the TRXs in the underlaid subcell are not sufficient. 15-3 . the co-BCCH cell is not recommended. The network KPIs such as TCH Seizure Success Rate and Handover Success Rate deteriorate. Thus. l Neighboring cell – If the co-BCCH cell is not adjacent to two or more single-band cells at the same time. this factor is negligible. you should consider the network hierarchy. the number of TRXs in the underlaid subcell should be greater or be equal to that in the overlaid subcell to prevent the congestion in the underlaid subcell.. l The BTS that adds a co-BCCH cell must support the configured frequency band. l The co-BCCH cell function and the extended cell function cannot be enabled at the same time. the number of TRXs configured in the underlaid subcell can be small. If the traffic load of neighboring cells is high. If the co-BCCH cell has a low priority.3 Configuring a Co-BCCH Cell This describes how to configure a co-BCCH cell on the Local Maintenance Terminal. BTS Prerequisite l Co-BCCH cell is not restricted by the license. The purpose is to prevent the calls on the edge of a common cell from being handed over to the co-BCCH cell. the traffic distributed on the edge of a common cell is switched to the co-BCCH cell. – Otherwise. the congestion is unlikely to occur in the underlaid subcell. 15. Impact None NEs Involved BSC.

Ltd. 1 Network planning BSC basic attributes HiFreqBandSupport Support High Frequency Band PCS1900 Network planning Basic call control parameters of the cell CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning ASSLOADJUDG EEN Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable ENABLE (ENABLE) Network planning MSMAXRETRA N MS MAX Retrans 2_Times (2_Times) Network planning ERGCALLDIS Emergent Call Disable NO(NO) Network planning ECSC ECSC NO(NO) Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 0 Network planning TRXFREQ TRX Freq. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 15 Configuring a Co-BCCH Cell Preparation Table 15-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a co-BCCH cell 15-4 Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source Cell attributes IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning BTSIDX BTS Index 0 Network planning CELLNAME Cell Name cell Network planning CTYPE Freq.. Band GSM900_DCS1 800 Network planning AST Activity State ACTIVATED (Activated) Network planning MCC MCC 460 Network planning MNC MNC 00 Network planning LAC LAC 1 Network planning CI CI 1 Network planning TRXBN TRX Board No.

run the ADD CELL command to add a co-BCCH cell.GSM850_1800 or GSM850_1900. Set Cell IUO Type to Concentric_cell(Concentric cell). Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NOTE If the cell to be added is in the GSM900_DCS1800 or GSM850_1800. Band to GSM900_DCS1800. and then set Enhanced Concentric Allowed and BCCH IUO of Double Freq Cell according to the actual network condition. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. It is recommended that BCCH IUO of Double Freq Cell be set to Extra (Extra). run the MOD BSCBASIC command to set Support High Frequency Band to PCS1900. Set Freq. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. you should modify the BSC attributes.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type Cell concentric attributes Cell concentric handover parameters 15 Configuring a Co-BCCH Cell Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source REASSEN Allow Reassign YES(Yes) Network planning IUOTP Cell IUO Type Concentric_cell (Concentric cell) Network planning ENIUO Enhanced Concentric Allowed YES(Yes) Network planning DBFREQBCCHIU O BCCH IUO of Double Freq Cell Extra(Extra) Network planning HOCTRLSWITC H Current HO Control Algorithm HOALGORITH M1(HO Algorithm I) Network planning ULTOOLHOALL OW UL to OL HO Allowed NO(NO) Network planning OLTOULHOALL OW OL to UL HO Allowed YES(Yes) Network planning RECLEVUOHOA LLOW RX_LEV for UO HO Allowed YES(Yes) Network planning RECQUALUOHO ALLOW RX_QUAL for UO HO Allowed NO(NO) Network planning TAFORUOHOAL LOW TA for UO HO Allowed YES(Yes) Network planning Procedure Step 1 (Optional) When you select GSM850_1900. run the MOD CELLIUO command to configure cell concentric attributes. Ltd. 15-5 . skip this step. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD CELLCCBASIC command to configure the basic call parameters of the cell according to the actual network condition. On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

15 Configuring a Co-BCCH Cell

Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the SET CELLHOIUO command to configure
concentric handover parameters of the cell according to the actual network condition.
----End

Example
An example script for adding a co-BCCH cell is as follows:
/*(Optional) When you select "GSM850_1900", you should modify the BSC attributes.
Set "Support High Frequency Band" to "PCS1900".*/ MOD BSCBASIC:
HiFreqBandSupport=PCS1900;
/*Add a co-BCCH cell in the GSM900_DCS1800*/ ADD CELL: IDXTYPE=BYIDX, BTSIDX=0,
CELLNAME="cell", CTYPE=GSM900_DCS1800, AST=ACTIVAED, MCC="460", MNC="00", LAC=1,
CI=1, TRXBN=0, TRXFREQ=1;
/*Configure the basic call control parameters of the cell*/ MOD CELLCCBASIC:
IDXTYPE=BYIDX, CELLIDX=0, ASSLOADJUDGEEN=ENABLE, MSMAXRETRAN=2_Times,
ERGCALLDIS=NO, ECSC=NO, REASSEN=YES;
/*Configure cell concentric type*/ MOD CELLIUO: IDXTYPE=BYIDX, CELLIDX=0,
IUOTP=Concentric_cell, ENIUO=YES, DBFREQBCCHIUO=Extra;
/*Configure concentric handover parameters of the cell*/ SET CELLHOIUO:
IDXTYPE=BYIDX, CELLIDX=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, ULTOOLHOALLOW=NO,
OLTOULHOALLOW=YES, RECLEVUOHOALLOW=YES, RECQUALUOHOALLOW=NO, TAFORUOHOALLOW=YES;

Postrequisite
l

Verifying co-BCCH cell
NOTE

In this section, the verification of a GSM900&DCS1800 co-BCCH cell is taken as an example. The
verification of the co-BCCH cell with other frequency bands combined is similar.

15-6

1.

Use an MS supporting the GSM900 frequency band to camp on a 900 MHz cell.
Perform the dialing test. The call is normally connected.

2.

Use an MS supporting the DCS1800 frequency band to camp on a 1800 MHz cell.
Perform the dialing test. The call is normally connected.

3.

Use an MS supporting the GSM900 and DCS1800 frequency bands to camp on a 900
MHz cell. Perform the dialing test. After the call is connected, move the MS towards
the 1800 MHz cell. Then, observe the window displaying the monitored channel
status. The MS is handed over to the 1800 MHz cell, and the call is still normally
connected.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

16

16 Configuring 2G/3G Interoperability

Configuring 2G/3G Interoperability

The 2G/3G interoperability feature enables an MS to be handed over to or reselected to the GSM
network if the serving cell of the MS is not covered by the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA network or
if the serving WCDMA/TD-SCDMA cell is in a weak coverage area. In addition, an MS can be
handed over to or reselected to the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA network if the MS requires the PS
services. When a dual-mode MS enters the coverage of the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA network
again, or the MS detects that the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA cell is better than the serving GSM cell,
the MS can be handed over to or reselected to the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA network if the handover
or cell reselection conditions are met. Then, the MS can use the abundant services provided by
the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA network.
Scenario

This feature is used for the MS reselection and handovers between the GSM
network and the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA network, and the interactions between
the GSM network and other 3G networks.

Impact

None

NEs Involved MS, BTS, BSC, MSC

Prerequisite
l

The MS must be a dual-mode MS, which supports the GSM and WCDMA/TD-SCDMA
networks. The MS must support bidirectional (2G to 3G and 3G to 2G) cell reselection and
handovers.

l

A Interface Tag, Um Interface Tag, and Abis Interface Tag are all set to
GSM_PHASE_2Plus.

l

2G/3G interoperability requires the support of the BSS and NSS. The NSS and BSS must
support inter-RAT cell selection, cell reselection, location update procedures, flow control
during inter-RAT handovers, handover decisions, and handover signaling procedures.

l

The configuration of 2G/3G interoperability is license-controlled.

l

Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. For details, see Activate BSC
License.

Preparation
The procedure for configuring GSM/WCDMA interoperability is similar to the procedure for
configuring GSM/TD-SCDMA interoperability. The configuration of GSM/TD-SCDMA
interoperability is taken as an example. The negotiated and planned data is as follows:
Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16-1

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

16 Configuring 2G/3G Interoperability

Table 16-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GSM/TD-SCDMA
Interoperability

16-2

Parameter

Example

Source

Cell Name

3G External Cell-1

Network planning

Cell MCC

460

Network planning

Cell MNC

86

Network planning

Cell LAC

10

Network planning

Cell CI

11

Network planning

Utran cell type

TDD(TDD)

Network planning

Sync case

SyncCase1(Sync case 1)

Network planning

Load Handover Support

YES(YES)

Network planning

Load Req.on Candidate Cell

50

Network planning

Index Type

BYNAME (By Name)

Network planning

Cell Name

CELL_1

Network planning

MSC Version indication

R99_or_above(R99 or above)

Network planning

HO Control Switch

HOALGORITHM2(HO
Algorithm II)

Network planning

Inter-RAT Out BSC
Handover Enable

YES(YES)

Network planning

Inter-RAT In BSC Handover
Enable

YES(YES)

Network planning

Inter-RAT Cell Reselection
Enable

YES(YES)

Network planning

TDD System Information
Optimized Allowed

YES(YES)

Network planning

TDD MI System
Information Broadcasting
Prohibit

YES(YES)

Network planning

Qsearch I

5

Network planning

Qsearch P

5

Network planning

Qsearch C

5

Network planning

TDD cell reselect diversity
[db]

5

Network planning

ECSC

YES(YES)

Network planning

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

16 Configuring 2G/3G Interoperability

Procedure
Step 1 Run the ADD CELL3GEXTC command to add a 3G external cell. Set Utran cell type to TDD
(TDD),Sync case to SyncCase1 (Sync case 1).
NOTE

l The value of Sync case must be the same as that set for the source 3G cell.
l If the 2G/3G Interoperability is required, set Utran cell type to FDD(FDD) and set the following parameters
according to the network condition: Ec/No threshold for layer Of 3G cell, Min Ec/No threshold, and PS
FDD Ec/No Quality Threshold.

Step 2 Run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to configure the 2G cell handover parameters. Set
Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Enable to YES(YES), Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable
to YES(YES), and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES(YES).
l If the inter-RAT load handover function needs to be configured, set Load HO Allowed to
YES(YES). In addition, run the SET CELLHOAD command to set Inter RAN Load
Information Allowed to YES(YES).
l If the inter-RAT service handover function needs to be configured, you should also run the
SET OTHSOFTPARA command to set Service Based Handover Switch to OPEN
(Open).
Step 3 According to the type of the 3G external cells that perform interoperability, run the MOD
CELLHOUTRANFDD or MOD CELLHOUTRANTDD command to configure the data
relevant to the handover from the GSM system to the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA system.
Step 4 Run the MOD CELLCCUTRANSYS command to configure the cell call control parameters.
1.

Set MSC Version indication to R99_or_above(R99 or above) and set the following
parameters according to the current network condition: Qsearch I, Qsearch P, and
Qsearch C.
NOTE

If Utrancell type is set to FDD(FDD), skip Step b. Then, set FDD Q offset according to the current
network condition.

2.

Based on the current cell type, set TDD System Information Optimized Allowed to YES
(YES) and TDD MI System Information Broadcasting Prohibit to YES(YES). Then,
set TDD cell reselect diversity according to the network condition.

Step 5 Run the MOD CELLCCBASIC command to set ECSC to YES(YES).
Step 6 Run the ADD CELL3GNC command to configure the neighboring cell relations. Then, set
RSCP Offset according to the network condition.
NOTE

If Utrancell type is set to FDD(FDD), set Ec/No Offset according to the network condition.

----End

Example
/*Add a 3G external cell*/
ADD CELL3GEXTC: CELLNAME="3G External Cell-1 ", MCC="460", MNC="86", LAC=10, CI=11,
SYNCCASE=SyncCase1,
UTRANCELLTYPE=TDD,LoadHoEn=YES, LoadAccThres=50;
/*Configure the cell handover parameters*/
SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME, CELLNAME="CELL_1", HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2,
INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=NO,
INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES, INTERRATCELLRESELEN=YES;

Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16-3

16 Configuring 2G/3G Interoperability

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

/*Configure the cell call parameters*/
MOD CELLCCUTRANSYS: IDXTYPE=BYNAME, CELLNAME="CELL_1", MSCVER=R99_or_above, QI=5,
QP=5, QSEARCHC=5,
TDDCELLRESELDIV=5, TDDSIOPTIMIZEDALLOWED=YES, TDDMIPROHIBIT=YES;
MOD CELLCCBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME, CELLNAME="3G External Cell-1", ECSC=YES;
/*Configure the neighboring cell relations*/
ADD CELL3GNC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME, SRCCELLNAME="CELL_1", NBRCELLNAME="3G External
Cell-1";

Postrequisite
l

l

16-4

Verifying 2G/3G interoperability
1.

Start the tracing of the RSL messages over the Abis interface. For details, see Tracing
BSSAP Messages on the A Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide.

2.

Query the CS-related BCCH Information messages over the Abis interface to
identify the messages whose system-info-type is system-information-2quater.
Then, check whether the L3 contents of the messages are null. If they are not null, it
indicates that 2G/3G inter-RAT reselection takes effect.

3.

Query the CS-related SACCH Filling messages over the Abis interface to identify
the messages whose system-info-type is measurement-information. Then, check
whether the L3 contents of the messages are null. If they are not null, it indicates that
2G/3G inter-RAT handover takes effect.

Deactivating 2G/3G interoperability
1.

On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to
set Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Enable to NO(NO), Inter-RAT Out BSC
Handover Enable to NO(NO), and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to NO
(NO).

2.

Verifying the deactivation of 2G/3G interoperability: The operations are the same as
those for Verifying deactivation of 2G/3G interoperability. Check the L3 contents
of the messages are null.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

17

17 Configuring TRX Cooperation

Configuring TRX Cooperation

With this feature, when the BCCH TRX or the TRX involved in baseband FH is faulty, the cell
automatically rectifies the faults. Thus, the services in the cell are not affected before the faulty
TRX is replaced. Based on the type of faulty TRXs and the handling method, the TRX
cooperation is classified into BCCH TRX cooperation and baseband FH TRX cooperation. For
the non-baseband FH cell, only the BCCH TRX cooperation occurs. For the baseband FH cell,
both BCCH TRX cooperation and baseband FH TRX cooperation are likely to occur.
Scenario

TRX Cooperation is configured to ensure that the cell is always in service.

Impact

None

NEs Involved BTS, BSC

Prerequisite
l

TRX Cooperation is not restricted by the license.

l

At least two TRXs are configured in the cell.

Preparation
Take the configuration of BTS3012 in TDM transmission mode as an example.
Table 17-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a BTS

Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

Parameter ID

Parameter Name

Example

Source

BTSNAME

BTS Name

BTS3012

Network
planning

TYPE

BTS Type

BTS3012

Network
planning

UPNODE

Up Node Type

BSC

Network
planning

SRN

Subrack No.

0

Network
planning

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17-1

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

17 Configuring TRX Cooperation

17-2

Parameter ID

Parameter Name

Example

Source

SN

Slot No.

26

Network
planning

PN

Port No.

10

Network
planning

BTSDESC

BTS Description

TDM BTS3012

Network
planning

MPMODE

Multiplexing Mode

MODE4_1

Network
planning

FlexAbisMode

Flex Abis Mode

FIX_ABIS(Fix Abis)

Network
planning

AbisByPassMode

Abis By Pass Mode

FALSE(Not Support)

Network
planning

ServiceMode

Service Type

TDM

Network
planning

DCELLNAME

Cell Name

TDMCELL

Network
planning

DCTYPE

Cell type

GSM900

Network
planning

DCMCC

Cell MCC

460

Network
planning

DCMNC

Cell MNC

34

Network
planning

DCLAC

Cell LAC

62

Network
planning

DCCI

Cell CI

98

Network
planning

CPLMode

Separate Mode

UNSUPPORT(Not Support)

Network
planning

TRXBN

TRX Board No.

0

Network
planning

FREQ

TRX Freq.

5

Network
planning

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

17 Configuring TRX Cooperation

Table 17-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring TRX Cooperation
Parameter ID

Parameter Name

Example

Source

IDXTYPE

Index Type

BYNAME (By Name)

Network
planning

CELLNAME

Cell Name

TDMCELL

Network
planning

TRXAIDSWITC
H

TRX Aiding
Function Control

AllowReForbid(Allowed &
Recover Forbidden)

Network
planning

Procedure
Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the ADD BTS command to add a BTS.
Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD CELLCCACCESS command to set TRX
Aiding Function Control as required.
----End

Example
An example script for configuring TRX Cooperation is as follows:
/*Add a BTS3012*/
ADD BTS: BTSNAME = "BTS3012", TYPE = BTS3012, UPNODE = BSC, SRN = 0, SN=26, PN =
10, BTSDESC = "TDM BTS3012"
, MPMODE = MODE4_1, FlexAbisMode = FIX_ABIS, AbisByPassMode = False, ServiceMode =
TDM,
DCELLNAME = "TDMCELL", DCTYPE = GSM900, DCMCC = "460", DCMNC = "34", DCLAC = 62,
DCCI = 98,
CPLMode = UNSUPPORT, TRXBN = 0, FREQ = 5;
/*Configure TRX Cooperation*/
MOD CELLCCACCESS: IDXTYPE=BYNAME, CELLNAME="TDMCELL", TRXAIDSWITCH=AllowReForbid;

Postrequisite
l

l

Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

Verifying TRX cooperation
1.

Switch off the power of the main BCCH TRX. In this way, the main BCCH TRX
becomes faulty, and thus the main BCCH TRX mutual aid is triggered.

2.

After a period of time (less than 15 minutes), the cell begins to be reinitialized. In this
case, run the MML command DSP CHNSTAT to query the channel status. The query
result shows that Current Channel Type of one TRX (not the initially configured
main BCCH TRX) whose channel number is 0 is set to Main BCCH.

3.

Make a call in the cell where the TRX mutual aid is enabled. The call is successfully
set up, and the voice is clear.

Deactivating TRX cooperation
1.

On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD CELLCCACCESS command
to set TRX Aiding Function Control to TRXAid_NotAllow.

2.

Verifying deactivation of TRX cooperation: Switch off the power supply of the main
BCCH TRX in the cell so that the main BCCH of the cell becomes faulty. Use the test
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17-3

17-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If the call fails to be set up. Ltd.. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .17 Configuring TRX Cooperation HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) MS to initiate a call in the cell. it indicates that the TRX cooperation function is deactivated.

The scanned results of the signal levels provides references for engineers to select proper operating frequencies. Scenario The cell frequency scan provides a reference for network optimization. BTS NOTE Cell frequency scan has the following impacts on other features: l Cell frequency scan occupies an idle TCH. NEs Involved BSC. l Cell frequency scan cannot be performed when an RF hopping loopback test is performed.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 18 18 Configuring Cell Frequency Scan Configuring Cell Frequency Scan The cell frequency scan function enables the scanning of the levels of the uplink signals at specific frequencies on a specific channel of a cell. Ltd. 18-1 . Preparation Table 18-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring cell frequency scan Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning STRTM Start time 17:06:07 Network planning TIME Duration minute 5 Network planning FREQBAND Frequency Band E-GSM900 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Impact Scanning the cell frequencies may affect the performance of other features.. l The cell frequency scan cannot be performed when an idle frame test is performed.

CELLIDX=0. 18-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the execution of the commands cannot be completed in the specified duration. run the LST FREQSCAN command to query the information of cell frequency scan. TIME=5. /*Stop the frequency scan information of the cell with index of 0*/ STP FREQSCAN: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. ----End Example An example script of configuring cell frequency scan is as follows: /*Configure cell frequency scan*/ SET FREQSCAN: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Ltd.. l If a BSC in BSC6000V900R008C12SP25 or a later version is used. NOTE l If a BSC earlier than BSC6000V900R008C12SP25 is used. Otherwise. FREQLST_E900=0&975&1023. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .18 Configuring Cell Frequency Scan HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 50 commands are executed per 30 seconds in sequence. run the STP FREQSCAN command to stop the cell frequency scan. a maximum of 50 commands are allowed in the batch processing file when the commands are processed in batches. FREQBAND=E-GSM900. If more than 50 commands exist in the batch processing file. run the SET FREQSCAN command to configure cell frequency scan. In addition. CELLIDX=0. STRTM=17&06&07. CELLIDX=0. some cells cannot be scanned. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. /*Query the frequency scan information of the cell with index of 0*/ LST FREQSCAN: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Duration minute cannot be set to a very small value. no restriction is imposed on the number of commands in the batch processing file when the commands are processed in batches. Therefore.

Scenario Generally. Preparation Table 19-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring high-speed signaling links in BM/TC combined mode Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source SERVICEMODE Service Mode TOGETHER(BM/TC Together) Network planning SRN Subrack No. l This feature should be supported by the MSC. the bandwidth of a signaling link is extended to N x 64 kit/s and a maximum of 2 Mbit/s E1 bandwidth (N = 31) can be used. high-speed signaling links are used for terrestrial transmission instead of satellite transmission and used together with the Local Multiple Signaling Points feature to support more flexible signaling networking mode. thus. Impact Compared with 64 kbit/s signaling link. the 2 Mbit/s signaling link is configured with more timeslots. Therefore.. MSC. and MGW Prerequisite l The GEIUA is configured. the N timeslots in an E1 are bound for the physical transmission of the SS7 signaling. 24 Network planning APN A Interface Port No.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 19 19 Configuring High-Speed Signaling Links Configuring High-Speed Signaling Links The BSC uses the high-speed signaling when the 64 kbit/s signaling fail to meet the signaling requirements on the A interface due to high traffic volume. the signaling transmission capacity of the 2 Mbit/s signaling link is greatly enhanced. Ltd. 0 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 19-1 . 0 Network planning ASN A Interface Slot No. With this feature. NEs Involved BSC.

0 Network planning ATSMASK A Interface Timeslot Mask TS8(8)-TS11(11) Network planning ATERTSMASK Ater Interface Timeslot Mask TS8(9)-TS11(11) Network planning SLC SLC 0 Network planning SLCSEND SLC Send 0 Network planning DPC DPC h'cc Network planning LKRATE Link Rate Type 2 M(2 Mbit/s) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 19 Configuring High-Speed Signaling Links Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source ATSMASK A Interface Timeslot Mask TS8(8) Network planning SLC SLC 23 Network planning SLCSEND SLC Send 0 Network planning DPC DPC h'cc Network planning LKRATE Link Rate Type 2 M(2 Mbit/s) Network planning Table 19-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring high-speed signaling links in BM/TC separate mode Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source SERVICEMODE Service Mode SEPARATE(BM/TC Separate) Network planning ATERPIDX Ater Connection Path Index 0 Network planning ASN A Interface Slot No. Ltd. NOTE Set the parameter value of Service Mode based on the current service mode in the system. and set Link Rate Type to 2 Mbit/s. In BM/TC separate mode. you are advised not to select TS1 under Ater Interface Timeslot Mask for the SS7 signaling link in the main GTCS subrack. 24 Network planning APN A Interface Port No. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . ----End 19-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. when the GTCS is configured remotely. run the ADD N7LNK command to add SS7 signaling links. Run the LST BSCBASIC command to query the current service mode.

Ltd. run the DSP MTP3LNK command. Postrequisite l l Verifying high-speed signaling links 1. APN=0. ATSMASK=TS0-0&TS1-0&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0& TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS 18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&TS2 1-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0&TS31-0. APN=0. 2. LKRATE=2M. DPC=h'cc. SLCSEND=0. DPC=h'cc. run the LST N7LNK command to query the information of the SS7 signaling link. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ATSMASK=TS0-0&TS1-0&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0 & TS7-0&TS8-1&TS9-0&TS10-0&TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&T S19-0&TS20-0&TS21-0&T S22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0&TS31-0. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the DEA MTP3LNK command to deactivate SS7 signaling links. the configured high-speed signaling link is normal. If INUSE is YES. /*Configure high-speed signaling links in BM/TC separate mode. 3. and then check the current status of the MTP link. Enter the specified DPC Code obtained from adding a high-speed signaling link to query the corresponding DPC Index. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. SRN=0. ATERPIDX=0. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Specify the Service Mode as required. SLCS END=0. run the LST N7DPC command. SLC=0. ASN=24. and there is a connection path on the Ater interface*/ ADD N7LNK: SERVICEMODE=SEPARATE. SLC=0. Set the Destination signalling point index according to the DPC Index obtained from step 2. The Link Type should be 2 M. Deactivating high-speed signaling links – On the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 19 Configuring High-Speed Signaling Links Example An example script of configuring high-speed signaling links is as follows: /*Configure high-speed signaling links in BM/TC combined mode*/ ADD N7LNK: SERVICEMODE=TOGETHER.. ATERTSMASK=TS0-0&TS1-0&TS2-0& TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS150&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0 & TS19-0&TS20-0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS300&TS31-0. ASN=24. 19-3 . LKRATE =2M.

.

the requirements for the signaling networking capability of the MSC are reduced because the highspeed signaling technology is not used. A maximum of four OPCs. 32 DPCs. the signaling load on the A interface and the call establishment time are increased. you should configure SS7 signaling links. NEs Involved BSC. Preparation This operation takes the configuration of two OPCs and one DPC as an example.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 20 20 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points With this feature. which effectively reduces the impact of the paging traffic on the BSC. Thus. 20-1 . you should configure the mapping between the BM subrack and the local signaling point. Table 20-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the mapping between the first OPC and the subrack Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source OPC attributes NAME OPC Name OPC1 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Impact With this feature. and 32 STPs can be configured to a BSC. For each signaling point. Each signaling point can be independently connected to other signaling points and thus meets the signaling link requirements for large capacity processing of the BSC6000. the operators' investment is saved. Scenario The traffic volume is properly distributed to the logical BSCs. the original intra-BSC handover or intra-BSC directed retry may be converted into outgoing BSC handover or outgoing BSC directed retry. Ltd.Used together with the High Speed Signaling feature to support more flexible signaling networking mode. The configuration procedure is the same as that for configuring general SS7 signaling links. The two OPCs correspond to number 0 and number 1 BM subracks. MSC and MGW NOTE For each BM subrack. Thus.. a physical node is logically classified into multiple signaling points. In addition.

0 Network planning OPC OSP Code H'A1 Network planning Table 20-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the mapping between the Second OPC and the subrack Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source OPC attributes NAME OPC Name OPC2 Network planning OPC OPC Code H'A2 Network planning SRN Subrack No. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . 1 Network planning OPC OSP Code H'A2 Network planning Configuring the mapping between the subrack and the OPC Table 20-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring DPC 20-2 Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source DPC attributes NAME DPC Name DSP1 Network planning DPC DPC Code H'C1 Network planning USESTP Using STP YES(Yes) Network planning DPCGIDX DPC Group Index 0 Network planning CNID MSC ID 0 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..20 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points Data Type Configuring the mapping between the subrack and the OPC HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source OPC OPC Code H'A1 Network planning SRN Subrack No. Ltd.

On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Step 5 Optional: When you need to configure the STP. USESTP=YES. /*Add the second OPC*/ ADD OPC: NAME="OPC2". run the ADD SROPCMAP command to configure the mapping between the subrack and the OPC. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. DPCGIDX=0. Postrequisite l Verifying local multiple signaling points – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. /*Add a DPC*/ ADD N7DPC: NAME="DSP1". Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. NOTE If there is no direct physical link between the OPC and the DPC. DPC=H'C1. 2. OPC=H'A1. Step 3 Repeat step 1 and step 2 to add the second OPC and the mapping between the second OPC and the subrack. If the status of the SCCP subsystem is "allowed". l Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Deactivating local multiple signaling points 1. ----End Example Example scripts of configuring local multiple signaling points are as follows: /*Add an OPC*/ ADD OPC: NAME="OPC1". run the ADD STP command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to add the STP.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 20 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. then you have to configure STPs. run the DSP SCCPSSN command to query the status of the SCCP subsystem. run the ADD OPC command to add the first OPC. run the ADD N7DPC command to add DPCs. run the RMV OPC command to delete the corresponding OPC. /*Add the mapping between the subrack and the OPC*/ ADD SROPCMAP: SRN=1. /*Add the mapping between the subrack and the OPC*/ ADD SROPCMAP: SRN=0.Using STP should be set to YES(Yes). OPC=H'A2.. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. OPC=H'A2. run the MOD SROPCMAP command to modify the OPC of the non-main subrack to be the same as that of the main subrack. OPC=H'A1. it indicates that local multiple signaling points are successfully activated. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd. 20-3 . CNID=0.

.

21.1 Configuring DTX This describes how to configure discontinuous transmission (DTX) on the Local Maintenance Terminal.. Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 21. 21-1 .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 21 21 Configuring DTX and DRX Configuring DTX and DRX About This Chapter Discontinuous transmission (DTX) and discontinuous reception (DRX) increases the standby time and call duration of an MS.2 Configuring DRX This describes how to configure discontinuous reception (DRX) on the Local Maintenance Terminal.

Otherwise. Preparation Take the configuration of BTS3012 in TDM transmission mode as an example. Table 21-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a BTS 21-2 Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source BTS basic attributes BTSNAME BTS Name BTS3012 Networ k plannin g TYPE BTS Type BTS3012 Networ k plannin g UPNODE Up Node Type BSC Networ k plannin g Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NEs Involved BSC.1 Configuring DTX This describes how to configure discontinuous transmission (DTX) on the Local Maintenance Terminal. save system resources. Ltd. the downlink DTX does not work. l The setting of downlink DTX should be performed at both the BSC and MSC. Prerequisite l DTX is not restricted by the license. and increase the call duration and standby time. l The setting of uplink DTX is completed by the BSC. Impact DTX affects only the transmission of TCH frames.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 21 Configuring DTX and DRX 21. Scenario DTX is configured to reduce power and system interference. and MS CAUTION DTX cannot be configured in co-cell mode.. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . BTS.

26 Networ k plannin g PN Port No.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type Issue 02 (2010-09-20) 21 Configuring DTX and DRX Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source SRN Subrack No. 0 Networ k plannin g BTSDESC BTS Description TDM BTS3012 Networ k plannin g MPMODE Multiplexing Mode MODE4_1 Networ k plannin g FlexAbisMode Flex Abis Mode FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis) Networ k plannin g AbisByPassMod e Abis By Pass Mode FALSE(Not Support) Networ k plannin g ServiceMode Service Type TDM Networ k plannin g DCELLNAME Cell Name TDMCELL Networ k plannin g DCTYPE Cell type GSM900 Networ k plannin g Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 0 Networ k plannin g SN Slot No. Ltd.. 21-3 .

0 Networ k plannin g FREQ TRX Freq. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .. 5 Networ k plannin g Table 21-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring DTX 21-4 Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source Filter and penalty data of the cell handover IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME (By Name) Networ k plannin g CELLNAME Cell Name TDMCELL Networ k plannin g Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 21 Configuring DTX and DRX Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source DCMCC Cell MCC 460 Networ k plannin g DCMNC Cell MNC 34 Networ k plannin g DCLAC Cell LAC 62 Networ k plannin g DCCI Cell CI 98 Networ k plannin g CPLMode Separate Mode UNSUPPORT(Not Support) Networ k plannin g TRXBN TRX Board No.

Ltd. /*Set "DtxMeasUsed" to "OPEN(open)"*/ SET CELLHOFITPEN: IDXTYPE = BYNAME. PN=0. FREQ=5. DCELLNAME="TDMCELL". AbisByPassMode=False. BTSDESC="TDM BTS3012". Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set TCH/F Uplink DTX or TCH/H Uplink DTX to Shall_Use(Shall Use) and set TCH/F Use Downlink DTX or TCH/H Use Downlink DTX to YES(YES). Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. FlexAbisMode=FLEX_ABIS.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type Cell basic attributes 21 Configuring DTX and DRX Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source HOCTRLSWIT CH HO Control Switch HOALGORITHM 1(HO Algorithm I) Networ k plannin g DTXMEASUSE D DtxMeasUsed OPEN(open) Networ k plannin g FRULDTX TCH/F Uplink DTX Shall_Use(Shall Use) Networ k plannin g HRULDTX TCH/H Uplink DTX Shall_Use(Shall Use) Networ k plannin g FRDLDTX TCH/F Use Downlink DTX YES(Yes) Networ k plannin g HRDLDTX TCH/H Use Downlink DTX YES(Yes) Networ k plannin g Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the ADD BTS command to add a BTS. DCCI=98. DCLAC=62. UPNODE=BSC. ----End Example An example script for configuring DTX for a BTS3012 in TDM transmission mode is as follows: /*Add a BTS3012*/ ADD BTS: BTSNAME="BTS3012". ServiceMode=TDM. DCTYPE=GSM900. DTXMEASUSED = OPEN. CPLMode=UNSUPPORT. SN=27. SRN=0.. MPMODE=MODE4_1. TYPE=BTS3012. DCMCC="460". run the SET CELLHOFITPEN command to set DtxMeasUsed to OPEN(open). 21-5 . CELLNAME = "TDMCELL". HOCTRLSWITCH = HOALGORITHM1. DCMNC="34". Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. TRXBN=0.

FRULDTX = Shall_Use. Check the BCCH Information messages in the Abis messages in the CS domain and find out the messages whose system-info-type is system-information-3 in the detailed information. TCH/F Use Downlink DTX to YES(Yes). TCH/H Uplink DTX to Shall_Use(Shall Use). it indicates that the system information is sent correctly. If the value of dtx-uplink in the messages with channel-type being bm-acch is 1. 2. HRULDTX = Shall_Use. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. FRDLDTX=YES. If the value of the downlink-dtx-flag information element is 0. run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set TCH/F Uplink DTX to Shall_Use(Shall Use). Postrequisite l Verifying DTX – Verifying the uplink DTX 1. If dtx-downlink in the channel-mode information element is 1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. The call is successfully set up. Check the Channel Activation messages in the Abis messages in the CS domain. run the SND SYSMSG command to forcedly send system information to the test cell. 5. If the value of dtx in the cell-options information element is 1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. it indicates that the BSC supports the downlink DTX. – Verifying the downlink DTX l 21-6 1. 3. TCH/F Use Downlink DTX to YES(Yes). Verify that the Abis signaling messages in the CS domain and the A signaling messages are traced. 3. CELLNAME="TDMCELL". it indicates that the BSC supports the uplink DTX function. Verify that the values of dtx-uplink and dtx-downlink are 0. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd. Use the MS to make a call. Deactivating DTX 1. run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set TCH/F Uplink DTX or TCH/H Uplink DTX to Shall_NOT_Use (Shall Not Use) and set TCH/F Use Downlink DTX or TCH/H Use Downlink DTX to NO (No). Check that the A signaling messages and Abis signaling messages in the CS domain are traced. run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set TCH/F Uplink DTX to Shall_Use(Shall Use). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Check the Channel Activation messages in the messages on the Abis interface in the CS domain. 2. 2.. HRDLDTX=YES. and TCH/H Use Downlink DTX to YES(Yes). 4.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 21 Configuring DTX and DRX /*Set "TCH/F Uplink DTX" or "TCH/H Uplink DTX" to "Shall_Use(Shall Use)" and set "TCH/F Use Downlink DTX" or "TCH/H Use Downlink DTX" to "YES(YES)"*/ MOD CELLBASICPARA: IDXTYPE = BYNAME. it indicates that the downlink DTX is allowed on the MSC. The operations for verifying deactivation of DTX are the same as those for Verifying DTX. TCH/H Uplink DTX to Shall_Use(Shall Use). Use the MS to make a call. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . Check the Assignment Request messages in the messages on the A interface. and TCH/H Use Downlink DTX to YES(Yes). The call is successfully set up.

0 Networ k plannin g SN Slot No. BTS. Preparation Take the configuration of BTS3012 in TDM transmission mode as an example. Impact None NEs Involved BSC..2 Configuring DRX This describes how to configure discontinuous reception (DRX) on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 0 Networ k plannin g Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. 21-7 . Scenario DRX increases the call duration and standby time of an MS. 27 Networ k plannin g PN Port No. and MS Prerequisite DRX is not restricted by the license. Table 21-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a BTS Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source BTS basic attributes BTSNAME BTS Name BTS3012 Networ k plannin g TYPE BTS Type BTS3012 Networ k plannin g UPNODE Up Node Type BSC Networ k plannin g SRN Subrack No.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 21 Configuring DTX and DRX 21.

Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 21 Configuring DTX and DRX Data Type 21-8 Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source BTSDESC BTS Description TDM BTS3012 Networ k plannin g MPMODE Multiplexing Mode MODE4_1 Networ k plannin g FlexAbisMode Flex Abis Mode FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis) Networ k plannin g AbisByPassMod e Abis By Pass Mode FALSE(Not Support) Networ k plannin g ServiceMode Service Type TDM Networ k plannin g DCELLNAME Cell Name TDMCELL Networ k plannin g DCTYPE Cell type GSM900 Networ k plannin g DCMCC Cell MCC 460 Networ k plannin g DCMNC Cell MNC 34 Networ k plannin g DCLAC Cell LAC 62 Networ k plannin g Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .

run the ADD BTS command to add a BTS.. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. 21-9 . 0 Networ k plannin g FREQ TRX Freq. 5 Networ k plannin g Table 21-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring DTX Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source Basic idle parameters of the cell IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME (By Name) Networ k plannin g CELLNAME Cell Name TDMCELL Networ k plannin g BSAGBLKSRE S Number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH 2 Networ k plannin g BSPAMFRAM Number of multiframes in a cycle on the paging channel 2_M_PERIOD(2 Multiframe Period) Networ k plannin g Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type 21 Configuring DTX and DRX Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source DCCI Cell CI 98 Networ k plannin g CPLMode Separate Mode UNSUPPORT(Not Support) Networ k plannin g TRXBN TRX Board No.

----End Example An example script for configuring DRX for a BTS3012 in TDM transmission mode is as follows: /*Add a BTS3012*/ ADD BTS: BTSNAME="BTS3012". DCMNC="34".HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 21 Configuring DTX and DRX Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. DCMCC="460". In this case. AbisByPassMode=False. The obtained paging group number is decimal. MPMODE=MODE4_1. 2. DCCI=98. DCTYPE=GSM900. TRXBN=0. TYPE=BTS3012. UPNODE=BSC. Use an MS to call another MS with a known IMSI (such as M). PN=0. FlexAbisMode=FLEX_ABIS. run the SND SYSMSG command to forcedly send system information to the test cell. it indicates that the setting of the paging group that delivers the paging messages is consistent with that set in the system information. run the MOD CELLIDLEBASIC command to set Number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH to 2 and set Number of multi-frames in a cycle on the paging channel to 2_M_PERIOD(2 Multiframe Period). BTSDESC="TDM BTS3012". BSPAMFRAMS=2_M_PERIOD. DCLAC=62. and whether bs-pamfrms (the corresponding parameter is Number of multi-frames in a cycle on the paging channel) is 0 in the control-channel-description information element. SRN=0. the MS can implement DRX by listening to the paging subchannel. 3. run the MOD CELLIDLEBASIC command to set Number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH to 2 and set Number of multi-frames in a cycle on the paging channel to 2_M_PERIOD(2 Multiframe Period). If the paging-group information element in the message is M% 1000%14%14. Check whether bs-ag-blks-res (the corresponding parameter is Number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH) is 2. it indicates that the system information is sent correctly.. 5. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . 4. NOTE % in M%1000%14%14 indicates the modulo operator. Ltd. DCELLNAME="TDMCELL". BSAGBLKSRES=2. Check the Page Command messages in the messages traced over the Abis interface in the CS domain. /*Configure DRX*/ MOD CELLIDLEBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. If so. CELLNAME="TDMCELL". Check the BCCH Information messages in the Abis messages in the CS domain and find out the messages whose system-info-type is system-information-3 in the detailed information. ServiceMode=TDM. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. The call is successfully set up. CPLMode=UNSUPPORT. SN=27. 21-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. FREQ=5. Postrequisite l Verifying DRX 1.

These services include weather forecasts.1 Configuring Location Service This describes how to configure location service (LCS) on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 22. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2 Configuring Simple Location Service This describes how to configure simple location service on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 22-1 . trip scheduling..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 22 22 Configuring Location Service Configuring Location Service About This Chapter Location sevice (LCS) enables the network to provide various services for an MS based on the location of the MS. and transportation conditions. business planning. emergency assistance. Ltd. stock information. The simple location service can locate an MS based on the information obtained during single-user message tracing. 22.

1 Configuring Location Service This describes how to configure location service (LCS) on the Local Maintenance Terminal. BSC. 5 Network planning LcsSupportControl LCS Support Control YES Network planning Cell LCS parameters IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning INPUTMD Latitude and Longitude input mode Degree(degree) Network planning NSLATI NS Latitude North_latitude (North latitude) Network planning LATIINT Latitude int part 45 Network planning LATIDECI Latitude decimal part 5 Network planning WELONGI WE Longitude East_Longitude (East Longititude) Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and MS Prerequisite l LCS is restricted by the license. BTS. Impact None NEs Involved SGSN. see Activate BSC License. Scenario The built-in SMLC supports the BSS-based Cell ID+TA location service. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd. For details..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 22 Configuring Location Service 22. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . Preparation Table 22-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring LCS 22-2 Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source Other software parameters on the A Interface DPC Subrack No.

run the SET AITFOTHPARA command.. it indicates that the location service is active. Postrequisite l l Verifying location service 1. Ltd. INPUTMD=Degree. run the MOD CELLHOCTRL command to configure cell LCS parameters. LONGIDECI="6". ----End Example An example script for configuring LCS is as follows: /*Configure the BSC to support LCS*/ SET AITFOTHPARA: DPC=12. NSLATI=North_latitude. Use an MS to make a call in the cell where the location service is enabled. 22-3 . enable the single-user tracing to trace the call signaling of the MS. 2.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type 22 Configuring Location Service Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source LONGIINT Longitude int part 115 Network planning LONGIDECI Longitude decimal part 6 Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. For details. and if Perform Location Response contains Location Estimate IE. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 3. 22. LONGIINT=115. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2. see Tracing CS Domain User Messages in the BSC LMT User Guide. Verify that Perform Location Response does not contain Location Estimate IE. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Analyze the A interface signaling. and set LCS Support Control to NO. CELLIDX=0. On the BSC6000 Local Maintenance Terminal. WELONGI=East_Longitude. LATIDECI="5". if the signaling Perform Location Request and Perform Location Response.2 Configuring Simple Location Service This describes how to configure simple location service on the Local Maintenance Terminal. LcsSupportControl=YES. Verifying the deactivation of location service: The operations are the same as those for Verifying location service. Deactivating location service 1. run the SET AITFOTHPARA command to configure LCS. /*Configure cell LCS parameters*/ MOD CELLIDLEBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. LATIINT=45.

22-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. see Configuring Location Service.. configure LCS. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . Preparation Table 22-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring simple location service Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source Simple location service attributes ITFTYPE Interface type AITF(A INTERFACE) Network planning TRCCONDITIO N Tracing condition MSISDN Network planning MSISDN MSISDN 1399455166 Network planning STRDT Start date 2008-11-15 Network planning STRTM Start time 21:22:51 Network planning ENDDT End date 2008-11-15 Network planning ENDTM End time 22:22:51 Network planning TASKNO trace task number 3212 Network planning TRCTYPE Trace type USERTRACE (User Trace) Network planning TRCMODE Trace mode RMSTREAM (STREAM) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Impact None NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite l Simple location service is restricted by the license. Ltd. For details.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 22 Configuring Location Service Scenario The simple location service is configured to trace the MS. see Activate BSC License. For details. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal.

/*Query the tracing task*/ LST TRCTASK: TRCTYPE=USERTRACE. run the DEL TRCTASK command to delete the tracing task. /*Delete the tracing task*/ STR TRCTASK:TASKNO=3212. run the LST TRCTASK command to query the tracing task. run the STP TRCTASK command to stop the tracing task.. TRCCONDITION=MSISDN. 22-5 . NOTE The task stopped must be a task that is running. ENDDT=2008&11&15. MSISDN="1399455166". run the CRE USERTRCTASK command to create a tracing task. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. STRDT=2008&11&15. /*Start the tracing task*/ STR TRCTASK:TASKNO=3212. STRTM=21&22&51. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. TASKNO=3212. Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd. Step 6 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ENDTM=2 1&22&51. TASKNO=3212. ----End Example An example script for configuring simple location service is as follows: /*Create a tracing task*/ CRE USERTRCTASK: ITFTYPE=AITF. run the STR TRCTASK command to start the tracing task. /*Stop the tracing task*/ STR TRCTASK:TASKNO=3212. TRCMODE=RMSTREAM. NOTE The task started must be a task that is not running.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 22 Configuring Location Service Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

.

This process is called tandem free operation (TFO). or ANR. Scenario In A over TDM. Thus. 23-1 . Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Configure the TFO according to the combination types of the BSC subracks: l In BM/TC separated mode. the degradation of the speech signals due to tandem operation is reduced and the voice quality is improved. When the calling MS and the called MS use the same speech version. Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 23 Configuring TFO 23 Configuring TFO The TFO feature can reduce the speech signal degradation caused by tandem operation. the TFO should be supported by the TCs at both ends. Prerequisite l The GDPUC/GDPUX is configured. and HLR NOTE The TFO is not supported in A over IP. BSC. MGW. l This function cannot be enabled at the same time as ALC.. AEC. MSC. thus improving the voice quality. In addition. l In BM/TC combined mode and the TDM transmission is adopted on the Abis interface. the TFO link is established through the in-band signaling negotiation. the TFO should be configured for the GDPUX in the GMPS/GEPS. In this manner. the traffic volume is evenly distributed in the MSC pool. l The data between the TCs at the two ends should be transmitted transparently. the least significant bit (or the second least significant bit) is stolen to seize the 8 kbit/s (or 16 kbit/s) sublink of the PCM transmission link for transparent transmission of TFO frames and bypass TC encoding/decoding. In addition. Impact None. the speech signal is encoded at the MS initiating the call and decoded at the MS terminating the call for only once. NEs Involved MS. the TFO should be configured for the GDPUC/GDPUX in the GTCS and the GDPUX of the GMPS/GEPS does not require the configuration of the TFO.

If you do not set DSP No. SN=5. the verification of the TFO is successful. 3. On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. the service status of all DSPs are queried. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and then hold on the call. Verify that no service channel with the TFO status being Connect exists.If you do not set DSP No. the status of all DSPs are queried. run the MOD DSPTC command to set TFO Switch to OPEN(Open). On the Local Maintenance Terminal. If you do not set DSP No. 0 Network planning SN Slot No. The operations for deactivating TFO are the same as those for Verifying TFO. Postrequisite l l 23-2 Verifying TFO 1. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . Tfo_Switch=OPEN. If Available State is Normal in the result. run the DSP DSPSVRSTAT.. the DSP is normal. 5 Network planning Tfo_Switch TFO Switch OPEN(Open) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 2. ----End Example An example script of configuring TFO is as follows: MOD DSPTC: SRN=0. 2. Ltd. the TC attributes of all the DSPs are configured.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 23 Configuring TFO Preparation Table 23-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring TFO Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source SRN Subrack No. Deactivating TFO 1. Use the test MS to call another MS. If the TFO state of certain channels is Connect. run the DSP DSPSTAT command.. run the MOD DSPTC command to set TFO Switch to CLOSE(Close).

and then transmits the combined signals.1 Installing Hardware (PBT) This describes how to connect the cables in PBT mode.. Context The TRX attributes and antenna feeder mode for the DBS3900 GSM are set on the BSC side. 24-1 . 24. This describes how to configure dynamic PBT on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 24 Configuring PBT 24 Configuring PBT About This Chapter In the DTRU. and the transmit power with high gain is achieved and the downlink coverage is extended. 24. In this way.2 Configuring PBT This describes how to configure PBT on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The method of configuring PBT for the DBS3900 is the same as that for the BTS3012/ BTS3012AE. The combiner combines the radio signals of the same frequency and same phrase from two TRXs. the downlink transmit power is higher than the transmit power of the original signals. 24. two TRXs are integrated into a TRX module that is configured with a combiner.3 Configuring Dynamic PBT Dynamic Power Boost Technology (PBT) is a timeslot-based PBT. the timeslot-based dynamic transmit diversity maintains optimal balance between capacity and coverage.

1 Installing Hardware (PBT) This describes how to connect the cables in PBT mode.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 24 Configuring PBT 24. Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Procedure l 24-2 Figure 24-1 shows the connections between the DTRU and the DDPU in PBT mode.

. 24-3 . Ltd.2 Configuring PBT This describes how to configure PBT on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 24 Configuring PBT Figure 24-1 Connections between the DTRU and the DDPU in PBT mode ----End 24.

24-4 Use the test MS to make a call. 0 Network planning TRXPN TRX Board Path No. ----End Example An example script for configuring PBT is as follows: MOD TRXDEV: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. SNDMD=PBT. the two TRXs in the DTRU are used as one TRX. CELLIDX=0. NOTE When you configure PBT. Postrequisite l Verifying PBT 1. BSC Prerequisite l The PBT is restricted by the license. Impact None. the signal can be transmitted through only channel 0. TRXPN=0. Preparation Table 24-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring PBT Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning TRXBN TRX Board No. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . and DBS3900 (RRU3004 available). run the MOD TRXDEV command to set Send Mode to PBT(PBT).HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 24 Configuring PBT Scenario The PBT is used to increase the coverage area of a BTS. l With this feature. BTS3012AE (DTRU available). refer to Activate BSC License. TRXBN=0. Ltd. BTS3900 or BTS3900A (DRFU available). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. NEs Involved BTS. The following BTSs support the PBT: BTS3012. For details. 0 Network planning SNDMD Send Mode PBT(PBT) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

3 Configuring Dynamic PBT Dynamic Power Boost Technology (PBT) is a timeslot-based PBT. For details. It indicates that the PBT is deactivated. 24. 2. l 2. DBS3900 configured with the RRU3004. it indicates that the PBT is activated. Impact None. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. l Currently. Preparation Table 24-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring dynamic PBT Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Compare the test result recorded in Step 2 with that recorded in Step 4. Test the BTS power by using the power meter. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD TRXDEV command to set Send Mode to NONE(none). BSC Prerequisite l Dynamic PBT is restricted by the license. run the MOD TRXDEV command to set Send Mode to PBT(PBT). l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. refer to Activate BSC License. and then record the test result. the timeslot-based dynamic transmit diversity maintains optimal balance between capacity and coverage. run the LST TRXDEV command to verify that Send Mode is set to PBT(PBT). run the MOD TRXDEV command to set Send Mode to NONE(none). 4.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 24 Configuring PBT NOTE This step is required only when the main BCCH is not carried on the test TRX. Deactivating PBT 1. 24-5 .. NEs Involved BTS. 5. If the power obtained in Step 4 is much larger than that obtained in Step 2. Ltd. This describes how to configure dynamic PBT on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 3. run the LST TRXDEV command to verify that Send Mode is set to NONE. Test the BTS power by using the power meter. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Scenario Dynamic PBT is configured to achieve the balance between capacity and coverage. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. dynamic PBT is supported by the following types of BTSs: BTS3012/ BTS3012AE configured with the DTRU BTS3900/BTS3900A configured with the DRFU. and then record the test result.

TRXBN=1. run the SET CELLCHMGBASIC command to set Dynamic Transmission Div<PBT> Supported to DPBT(DPBT). IUOTP=Concentric_cell. 0 Network planning TRXPN TRX Board Path No. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . CELLIDX=0. CELLIDX=0. the channel status monitoring interface shows that the call occupies two channels on the same timeslots of two TRXs. DYNPBTSUPPORTED=DPBT. run the MOD TRXDEV command to set Send Mode of the TRX in the overlaid subcell to DPBT(DPBT). Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. MOD TRXDEV: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. run the MOD CELLIUO command to set Cell IUO Type to Concentric_cell(Concentric cell). The status of one channel is Working. CELLIDX=0. whereas that of another channel is Subordinate Channel. Postrequisite l l Verifying dynamic PBT 1. run the SET CELLCHMGBASIC command to set Dynamic Transmission Div<PBT> Supported to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support). TRXPN=1.. SNDMD=DPBT. l To configure dynamic PBT. SET CELLCHMGBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Ltd. In addition. 0 Network planning SNDMD Send Mode DPBT(DPBT) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 2. Monitor the channel status. two TRXs must be configured. When a call occupies a TRX with dynamic PBT enabled. ----End Example An example script for configuring dynamic PBT is as follows: MOD CELLIUO: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. dynamic PBT cannot be configured on the MBCCH. and use the test MS to initiate an emergency call in an area with weak signals (such as at the boundary between an overlaid subcell and an underlaid subcell).HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 24 Configuring PBT Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning TRXBN TRX Board No. NOTE l You can use the LST TRXIUO command to check whether the TRX is in the overlaid subcell or underlaid subcell. Deactivating dynamic PBT 1. 24-6 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

Ltd. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) 24 Configuring PBT On the Local Maintenance Terminal. If Dynamic Transmission Div<PBT> Supported is set to Not Support.. it indicates that the dynamic PBT function is deactivated. 24-7 . run the LST CELLCHMGBASIC command.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 2.

.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 25 25 Configuring Transmit Diversity Configuring Transmit Diversity About This Chapter In the DTRU. the two independent multi-path signals are processed by the equalizer of the MS. the downlink coverage is improved. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Then. 25-1 .1 Installing Hardware (Transmit Diversity) This describes how to connect the cables in transmit diversity mode.. 25. Ltd.3 Configuring Dynamic Transmit Diversity Dynamic transmit diversity is timeslot-based transmit diversity. With this feature. timeslot-based dynamic transmit diversity maintains optimal balance between capacity and coverage. This provides two independent multi-path signals for the downlink. In this way. the BTS can enable this feature through data configuration. 25. Therefore. When the DTRU works in single TRX mode. 25. the two TRXs on the DTRU transmit the correlated signals of the same carrier. two TRXs are integrated into one TRX module.2 Configuring Transmit Diversity This describes how to configure transmit diversity on the Local Maintenance Terminal. the diversity gain is obtained.This describes how to configure dynamic transmit diversity on the Local Maintenance Terminal. and the quality of the receive signal is improved.

1 Installing Hardware (Transmit Diversity) This describes how to connect the cables in transmit diversity mode.25 Configuring Transmit Diversity HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 25. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .. Procedure l 25-2 The blue lines in Figure 25-1 show the cable connections between the DTRU and the DDPU in the BTS3012/BTS3012AE in transmit diversity mode. Ltd.

. Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 25 Configuring Transmit Diversity Figure 25-1 Cable connections between the DTRU and the DDPU in the BTS3012/ BTS3012AE in transmit diversity mode l Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Figure 25-2 shows the cable connections between the DDPM and the DDRM in the BTS3006C in transmit diversity mode. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 25-3 .

l 25-4 Figure 25-3 shows the cable connections between the DDPM and the DDRM in the BTS3002E in transmit diversity mode..25 Configuring Transmit Diversity HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Figure 25-2 Cable connections between the DDPM and the DDRM in the BTS3006C in transmit diversity mode. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. 25-5 .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 25 Configuring Transmit Diversity Figure 25-3 Cable connections between the DDPM and the DDRM in the BTS3002E in transmit diversity mode l Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Figure 25-4 shows the cable connections in the DBS3900 GSM in transmit diversity mode. Ltd.

In addition. For details. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. refer to Activate BSC License. Scenario Transmit diversity is configured to improve the downlink signal strength by manually realizing multipath. The following BTSs or TRXs support the transmit diversity: BTS3012. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . Ltd. BSC Prerequisite 25-6 l Transmit diversity is restricted by the license.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 25 Configuring Transmit Diversity Figure 25-4 Cable connections in the DBS3900 GSM in transmit diversity mode ----End 25. l The two TRXs enabling the transmit diversity work as only a TRX. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. NEs Involved BTS.2 Configuring Transmit Diversity This describes how to configure transmit diversity on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Impact None. at least a pair of dual-polarized antenna feeders or two pairs of single-polarized antenna feeders are required.

CELLIDX=0. If the power is not 0. run the MOD TRXDEV command to set Send Mode to a value other than DIVERSITY(DiversityTransmit).HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 25 Configuring Transmit Diversity BTS3012AE (DTRU available). In addition. run the LST TRXDEV command to verify that Send Mode is set to a value other than DIVERSITY(DiversityTransmit). SNDMD=DIVERSITY. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd. and DBS3900 (RRU3004 or RRU3008 available). run the MOD TRXDEV command to set Send Mode to Diversity(DiversityTransmit). Then. l Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Deactivating transmit diversity 1. ----End Example An example script for configuring transmit diversity is as follows: MOD TRXDEV: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. 25-7 . the signal can be transmitted through only channel 0. BTS3006C or BTS3002E (DDRM available). record the test results. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 0 Network planning SNDMD Send Mode DIVERSITY (DiversityTrans mit) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. one double-transceiver unit serves as one TRX. it indicates that the transmit diversity function takes effect. Postrequisite l Verifying transmit diversity – Test the power of channel B on the TRX whose Send Mode is set to DIVERSITY (DiversityTransmit) by using a power meter. NOTE When you configure transmit diversity. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. It indicates that the transmit diversity is deactivated. 0 Network planning TRXPN TRX Board Path No.. Preparation Table 25-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring transmit diversity Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning TRXBN TRX Board No. BTS3900 or BTS3900A (DRFU available). TRXPN=0. 2. TRXBN=0.

Impact None. Scenario Dynamic transmit diversity makes full use of the idle timeslots to expand the coverage in the areas with weak signals.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 25 Configuring Transmit Diversity 25.This describes how to configure dynamic transmit diversity on the Local Maintenance Terminal. this feature is supported by the following types of BTSs:BTS3012/BTS3012AE configured with the DTRU.3 Configuring Dynamic Transmit Diversity Dynamic transmit diversity is timeslot-based transmit diversity. BSC. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .BTS3006C/BTS3002E configured with the DDRM. Currently. For details.DBS3900 configured with the RRU3004 or RRU3008. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal.. Preparation Table 25-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring transmit diversity 25-8 Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning IUOTP Cell IUO Type Concentric_cell (Concentric cell) Network planning ENIUO Enhanced Concentric Allowed NO(NO) Network planning DYNPBTSUPPOR TED Dynamic Transmission Div<PBT> Supported DDIVERSITY (DDiversityTransmit) Network planning TRXBN TRX Board No.BTS3900/BTS3900A configured with the DRFU. 0 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l The cell to which dynamic transmit diversity is applied must be configured with a minimum of one dual-polarized antenna or two uni-polarized antennas. Ltd. timeslot-based dynamic transmit diversity maintains optimal balance between capacity and coverage. NEs Involved BTS. 1 Network planning TRXPN TRX Board Path No. Prerequisite l Dynamic transmit diversity is restricted by the license. refer to Activate BSC License.

and use the test MS to initiate an emergency call in an area with weak signals (such as at the boundary between an overlaid subcell and an underlaid subcell). Ltd. CELLIDX=0. TRXPN=0. In addition. NOTE l You can run the LST TRXIUO command to check whether the TRX is in the overlaid subcell or in the underlaid subcell.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 25 Configuring Transmit Diversity Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source SNDMD Send Mode DDIVERSITY (DDiversityTransmit) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 2. run the SET CELLCHMGBASIC command to set Dynamic Transmission Div<PBT> Supported to DDIVERSITY(DDIVERSITY). On the Local Maintenance Terminal. MOD TRXDEV: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. run the SET CELLCHMGBASIC command to set Dynamic Transmission Div<PBT> Supported to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support). 25-9 . IUOTP=Concentric_cell. SET CELLCHMGBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX.. l To configure dynamic transmit diversity. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD CELLIUO command to set Cell IUO Type to Concentric_cell(Concentric cell). whereas that of another channel is Subordinate Channel. two TRXs must be configured. CELLIDX=0. Deactivating dynamic transmit diversity 1. ENIUO=NO. DYNPBTSUPPORTED=DDIVERSITY. TRXBN=1. the channel status monitoring interface shows that the call occupies two channels on the same timeslots of two TRXs. run the LST CELLCHMGBASIC command. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the MOD TRXDEV command to set Send Mode of the TRX in the overlaid subcell to DDIVERSITY(DDiversityTransmit). If Dynamic Transmission Div<PBT> Supported is set to Not Support. 2. ----End Example An example script for configuring dynamic transmit diversity is as follows: MOD CELLIUO: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. dynamic transmit diversity cannot be configured on the MBCCH. it indicates that the dynamic transmission diversity function is deactivated. Postrequisite l l Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Verifying dynamic transmit diversity 1. CELLIDX=0. When a call occupies a TRX with dynamic transmit diversity enabled. SNDMD=DDIVERSITY. The status of one channel is Working. Monitor the channel status.

.

Thus. the receive sensitivity is improved.2 Configuring 4-Way Receive Diversity This describes how to configure 4-way receive diversity on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1 Installing Hardware (4-Way Receive Diversity) This describes how to connect the cables in 4-way receive diversity mode. Ltd. and the receive effect is much better than that of none receiver diversity and that of two-way receiver diversity.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 26 26 Configuring 4-Way Receive Diversity Configuring 4-Way Receive Diversity About This Chapter With appropriate design. 26-1 . 26.. the 4-way receiver diversity technology allows one TRX module to receive the uplink signals from four RX channels and then combine the uplink signals to achieve better signal quality and demodulation performance. 26.

. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . 26-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.26 Configuring 4-Way Receive Diversity HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 26. Procedure Step 1 This takes the BTS3012/BTS3012AE as an example. Ltd. The red lines in Figure 26-1 shows the connection between the DTRU and the DDPU in 4-way receive diversity mode.1 Installing Hardware (4-Way Receive Diversity) This describes how to connect the cables in 4-way receive diversity mode.

Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 26 Configuring 4-Way Receive Diversity Figure 26-1 Connection between the DTRU and the DDPU in 4-way receive diversity mode Table 26-1 Description of ports on the DTRU Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Port Type Explanation TX1 N female connector TX1 output Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 26-3 ..

communication signal.. clock signal. Ltd. and clock signal from the DSCB of the BTS3012AE. TX2 N female connector TX2 output RXM1 SMA female connector Main receive port of TRX 1 or diversity receive port 1 of TRX 1 RXD1 SMA female connector Diversity receive port of TRX 1 or diversity receive port 2 of TRX 1 RXM2 SMA female connector Main receive port of TRX 2 or diversity receive port 3 of TRX 1 RXD2 SMA female connector Diversity receive port of TRX 2 or diversity receive port 4 of TRX 1 PWR 3V3 power connector Power input Table 26-2 Description of ports on the DDPU Port Type Explanation COM DB26 female connector l Receives control signal. communication signal. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .26 Configuring 4-Way Receive Diversity HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Port Type Explanation TCOM N female connector Combines and exports signals from TX1 and TX2 or exports PBT combined signals. and rack number signal from the DCTB of the BTS3012. l Receives control signal. 26-4 POWER 3V3 power connector Power input TXA N female connector Combined TX input from the DTRU to the DCOM TXB N female connector Combined TX input from the DTRU to the DCOM RXA1 SMA female connector Main output port for route 1 RXA2 SMA female connector Main output port for route 2 RXA3 SMA female connector Main output port for route 3 RXA4 SMA female connector Main output port for route 4 RXB1 SMA female connector Diversity output port for route 1 RXB2 SMA female connector Diversity output port for route 2 RXB3 SMA female connector Diversity output port for route 3 RXB4 SMA female connector Diversity output port for route 4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Scenario The 4-way receive diversity is configured to improve the gain of the uplink signals on the radio channel and the receiver sensibility. this feature is supported by the following types of BTSs: BTS3012/BTS3012AE configured with the DTRU. 0 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. and BTS3900/BTS3900A configured with the DRFU. l The 4-way receive diversity is restricted by the license. ----End 26.2 Configuring 4-Way Receive Diversity This describes how to configure 4-way receive diversity on the Local Maintenance Terminal. NEs Involved MS. For details. l Connects to the BTS3012AE indoor 1/4-inch jumper or the Bias-Tee. Preparation Table 26-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring 4-way receive diversity Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning TRXBN TRX Board No. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Prerequisite l Only one TRX can be configured on a DTRU. Impact None. Currently.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 26 Configuring 4-Way Receive Diversity Port Type Explanation ANTA DIN female connector l Connects to the BTS3012 indoor 1/2-inch jumper or the Bias-Tee. BTS.BTS3006C/BTS3002E configured with the DDRM. Ltd. 26-5 . l Connects to the BTS3012AE indoor 1/4-inch jumper or the Bias-Tee. ANTB DIN female connector l Connects to the BTS3012 indoor 1/2-inch jumper or the Bias-Tee. and BSC. refer to Activate BSC License. l The cell to which 4-way receiver diversity is applied must be configured with two dualpolarized antennas or four uni-polarized antennas.

CELLIDX=0. l Deactivating 4-way receive diversity 1. 2. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD TRXDEV command to set Receive Mode to a value other than FOURDIVERSITY(Four Diversity Receiver). ----End Example An example script for configuring 4-way receive diversity is as follows: MOD TRXDEV: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. It indicates that the 4-way receive diversity function is activated. 0 Network planning RCVMD Receive Mode FOURDIVERSIT Y(Four Diversity Receiver) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD TRXDEV command to set Receive Mode to FOURDIVERSITY(Four Diversity Receiver). Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 26 Configuring 4-Way Receive Diversity Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source TRXPN TRX Board Path No. TRXPN=0. l If the TRX of the DTRU is allocated to channel 1. TRXBN=0. NOTE l If the TRX of the DTRU is allocated to channel O. It indicates that the 4-way receive diversity function is deactivated. Postrequisite l Verifying 4-way receive diversity – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. DDIVERSITY(DDiversityTransmit).. Send Mode can be set to only NOCOMB (NoCombin). DIVERSITY(DiversityTransmit). PBT (PBT). run the LST TRXDEV command to verify that Receive Mode is set to FOURDIVERSITY(Four Diversity Receiver). run the LST TRXDEV command to verify that Receive Mode is set to a value other than FOURDIVERSITY(Four Diversity Receiver). RCVMD=FOURDIVERSITY. or DPBT(DPBT). Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . set Send Mode to NOCOMB(NoCombin). l 26-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Preparation Table 27-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring SDCCH dynamic adjustment Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning SDDYN SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed YES(YES) Network planning IDLESDTHRES Idle SDCCH Threshold N1 2 Network planning CELLMAXSD Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum 80 Network planning MINRESTIMETC H TCH Minimum Recovery Time<s> 60 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NEs Involved BTS.This describes how to configure SDCCH dynamic adjustment on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Impact The SDCCH dynamic adjustment can decrease the TCH traffic bearer capability and increase intra-cell handovers. In this way.. Ltd. BSC. Scenario The SDCCH dynamic adjustment is performed to reduce the SDCCH congestion rate and the impact of the SDCCH initial configuration on the system performance. and radio resources are fully utilized. 27-1 . the effect of the initial configuration of the SDCCH on the system is minimized.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 27 27 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment Configuring SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment SDCCH dynamic adjustment is to dynamically adjust the number of SDCCHs according to the load of the TCHs and SDCCHs.

27 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. IDLESDTHRES=2. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . ----End Example An example script for configuring SDCCH dynamic adjustment is as follows: MOD CELLBASICPARA: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. CELLIDX=0. it indicates that the function of SDCCH dynamic adjustment is activated.. run the LST CELLBASICPARA command. 2. and TCH Minimum Recovery Time<s>. l 27-2 Deactivating SDCCH dynamic adjustment 1. run the SET CELLCHMGBASIC command to set Idle SDCCH Threshold N1. CELLIDX=0. If SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed is set to YES. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Postrequisite l Verifying SDCCH dynamic adjustment – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the LST CELLBASICPARA command. SDDYN=YES. If SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed is set to No. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed to NO(No). Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum. run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed to YES(YES). On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd. SET CELLCHMGBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. it indicates that the function of SDCCH dynamic adjustment is deactivated. CELLMAXSD=80. MINRESTIMETCH=60.

Prerequisite l The cell supports the GPRS services.. NEs Involved MS.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 28 Configuring NACC 28 Configuring NACC NACC refers to network-assisted cell reselection. 28-1 . Impact None. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. the service interruption time due to the cell reselection is minimized. Therefore. Ltd. To implement rapid PS access after cell reselection. For details. l NACC is restricted by the license. This describes how to configure NACC on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Scenario NACC is configured to reduce the time of service interruption caused by the cell reselection. the BSC sends the system information about the target cell to the MS before cell reselection. refer to Activate BSC License. Preparation Table 28-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring NACC Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning NCO Network Control Mode nc0(nc0) Network planning GPRS GPRS SupportAsInnPcu (SupportAsInnPcu) Network planning NACCSPT NaccSpt YES(Yes) Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and PCU. BSC.

. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd. 3. you are advised to disable the NC2 function before verifying NACC. NACCSPT=YES. l 28-2 2. NCO=nc0. 1. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 2. run the SET PSBASE command to set Network Control Mode to nc0(nc0) or nc1(nc1).HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 28 Configuring NACC Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Verify that the message interchange in Verifying NACC does not exist. CELLIDX=0. Deactivating NACC 1. and SI13 of the target cell. 4. run the SET CELLGPRS command to set NaccSpt to NO(No). the cell reselection procedure is the NC2 procedure. NOTE When Network Control Mode is set to NC2. run the SET CELLGPRS command to set Nc2Spt to NO(No). Set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(SupportAsInnPcu) or SupportAsExtPcu (SupportAsExtPcu) as required. GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu. Trace PS messages on the Um interface. Make an MS camp on the serving cell. the MS sends a PACKET CELL CHANGE NOTIFICATION message to the BSC. SET CELLGPRS: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. CELLIDX=0. Thus. Postrequisite l Verifying NACC 1. Adjust the position of the MS or increase the power of the target cell so that the level of the target cell is higher than that of the serving cell. After receiving the message. When detecting that the signal strength of the serving cell weakens and that a neighboring cell with better signal strength is available. Then. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . activate the GPRS services and trace the signaling on the Um interface. the BSC sends a PACKET CELL CHANGE CONTINUE message to the MS to instruct the MS to continue with cell reselection. The operations for verifying deactivation of NACC are the same as those for Verifying NACC. 2. ----End Example An example script for configuring NACC is as follows: SET PSBASE: IDXTYPE=BYCELLIDX. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Set NaccSpt to YES(Yes). the BSC replies a PACKET NEIGHBOUR CELL DATA message containing SI1. run the SET CELLGPRS command. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Then. SI3.

the network instructs the MS to perform cell reselection. BSC. Scenario With NC2.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 29 Configuring NC2 29 Configuring NC2 The network-controlled cell reselection (NC2) refers to the situation that the MS in packet transfer mode can be controlled by the network to reselect a cell according to the measurement report. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Prerequisite l The cell supports the GPRS services. NEs Involved MS. l NC2 is restricted by the license. Preparation Table 29-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring NC2 Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning NCO Network Control Mode nc2(nc2) Network planning GPRS GPRS SupportAsInnPcu (SupportAsInnPcu) Network planning NC2SPT Nc2Spt YES(Yes) Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. refer to Activate BSC License.This describes how to configure NC2 on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 29-1 . For details. Ltd. Impact None.

Postrequisite l l 29-2 Verifying NC2 1. GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu. NCO=nc2. For details. Then. Deactivating NC2 1. run the SET PSBASE command to set Network Control Mode to nc2(nc2). Set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(SupportAsInnPcu) or SupportAsExtPcu (SupportAsExtPcu) as required. and set Nc2Spt to NO(No). 1. Verify that network-control-order in the Packet PSI13 message is NC2 in the tracing result. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . see Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. CELLIDX=0. 3. Set Nc2Spt to YES(Yes). Ltd. run the SET CELLGPRS command. CELLIDX=0. Start the tracing of the messages on the Um interface. Make an MS camp on the serving cell. run the SET CELLGPRS command. 2. NC2SPT=YES. Verify that network-control-order in the Packet PSI13 message is not NC2. activate the GPRS services and trace the signaling on the Um interface. ----End Example An example script for configuring NC2 is as follows: SET PSBASE: IDXTYPE=BYCELLIDX. 2. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Verifying the deactivation of NC2: The operations are the same as those for Verifying NC2.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 29 Configuring NC2 Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. SET CELLGPRS: IDXTYPE=BYIDX.. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2.

11-bit EGPRS access on CCCH can improve the EDGE MS performance. and you can run the pcu cfgpara add<BoardNo>g_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 0 command to disable the function of takeover of packet assignment by the BTS. Procedure Step 1 Configure extended uplink TBF. l In external PCU mode. Prerequisite The packet performance improvement function is not license-controlled. see the Manual of Commands related to the PCU. reset the cell. 30-1 . run the following command: pcu add privateoptpara<LCNo><PSPrecedence><UpTbfRelDelay>2000<DnTbfRelDelay> l In built-in PCU mode. NOTE l When the PCU is in external mode. run the PCU add privateoptpara command on the PCU maintenance terminal to configure the duration of the inactive period timer.. and takeover of the packet immediate assignment by the BTS can improve MS access performance and decrease access delay.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 30 30 Configuring Packet Performance Improvement Configuring Packet Performance Improvement This describes how to configure packet performance improvement on the external PCU maintenance console or Local Maintenance Terminal. To configure the duration of the inactive period timer to 2000 ms. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the SET PRIVATEOPTPARA command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to configure the duration of the inactive period timer. For PCU commands. Ltd. the BSC6000V900R008C02 and later versions support takeover of immediate assignment and packet assignment by the BTS l When the PCU is in external mode. Context Extended uplink TBF can decrease transmission delay. you can run the pcu cfgpara add<BoardNo>g_bCellSptImmAssDlShift 4 0 command to disable the function of takeover of immediate assignment by the BTS. Then.

with the extended uplink TBF enabled and disabled. l In built-in PCU mode. l In external PCU mode. run the pcu cfgpara add<BoardNo>g_bCellSptImmAssDlShift 4 1 command on the PCU maintenance terminal to configure takeover of immediate assignment by the BTS. reset the cell. Extended uplink TBF – Connect an MS supporting the GERAN Feature Package 1 to a PC to test the Ping service performance. – Connect an MS to a PC to test the Ping service performance. with the takeover of packet assignment by the BTS enabled and disabled..30 Configuring Packet Performance Improvement HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Step 2 Configuring EGPRS access of 11-bit messages on the CCCH. run the pcu cfgpara add<BoardNo>g_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 1 command on the PCU maintenance terminal to configure takeover of packet assignment by the BTS. Step 4 Configure takeover of packet assignment by the BTS. run the following command: pcu set egprspara<LCNo><LQCMode> <BepPeriod>yes<UpFixMcs><UpDefaultMcs><DnFixMcs><DnDefaultMcs> – To disable the EGPRS access of 11-bit messages on the CCCH for the cell. run the PCU set egprspara command on the PCU maintenance terminal to configure the EGPRS access of 11-bit messages on the CCCH for the cell. – To enable the EGPRS access of 11-bit messages on the CCCH for the cell. Ltd. 3. with the EGPRS access of 11-bit messages on the CCCH enabled and disabled. 30-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. with the takeover of immediate assignment by the BTS enabled and disabled. run the SET PSBASE command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to enable the EGPRS access of 11-bit messages. Step 3 Configure takeover of immediate assignment by the BTS. run the SET PSOTHERPARA command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to configure takeover of packet assignment by the BTS. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . l In external PCU mode. Takeover of immediate and packet immediate assignments by the BTS – Connect an MS to a PC to test the Ping service performance. l In built-in PCU mode. 2. reset the cell. run the SET PSOTHERPARA command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to configure takeover of immediate assignment by the BTS. EGPRS access of 11-bit messages on the CCCH – Connect an EGPRS capable MS to a PC to test the Ping service performance. Then. l In external PCU mode. Then. run the following command: pcu set egprspara<LCNo><LQCMode> <BepPeriod>no<UpFixMcs><UpDefaultMcs><DnFixMcs><DnDefaultMcs> l In built-in PCU mode. ----End Postrequisite l Verifying Packet Performance Improvement 1.

Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. the transmission resources on the Abis interface form a resource pool to share resources between CS services and PS services (including idle timeslots) and also between different cells or BTSs. 31. That is.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 31 31 Configuring Flex Abis Configuring Flex Abis About This Chapter Flex Abis implements the sharing of the transmission resources on the Abis interface between different BTSs. and the cells configured with the EGPRS function. the transmission resources on the Abis interface can be used in an efficient way. 31.1 Configuring Flex Abis This describes how to configure Flex Abis on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Flex Abis is an allocation mode of the transmission resources on the Abis interface. Context For the impact of configuring the Flex Abis on the system. cells. cascading BTSs.2 Configuring Exclusive Timeslot This describes how to configure exclusive timeslots on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Especially when Flex Abis is enabled in multi-cell large capacity BTSs. and services.. and thus improves the resource utilization. see BSS Feature Description. 31-1 .

NEs Involved BSC. the following restrictions should apply: – Flex Abis must be enabled in all the BTSs. Scenario With the Flex Abis feature. l Flex Abis serves as the basis of the BTS local switching. l When BTS ring topology I and Flex Abis are simultaneously enabled.. the utilization of the transmission resources on the Abis interface are greatly improved. After the BTS local switching is performed. – The Abis bypass function is not supported. l The license is activated through the Local Maintenance Terminal. This can save the transmission resources on the Abis interface.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 31 Configuring Flex Abis 31. Impact The signaling load on the Abis interface is increased and the reliability of the system is reduced. 31-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and only the forward and reverse single E1 link is supported. l The Flex Abis and Abis bypass functions can be enabled simultaneously. the occupied transmission resources on the Abis interface are released. – The 16 kbit/s LAPD link is not supported. Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . see Activate BSC License. For details.1 Configuring Flex Abis This describes how to configure Flex Abis on the Local Maintenance Terminal. BTS Prerequisite l The configuration of Flex Abis is license-controlled.

you need to set only Sublink resources preemption switch to Yes to increase the access success rate of the CS service users if the Abis transmission resources are insufficient. l If there are no lower-level BTSs. Multiplexing Mode can be set to 5:1 or 6:1 to multiplex five or six RSLs onto a 64 kbit/s timeslot. the type of corresponding Abis timeslots is automatically changed to TCH. Ltd. l After a call is released.If the lower-level BTS needs to process data services. PCU Support PREEMPT_ABIS_LINK message is set to YES(YES) to allow the BSC to send a PREEMPT_ABIS_LINK message to the PCU so that the CS services can preempt the transmission resources occupied by the PCU if the PCU supports the processing of this message. l If there are lower-level BTSs. l When the built-in PCU is configured. the CS services and PS services share the transmission resources on the Abis interface. the Abis timeslots allocated to the extension cabinet group are displayed as TCH. the system allocates TCHHs preferentially if the fixed Abis channel seizure rate exceeds Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred{%} and the Flex Abis channel seizure rate exceeds Flex Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred{%}. set Flex Abis Mode to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis) or SEMI_ABIS(Semisolid Abis). If Flex abis needs to be enabled after the BTS is configure. l If the Flex Abis function is enabled on the BTS. as shown in Figure 31-1. you are advised to set both Sublink resources preemption switch and Lower-level sublink resources preemption switch to Yes. In this case. the Abis transmission resources may be insufficient even if there are still available TCHFs. In this manner. l The CS services can preempt the resources of PS services on the secondary link (or even the primary link if necessary) in a BTS and its lower-level BTS. Flex Abis Mode is set to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis) or SEMI_ABIS(Semisolid Abis) to enable Flex Abis. the Abis interface transmission link can be quickly established when the new call arrives. To enable this function. Low Lev Sub Res Preempt Flag is set to YES(YES) to allow the CS services to preempt the resources of PS services on the secondary link in the lower-level BTSs. the primary link and secondary link are dynamically allocated. idle timeslots need to be configured. the allocation of TCHHs can be triggered based on the Abis transmission resource load to increase the call access success rate. l When the external PCU is configured. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. This can prevent an additional 64 kbit/s timeslot from being occupied. 31-3 . l When Flex Abis is enabled. and if a lower-level BTS is in SemiSolid mode. That is. If the extension cabinet group needs to process data services. MCS3 to MCS9) are required. and if the high-rate coding schemes (CS3 and CS4. indicating fixed timeslots. the type of the timeslots allocated to the lower BTS is displayed as TCH. indicating fixed timeslots. l When the BTS is initially configured.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 31 Configuring Flex Abis Preparation NOTE l When Flex Abis is enabled. and if the extension cabinet group is directly connected to the BSC.. the transmission link that the call uses can be reserved if a new call can totally or partly uses the link. l If the Flex Abis function is enabled on the BTS. the transmission resources on the Abis interface can be dynamically allocated without configuring the static PDTCH and idle timeslots if the actual traffic volume is smaller than the estimated value in network design. indicating fixed timeslots. Sub Res Preempt Flag is set to YES(YES) to allow the CS services to preempt the resources of PS services on the secondary link in the same-level BTSs. l After Flex Abis is enabled in the BSC. if an upper-level BTS is in Flex Abis mode. but the timeslot type that the upper-level BTS reports to the BSC is displayed as Flex. and if the high-rate coding schemes (CS3 and CS4. l When Flex Abis is enabled and Abis Resource Adjustment TCHH Function Switch is set to YES (YES). l In the case of cascaded BTSs. and if the channel type is changed to static PDCH. In this manner. you need to set FlexAbis Bypast-connect Status to Yes. l After Flex Abis is enabled. idle timeslots need to be configured. the access success rate of the CS service users is increased if the Abis transmission resources are insufficient. MCS3 to MCS9) are required.

26 Network planning PN Port No..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 31 Configuring Flex Abis Figure 31-1 Configuration of BTS combined cabinets and cabinet groups BTS Master cabinet group Flex Abis/SemiSolid BSC Extension cabinet group Fix Abis The following is an example of configuring Flex Abis for the BTS3012 in TDM service mode. 0 Network planning BTSDESC BTS Description TDM BTS3012 Network planning MPMODE Multiplexing Mode MODE4_1 Network planning FlexAbisMode Flex Abis Mode FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis) Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . 0 Network planning SN Slot No. Table 31-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring Flex Abis 31-4 Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source BTSNAME BTS name BTS3012 Network planning TYPE BTS Type BTS3012 Network planning UPNODE Up Node Type BSC Network planning SRN Subrack No. Ltd.

.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 31 Configuring Flex Abis Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source AbisByPassMod e Abis By Pass Mode FALSE(Not Support) Network planning ServiceMode Service Type TDM Network planning DCELLNAME Cell Name TDMCELL Network planning DCTYPE Cell Type GSM900 Network planning DCMCC Cell MCC 460 Network planning DCMNC Cell MNC 01 Network planning DCLAC Cell LAC 8240 Network planning DCCI Cell CI 1 Network planning CPLMode Separate Mode UNSUPPORT(Not Support) Network planning TRXBN TRX Board No. run the ADD BTS command. 988 Network planning SUBRESPREE MPTFLG Sub Res Preempt Flag YES(YES) Network planning LOWLEVSUBR ESPREEMPTFL G Low Lev Sub Res Preempt Flag YES(YES) Network planning ABISRESADJT CHHFUNSWIT CH Abis Resource Adjustment TCHH Function Switch YES(YES) Network planning FIXABISPRIOR ABISLOADTH RED Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred{%} 80 Network planning FLEXABISPRI ORABISLOAD THRED Flex Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred{%} 85 Network planning FLEXABISUSE CONNSTATE FlexAbis Bypastconnect Status YES(YES) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd. 0 Network planning FREQ TRX Freq. Add a BTS and set the Flex Abis Mode to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis). Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the MOD FLEXABIS command to configure parameters of Flex Abis. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 31-5 .

31-6 4. Use the test MS to initiate a call in the cell. To block the Flex Abis timeslots. run the SET OTHSOFTPARA command. TYPE=BTS3012. Run the DSP ABISTS command to query the timeslot status. 6. DCCI=1.. /*Configure FlexAbis Bypast-connect Status*/ SET OTHSOFTPARA: FlexAbisUseConnState=YES. CPLMode=UNSUPPORT. DCMCC="460". UPNODE=BSC. TRXBN=0. Leave only cell 1 with the main BCCH. Then. and End Sub Timeslot NO. run the LST BTSTS command to query the timeslots on the ports of the BTS. LOWLEVSUBRESPREEMPTFLG=YES. DCELLNAME="TDMCELL". FIXABISPRIORABISLOADTHRED=80. BTSNAME="BTS3012". Verify that State is set to OCCUPIED (Occupied). End the call and block the occupied TCH. FLEXABISPRIORABISLOADTHRED=85. and hold on the call. 7. End Timeslot NO.. Use the test MS to call a fixed-line phone in the cell. SDCCH. Reserve only one 16 kbit/s subtimeslot for services during the test because the timeslots are blocked in unit of 16 kbit/s subtimeslots. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. FlexAbisMode=FLEX_ABIS. /*Configure Flex Abis parameters*/ MOD FLEXABIS: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. BTSDESC="TDM BTS3012". do as follows: Select Start Timeslot NO. Then. and hold on the call. run the SET BTSFORBIDTS command to block the Flex Abis timeslots. ABISRESADJTCHHFUNSWITCH=YES. 2. SN=26. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . run the MOD FLEXABIS command to set Abis By Pass Mode to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis) and Multiplexing Mode to MODE16K. according to the Flex Abis timeslots and sub-timeslots queried in Step 2. Ltd. 5. block the Flex Abis timeslots and sub-timeslots until only two consecutive 8 kbit/s Flex Abis sub-timeslots are available. Start Sub Timeslot NO. DCMNC="01". DCLAC=8240. It is found that the Abis timeslot corresponding to the channel occupied by the call is the unblocked Flex Abis timeslot. FREQ=988. The call occupies another TCH in the cell.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 31 Configuring Flex Abis Step 3 (Optional)On the Local Maintenance Terminal. PN=0. Postrequisite l Verifying Flex Abis 1. 3. On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. ServiceMode=TDM. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Verify that State is set to OCCUPIED(Occupied). SRN=0. ----End Example An example script of configuring Flex Abis on BTS3012 in TDM service mode is as follows: *Add a BTS3012*/ ADD BTS: BTSNAME="BTS3012". MODE=FLEX_ABIS. only one unblocked channel is available. NOTE Do not block any timeslot other than Flex Abis timeslots. SUBRESPREEMPTFLG=YES. MPMODE=MODE4_1. and two TCHs by deactivating cells through MOD CELLACS and blocking channels through SET BTSOBJ.. Run the DSP ABISTS command to query the timeslot status. set the FlexAbis Bypast-connect Status to YES(YES). DCTYPE=GSM900. The Abis timeslot Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

8. This indicates that the configuration takes effect. run the SET BTSFORBIDTS command to disable the specified timeslots on a BTS. Impact None NEs Involved BSC.2 Configuring Exclusive Timeslot This describes how to configure exclusive timeslots on the Local Maintenance Terminal. an RSL. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD FLEXABIS command to set Abis By Pass Mode to FIX_ABIS(Fix Abis). The test personnel disables the other timeslots on the port to check whether a timeslot without being disabled work normally. l Release the call. Scenario Test the timeslots on the port to check whether the timeslots work normally. Prerequisite l Both the GXPUM and GXPUT are configured. l The BTS is configured. 10 Network planning ENDTS End Timeslot No. 31-7 .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 31 Configuring Flex Abis corresponding to the occupied TCH is the unblocked Flex Abis timeslot. Deactivating Flex Abis 1. run the LST FLEXABIS command to verify that Abis By Pass Mode is set to FIX_ABIS(Fix Abis). There are idle ports on the configured GEIUB. Preparation Table 31-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring exclusive timeslots Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME (By Name) Network planning BTSNAME BTS name BTS3012 Network planning OPTYPE Operate Type FORBID(Forbid) Network planning PN Port No. On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. Ltd. BTS NOTE If a timeslot on the port is disabled. or a TCH. 31. 2. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. it cannot serve as an OML. 0 Network planning STARTTS Start Timeslot No. 23 Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

ENDTS=23. run the LST BTSTS command to view the timeslots on the ports of the BTS.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 31 Configuring Flex Abis NOTE You can also run this command to enable the exclusive timeslots. run the SET BTSFORBIDTS command to set Operate Type to RESTORE(Restore). OPTYPE=FORBID. BTSNAME="BTS3012". Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . l 31-8 Unblocking exclusive timeslot 1. 2. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Ltd. An example script of configuring exclusive timeslots is as follows: SET BTSFORBIDTS: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ----End Example Disable the timeslots from 10 to 23 on the BTS3012. run the LST BTSTS command to view the timeslots on the ports of the BTS. numbered from 1 to 30. PN=0. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Postrequisite l Verifying exclusive timeslot – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. STARTTS=10.

1 Configuring MSC Pool (A over TDM) This describes how to verify the MSC pool in A over TDM on the Local Maintenance Terminal. a maximum of 32 MSCs form a resource pool to provide services for the subscribers under one group of BSCs. In addition. and the relevant data is configured correctly. 32.2 Configuring the MSC Pool (A over IP) This describes how to configure the MSC pool in A over IP on the Local Maintenance Terminal. see Activate BSC License. l The MSC server interconnects with the MGW.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 32 32 Configuring the MSC Pool Configuring the MSC Pool About This Chapter With this feature. 32-1 . Through the MSC pool. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the traffic on the BSC is evenly distributed to the MSCs in the pool according to the NRI or load balancing principle. Prerequisite l The BSC and the MSC are Huawei devices. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. one BSC can be connected to multiple MSCs at the same time. l The MSC pool requires a license. 32. Ltd.. For details.

Ltd. MGW. Table 32-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring MSC Pool in A over TDM Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source DPC attributes NAME DPC Name dsp1 Network planning DPC DPC Code h'cc Network planning DPCGIDX DPC Group Index 0 Network planning CNID MSC ID 0 Network planning SRN Subrack No. and HLR Preparation The prerequisites of the operation is that the mapping between the OPC and the subrack is configured.. NEs Involved MS. Impact None. the traffic volume is evenly distributed in the MSC pool. MSC. 0 Network planning STCIC Start CIC 0 Network planning DPCGIDX DPC Group Index 0 Network planning OPNAME Operator Name 46000 Network planning Attributes of E1 on the A interface MSC pool switch attributes 32-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . 5 Network planning SN Slot No.1 Configuring MSC Pool (A over TDM) This describes how to verify the MSC pool in A over TDM on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Scenario In A over TDM.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 32 Configuring the MSC Pool 32. 14 Network planning PN Port No. This describes how to configure the MSC pool in A over TDM on the BSC. BSC.

such as the NRI and NULL_NRI of each MSC. DPCGIDX=0. You can run the MOD N7DPC command to modify the default signaling point. Set MSC Pool Function Enabled to YES(Yes) and specify Length of NRI in TMSI and NULL-NRI Value. NOTE When you add multiple DPCs. For Huawei core network devices. run the ADD N7DPC command to add DPCs. 1. MSCNULLNRI=4. 2. STCIC=0. run the ADD AE1T1 command to add E1s on the A interface. Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the SET MSCPOOL command. MNC. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. PN=0. CNID=0. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. SN=14. the first DPC is the default signaling point. DPC=h'cc. ----End Example Assume that the OPC is configured according to the network planning. For details on parameter settings.. Configure the parameters related to the MSC pool. /*Enable the MSC pool function*/ SET MSCPOOL: OPNAME="46000". see the user manuals related to the MSC products. see relevant user manuals of the MSC. enable the MSC pool on the MSC side. NRILEN=3. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type Mapping between the NRI and the MSC 32 Configuring the MSC Pool Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source MSCPOOLAL LOW MSC Pool Function Enabled YES(Yes) Network planning NRILEN Length of NRI in TMSI 3 Network planning MSCNULLNR I NULL-NRI Value 4 Network planning NRI NRI Value 3 Network planning DPC DPC h'cc Network planning Procedure Step 1 Configure the data of the MSC server and the MGW. Example scripts are as follows: /*Add a DPC*/ ADD N7DPC: NAME="dsp1". DPCGIDX=0. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.For details on parameter settings. MSCPOOLALLOW=YES. and MSC ID. run the ADD NRIMSCMAP command to configure the mapping between the NRI and the MSC. 32-3 . The start CICs of different ports within a DPC group cannot be duplicate. /*Add an E1 on the A interface*/ ADD AE1T1: SRN=5. Ltd. available capacity of the MSC.

2.. BSC. and ensure that the BSC status and MSC status are normal. Run the MOD N7DPC command to set MSC Administrable State of MS 1 to UNAVAIL(Unavail). Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . ensure that the values of parameters such as Length of NRI in TMSI and NULL-NRI are same as those on the MSC side. run the SET MSCPOOL command to enable the MSC pool function. the core network allocates the TMSI to MS 2. the traffic volume is evenly distributed in the MSC pool. Impact None. run the MOD N7DPC command to set MSC Administrable State of the MSCs except for this specific MSC to UNAVAIL(Unavail). Then. Ltd. run the LST MSCPOOL command to verify that MSC Pool Function Enabled is set to NO. and HLR 32-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. After the location update is complete. Scenario In A over IP. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Power on MS 2 so that MS 2 initiates the location update procedure on MSC 2. change the value of MSC Administrable State to NORMAL(Normal). It indicates that the MSC pool(A over TDM) function is deactivated. MGW.2 Configuring the MSC Pool (A over IP) This describes how to configure the MSC pool in A over IP on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 2. NEs Involved MS. l 7. the core network allocates the TMSI to MS 1. Then. Verify that the call is normal. 6. and set Selected Cells on the BSSAP tab page to the cell where the MS camps. 5. Power on MS 1 so that MS 1 initiates the location update procedure on MSC 1. 4. and MSC 2 assigns a new TMSI to MS 1 according to the messages traced over the A interface. enable the TMSI reallocation function on the core network side. 32. On the BSC side. Set DPC Code(Hex) to the DPC code of MSC 1/MSC 2. NOTE If you want to make an MS to initiate the location update procedure on a specific MSC. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. In addition. Verify the A signaling messages between BSC and MSC 1/ MSC 2. Deactivating MSC pool(A over TDM) 1. Then. Postrequisite l Verifying MSC Pool (A over TDM) 1. 3. run the SET MSCPOOL command to set MSC Pool Function Enabled to NO(No). Combine MSC 1 and MSC 2 to form an MSC pool.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 32 Configuring the MSC Pool /*Configure the mapping between the NRI and the MSC*/ ADD NRIMSCMAP: NRI=3. DPC=h'cc. 8. Use MS 1 to call MS 2 in the area covered by the MSC pool. MSC. Start the trace of the messages on the A interface. Get two MSs that are registered in the MSC pool ready.

1 Network planning NAME Destination Entity Name m3de Network planning DPC DPC Code h'cc Network planning RTCONTEXT Routing Context 0 Network planning SSN Subsystem Number 254 Network planning CNID Network Element ID 0 Network planning SIGLKSIDX Signaling Link Set Index 0 Network planning NAME Signaling Link Set Name linkset_1 Network planning DENO Adjacent Destination Entity No. This describes how to configure the MSC pool in A over IP on the BSC.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 32 Configuring the MSC Pool Preparation The prerequisites of the operation is that the M3UA local entity and the mapping between the OPC and the subrack is configured. 2048 Network planning M3UA link set M3UA route M3UA link Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 32-5 . 2048 Network planning PEERPN Destination Port No. 1 Network planning SIGLKSIDX Signaling Link Set Index 0 Network planning SIGLKSIDX Signaling Link Set Index 0 Network planning SRN Subrack No. Ltd. 1 Network planning DENO Destination Entity No. 0 Network planning LOCPN Local Port No. Table 32-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring links on the A interface Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source M3UA destination entity DENO Destination Entity No..

see the user manuals related to the MSC products. For Huawei core network devices.For details on parameter settings. Step 5 Configure GFGUA/GOGUA.10. and MSC ID. 1. 32-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the ADD M3DE command to add M3UA destination entities.1 Network planning Table 32-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring MSC Pool in A over IP Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source MSC pool switch attributes OPNAME Operator Name 46000 Network planning MSCPOOLAL LOW MSC Pool Function Enabled YES(Yes) Network planning NRILEN Length of NRI in TMSI 3 Network planning MSCNULLNR I NULL-NRI Value 4 Network planning NRI NRI Value 3 Network planning DPC DPC h'cc Network planning Mapping between the NRI and the MSC Procedure Step 1 Configure the data of the MSC server and the MGW.2 Network planning PEERIP1 First Destination IP Address 192. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the ADD M3LKS command to add M3UA link sets. see relevant user manuals of the MSC..30. For details on parameter settings. 2. run the ADD M3RT command to add the M3UA route. enable the MSC pool on the MSC side.168. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Configure the parameters related to the MSC pool. Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 32 Configuring the MSC Pool Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source LOCIP1 First Local IP Address 192. such as the NRI and NULL_NRI of each MSC. MNC. available capacity of the MSC.168.

run the MOD N7DPC command to set MSC Administrable State of the MSCs except for this specific MSC to UNAVAIL(Unavail). /*Configure the mapping between the NRI and the MSC*/ ADD NRIMSCMAP: NRI=3. Set MSC Pool Function Enabled to YES(Yes) and specify Length of NRI in TMSI and NULL-NRI Value. 5. Ltd. /*Add an M3UA route*/ ADD M3RT: DENO=1.1. Step 7 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Then. SRN=0.2. Start the trace of the messages on the A interface. Step 8 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Get ready two MSs that are registered in the MSC pool.. 4. run the SET MSCPOOL command to enable the MSC pool function. 6. 3. the core network allocates the TMSI to MS 1. NRILEN=3.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 32 Configuring the MSC Pool Step 6 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Example scripts are as follows: /*Add an M3UA destination entity*/ ADD M3DE: DENO=1. Power on MS 1 so that MS 1 initiates the location update procedure on MSC 1. In addition. 2. /*Enable the MSC pool function*/ SET MSCPOOL: OPNAME="46000". ensure the values of parameters such as Length of NRI in TMSI and NULL-NRI are same as those on the MSC side. NAME="m3de".2. RTCONTEXT=0. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Run the MOD N7DPC command to set MSC Administrable State of MS 1 to UNAVAIL(Unavail). NOTE If you want to make an MS to initiate the location update procedure on a specific MSC. ----End Example Assume that the M3UA local entity is configured according to the network planning. PEERPN=2048. Power on MS 2 so that MS 2 initiates the location update procedure on MSC 2. PEERIP1="2. and ensure the BSC status and MSC status are normal. run the ADD NRIMSCMAP command to configure the mapping between the NRI and the MSC. /*Add an M3UA link set*/ ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSIDX=0. Verify the A signaling messages between BSC and MSC 1/ MSC 2. Postrequisite l Verifying MSC pool (A over IP) 1. the core network allocates the TMSI to MS 2. 32-7 . CNID=0. change the value of MSC Administrable State to NORMAL(Normal). /*Add an M3UA link*/ ADD M3LNK: SIGLKSIDX=0. Then. NAME="linkset_1". After the location update is complete. SSN=254. SIGLKSIDX=0. enable the TMSI reallocation function on the core network side. LOCPN=2048. Set DPC Code(Hex) to the DPC code of MSC 1/MSC 2. run the ADD M3LNK command to add M3UA links. Combine MSC 1 and MSC 2 to form an MSC pool. and set Selected Cells on the BSSAP tab page to the cell where the MS camps.1". Then. On the BSC side. DENO=1.1. DPC=h'cc. LOCIP1="1. MSCNULLNRI=4. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. MSCPOOLALLOW=YES. DPC=h'cc.2". 7. run the SET MSCPOOL command to configure the parameters related to the MSC pool.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the LST MSCPOOL command to verify that MSC Pool Function Enabled is set to NO. l 32-8 Use MS 1 to call MS 2 in the area covered by the MSC pool. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Verify that the call is normal.. Ltd. run the SET MSCPOOL command to set MSC Pool Function Enabled to NO(No). and MSC 2 assigns a new TMSI to MS 1 according to the messages traced over the A interface. It indicates that the MSC pool(A over IP) function is deactivated. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 32 Configuring the MSC Pool 8. Deactivating MSC pool(A over IP) 1. 2.

If there is a breakpoint on the ring. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and the lowest-level BTS is connected to the BSC through the transmission link. Context In BTS ring topology I. 33. the BTSs that precede the breakpoint remain unchanged in networking mode whereas the BTSs that follow the breakpoint form a new chain connection in the reverse direction. the reverse-link BTS is reinitialized after the transmission is interrupted.5 Manually Switching over BTS Ring Topology This describes how to manually switch over the BTS ring topology on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 33.2 Changing Non-Ring Topology to Ring Topology This describes how to change a BTS in non-ring topology to a BTS in ring topology on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd.1 Configuring BTS Ring Topology This describes how to configure the BTS ring topology on the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 33 33 Configuring BTS Ring Topology Configuring BTS Ring Topology About This Chapter The ring networking mode is a special chain networking mode. 33-1 .4 Deleting a BTS from the Ring Topology This describes how to delete a BTS from the ring topology on the Local Maintenance Terminal.3 Querying BTS Ring Topology This describes how to query the ring topology attributes of a BTS on the Local Maintenance Terminal. the BTS services are disrupted. the services of the reverse-link BTS are not disrupted after the transmission is interrupted. 33. The BTS ring topology is categorized into two types: Huawei BTS ring topology I and Huawei BTS ring topology II. 33. thus forming a ring. Several BTSs form a chain. In BTS ring topology II.. 33.

– The Abis transmission backup function is license-controlled. GXPUT. and GEIUB are configured on the GMPS or GEPS in the BSC. When the active SDH transmission link is faulty due to a natural disaster. – Ring topology II The switchover between the forward link and the reverse link of the BTS in ring topology (the time between the disconnection of the physical link and the restoration of the OML and the RSL) is less than eight seconds. The Abis bypass function is not supported. In satellite transmission mode. – To facilitate the maintenance of the unstable transmission quality or the transmission at the sites in mountainous areas or isolated islands. the BTS is reset and the services of the BTS are affected. NEs Involved BSC. a wide range of services are affected when the transmission links are disrupted. you are advised to deploy the ring topology. thus maintaining the normal operation of the network. Impact – Ring topology I – If you switch over the BTS in ring topology I manually. OML backup. you are advised to deploy the ring topology. you are advised to deploy the ring topology. – To improve the security and reliability of the chain topology in the multilevel cascading network.1 Configuring BTS Ring Topology This describes how to configure the BTS ring topology on the Local Maintenance Terminal. l Ring topology I – The Abis over IP. the Abis transmission backup function is recommended.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 33 Configuring BTS Ring Topology 33. Thus. l The BTS is configured. – After link disconnection. Ltd. l 33-2 Ring topology II Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Scenario – At the sites with high traffic volume. The 16 kbit/s LAPD signaling link is not supported. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .. – The BTS ring topology with Flex Abis enabled has the following impact on other features: Flex Abis must be enabled in all the BTSs and only the forward and reverse single E1 link can be configured. and HubBTS functions are not supported. – The ring topology with Flex Abis enabled does not support the preemption of the lower-level PS secondary links. BTS Prerequisite l The GXPUM. the GBSS automatically switches the terrestrial TDM transmission link on the Abis interface to a backup satellite transmission link. the services are disrupted in the case of switchover. – At the sites in the areas with frequent earthquakes. the disconnected BTS is initialized and the services of the BTS are affected.

– The Flex Abis. and 16 kbit/s LAPD signaling links are not supported. 0 Network planning SN Slot No. 0 Network planning BTSDESC BTS Description TDM BTS3012 Network planning MPMODE Multiplexing Mode MODE4_1 Network planning FlexAbisMode Flex Abis Mode Fix Abis(Fix Abis) Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. OML backup. and HubBTS functions are not supported.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 33 Configuring BTS Ring Topology – The Abis over IP. the services are disrupted in the case of switchover. 33-3 . local switching. – The conversion of the bearing modes is not supported. Table 33-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring BTS ring topology Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source BTSNAME BTS name BTS3012 Network planning TYPE BTS Type BTS3012 Network planning UPNODE Up Node Type BSC Network planning SRN Subrack No. Preparation The following is an example of configuring a BTS3012 in TDM service mode. – The configuration of exclusive timeslots is supported but the configuration of monitoring timeslots is not supported. that is. – In HDLC ring topology. the conversion from the HDLC ring topology to the TDM ring topology is not supported.. l HDLC ring topology – The HDLC-TDM hybrid networking and the connection of secondary links are not supported. – Only the forward and reverse single E1 link can be configured. Abis bypass. – The Flex Abis and Abis bypass functions are not supported. – The cabinets of the BTS30 or BTS312 cannot be used in cabinet groups. Ltd. – In satellite transmission mode. 26 Network planning PN Port No. timeslots cannot be manually allocated.

NI=NATB. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 33 Configuring BTS Ring Topology Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source AbisByPassMode Abis By Pass Mode FALSE(Not Support) Network planning ServiceMode Service Type TDM Network planning DCELLNAME Cell Name TDMCELL Network planning DCTYPE Cell Type GSM900 Network planning DCMCC Cell MCC 460 Network planning DCMNC Cell MNC 01 Network planning DCLAC Cell LAC 8240 Network planning DCCI Cell CI 1 Network planning CPLMode Separate Mode UNSUPPORT(Not Support) Network planning TRXBN TRX Board No. 1 Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 33-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 988 Network planning REVCFGRING Ring Mode YES(Yes) Network planning REVSN Rev ring slot No. NETSTRUCT=BIT14. 0 Network planning FREQ TRX Freq. 26 Network planning REVPN Rev ring port No. run the ADD BTS command to add a BTS.. OPC=h'aa. ----End Example An example script of configuring ring topology for the BTS3012 in TDM service mode is as follows: /*Add an OPC*/ ADD OPC: NAME="1". Ltd.

l The BTSs must be in the chain topology. /*Add Subrack-OPC Mapping*/ ADD SROPCMAP: SRN=0. /*Add a GXPUT*/ ADD BRD: SRN=0. 33. Scenario – At the sites with high traffic volume. WorkMode=E1. the Abis transmission backup function is recommended. ServiceMode=TDM. NEs Involved BSC. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2 Changing Non-Ring Topology to Ring Topology This describes how to change a BTS in non-ring topology to a BTS in ring topology on the Local Maintenance Terminal. FREQ=988. When the active SDH transmission link is faulty due to a natural disaster. REVCFGRING=YES. BackType=OUTPEER. – To improve the security and reliability of the chain topology in the multilevel cascaded network. DCCI=1. you are advised to deploy the ring topology. 33-5 . UPNODE = BSC. CPLMode=UNSUPPORT. BT=GXPUT. TRXBN=0. SN=26.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 33 Configuring BTS Ring Topology /*Add a DPC*/ ADD N7DPC: NAME="2". you are advised to deploy the ring topology. BTSDESC = "TDM BTS3012". CNID=0. DCTYPE=GSM900.. PN=0. SN=1. SRN = 0. /*Add a BTS3012 and configure BTS ring topology*/ ADD BTS: BTSNAME= "BTS3012". SN=26. Ltd. REVSN=26. and port 1 of the upper-level BTS must be connected to port 0 of the lower-level BTS. the GBSS automatically switches the terrestrial TDM transmission link on the Abis interface to a backup satellite transmission link. a wide range of services are affected when the transmission links are disrupted. you are advised to deploy the ring topology. Thus. – At the sites in the areas with frequent earthquakes. DPCGIDX=1. TYPE = BTS3012. thus maintaining the normal operation of the network. DCELLNAME="TDMCELL". Impact Performing this operation leads to the resetting of the BTS. DCMCC="460". /*Add a GEIUB*/ ADD BRD: SRN=0. l The BTSs are configured in the non-ring topology mode. DCLAC=8240. AbisByPassMode=False. MPMODE = MODE4_1. REVPN=1. OPC=h'aa. BT=GEIUB. BackType=OUTPEER. BackType=OUTPEER. /*Add a GXPUM*/ ADD BRD: SRN=0. – To facilitate the maintenance of the unstable transmission quality or the transmission at the sites in mountainous areas or isolated islands. DCMNC="01". SN=2. DPC=h'cc. FlexAbisMode=FLEX_ABIS. BTS Prerequisite l The GEIUB/GOIUB/GEHUB board is configured. BT=GXPUM.

and then set Configure ring to NO(No). Set Configure ring to YES(Yes) and set the corresponding Reverse slot No. REVSN=26. STNAME="BTS3012"..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 33 Configuring BTS Ring Topology Preparation Table 33-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for changing non-ring topology to ring topology Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source CONFIGRING Configure ring YES(Yes) Network planning REVSN Reverse slot No. run the MOD BTSRINGATTR command. Scenario Query the BTS ring topology. Impact None..3 Querying BTS Ring Topology This describes how to query the ring topology attributes of a BTS on the Local Maintenance Terminal. enter the MOD BTSRINGATTR command on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . 26 Network planning REVP Reverse port No. REVPN=1. NEs Involved BSC. 33-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Postrequisite To change a BTS in ring topology to a BTS in non-ring topology. ----End Example An example script of configuring ring topology for BTSs is as follows: MOD BTSRINGATTR: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. BTS Prerequisite The BTS is configured. CONFIGRING=YES. 1 Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 33. and Reverse port No. Ltd.

BTSNAME="BTS3012". BTSNAME="BTS3012".HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 33 Configuring BTS Ring Topology Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. BTS Prerequisite The BTSs are configured in the ring topology mode.. ACTSTAT=NOT_ACTIVATED. run the MOD BTSACTSTAT command to modify the Active State to NOT_ACTIVATED(Not Activated). 33. are consistent with the settings in the 33.4 Deleting a BTS from the Ring Topology This describes how to delete a BTS from the ring topology on the Local Maintenance Terminal. ----End Example An example script of deleting a BTS3012 from the ring topology is as follows: MOD BTSACTSTAT: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. Ltd.2 Changing Non-Ring Topology to Ring Topology. Scenario Besides saving transmission resources. run the RMV BTS command to delete a BTS from the ring topology. and Reverse port No. BTSNAME="BTS3012". Reverse slot No. NOTE Check whether the Configure ring. NOTE If the deleted BTS has lower-level BTSs. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 33-7 . ----End Example An example script of querying the ring topology attribute of a BTS is as follows: LST BTSRINGATTR: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. RMV BTS: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. the lower-level BTSs are also deleted. NEs Involved BSC. the BTS ring topology improves the reliability of the system. see BSS Feature Description.. Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the LST BTSRINGATTR command to query the ring topology information of the BTS. Impact For the impact of deleting a BTS from the ring topology on the system. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

start from the highest-level BTS in the forward direction and then the other BTSs in sequence.. the maintenance personnel can manually switch over the link to the reverse direction. Set the port for link establishment after the switchover as required to manually switch over the ring topology direction of a BTS. 33-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Thus. start from the highest-level BTS in the reverse direction. the BTS reverse link is set up and the transmission is restored. however. l When the switchover is performed manually from the reverse link to the forward link. ----End Example An example script of manually switching over the ring topology of a BTS3012 from forward direction to reverse direction is as follows: SWP BTSRING: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. After the switchover. perform this operation with caution. l The transmission in the forward and reverse directions must work normally during manual switchover. NEs Involved BTS. can forcibly switch over the link to the forward direction. When the transmission quality in the forward direction is poor. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . The BTS link cannot switch over to the forward direction automatically. Ltd. BSC NOTE l When the switchover is performed manually from the forward link to the reverse link. BTSNAME="BTS3012". perform the switchover on the next BTS. OMLCPT=1.5 Manually Switching over BTS Ring Topology This describes how to manually switch over the BTS ring topology on the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 33 Configuring BTS Ring Topology 33. run the SWP BTSRING command. Prerequisite l The BTSs are configured in ring topology mode. The maintenance personnel. Scenario After a link is broken. After a BTS is successfully connected in the reverse direction and automatically initialized. Impact The manual switchover of BTS ring topology is critical to operation and maintenance. Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. the BTS cannot work for a certain period.

l In BM/TC separated and built-in PCU mode. l In BM/TC combined and external PCU mode. Impact When the BSC is connected to the optical transmission equipment and the working channel is faulty. BSC. l In A over IP and external PCU mode. The APS configuration consists of configuring and verifying APS. you must modify the APS attributes. and SGSN NOTE l In BM/TC separated and external PCU mode.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 34 Configuring APS 34 Configuring APS The automatic protection switching (APS) function applies to optical port backup. Ltd. GOIUT. GOIUB. the BSC negotiates with the optical transmission equipment on the protection channel through the APS to switch over the active OIUa and standby OIUa. and GOIUP can be configured to support the APS function. and GOIUP. the APS function is supported by default and cannot be deactivated after the GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT is added. 34-1 . GOIUT.. If a fault occurs on the working channel. the APS function is supported by default and cannot be deactivated after the GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT is added. APS can be configured on the GOIUA. The default configuration is recommended for the BSC. APS can be configured on the GOIUA. APS can be configured on the GOIUA and GOIUB. GOIUB. l In BM/TC combined and A over IP mode. APS can be configured on the GOIUA. and GOIUP. Scenario The GOIUA. GOIUB. GOIUB. l In BM/TC combined and built-in PCU mode. Prerequisite The principles of and requirements for configuring APS are as follows: l Issue 02 (2010-09-20) The APS attributes at the local and peer ends must be consistent. NEs Involved MSC. APS can be configured on the GOIUB and GOIUP. the BSC negotiates with the optical transmission equipment on the protection channel through the APS to switch traffic signals onto the protection channel. and GOIUT. l In BM/TC separated mode. If the configured APS attributes at the local and peer ends are inconsistent. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. MGW. APS can improve the stability and maintainability of the entire system. Then the traffic signals are switched from the channel used to receive the data to the protection channel.

l The parameter settings at both ends must be consistent. For example.. Then. Table 34-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring APS Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source SRN Subrack No. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . An example script is as follows: /*Configure the APS function*/ ADD OIUAPS: SRN=5. NOTE When verifying the APS. Postrequisite l Verifying APS 1. The protection channel at the local end must be properly connected to that at the peer end. you are not advised to set APS Command to other switching modes. 34-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The BSC supports only the 1+1 protection mode. Set Subrack No. the GOIUA already exists. 14 Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Otherwise. run the ADD OIUAPS command to add the APS function. Set Subrack No. Preparation The following procedure takes the configuration of APS on the GOIUA in BM/TC separated and external PCU mode as an example. 5 Network planning SN Slot No. SN=14. and APS Status is set to SWITCH.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 34 Configuring APS l The interconnected optical ports must be in the same mode. If Switch Request is set to Forced Switch or Exercise Switch. SWITCH_MODE and REVERT_MODE at both ends must be consistent. the protocol switching may be affected. l The optical fiber must be connected properly. Ltd. l APS must be enabled at both ends. of the GOIUA whose APS needs to be verified. The optical port in SDH mode cannot interconnect with that in SONET mode. ----End Example In BM/TC separated mode. and Slot No. set APS command to EXERS(Exercise switch). On the Local Maintenance Terminal. it indicates that the APS function is configured successfully. 2. protocol switching cannot be performed. run the DSP APS command. and Slot No. Otherwise. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the SET APSCMD command. l The protection modes at both ends must be consistent. of the GOUIA whose APS needs to be verified.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) l 34 Configuring APS Deactivating APS – On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. Ltd. 34-3 . NOTE If you need to reconfigure the APS attributes. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the RMV OIUAPS command to delete the APS function of the GOIUA. run the MOD OIUAPS command on the Local Maintenance Terminal.

.

BSC local switching is not supported. MSC announcement. the following functions are unavailable after the BTS local switch is enabled: lawful interception. BSC local switching is not supported. if the calling MS and called MS are under the same BSC. the speech signals on the Abis interface are looped back to the MS without traveling around the NSS. If the CN equipment is not provided by Huawei. DTMF. l In A over IP mode. the speech coding schemes of the calling MS and called MS are the same and thus no coding conversion is required. l The license is activated on the Local Maintenance Terminal. see Activate BSC License. l The BTS local switching function has enabled before the BSC local switching function is activated. In addition. Ltd. NEs Involved MSC. 35-1 . and independent charging of the BTS local switch. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. see Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points. In addition. Therefore. the TC resources involved in the BSC local switch can be released. and BTS Prerequisite l The BSC local switching is license-controlled. BSC. in the BSC local switch. For details. For details. Scenario BSC local switching is configured to save the transmission resources on the Ater interface. l In Abis over IP mode or Abis over HDLC mode. l In BM/TC combined mode. fax during voice.. and thus the speech quality is improved.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 35 35 Configuring BSC Local Switching Configuring BSC Local Switching With this feature. l The SS7 signaling point of the BSC is already configured. BSS local switching is not supported. Impact BSC local switching may decrease handover success rate or increase call drop rate.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l If the MSC cooperates with the BSC to perform BSS local switching. l When BSS Loop Switch MSC Cooperate is set to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support). Ltd. 35-2 l If the BSC performs BSS local switching independently. run the MOD N7DPC command to configure the way of finishing BSS local switching.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 35 Configuring BSC Local Switching Preparation Table 35-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring BSC local switching Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source DPC attributes IDXTYPE Index Type BYDPC(By DPC Code) Networ k plannin g DPC DPC Code h'cc Networ k plannin g BSSLSMSCCO OPSW BSS Loop Switch MSC Cooperate NOTSUPPORT (Not Support) Networ k plannin g BssLsGenMode BSS General Strategy BSCONLY(BSC Only) Networ k plannin g BscLsStartMode Options for BSC Local Switch ATERCONGEST S(Start When Ater Congests) Networ k plannin g ATERJAMTHR ESHOLD2STAR TLS Start Ater Threshold for BSC 50 Networ k plannin g BSSBSCCLOSE BSC Close Based on Number NO(No) Networ k plannin g BSS local switching parameters Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .. set BSS Loop Switch MSC Cooperate to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support). set BSS Loop Switch MSC Cooperate to BASIC(Basic) or ENHANCED(Enhanced) and set the related parameters on the MSC side to support the BSS local switching. the BSC independently performs BSC local switching.

either of the following cases may occur: If the MSC does not allow the BSS local switching. In this case. the BSC determines whether to enable the local switching. In this case. Postrequisite l Verifying BSC local switching – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. you should set Prefix Number for BSC. The operations for verifying deactivation of BSC local switching are the same as those for verifying BSC local switching. the MSC carries the indication information in the assignment request or incoming BSC handover request message and prohibits the BSC from enabling the local switching. the BSC cannot process the local switching. DPC=h'cc. run the DSP CALLRES command to query the call resources of an MS. the ongoing supplementary services are interrupted. If the MSC allows the BSS local switching. BssBscClose=NO. In this case. l Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Deactivating BSC local switching 1. you should set Start Ater Threshold for BSC. BscLsStartMode=ATERCONGESTS. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. either of the following cases may occur: If the MSC does not allow the BSS local switching. run the MOD BSSLS command to set BSS General Strategy to BSCPRIORITY(BSC Priority) or BSCONLY(BSC Only) and set Options for BSC Local Switch] and BSC Close Based on Number. In this case. ----End Example An example script for configuring BSC local switching is as follows: /*Set "BSS Loop Switch MSC Cooperate"*/ MOD N7DPC: IDXTYPE=BYDPC. 35-3 . run the MOD BSSLS command to set BSS General Strategy to NEITHERSTART(Neither Start). the BSC determines whether to enable the local switching.. /*Configure the parameters related to BSC local switching on the BSC*/ MOD BSSLS: BssLsGenMode=BSCONLY. l When BSS Loop Switch MSC Cooperate is set to ENHANCED(Enhanced). l If BSC Close Based on Number is set to Yes(Yes). you should set the Avoid Number for BSC . AterJamThreshold2StartLs=50. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. l If Options for BSC Local Switch is set to PREFIXNUMBER(Start by Prefix Number). On the Local Maintenance Terminal. the BSC cannot process the local switching. 2. Ltd. the MSC carries the indication information in the assignment request or incoming BSC handover request message and prohibits the BSC from enabling the local switching. the calls involved in the local switching are restored to normal calls so that the supplementary services can be processed normally. BSSLSMSCCOOPSW=CLOSE. Verify that the information about the Ater interface and TC resources are included in the query result. NOTE If BSC local switching is started successfully. Ater Interface Information and TC Resource Information is not shown in the result.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 35 Configuring BSC Local Switching l When BSS Loop Switch MSC Cooperate is set to BASIC(Basic). If the MSC allows the BSS local switching. l If Options for BSC Local Switch is set to ATERCONGESTS(Start When Ater Congests).

.

l The license is activated through the Local Maintenance Terminal. and independent charging of the BTS local switch. the BSS local switching can be enabled only when both the BTS software and the TRX software support BSS local switching. in addition to the license of the BTS local switching. In Abis over IP. MSC announcement. fax during voice. the BTS local switching is not supported. the BSC performs the loopback on the cabinet group of the convergent BTS. l At the sites with hybrid BTS cabinet groups. If the BTS local switching is enabled in the network. l In Abis over TDM. if the calling MS and called MS are within the coverage of the same BTS or BTS group. DTMF. Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In Abis over HDLC. 36-1 . the BTS local switching can be enabled on the lower-level BTSs only. NEs Involved BTS Prerequisite l BTS local switching is not restricted by the license. see Activate BSC License. l The BTS local switching and BTS ring topology cannot be enabled at the same time for one BTS. the license of the BSC local switching is required. Preparation Take the configuration of BTS3012 in TDM transmission mode as an example. Scenario BTS local switching can save the transmission resources on the Abis and Ater interfaces and reduce the TC processing delay during the call. For details. l The SS7 signaling point on the BSC is already configured. l If IP transmission mode is adopted on the A interface. For details. the BTS local switching can be enabled after Flex Abis is enabled (Flex Abis is license-controlled). Impact If the CN equipment is not provided by Huawei.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 36 36 Configuring BTS Local Switching Configuring BTS Local Switching With this feature. see Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points.. the BTS local switching is not supported. the following functions are unavailable after the BTS local switch is enabled: lawful interception.

Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 36 Configuring BTS Local Switching Table 36-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a BTS 36-2 Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source BTS basic attributes BTSNAME BTS Name BTS3012 Network planning TYPE BTS Type BTS3012 Network planning UPNODE Up Node Type BSC Network planning SRN Subrack No.. 0 Network planning SN Slot No. 0 Network planning BTSDESC BTS Description TDM BTS3012 Network planning MPMODE Multiplexing Mode MODE4_1 Network planning FlexAbisMode Flex Abis Mode FLEX_ABIS (Flex Abis) Network planning AbisByPassMode Abis By Pass Mode FALSE(Not Support) Network planning ServiceMode Service Type TDM Network planning DCELLNAME Cell Name TDMCELL Network planning DCTYPE Cell type GSM900 Network planning DCMCC Cell MCC 460 Network planning DCMNC Cell MNC 34 Network planning DCLAC Cell LAC 62 Network planning DCCI Cell CI 98 Network planning CPLMode Separate Mode UNSUPPORT (Not Support) Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 10 Network planning PN Port No.

0 Network planning FREQ TRX Freq. Ltd. For details. 36-3 . NOTE If a BTS is already configured. run the MOD BTSLSW command to set Support BTS Local Switch to SUPPORT(Yes). Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type 36 Configuring BTS Local Switching Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source TRXBN TRX Board No. run the ADD BTS command to set Flex Abis Mode to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis). enter the MOD FLEXABIS command on the Local Maintenance Terminal and then set Flex Abis Mode to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis) to configure the Flex Abis for the BTS.. see Configuring Flex Abis. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 5 Network planning Table 36-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring BTS local switching Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source BTS local switching parameters IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning BTSIDX BTS Index 0 Network planning IsSupportBTSLSwitch Support BTS Local Switch SUPPORT (Yes) Network planning BSSLSGENMOD E BSS General Strategy BTSONLY (BTS Only) Network planning BTSLSSTARTM ODE Options for BTS Local Switch ABISCONGES TS(Start When Abis Congests) Network planning BSSBTSCLOSE BTS Close Based on Number NO(No) Network planning ABISJAMTHRE SHOLD2START LS Start Abis Threshold for BTS 50 Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD N7DPC command to configure the way of finishing BSS local switching.

CPLMode = UNSUPPORT. SN=10. Ltd. If the MSC allows the BSS local switching. 36-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. IsSupportBTSLSwitch = SUPPORT. /*Set "BSS Loop Switch MSC Cooperate"*/ MOD N7DPC: IDXTYPE=BYDPC. DPC=h'cc. FREQ = 5. l If Options for BTS Local Switch is set to ABISCONGESTS(Start When Abis Congests). /*Add a BTS3012*/ ADD BTS: BTSNAME = "BTS3012". DPCGIDX=1. OPC=h'aa. the BSC independently performs BSC local switching. it is impossible to set Options for BTS Local Switch. MPMODE = MODE4_1. the BSC determines whether to enable the local switching. DCELLNAME = "TDMCELL". In this case.36 Configuring BTS Local Switching HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) l When BSS Loop Switch MSC Cooperate is set to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support). run the MOD BSSLS command to set BSS General Strategy to BTSPRIORITY(BTS Priority) or BTSONLY(BTS Only) and set Options for BTS Local Switchand BTS Close Based on Number. l If Options for BTS Local Switch is set to PREFIXNUMBER(Start by Prefix Number). In this case. /*Add a DPC*/ ADD N7DPC: NAME="2". SN=1. BSSLSMSCCOOPSW=CLOSE. ----End Example An example script for configuring BTS local switching is as follows: /*Add an OPC*/ ADD OPC: NAME="1". either of the following cases may occur: If the MSC does not allow the BSS local switching. l When BSS Loop Switch MSC Cooperate is set to ENHANCED(Enhanced). WorkMode=E1. PN = 0. ServiceMode = TDM. CNID=0. the BSC cannot process the local switching. /*Add a GXPUM*/ ADD BRD: SRN=0. the MSC carries the indication information in the assignment request or incoming BSC handover request message and prohibits the BSC from enabling the local switching. BackType=OUTPEER. NETSTRUCT=BIT14. the MSC carries the indication information in the assignment request or incoming BSC handover request message and prohibits the BSC from enabling the local switching. TYPE = BTS3012. BTSDESC = "TDM BTS3012". SRN = 0. the calls involved in the local switching are restored to normal calls so that the supplementary services can be processed normally. you should set the Avoid Number for BTS . the BSC determines whether to enable the local switching. DCLAC = 62. SN=10. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. DCMNC = "34". NI=NATB. NOTE For BTSs in IP transmission mode. either of the following cases may occur: If the MSC does not allow the BSS local switching. In this case.. /*Add a GEIUB*/ ADD BRD: SRN=0. you should set Prefix Number for BTS. AbisByPassMode = False. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . /*Configure subrack-OPC mapping*/ ADD SROPCMAP: SRN=0. DCMCC = "460". BTSIDX=0. BT=GEIUB. DPC=h'cc. l When BSS Loop Switch MSC Cooperate is set to BASIC(Basic). TRXBN = 0. In this case. BackType=OUTPEER. the ongoing supplementary services are interrupted. BT=GXPUM. DCTYPE = GSM900. /*Configure BTS local switching*/ MOD BTSLSW: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. OPC=h'aa. l If BTS Close Based on Number is set to Yes(Yes). DCCI = 98. If the MSC allows the BSS local switching. the BSC cannot process the local switching. you should set Start Abis Threshold for BTS. FlexAbisMode = FLEX_ABIS. UPNODE = BSC.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 36 Configuring BTS Local Switching /*Configure the parameters related to BTS local switching on the BSC*/ MOD BSSLS: BssLsGenMode=BTSONLY. BtsLsStartMode=ABISCONGESTS. The operations for verifying deactivation of BTS local switching are the same as those for Verifying BTS local switching. 2. Verify that the information about the Ater interface and Abis interface are included in the query result. 36-5 . NOTE If the information about the Ater interface and Abis interface is not contained in the query result. Set up a call between two MSs under the same BTS. run the DSP CALLRES command to query the call resources of an MS. Ltd. AbisJamThreshold2StartLs=50. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. l Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Deactivating BTS local switching 1.. it indicates that the BTS local switching function is enabled successfully. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD BTSLSW command to set Support BTS Local Switch to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support). 2. Postrequisite l Verifying BTS local switching 1. BssBtsClose=NO.

.

Ltd. the requirements for the FH data configuration of the BTS are different. 37-1 . 37. the MAIO value is dynamically adjusted according to the current interference and the MAIO value with the minimum interference is assigned to the channel. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. adjacent-channel or co-channel interference are likely to occur among channels because the frequency resources are insufficient and the tight frequency reuse is adopted. when an MAIO is assigned to a channel under activation.With the dynamic MAIO. 37.reduces the adjacentchannel and co-channel interference in the GSM system. In different scenarios.2 Configuring Dynamic MAIO This describes how to configure dynamic MAIO on the Local Maintenance Terminal..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 37 37 Configuring Dynamic MAIO Configuring Dynamic MAIO About This Chapter Under the BTSs with large capacity.1 Precautions for Configuring Dynamic MAIO This provides the precautions for configuring dynamic MAIO.

1 Precautions for Configuring Dynamic MAIO This provides the precautions for configuring dynamic MAIO. The FH data used by other timeslots is the same.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 37 Configuring Dynamic MAIO 37. l Dynamic MAIO cannot be configured for the double-timeslot extension cell. the FH data configuration of the BTS must meet the following requirements: l 1x1 frequency reuse with BCCH frequencies not joining in FH – All the FH channels in the BTS use the same MA and HSN. l 1x3 frequency reuse with BCCH frequencies joining in FH – The FH data used by the cells in the BTS is different. In different scenarios. – The FH data used by all the FH channels in the cell is the same. HSN1}. Impact None NEs Involved BTS. – Adjacent frequencies exist not in MAs but between the MAs. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . l No cell in the BTS is configured with frame offset. achieves the tight frequency reuse within the BTSs and thus improves the system capacity. l 1x3 frequency reuse with BCCH frequencies not joining in FH – The FH data used by the cells in the BTS is different. Scenario Reduces the adjacent-channel and co-channel interference in the GSM system. All the other timeslots use another set of FH data {MA1. the requirements for the FH data configuration of the BTS are different. The requirements for configuring dynamic MAIO are as follows: l Each cell can be configured with up to two different MAs. l 1x1 frequency reuse with BCCH frequencies joining in FH – All the channels on timeslot 0 in the BTS use one set of FH data {MA0. l The length of MA used by the same timeslot in a BTS must be the same. HSN0}. but the number of frequencies in all MAs and the HSN are the same.2 Configuring Dynamic MAIO This describes how to configure dynamic MAIO on the Local Maintenance Terminal.. – Adjacent frequencies exist not in MAs but between the MAs. l The channels in the same timeslot in a cell must use the same MA during FH. – The MA used by timeslot 0 in the cell is different from the MA used by other timeslots. For better performance of the dynamic MAIO algorithm. l The value of Flex MAIO Switch must be the same for the cells in the same BTS. 37. but the number of frequencies in all MAs on the same timeslot and the HSN are the same. Ltd. BSC 37-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

.. Preparation Table 37-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring dynamic MAIO Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning FLEXMAIO Flex MAIO Switch OPEN(Open) Network planning HSNSW Flex HSN Switch OPEN(Open) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. including the setting of the parameters TRX No. and Channel No.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 37 Configuring Dynamic MAIO Prerequisite l During baseband frequency hopping. For details. Postrequisite l Verifying dynamic MAIO 1. NOTE Dynamic MAIO cannot be configured for the PS services. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) On the Local Maintenance Terminal. The PS services do not support dynamic MAIO assignment. run the DSP CALLRES command to query the call resources occupied by a specified MS. Ltd. Only the function of selecting a channel with the least interference is supported. run the MOD CELLFLEXMAIO command to set Flex MAIO Switch and Flex HSN Switch to OPEN(Open). CELLIDX=0. FLEXMAIO=OPEN. l Only the CS services support dynamic MAIO assignment. see 8 Configuring Frequency Hopping. configure the cell to be an FH cell. HSNSW=OPEN. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. dynamic MAIO assignment is not supported. 37-3 . Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ----End Example An example script for configuring dynamic MAIO is as follows: /*Modify the channel management parameters related to Flex MAIO*/ MOD CELLFLEXMAIO: IDXTYPE=BYIDX.

Ltd. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD CELLFLEXMAIO command to set Flex MAIO Switch to CLOSE(Close). run the DSP BTSATTR command to query MAIO according to the obtained values of TRX No. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Otherwise. Deactivating dynamic MAIO 1. record the query result. run the LST CELLFLEXMAIO command. 3. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Then. dynamic MAIO is not enabled. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . Repeat Step 2. If Flex MAIO Switch is set to Close. and Channel No.. l 37-4 2..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 37 Configuring Dynamic MAIO NOTE The dynamic MAIO message of the MS can be traced only when the call is set up and the MS occupies the TCH on the non-BCCH TRX. 2. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. If MAIO shown in the query result constantly changes. it indicates that dynamic MAIO is deactivated. it indicates that dynamic MAIO is already enabled.

adhere to the following principles: l When baseband FH (or hybrid FH) is configured. antenna hopping is disabled in the antenna hopping group upon the automatic notification from the BSC. thus improving network performance. antenna hopping group must share the same TRX with baseband MA group. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. This optimizes the data reception of the MS from the main BCCH TRX and the data transmission of the main BCCH TRX.. the downlink data on each TRX can be randomly transmitted on other TRXs. With antenna hopping. Prerequisite l Antenna hopping is not restricted by the license. thus improving network performance. Scenario Antenna hopping is configured to optimize the data reception of the MS from the main BCCH TRX and the data transmission of the main BCCH TRX. l One TRX must belong to the baseband MA group and the antenna hopping group with the same group number. Ltd. l The BTS must be a double-transceiver BTS.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 38 38 Configuring Antenna Hopping Configuring Antenna Hopping This describes how to configure antenna hopping. BTS NOTE l A cell can be configured with multiple antenna hopping groups. If the faulty TRX recovers. l There are at least two TRXs in an antenna hopping group. 38-1 . l When baseband frequency hopping and antenna hopping are applied at the same time. When a TRX in an antenna hopping group is faulty. Impact None NEs Involved BSC. antenna hopping in the antenna hopping group is enabled again.

NOTE At least two TRXs should be configured in an antenna hopping group. 0 Network planning TRX2PN No. If you use multi-transceiver TRX board. run the LST CELLHOPANT command to view the setting of Cell Hop Ant.2 TRX Board Pass No.. specify the path number of the TRX board. 0 Network planning TRX2BN No. l 38-2 Deactivating antenna hopping Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . Ltd.2 TRX Board No. TRX2BN=0. TRX1PN=0. CELLIDX=0. HOPTRXHSN=0. 1 Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 38 Configuring Antenna Hopping Preparation Table 38-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring antenna hopping Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning HOPTRXHSN Hop Trx Group Hsn 0 Network planning TRX1BN No. Postrequisite l Verifying antenna hopping – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. If the parameter is set to Yes. run the ADD CELLHOPANTGRP command to configure antenna hopping. it indicates that antenna hopping is activated. Do not set HSN to 0 because this leads to low quality of interference source diversity. TRX2PN=1.1 TRX Board No.1 TRX Board Pass No. ----End Example An example script for configuring antenna hopping is as follows: ADD CELLHOPANTGRP: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. 0 Network planning TRX1PN No. TRX1BN=0.

Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 38 Configuring Antenna Hopping – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd. run the RMV CELLHOPANTGRP command to delete the antenna hopping group. 38-3 .

.

and set Voice quality report switch. run the MOD CELLOTHBASIC command to set Cell Name or Cell Index. l The EMR feature should be supported by the MS. the voice quality of the network is quantified. By measuring the uplink VQI and downlink VQI.. Preparation Table 39-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring VQI Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning RPTVOICE Voice quality report switch YES(Report) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Impact None NEs Involved BTS. which provides a reference for future network optimization.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 39 39 Configuring Voice Quality Index Configuring Voice Quality Index The voice quality index (VQI) feature provides a direct method to measure the voice quality of the radio network. Ltd. 39-1 . Scenario VQI is configured to monitor the voice quality. ----End Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. BSC Prerequisite l The cell is already configured.

as shown in Figure 39-2. choose Trace > Trace CS Message > Trace User Message. TMSI. Then. select and enter the IMSI. Tracing Mode. RPTVOICE=YES. Postrequisite l Verifying voice quality index 1.. CELLIDX=0. 39-2 Click OK to start tracing. The result is displayed. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . as shown in Figure 39-1. Ltd. MSISDN.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 39 Configuring Voice Quality Index Example An example script for configuring VQI is as follows: MOD CELLOTHBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. IMEI. or Channel of the user to be traced. On the Trace&Monitor tab page of the BSC6000 Local Maintenance Terminal. Figure 39-1 Trace User Message dialog box 2. and Color. Set the parameters under Interface Type. A dialog box is displayed.

. double-click Measurement Result).HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 39 Configuring Voice Quality Index Figure 39-2 Result of the user message tracing 3. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. as shown in Figure 39-3. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Double-click Preprocessed Measurement Result (if the preprocessed measurement result function is not enabled. A dialog box is displayed. Ltd. 39-3 .

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you can infer that the BTS reports the VQI information. if the tlv-type-vqi field exists. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . l 39-4 Deactivating VQI 1. Then.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 39 Configuring Voice Quality Index Figure 39-3 Message Browser window According to the result shown in Figure 39-3. Verify that the tlv-type-vqi field does not exist. Ltd. That is. set Voice quality report switch to NO(Not report). NOTE When the VQI function is enabled. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. the tlv-type-vqi field exists in the Preprocessed Measurement Result or Measurement Result once every five measurement report periods. the BTS reports the VQI information once every five measurement report periods.. run the MOD CELLOTHBASIC command to set Cell Name or Cell Index of the target cell. 2. Verifying the deactivation of VQI: The operations are the same as those for verifying the VQI function.

. Thus. Ltd. 5 Network planning SN Slot No. the speech signals are received clearly at the peer end.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 40 Configuring ANR 40 Configuring ANR Automatic noise restraint (ANR) reduces the background noise in the uplink speech signals and improves the signal noise ratio (SNR) and speech intelligibility. NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite l The GDPUC or GDPUX is already configured. Impact ANR can improve the voice quality when background noise exists. Thus. the speech signals are received clearly at the peer end. 0 Network planning ANRSWITH ANR Switch OPEN(Open) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Preparation Table 40-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring ANR Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source SRN Subrack No. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l ANR and TFO cannot be enabled at the same time. 40-1 . run the MOD DSPTC command to set ANR Switch to OPEN(Open). Scenario ANR is configured to reduce the background noise in the uplink speech signals and improve the SNR and speech intelligibility.

On the Local Maintenance Terminal. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . On the Local Maintenance Terminal. The volume of the background noise decreases. run the MOD DSPTC command to set ANR Switch to CLOSE(Close). In the same cell. it indicates that ANR is deactivated. SN=0. use MS 1 to call MS 2 with a normal voice in a noisy environment. Other values are invalid and reserved.. 5. 2. ----End Example An example script for configuring ANR is as follows: /*Configure ANR*/ MOD DSPTC: SRN=5. all the DSP TC objects are configured. 4. 3. run the MOD DSPTC command to set ANR Switch to OPEN(Open). If ANR Switch is set to Close.. In this case.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 40 Configuring ANR NOTE l If you do not set DSP No. 2. run the LST DSPTC command. Use MS 1 to call MS 2 again with a normal voice. Ltd. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Postrequisite l l 40-2 Verifying ANR 1. It indicates that ANR is activated. the greater the noise can be restrained. l ANR Noise Target Level [dB] can be set to only the default value -48dB. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ANRSWITH=OPEN. l ANR Mode can be set to only MODE0(Mode 0) at present. run the MOD DSPTC command to set ANR Switch to CLOSE(Close). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Deactivating ANR 1. Other values are invalid and reserved. The greater the value is. hang up the phone. run the LST DSPTC command to verify that ANR Switch is set to OPEN(Open). when you hear loud background noise. l ANR Noise Reduction Level[dB] determines the extent to which the noise can be restrained.

4 Configuring Power Optimization Based on Channel Type This describes how to configure the power optimization based on channel type. Power Optimization Based on Channel Type. The technologies such as channel assignment algorithm. Timeslot-level Shutdown of the Power Amplifier. 41. The technologies used for intelligent power consumption decrease are as follows: TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown. Intelligent Combiner Bypass. and power control also help to decrease the power consumption. In the power optimization based on channel type. thus reducing the power consumption and prolonging the operation time and lifetime of the PSU. Thus. 41. Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization. ICB is applicable to the dual-transceiver unit. In addition. the power amplifiers of the TRXs whose dynamic power consumption is zero are shut down. only the required PSUs are switched on and the redundant PSUs are shut down to improve the efficiency of power conversion. In ICB. only some TRXs carry the traffic in a cell. Active Backup Power Control.3 Configuring PSU Smart Control This describes how to configure the PSU smart control. the BTS power consumption is reduced.2 Configuring Intelligent Combiner Bypass This describes how to configure the intelligent combiner bypass (ICB). and the power amplifiers of the TRXs not carrying traffic are shut down. That is. different Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. PSU Smart Control. the carrier of channel B is shut down in idle hours and the carrier of channel A is configured to work in PBT mode. Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation and TRX Working Voltage Adjustment. which is also called dynamic voltage adjustment. the voltage of both channels is decreased to reduce the power consumption. You can enable the TRX to work in ICB mode through configuration.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 41 41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease About This Chapter This describes how to decrease the power consumption of various BTS parts through the use of a technology to decrease the overall BTS power consumption. In the PSU smart control. ICB is aimed at decreasing the BTS power consumption when the traffic load is light. DTX. 41-1 . 41. 41. Ltd.1 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown When TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown is enabled..

The enhanced BCCH power consumption optimization reduces the BTS power consumption in idle hours by reducing the power of non-BCCHs on the BCCH TRX.41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) working voltages are applied to the TRX power amplifier on the basis of the modulation modes of the channels to reduce the BTS power consumption. 41. extra power is consumed because a lower working voltage can also provide the required output power. 41. 41. Huawei developed the function of "TRX Working Voltage Adjustment" that enables the intelligent adjustment of the TRX working voltage according to the output power.5 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization This describes how to configure the enhanced BCCH power consumption optimization. In this way. the BSC shuts down certain TRXs or reduces the maximum transmit power of the TRX to reduce the BTS power consumption. 41-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. When the total output power of the power amplifier reduces after the measurement for a period. To reduce the power consumption of the TRX. This is called active backup power control. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . this feature adjusts the working voltage of the power amplifier to a lower value according to the related algorithm.7 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation This feature monitors the output power of all the carriers within the module. The battery provides a limited capacity. Ltd. if the TRX still works under such a high voltage. The BTS uses the configured battery for power supply when the mains failure occurs.8 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment The working voltage of the TRX is always set to a high level to ensure the maximum output power of the TRX. In this case. thus reducing the OPEX of the operators. the maximum output power of the TRX is not always required. 41.6 Configuring Active Backup Power Control This describes how to configure the active backup power control. In actual application. the power amplifier works with great efficiency after the output power reduces. however. The time segment and degree of the power reduction are configurable. thus reducing the power consumption of the TRX.. To prolong the power supply time of the battery.

– The PDCH does not exist.1 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown When TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown is enabled. the BTS checks only the CS services. only some TRXs carry the traffic in a cell. l When basband FH is enabled but the main BCCH does not participate in baseband FH. Ltd. ensure that the TRX meets the following requirements: – The TRX must be the TRX where the non-BCCH is located. NOTE During a BTS deployment test. Before configuring Dynamic Close TRX Ampier Power switch on the TRX. Scenario – For the BTS main equipment that does not process services. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. the BTS power consumption is reduced. the dormant mode is started to reduce the power consumption. l When the BSC enables intelligent shutdown of the TRX. For details. – If the BTS main equipment works normally and processes services. see Activate BSC License. you need to set the parameter Dynamic Open Trx AmpierPower Switch to NO(No) by running the MOD CELLBASICPARA command. 41-3 . l When the main BCCH participates in baseband FH. the function of intelligent shutdown of TRXs is not supported. BSC Prerequisite l Intelligent shutdown of the TRX is restricted by the license. Impact None NEs Involved BTS.. you can enable intelligent power consumption reduction without affecting the services. – Antenna hopping is disabled. the power amplifiers of the TRXs whose dynamic power consumption is zero are shut down.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease 41. That is. the TRXs can be shut down only when all the TRXs in the cell (except the main BCCH TRXs) are idle. and the power amplifiers of the TRXs not carrying traffic are shut down. Thus.

run the SET CELLSOFT command to set Base Hop Support Close TRX Allowed to YES(YES). run the MOD BSCDSTPA command to set Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier by BSC to YES(Yes).. 3. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ensure that Base Hop Support Close TRX Allowed is set to YES(YES) if the baseband FH is allowed in the cell. 0 Network planning TRXPN TRX Board Path No. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 2. 0 Network planning OPTL TRX Priority L7(Level7) Network planning CPS Dynamic Close TRX Ampier Power switch YES(Yes) Network planning Procedure l Configure intelligent shutdown of the TRX. run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set Dynamic Open Trx AmpierPower Switch to YES(Yes). 1. 41-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NOTE Before configuring Dynamic Close TRX Ampier Power switch. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease Preparation Table 41-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring intelligent power consumption reduction Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source Intelligent shutdown of the TRX BSCDynSwitchTr xPAAllow Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier by BSC YES(Yes) Network planning IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning DYNOpenTrxPo wer Dynamic Open Trx AmpierPower Switch YES(Yes) Network planning BASEHOPCLOS ETRXALLOWE D Base Hop Support Close TRX Allowed YES(Yes) Network planning TRXBN TRX Board No. Ltd.

StartMonthDSTPA=JAN. DateRangeIndex=1. TRXPN=0.2 Configuring Intelligent Combiner Bypass This describes how to configure the intelligent combiner bypass (ICB). In addition. Postrequisite l TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown – Deactivating TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown 1. ICB is aimed at decreasing the BTS power consumption when the traffic load is light. CPS=YES. CELLIDX=0. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Do as follows: (1) On the Local Maintenance Terminal. do not shut down the power amplifiers of the TRX modules. run the MOD TRXDEV command to set Dynamic Close TRX Ampier Power switch to YES(YES). EndMonthDSTPA=FEB. run the LST BSCDSTPA command. (Optional) On the Local Maintenance Terminal. You can enable the TRX to work in ICB mode through configuration. In ICB. the traffic volume surges. StartDayDSTPA=1. the carrier of channel B is shut down in idle hours and the carrier of channel A is configured to work in PBT mode. (Optional) On some special days such as holidays. StartTimeTACloseTrxPA=00&00. DYNOpenTrxPower=YES. EndDayDSTPA=28. 41-5 . 6. TRXBN=0.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease 4. 5. StartMonthDSTPA=FEB. ICB is applicable to the dual-transceiver unit. /*Set "Dynamic Open Trx AmpierPower Switch"*/ MOD CELLBASICPARA: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. TsTurningOffEnable=NO. To query the parameter Prohibiting Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier Date Range. run the ADD BSCDSTPADATE command to set the period of prohibiting intelligent shutdown of the TRX. StartDayDSTPA=1. run the RMV BSCDSTPADATE command to delete the period of prohibiting intelligent shutdown of the TRX. /*Delete the period of prohibiting intelligent shutdown of the TRX*/ RMV BSCDSTPADATE: BSCDynSwitchTrxPAAllow=YES. /*Add the period of prohibiting intelligent shutdown of the TRX*/ ADD BSCDSTPADATE: BSCDynSwitchTrxPAAllow=YES. (2) Run the MOD BSCDSTPA command to set the time when intelligent shutdown of the TRX is enabled and disabled. BTSadjust=YES. OPTL=L7. Ltd. You can set up to 12 periods. run the MOD BSCDSTPA command to set Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier by BSC to NO(No). /*Set "Dynamic Close TRX Ampier Power switch"*/ MOD TRXDEV: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. 41. BASEHOPCLOSETRXALLOWED=YES. the voltage of both channels is decreased to reduce the power consumption. EndMonthDSTPA=JAN. EndDayDSTPA=28. EndTimeTACloseTrxPA=08&00. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. /*Set "Base Hop Support Close TRX Allowed"*/ SET CELLSOFT: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ----End Example An example script for configuring intelligent shutdown of the TRX is as follows: /*Modify the parameters related to intelligent shutdown of the TRX*/ MOD BSCDSTPA: BSCDynSwitchTrxPAAllow=YES. CELLIDX=0.. CELLIDX=0. In such a case.

DRFU. The TRXs supporting ICB are DRRU. set TRX Priorityof the TRX that is on the same double-transceiver unit as the BCCH TRX to a small value.. In addition. l To implement the intelligent combiner bypass. l The non-BCCH TRX is not configured with PDCHs. This is to ensure that the preferred double-transceiver TRX board where the BCCH is located enters the ICB mode in the same alternative conditions in idle hours. l The cell attribute parameter Allow Dynamic Voltage Adjustment is set to Yes. the BCCH TRX and non-BCCH TRXs are configured for the same cell. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . After the power burst technology (PBT) is enabled on a TRX. l The baseband FH and antenna hopping are not configured. thus reducing the power consumption. l Power Level of the BCCH TRX is set to 0 or 1. Impact When the TRX other than the BCCH TRX is idle. TRX Priority should be used together with the channel management parameter of the cell Allocation TRX Priority Allowed. If the minimum working voltage is applied to the TRX. NEs Involved Prerequisite l The intelligent combiner bypass function is not license-controlled.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease Scenario The function of intelligent combiner bypass reduces the power consumption of the idle TRX that is on the same dual-transceiver unit as the BCCH TRX. the cabinet-top power of the TRX is the same as the cabinet-top power provided when the single power amplifier transmits at 60 W or 40 W. the dual-transceiver unit that houses the BCCH TRX starts working in ICB mode and the capacity of the dualtransceiver unit decreases to one TRX. l The ICB is applicable to only the double-transceiver TRXs and must be configured as combining output. and optimized DTRU. The channels can be allocated according to the TRX priorities only when Allocation TRX Priority Allowed is set to Yes. l All the non-BCCH TRXs on the double-transceiver unit where the BCCH TRX is located are idle. Ltd. the output power of the single power amplifier of the TRX is decreased to 15 W or 10 W. 41-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Preparation Table 41-2 Example of Configuring the Intelligent Combiner Bypass Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME(By Name) Network planning CELLNAME Cell Name BTS3900_01 Network planning ICBALLOW ICB Allowed YES(YES) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set ICB Allowed to YES(Yes).

3 Configuring PSU Smart Control This describes how to configure the PSU smart control. l Deactivating Intelligent Combiner Bypass 1. This is to ensure the preferred double-transceiver TRX board where the BCCH is located enter the ICB mode in the same alternative conditions in idle hours.. it indicates that intelligent combiner bypass is deactivated. Impact None. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. If the parameter is set to NO. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Scenario The redundant PSUs are shut down if the power requirement of the BTS is met. run the LST CELLBASICPARA command to check the setting of the ICB Allowed parameter. The channels can be allocated according to the TRX priorities only when Allocation TRX Priority Allowed is set to Yes through the MOD CELLCHMGAD command. ICBALLOW=YES.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease NOTE l To implement the intelligent combiner bypass. If the parameter is set to Yes. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ----End Example An example script for configuring the Intelligent Combiner Bypass /*Configuring the Intelligent Combiner Bypass*/ MOD CELLBASICPARA: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. Thus. run the MOD TRXDEV command to set TRX Priority of the TRX that is on the same double-transceiver unit as the BCCH TRX to a low value. thus reducing the power consumption and prolonging the operation time and lifetime of the PSU. the efficiency of power conversion is improved and the lifetime of the PSU is prolonged. thus reducing the power consumption. only parts of the PSUs are used to supply power. In the PSU smart control. run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set ICB Allowed to NO(NO). NEs Involved BSC. 41. 2. In this manner. BTS Prerequisite l Issue 02 (2010-09-20) The configuration of PSU smart control is license-controlled. l TRX Priority should be used together with the channel management parameter of the cell Allocation TRX Priority Allowed. Postrequisite l Verifying intelligent combiner bypass – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd. it indicates that intelligent combiner bypass is activated. run the LST CELLBASICPARA command to check the setting of the ICB Allowed parameter. 41-7 . CELLNAME="BTS3900_01". only the required PSUs are switched on and the redundant PSUs are shut down to improve the efficiency of power conversion.

For details. BTSNAME="BTS3900". Verifying deactivation of PSU smart control: After the function of PSU smart control is disabled.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Postrequisite l Verifying PSU smart control – After the function of PSU smart control is enabled. the BTS3900A.. PSUTURNINGOFFENABLE=YES. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . l The working mechanism of the PSU smart control is as follows: The main control unit of the BTS in cooperation with the PMU in the power supply system manages the PSU. BTS3900. Preparation Table 41-3 Example of configuring PSU Smart Control Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME(By Name) Network planning STNAME BTS Name BTS3900 Network planning PSUTURNINGO FFENABLE PSU Turning Off Enable YES(YES) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. and DBS3900 delivered with APM30 support this function. l 41-8 Deactivating PSU smart control 1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. The BTS3012AE and BTS3006C/BTS3002E delivered with APM support this function. In addition. see Activate BSC License. run the MOD BTSOTHPARA command to set PSU Turning Off Enable to YES(Yes). all the PSUs at BTSs with low power consumption are working properly. run the MOD BTSOTHPARA command to set PSU Turning Off Enable to NO(No). part of the PSUs are automatically disabled at BTSs with low power consumption. ----End Example An example script for configuring the PSU Smart Control /*Configuring the PSU Smart Control*/ MOD BTSOTHPARA: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. Ltd.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease

41.4 Configuring Power Optimization Based on Channel
Type
This describes how to configure the power optimization based on channel type, which is also
called dynamic voltage adjustment. In the power optimization based on channel type, different
working voltages are applied to the TRX power amplifier on the basis of the modulation modes
of the channels to reduce the BTS power consumption.
Scenario

In the power optimization based on channel type, different working voltages are
applied to the TRX power amplifier on the basis of the modulation modes of
the channels to reduce the BTS power consumption.

Impact

None

NEs Involved BSC,BTS

Prerequisite
l

This function is not license-controlled.

l

This function is supported by 3012 series and 3900 series base stations.

l

This function is not supported by the non-optimized DTRU.

Preparation
Table 41-4 Example of the configuring the Power Optimization Based on Channel Type
Parameter ID

Parameter Name

Example

Source

IDXTYPE

Index Type

BYNAME(By Name)

Network planning

CELLNAME

Cell Name

BTS3900_01

Network planning

EDGE

EDGE

YES(YES)

Network planning

BTSADJUST

Adjust Voltage

YES(YES)

Network planning

PDCHPWRSAV
EN

PDCH Power
Saving Enable

YES(YES)

Network planning

Procedure
Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the SET CELLGPRS command to set EDGE to
YES(Yes).
Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set
Adjust Voltage to YES(Yes).
Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the SET CELLSOFT command to set PDCH Power
Saving Enable to YES(Yes).
----End
Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

41-9

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease

Example
An example script for configuring the Power Optimization Based on Channel Type
/*Configuring the Power Optimization Based on Channel Type*/
SET CELLGPRS: IDXTYPE=BYNAME, CELLNAME="BTS3900_01", GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu,
EDGE=YES;
MOD CELLBASICPARA: IDXTYPE=BYNAME, CELLNAME="BTS3900_01", BTSadjust=YES;
SET CELLSOFT: IDXTYPE=BYNAME, CELLNAME="BTS3900_01", DROPCTRLCONNFAILRLFAIL=1,
PDCHPWRSAVEN=YES;

Postrequisite
l

Deactivating power optimization based on channel type
1.

On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command
to set Adjust Voltage to NO(No).

2.

On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the SET CELLSOFT command to set
PDCH Power Saving Enable to NO(No).

41.5 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption
Optimization
This describes how to configure the enhanced BCCH power consumption optimization. The
enhanced BCCH power consumption optimization reduces the BTS power consumption in idle
hours by reducing the power of non-BCCHs on the BCCH TRX, thus reducing the OPEX of the
operators. The time segment and degree of the power reduction are configurable.
Scenario

Reduce the BTS power consumption in idle hours

Impact

None

NEs Involved BSC,BTS

Prerequisite
l

The configuration of Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization is licensecontrolled.

l

Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. For details, see Activate BSC
License.

l

This function is supported by 3012 series and 3900 series base stations.

Preparation
Table 41-5 Example of the configuring the Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization

41-10

Parameter ID

Parameter Name

Example

Source

IDXTYPE

Index Type

BYNAME(By
Name)

Network planning

BTSNAME

BTS Name

BTS3900

Network planning

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease

Parameter ID

Parameter Name

Example

Source

MAINBCCHPW
RDTEN

Main BCCH Trx Non-Bcch
Time Slot Power Derating
Enable

YES(YES)

Network planning

MAINBCCHPWRDTS
TIME

BCCH TRX Non-BCCH
Timeslot Power Derating
Start Time[HH:MM]

00:00

Network planning

MAINBCCHPW
RDTETIME

BCCH TRX Non-BCCH
Timeslot Power Derating
End Time[HH:MM]

05:00

Network planning

MAINBCCHPWRDTR
ANGE

Main BCCH Trx Non-Bcch
Time Slot Power Derating
Range[0.2dB]

2

Network planning

MAINBCCHPWDTAC
TCHEN

BCCH TRX Non-BCCH
Timeslot Power Derating
Enabled

YES(YES)

Network planning

Procedure
Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD CELLOTHEXT command to set Main
BCCH Trx Non-Bcch Time Slot Power Derating Enable to YES(Yes).Then, configure the
time segment and degree of the power reduction.
NOTE

l When the power of the non-BCCH timeslots on the BCCH TRX is reduced, the MS camping on a
neighboring cell may not measure the downlink receive level of the serving cell accurately. This may
affect the MS handover from the neighboring cell to the serving cell. Therefore, be careful when you
enable the function of enhanced BCCH power consumption optimization.
l When Main BCCH Trx Non-Bcch Time Slot Power Derating Enable is set to YES(YES) and the
current time is between Main BCCH Trx Non-Bcch Time Slot Power Derating Start Time and
Main BCCH Trx Non-Bcch Time Slot Power Derating End Time, the BTS decreases the transmit
power of idle channels on the non-BCCH timeslots of the BCCH TRX. The power decrease degree is
controlled by Main BCCH Trx Non-Bcch Time Slot Power Derating Range
l When Main BCCH Trx Non-Bcch Time Slot Power Derating Active Channel Enable is set to YES
(YES), the BTS performs power decrease on the occupied channels on the BCCH TRX. If the power
control is performed on the occupied channels and the decreased power is smaller than Main BCCH
Trx Non-Bcch Time Slot Power Derating Range, adopt Main BCCH Trx Non-Bcch Time Slot
Power Derating Range to transmit signals. Otherwise, adopt the power required for the channel power
control to transmit signals.

----End

Result
Example
An example script for configuring the Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization
/*Configuring the Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization*/

Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

41-11

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease

MOD CELLOTHEXT: IDXTYPE=BYNAME, CELLNAME="BTS3900_01", MAINBCCHPWRDTEN=YES,
MAINBCCHPWRDTSTIME=00&00, MAINBCCHPWRDTETIME=05&00, MAINBCCHPWRDTRANGE=2,
MAINBCCHPWDTACTCHEN=YES;

Postrequisite
l

Verifying enhanced BCCH power consumption optimization
– On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the LST CELLOTHEXT command to
query the setting of Main BCCH Trx Non-Bcch Time Slot Power Derating
Enable. If the parameter is set to YES(Yes), it indicates that the function of enhanced
BCCH power consumption optimization is activated.

l

Deactivating enhanced BCCH power consumption optimization
1.

On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD CELLOTHEXT command to
set Main BCCH Trx Non-Bcch Time Slot Power Derating Enable to NO(No).

2.

On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the LST CELLOTHEXT command to
query the setting of Main BCCH Trx Non-Bcch Time Slot Power Derating
Enable. If the parameter is set to NO(No), it indicates that the function of enhanced
BCCH power consumption optimization is deactivated.

41.6 Configuring Active Backup Power Control
This describes how to configure the active backup power control. The BTS uses the configured
battery for power supply when the mains failure occurs. The battery provides a limited capacity.
To prolong the power supply time of the battery, the BSC shuts down certain TRXs or reduces
the maximum transmit power of the TRX to reduce the BTS power consumption. This is called
active backup power control.
Scenario

When the mains failure occurs, the BSC shuts down certain TRXs or reduces
the maximum transmit power of the TRX to reduce the BTS power consumption,
thus prolonging the power supply time of the battery.

Impact

None

NEs Involved BSC, BTS

Prerequisite
l

The configuration of Active Backup Power Control is license-controlled.

l

Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. For details, see Activate BSC
License.

l

The BTS is configured with the PMU.

l

This function is supported by 3012, 3012II, 3012III and 3900 series base stations.

Preparation
Table 41-6 Example of the configuring the Active Backup Power Control

41-12

Parameter ID

Parameter Name

Example

Source

IDXTYPE

Index Type

BYNAME(By Name)

Network planning

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease

Parameter ID

Parameter Name

Example

Source

STNAME

BTS Name

BTS3900

Network planning

BAKPWRSAVM
ETHOD

Backup Power
Saving Method

BYPWR(Reduce
Power)

Network planning

BAKPWRSAVP
OLICY

Backup Power
Saving Policy

BYSAVING(Backup
Power Preferred)

Network planning

DROPPWRSTA
RTTIME

Drop Power Start
Time [T1][hour]

2

Network planning

SHUTDOWNTR
XSTARTTIME

Shutdown Trx Start
Time [T2][hour]

3

Network planning

DROPPWRINTE
RVAL

Drop Power Time
Interval [T3][min]

5

Network planning

DROPPWRSTEP

Drop Power Step
[dB]

2

Network planning

MAXDROPPWR
THRESHOLD

Max Drop Power
Threshold[dB]

10

Network planning

Procedure
Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD BTSBAKPWR command to set Backup
Power Saving Method to BYPWR(Reduce Power).Then, set the following parameters: Drop
Power Start Time(T1)(H), Shutdown Trx Start Time(T2)(H), Drop Power Time Interval
(T3)(M), Drop Power Step(db), and Max Drop Power Threshold(db).
NOTE

When Backup Power Saving Method is set to BYTRX(Turn off Trx), the BSC shuts down the TRXs
whose Shut Down Enabled is set to ENABLE(Enable) after the BTS is powered off. The Shut Down
Enabled parameter can be set by running the MOD TRXDEVcommand.

----End

Example
An example script for configuring the Active Backup Power Control
/*Configuring the Active Backup Power Control*/
MOD BTSBAKPWR: IDXTYPE=BYNAME, STNAME="BTS3900", BAKPWRSAVMETHOD=BYPWR,
BAKPWRSAVPOLICY=BYSAVING,
DROPPWRSTARTTIME=2, SHUTDOWNTRXSTARTTIME=3, DROPPWRINTERVAL=5, DROPPWRSTEP=2,
MAXDROPPWRTHRESHOLD=10;

Postrequisite
l

Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

Verifying active backup power control

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

41-13

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease

l

1.

Turn off the mains power supply switch of the BTS. Then, part of the TRXs are
automatically shut down under the control of the timer. In addition, the transmit power
of the TRXs is reduced in certain steps.

2.

Turn on the mains power supply switch of the BTS. Verify that the shut-down TRXs
are automatically started up, and all the TRXs normally transmit power.

Deactivating active backup power control
1.

On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD TRXDEV command to set Shut
Down Enabled to DISABLE(Disable).

2.

Verifying deactivation of active backup power control: Turn off the mains power
supply switch of the BTS. Then, the BSC shuts down all the TRXs that can be shut
down under the BTS. The power of the remaining TRXs does not change. Then, turn
on the mains power supply switch of the BTS, and verify that the BTS automatically
starts up all the shut-down TRXs.

41.7 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage
Regulation
This feature monitors the output power of all the carriers within the module. When the total
output power of the power amplifier reduces after the measurement for a period, this feature
adjusts the working voltage of the power amplifier to a lower value according to the related
algorithm. In this way, the power amplifier works with great efficiency after the output power
reduces, thus reducing the power consumption of the TRX.
Scenario

The working voltage of the power amplifier of the multi-carrier is adjusted on
the basis of the output power of the power amplifier. Thus, the working
efficiency of the power amplifier is improved and the power consumption of
the BTS is reduced.

Impact

None

NEs Involved BSC, BTS

Prerequisite
l

The configuration of PSU smart control is license-controlled.

l

Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. For details, see Activate BSC
License.

l

The multi-carrier intelligent voltage adjustment is supported by 3900 series base stations.
The TRXs supporting this function are GRRU and GRFU.

l

The cell attribute parameter Adjust Voltage is set to YES(YES).

Preparation
Table 41-7 Example of the configuring the Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation

41-14

Parameter ID

Parameter Name

Example

Source

IDXTYPE

Index Type

BYNAME(By Name)

Network planning

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease

Parameter ID

Parameter Name

Example

Source

STNAME

BTS Name

BTS3900

Network planning

PAADJVOL

PA Intelligent
Adjust Voltage

YES(YES)

Network planning

Procedure
Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD BTSOTHPARA command to set PA
Intelligent Adjust Voltage to YES(Yes).
----End

Example
An example script for configuring the Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation
/*Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation*/
MOD BTSOTHPARA: IDXTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="BTS3900", PAADJVOL=YES;

Postrequisite
l

Verifying multi-carrier intelligent voltage regulation
– On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the LST BTSOTHPARA command. Check
the setting of PA Intelligent Adjust Voltage. If the parameter is set to YES, it indicates
that the function of multi-carrier intelligent voltage regulation is activated.

l

Deactivating multi-carrier intelligent voltage regulation
1.

On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD BTSOTHPARA command to
set PA Intelligent Adjust Voltage to NO(No).

2.

On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the LST BTSOTHPARA command to
check the setting of PA Intelligent Adjust Voltage. If the parameter is set to NO, it
indicates that the function of multi-carrier intelligent voltage regulation is deactivated.

41.8 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment
The working voltage of the TRX is always set to a high level to ensure the maximum output
power of the TRX. In actual application, however, the maximum output power of the TRX is
not always required. In this case, if the TRX still works under such a high voltage, extra power
is consumed because a lower working voltage can also provide the required output power. To
reduce the power consumption of the TRX, Huawei developed the function of "TRX Working
Voltage Adjustment" that enables the intelligent adjustment of the TRX working voltage
according to the output power.
Scenario

Adjustment of the TRX working voltage according to the output power. Hence,
to lower the TRX power consumption, the TRX should work under a suitable
voltage to ensure an efficient output power.

Impact

None

Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

41-15

41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

NEs Involved BSC and BTS

Prerequisite
l

This function is supported by the optimized TRX modules of the BTS3012 series base
stations.

l

This function is supported by the TRX modules of all the BTS3900 series base stations.

Preparation
Table 41-8 Example of the TRX Working Voltage Adjustment
Data Type

Parameter
ID

Parameter
Name

Example

Source

Cell Attributes

IDXTYPE

Index Type

BYNAME(By
Name)

Network planning

CELLNAME

Cell Name

BTS3900_01

Network planning

BTSADJUST

Adjust Voltage

YES(YES)

Network planning

TRXBN

TRX Board No.

0

Network planning

POWL

Power Level

1

Network planning

POWT

Power Type

45W(45W)

Network planning

Device
Attributes

Procedure
Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set
Adjust Voltage to YES(Yes).
----End

Example
An example script for configuring the TRX Working Voltage Adjustment
/*Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment*/
/*Configuring Cell Attributes */
MOD CELLBASICPARA: IDXTYPE=BYNAME, CELLNAME="BTS3900_01", BTSadjust=YES;
/*Configuring Device Attributes*/
MOD TRXDEV: IDXTYPE=BYNAME, CELLNAME="BTS3900_01", TRXBN=0, POWL=1, POWT=45W;

Postrequisite
l

Verifying TRX working voltage adjustment
– On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the LST CELLBASICPARA command to
check the setting of Adjust Voltage. If the parameter is set to YES, it indicates that the
function of TRX working voltage adjustment is activated.

l
41-16

Deactivating TRX working voltage adjustment
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

run the LST CELLBASICPARA command to check the setting of Adjust Voltage. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. If the parameter is set to No. 2. it indicates that the function of TRX working voltage adjustment is deactivated. Ltd. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Issue 02 (2010-09-20) 41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease 1. 41-17 . On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set Adjust Voltage to NO(No).

.

and there is idle port on the Abis interface board. more frequencies can be used at the FH layer. an MS may be handed over from the non-BCCH TRX to the BCCH TRX if the load of a cell increases. Ltd. l The GXPUM and Abis interface board are configured on the GMPS or GEPS. Table 42-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a BTS Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source BTS basic attributes BTSNAME BTS Name BTS3012 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. thus improving the system capacity. Therefore.. Impact When the function of tight BCCH frequency reuse is enabled. Scenario Tight BCCH frequency reuse is configured in the network with insufficient frequency resources. 42-1 . NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite l Tight BCCH frequency reuse is not restricted by the license.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 42 42 Configuring Tight BCCH Frequency Reuse Configuring Tight BCCH Frequency Reuse The tight BCCH frequency reuse technology is applicable to the network with insufficient frequency resources. This increases the number of handovers in the network. Concentric cell and multiband networks do not support tight BCCH frequency reuse. It increases the reusability of BCCH frequencies and reduces the number of frequencies used by the BCCHs. thus improving frequency reuse rate and increasing the system capacity. Preparation Take the configuration of BTS3012 in TDM transmission mode as an example.

0 Network planning BTSDESC BTS Description TDM BTS3012 Network planning MPMODE Multiplexing Mode MODE4_1 Network planning FlexAbisMod e Flex Abis Mode FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis) Network planning AbisByPass Mode Abis By Pass Mode FALSE(Not Support) Network planning ServiceMode Service Type TDM Network planning DCELLNAM E Cell Name TDMCELL Network planning DCTYPE Cell type GSM900 Network planning DCMCC Cell MCC 460 Network planning DCMNC Cell MNC 01 Network planning DCLAC Cell LAC 8240 Network planning DCCI Cell CI 1 Network planning CPLMode Separate Mode UNSUPPORT(Not Support) Network planning TRXBN TRX Board No. Ltd. 0 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 26 Network planning PN Port No. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 42 Configuring Tight BCCH Frequency Reuse Data Type 42-2 Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source TYPE BTS Type BTS3012 Network planning UPNODE Up Node Type BSC Network planning SRN Subrack No.. 0 Network planning SN Slot No.

for Assigning Main BCCH Carrier Channel Under TIGHT BCCH 30 Network planning TIGHTBCCHASSMAINBCCHQUA L Quality Thresh.. 988 Network planning Table 42-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring tight BCCH frequency reuse Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source Channel management parameters of the cell IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning TIGHTBCCHSWI TCH TIGHT BCCH Switch YES(YES) Network planning TIGHTBCCHASSMAINBCCHLEV Level Thresh.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type 42 Configuring Tight BCCH Frequency Reuse Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source FREQ TRX Freq. for Assigning Main BCCH Carrier Channel Under TIGHT BCCH 1 Network planning HOCTRLSWITCH HO Control Switch HOALGORITH M1(HO Algorithm I) Network planning TIGHTBCCHHOS TATTIME TIGHT BCCH HO Watch Time[s] 3 Network planning TIGHTBCCHHOL ASTTIME TIGHT BCCH HO Valid Time[s] 3 Network planning TIGHTBCCHRXQUALTHRES RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO 3 Network planning TIGHTBCCHHOLOADTHRES Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO 80 Network planning Advanced channel management parameters of the cell Cell handover parameters Cell handover advanced parameters Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the ADD BTS command to add a BTS. Ltd. 42-3 . Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

for Assigning Main BCCH Carrier Channel Under TIGHT BCCH and Quality Thresh. CELLIDX=0. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . TIGHTBCCHASSMAINBCCHLEV=30. /*Set advanced handover parameters of the cell*/ SET CELLCHMGBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. AbisByPassMode=False. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Use the MS to initiate a call in the cell. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. for Assigning Main BCCH Carrier Channel Under TIGHT BCCH. 3. for Assigning Main BCCH Carrier Channel Under TIGHT BCCH to 63 and Quality Thresh. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set HO Control Switch. CPLMode=UNSUPPORT. DCLAC=8240. CELLIDX=0. and TIGHT BCCH HO Valid Time [s]. TRXBN=0. for Assigning Main BCCH Carrier Channel Under TIGHT BCCH to 0. DCMCC="460". SRN = 0. SN=26. If TIGHT BCCH Switch is set to NO. run the SET CELLCHMGBASIC command to set TIGHT BCCH Switch to YES(YES). TIGHTBCCHHOLASTTIME=2. run the SET CELLHOAD command to set RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO and TIGHT Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO. TIGHTBCCHSWITCH=YES. run the SET CELLHOAD command to set TIGHT Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO to 100. run the LST CELLCHMGBASIC command. /*Set basic handover parameters of the cell*/ SET CELLCHMGBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ServiceMode=TDM. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Verify that the call is successfully set up. /*Set basic channel management parameters of the cell*/ SET CELLCHMGBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. it indicates that the function of tight BCCH frequency reuse is deactivated. TIGHTBCCHHOLOADTHRES=80. Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. FlexAbisMode=FLEX_ABIS. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. TIGHTBCCHHOSTATTIME=3.. DCELLNAME="TDMCELL". BTSDESC = "TDM BTS3012". TIGHTBCCHRXQUALTHRES=3. TIGHT BCCH HO Watch Time[s].42 Configuring Tight BCCH Frequency Reuse HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. UPNODE = BSC. Postrequisite l l 42-4 Verifying tight BCCH frequency reuse 1. DCTYPE=GSM900. TYPE = BTS3012. CELLIDX=0. run the MOD CELLCHMGAD command to set Level Thresh. FREQ=988. PN=0. MPMODE = MODE4_1. Ltd. /*Modify advanced channel management parameters of the cell*/ (MOD CELLCHMGAD)MOD CELLCHMGAD: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. ----End Example An example script for configuring tight BCCH frequency reuse for the BTS3012 in TDM transmission mode is as follows: /*Add a BTS3012*/ ADD BTS: BTSNAME= "BTS3012". 2. DCCI=1. DCMNC="01". 2. TIGHTBCCHASSMAINBCCHQUAL=1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the SET CELLCHMGBASIC command to set TIGHT BCCH Switch to NO(No). Deactivating tight BCCH frequency reuse 1. run the MOD CELLCHMGAD command to set Level Thresh. CELLIDX=0.

a pair of IP interface boards need to be added to each BSC. the IP interface boards of two BSCs can be connected through the switches. 43-1 . By setting the parameters of the current BSC and external BSC. If Abis over IP or A over IP is not adopted. 0 Network planning SN Slot No. Scenario the scenarios of inter-BSC information exchange Impact None NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite If Abis over IP or A over IP is adopted.. The configuration of the current BSC is the same as that of the external BSC. Preparation Assume that the name of the current BSC is BSC216 and that of the external BSC is BSC217. you can finish the configuration of the inter-BSC signaling links.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 43 43 Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP This describes how to configuring Inter-BSC signaling links on the current BSC and external BSC on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Take the configuration of the current BSC216 as an example negotiated and planned as follows: Table 43-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for Configuring Inter-BSC Signaling Links Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Example Source Board attributes SRN Subrack No. 24 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.

Ltd. 98 Network planning NAME Destination Entity Name BSC217 Network planning DPC DPC Code h'b1 Network planning RTCONTE XT Routing Context 4294967290 Network planning SSN Subsystem Number 143 Network planning CNID Network Element ID 1 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2 Network planning MASK Subnet mask 255. 0 Network planning IPINDEX IP address index 0 Network planning IPADDR IP address 2.10.2.10..255.255.216 Network planning MASK Subnet mask 255.255. 255 Network planning GATEWAY Gateway IP address 2.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 43 Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP Data Type IP attributes Device IP address Port IP address BSC route MU3A attributes M3UA local entity M3UA destination entity 43-2 Parameter ID Parameter Example Source IPADDR IP address 10.255.2.255.1 Network planning NAME Local Entity Name BSC216 Network planning OPC OPC Code h'a1 Network planning RTCONTE XT Routing Context 4294967290 Network planning DENO Destination Entity No.2.10. 0 Network planning IPADDR IP address 10.255.10. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .2. 0 Network planning PORT Port No.217 Network planning MASK Subnet mask 255.

45 Network planning LOCIP1 First Local IP Address 10. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal of the current BSC.. run the command ADD PHYPORTIP to add the port IP address. run the command ADD DEVIP to add the device IP address.10. 43-3 . the IP address of the GFGUB port on the external BSC.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type M3UA link set M3UA route M3UA link 43 Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP Parameter ID Parameter Example Source SIGLKSID X Signalling Link Set Index 1 Network planning NAME Signalling Link Set Name T0217 Network planning DENO Adjacent Destination Entity No.10.10. 98 Network planning SIGLKSID X Signalling Link Set Index 1 Network planning SIGLKSID X Signalling link set index 1 Network planning SRN Subrack No. run the command ADD IPRT to add the IP address. The gateway address is the IP address of the peer board. that is. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.217 Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal of the current BSC. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal of the current BSC.216 Network planning PEERIP1 First Destination IP Address 10. 1 Network planning PEERPN Destination Port No. Ltd.10. 98 Network planning DENO Destination Entity No. run the command LST ITFIPTYPE to query the communication type of the Abis interface. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal of the current BSC. 0 Network planning LOCPN Local Port No.

PEERPN=45. ----End Example The example script for configuring the current BSC is as follows: /*Confirm the transmission mode on the Gb interface*/ LST ITFIPTYPE:. Step 9 On the Local Maintenance Terminal of the current BSC. /*Add M3UA local entity*/ ADD M3LE: NAME="BSC216". SSN=143.255.10. NAME="BSC217". run the command ADD M3LKS to add the M3UA link set.10. MASK="255.255.10.2. /*Add IP route of the current BSC*/ ADD IPRT: SRN=0. run the command ADD M3LNK to add the M3UA link. LOCIP1="10. Step 10 Repeat Step 1 through Step 9 on the Local Maintenance Terminal of the external BSC to configure links of the external BSC. PEERIP1="10.2.43 Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal of the current BSC. IPADDR="2. OPC=h'a1. IPADDR="10. DENO=98. SN=24..10. PORT=1. SN=24.2".255. run the command ADD M3DE to add the M3UA destination entity. Ltd. run the command ADD M3LE to add the M3UA local entity.255. /*Add M3UA link*/ ADD M3LNK: SIGLKSIDX=1. SN=24. Step 7 On the Local Maintenance Terminal of the current BSC.0". RTCONTEXT=0.1".255. /*Add M3UA destination entity*/ ADD M3DE: DENO=98.217". Step 8 On the Local Maintenance Terminal of the current BSC. GATEWAY="2. SRN=0. MASK="255. SIGLKSIDX=1. NETSTRUCT=BIT14. /*Add M3UA route*/ ADD M3RT: DENO=98. LOCPN=1.0".217".2. IPADDR="10.216". /*Add device IP address of the current BSC*/ ADD DEVIP: SRN=0. run the command ADD M3RT to add the M3UA router. CNID=1.10.255.10.2. Step 6 On the Local Maintenance Terminal of the current BSC. MASK="255. NAME="T0217".216".255".10. DPC=h'b1. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .10. 43-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. /*Add M3UA link set*/ ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSIDX=1. RTCONTEXT=0. /*Add port IP address of the current BSC*/ ADD PHYPORTIP: SRN=0.

do as follows: l The license is required for the implementation of Soft-Synchronized Network. – The network using the Soft-Synchronized Network technology should be planned in an continuous coverage area. – When the Soft-Synchronized Network technology is used in dual-band networks. In a synchronous network. and the BTSs operating at 1800 MHz are grouped together for synchronization.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 44 44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task About This Chapter The Soft-Synchronized Network feature realizes the synchronization through software. all the BTSs under one BSC synchronize with each other by adjusting the frame number. the continuous coverage area can be regarded as a to-be-synchronized area. For details. comply with the following rules: – The Soft-Synchronized Network technology is applicable to the tight frequency reuse scenario. and bit offset in the timeslot to be the same through software. 44-1 . This greatly improves the frequency usage and increases the network capacity. under a BSC.. To obtain and activate the license. Prerequisite The license is obtained and activated. With this feature. the networks operating at different bands should be separated for synchronization. see Activate BSC License l You can configure parameters related to Soft-Synchronized Network only by running MML commands on the local maintenance terminal. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. A distance of shorter than 800 m is recommended. dynamic frequency allocation and dynamic channel assignment can be adopted to minimize inter-cell co-channel and adjacent-channel collision. That is. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. The BTSs operating at 900 MHz are grouped together for synchronization. l To make best use of the Soft-Synchronized Network technology. Ltd. timeslot number. – The distance between BTSs should be shorter than 900 m.

44. 44. the BTS offset information is collected and the offset time is adjusted automatically to synchronize the BTSs. 44. 44. This operation is optional as required. 44.5 Creating an Inter-BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task This describes how to create an inter-BSC soft-synchronized network task on the Local Maintenance Terminal of the controlling BSC and collaborating BSC. 44. and collaborating BSC. controlling BSC.6 Verifying an Inter-BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task This describes how to verify the inter-BSC soft-synchronized network task on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . lower-level BSC.. you can reconfigure the neighboring cells as required. The concepts consist of reference BSC. Ltd.9 Deleting a Soft-Synchronized Network Task This describes how to delete a soft-synchronized network task on the Local Maintenance Terminal. a pair of neighboring cells are automatically generated by the program according to the rules. Collecting the offset information between BTSs consists of collecting the intra-BSC and inter-BSC offset information between BTSs. collect synchronization information of underlaid subcells. it is recommended that you set these BTSs as reference BTSs to shorten the synchronization time of the entire network. 44. The collected offset information provides a basis for adjusting the BTS clock.2 Creating an Intra-BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task This describes how to create an intra-BSC soft-synchronized network task on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 44. 44-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. – If BTSs with GPS antennas exist in the network.4 Verifying an Intra-BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task This describes how to verify an intra-BSC soft-synchronized network task on the Local Maintenance Terminal.44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) – If concentric cells exist in a network.7 Collecting the Offset Information Between BTSs This describes how to collect the offset information between BTSs on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 44.8 Synchronizing BTSs After a soft-synchronized network task is created. If the neighboring cells do not meet the measurement requirements.3 Configuring a Pair of Neighboring Cells of Intra-BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task In an intra-BSC soft-synchronized network task. If the drive test result shows that the offset between the synchronized BTSs is great. you can manually synchronize the BTSs on the Local Maintenance Terminal.1 Concepts Related to the Soft-Synchronized Network This describes the concepts related to the soft-synchronized network.

and BSC Prerequisite l Each BSC should be configured with at least two BTSs. the conversion from an asynchronous network to a synchronous network can effectively reduce the interference on the entire network and expand the network capacity. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Therefore. If the soft-synchronized network task is implemented between BSC A and a lower-level BSC B. the reference BSC is the controlling BSC whereas BSC A is the collaborating BSC. and antenna azimuth of each cell should be configured. the BTSs should support the soft-synchronized network. latitude. then BSC A is a lowerlevel BSC relative to BSC B. l Collaborating BSC: The BSC that collaborates with the controlling BSC during the softsynchronized network task is referred to as a collaborating BSC.1 Concepts Related to the Soft-Synchronized Network This describes the concepts related to the soft-synchronized network. In addition. l Reference BSC: The inter-BSC soft-synchronized network task is implemented in hierarchical mode. l The BTSs must be configured with the same SiteSyncZone. The concepts consist of reference BSC. the longitude. 44. lower-level BSC. In addition. it is referred to as the reference BSC. then BSC A is the controlling BSC whereas BSC B is the collaborating BSC. In addition. l Controlling BSC: The BSC that initiates the offset information collection between BSCs and plays a controlling role in the soft-synchronized network task is called a controlling BSC. 44-3 . controlling BSC. NOTE Controlling BSC and collaborating BSC are relative concepts. BTS. The soft-synchronized network must work with other technologies such as network planning or IBCA. The BSC located in the center of the coverage area of the BSCs is taken as the starting point of the hierarchical synchronization. l Each BTS should be configured with at least two cells. Impact The gain of the radio-related KPIs can be greatly improved. If BSC A is located in a lower level than BSC B.2 Creating an Intra-BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task This describes how to create an intra-BSC soft-synchronized network task on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Scenario The soft-synchronized network is applicable to the scenario of tight frequency reuse. Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task 44. and collaborating BSC. NEs Involved MS. l Lower-level BSC: The inter-BSC soft-synchronized network task is implemented in hierarchical mode. If the soft-synchronized network task is implemented between BSC A and reference BSC..

2 Network planning SYMOFFSET SymOffset 0 Network planning SITESYNCZONE SiteSyncZone 0 Network planning Table 44-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for creating an intra-BSC softsynchronized network task Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source TASKIDX Aiss Task Index 0 Network planning GATHON Offset Information Collection Switch ON(ON) Network planning ADTON Offset Time Adjustment Switch ON(ON) Network planning BASEBTSIDX Reference BTS Index 1. Assume that this soft-synchronized network task is implemented between two BTSs. 44-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Table 44-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for setting the BTS synchronization zone Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning BTSIDX BTS index 1. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . Ltd. Set the same SiteSyncZone for the BTSs that participate in the soft-synchronized network task.. 2 Network planning REINITTBL Reinitialize Neighboring Cell List YES(YES) Network planning ISSPTBSCAISS Support BSC AISS NO(NO) Network planning Procedure Step 1 Run the SET BTSAISS command on the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task Preparation The following operation creates the soft-synchronized network task (Aiss Task Index = 0).

SYMOFFSET=0. ADTON=ON. Ltd. ADD AISSCFG: TASKIDX=0. run the ADD AISSCFG command. and should be set as required. REINITTBL=YES. l The neighboring cell relations between the pair of neighboring cells are configured.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task NOTE Set the same SiteSyncZone for the BTSs numbered 1 and 2. 44-5 . If the neighboring cells do not meet the measurement requirements. ISSPTBSCAISS=NO. /*Create an intra-BSC soft-synchronized network task*/ ADD AISSCFG: TASKIDX=0. NOTE The BTSs that serve the configured cells should support soft-synchronized network. and set Support BSC AISS to NO(NO) to create an intra-BSC soft-synchronized network task.7 Collecting the Offset Information Between BTSs and 44. a pair of neighboring cells are automatically generated by the program according to the rules. see 44. 44. Prerequisite l The intra-BSC soft-synchronized network task is created successfully. To manually collect the offset information and adjust the offset time. ----End Example An example script of creating the intra-BSC soft-synchronized network task is as follows: /*Set the BTS synchronization zone*/ SET BTSAISS: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Choose the BTSs that support the soft-synchronized network.]. REINITTBL=YES. You can run the DSP NCELLTBL command to query the neighboring cell list composed of the cells and BTSs that serve the cells. SYMOFFSET=0. BTSIDX=2. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. set Offset Information Collection Switch and Offset Time Adjustment Switch to ON(ON). This parameter determines the value of Frame Offset [frame No. the overlaid cell and underlaid cell must be in the same frequency band. If the neighboring cell list is empty. ISSPTBSCAISS=NO. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. SymOffset is an optional parameter.8 Synchronizing BTSs. the BTS offset information are collected and the offset time are adjusted automatically to finish the softsynchronized network task. ADTON=ON. BTSIDX=1. NOTE After the Offset Information Collection Switch and Offset Time Adjustment Switch are turned on.3 Configuring a Pair of Neighboring Cells of Intra-BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task In an intra-BSC soft-synchronized network task. Then. GATHON=ON. SITESYNCZONE=0. SET BTSAISS: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. you must add the pair of neighboring cells starting from the reference BTS. The BTS that serves the first cell in the pair of neighboring cells should be in the neighboring cell list of the softsynchronized network task. If the cell is a concentric cell. GATHON=ON. the default value is retained. BASEBTSIDX=2. In general. SITESYNCZONE=0. BASEBTSIDX=1. l The two added cells must be in the same frequency band. you can reconfigure the neighboring cells as required.

SCELLIDX=10. run the ADD NCELL command to add an optimal pair of neighboring cells. l The BTS can be deleted only when there are no neighboring cells in the BTS. NOTE If the BTS is also deleted. An example script is as follows: TASKIDX=0. BYCELLTYPE=BYIDX. Postrequisite Run the DEL NCELL command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to delete the optimal pair of neighboring cells. MCELLIDX=15. MCELLIDX=15. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . 44-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task Preparation Table 44-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for creating an intra-BSC softsynchronized network task Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source TASKIDX Aiss Task Index 0 Network planning BYCELLTYPE Cell Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning SCELLIDX First Cell Index 10 Network planning MCELLIDX Second Cell Index 15 Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. the BTS cannot be deleted even if Delete BTS In the Neighboring Cell List is set to YES(YES). /*Add the optimal pair of neighboring cells*/ ADD NCELL: TASKIDX=0. BYCELLTYPE=BYIDX. If the neighboring cell list does not meet the requirements of the actual measurement.. ----End Example An example script of configuring the neighboring cells for an intra-BSC soft-synchronized network task is as follows: /*Check whether the neighboring cell list meets the requirements of the actual measurement*/ DSP NCELLTBL: TASKIDX=0. DELSITE=YES. run the DSP NCELLTBL command to check whether the neighboring cell list meets the actual measurement requirements. SCELLIDX=10. reconfigure the neighboring cell list as follows: Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. you need to set Delete BTS In the Neighboring Cell List to Yes. Ltd. l If there are neighboring cells in the BTS.

l The BTSs must be configured with the same SiteSyncZone. l Each BTS should be configured with at least two cells. and antenna azimuth of each cell should be configured. Scenario The soft-synchronized network is applicable to the scenario of tight frequency reuse. the detailed information about all the soft-synchronized network tasks are queried. In addition. In addition.5 Creating an Inter-BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task This describes how to create an inter-BSC soft-synchronized network task on the Local Maintenance Terminal of the controlling BSC and collaborating BSC.. ----End 44. BTS. Ltd. l Each BSC should be configured with at least two BTSs. NEs Involved MS. the conversion from an asynchronous network to a synchronous network can effectively reduce the interference on the entire network and expand the network capacity. see Connection Inter BSC over IP. run the LST AISSCFG command to query the information about the soft-synchronized network task. l The communication links between the BSCs are configured and work normally.4 Verifying an Intra-BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task This describes how to verify an intra-BSC soft-synchronized network task on the Local Maintenance Terminal. latitude. the task of creating the soft-synchronized network task is successful. Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. If it exists.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task 44. NOTE If you do not set Aiss Task Index. Impact The gain of the radio-related KPIs can be greatly improved. Check whether Aiss Task Index added in the procedure of 44. the longitude. and BSC Prerequisite l The inter-BSC link is configured and the communication is normal. the BTSs should support the soft-synchronized network.2 Creating an Intra-BSC SoftSynchronized Network Task exists. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In addition. For details. 44-7 . The soft-synchronized network must work with other technologies such as network planning or IBCA.

Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .. Table 44-5 Example of the data negotiated and planned for creating an inter-BSC softsynchronized network 44-8 Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source Controlli ng BSC216 paramet ers TASKIDX Aiss Task Index 0 Network planning GATHON Offset Information Collection Switch ON(ON) Network planning ADTON Offset Time Adjustment Switch ON(ON) Network planning BASEBTSIDX Reference BTS Index 1 Network planning REINITTBL Reinitialize Neighboring Cell List YES(YES) Network planning ISSPTBSCAISS Support BSC AISS YES(YES) Network planning ISBASICBSC Base BSC YES(YES) Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Assume that this soft-synchronized network task is implemented between two BTSs.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task Preparation The following operation creates the soft-synchronized network task (Aiss Task Index = 0).2 Network planning SYMOFFSET SymOffset 0 Network planning SITESYNCZONE SiteSyncZone 0 Network planning Assume that BTS 1 under the controlling BSC216 and BTS 2 under the collaborating BSC217 support soft-synchronized network. Table 44-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for setting the BTS synchronization zone Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning BTSIDX BTS index 1.

44-9 .. Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source Collabor ating BSC217 paramet ers TASKIDX Aiss Task Index 0 Network planning GATHON Offset Information Collection Switch ON(ON) Network planning ADTON Offset Time Adjustment Switch ON(ON) Network planning BASEBTSIDX Reference BTS Index 2 Network planning REINITTBL Reinitialize Neighboring Cell List YES(YES) Network planning ISSPTBSCAISS Support BSC AISS YES(YES) Network planning ISBASICBSC Base BSC NO Network planning CTRBSCDPC Controlling BSC DPC h'a1 Network planning Table 44-6 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the cell that creates the inter-BSC soft-synchronized network task Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source 2G external cell configur ation CELLIDX Cell Index 2048 Network planning CELLNAME Cell Name D Network planning MCC Cell MCC 460 Network planning MNC Cell MNC 01 Network planning LAC Cell LAC 8240 Network planning CI Cell CI 1 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Ltd. run the ADD AISSCFG command to create a soft-synchronized network task. 44-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and should be set as required. This parameter determines the value of Frame Offset [frame No. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . run the ADD AISSCFG command to create a soft-synchronized network task. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal of the controlling BSC216.44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task Data Type 2G unidirect ional neighbor ing cell configur ation Neighbo ring cell pair configur ation HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source BCCH BCCH FD 988 Network planning NCC NCC 1 Network planning BCC BCC 1 Network planning IDXTYPE Index type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning SRCCELLIDX Source Cell Index 0 Network planning NBRCELLIDX Neighbor Cell Index 2048 Network planning HOCTRLSWITCH Current HO Control Algorithm in Source Cell HOALGORIT HM1 Network planning IDXTYPE Index type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning INNCELLIDX BSC inner Cell index 0 Network planning ADJBSCDPC Adjacent BSC DPC h'a3 Network planning EXTADJCELLIDX BSC adjacent Cell index 2048 Network planning Procedure Step 1 Run the SET BTSAISS command on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Set the same SiteSyncZone for the BTSs that participate in the inter-BSC soft-synchronized network task. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal of the collaborating BSC217. In general. SymOffset is an optional parameter. Set Support BSC AISS and Base BSC to Yes. NOTE Set the same SiteSyncZone for the BTSs numbered as 1 and 2. the default value is selected.].. Set Base BSC to No. and specify Controlling BSC DPC.

ISBASICBSC=NO. CELLNAME="D". Ltd. REINITTBL=YES. that is. NBRCELLIDX=2048. ISBASICBSC=YES. /*Create a soft-synchronized network task on the controlling BSC216*/ ADD AISSCFG: TASKIDX=0. BTSIDX=1. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal of the controlling BSC216. the task of creating the soft-synchronized network is complete. Step 6 On the Local Maintenance Terminal of the controlling BSC216. BCCH=988. MCC="460". NCC=1. To manually collect the offset information and adjust the offset time. SYMOFFSET=0. run the ADD CELL2GEXTC command to add a 2G external cell. ADJBSCDPC=h'a3. run the ADD EXTNCELL command to add a pair of neighboring cells. CTRBSCDPC=h'a1. see 44. Prerequisite A soft-synchronized network task is created through the ADD AISSCFG command and the task supports inter-BSC soft-synchronized network. GATHON=ON. LAC=8240. EXTADJCELLIDX=2055. ADTON=ON. Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal of the controlling BSC216. BCC=3. Then.6 Verifying an Inter-BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task This describes how to verify the inter-BSC soft-synchronized network task on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 44. BASEBTSIDX=1.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task NOTE After the Offset Information Collection Switch and Offset Time Adjustment Switch are set to ON (ON). /*Add a 2G external cell*/ ADD CELL2GEXTC: CELLIDX=2048. NOTE Configure cell D under the BSC217 as an external cell under the BSC216. BTSIDX=2. /*Create a soft-synchronized network task on the collaborating BSC217*/ ADD AISSCFG: TASKIDX=0. REINITTBL=YES. to make cell C and cell D into a pair. Set Cell Index according to the configured cells. GATHON=ON. /*Add a pair of neighboring cells*/ ADD EXTNCELL: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. 44-11 . Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the BTS offset information are collected and the offset time are adjusted automatically to finish the soft-synchronized network task. /*Add a 2G unidirectional neighboring cell*/ ADD CELL2GNC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX.. CI=1. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. run the ADD CELL2GNC command to add a 2G unidirectional neighboring cell and configure cell D as the neighboring cell of cell C. ----End Example An example script of creating an inter-BSC soft-synchronized network task is as follows: /*Set the BTS synchronization zone*/ SET BTSAISS: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. BASEBTSIDX=2. MNC="01". ISSPTBSCAISS=YES. SET BTSAISS: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. SITESYNCZONE=0.7 Collecting the Offset Information Between BTSs and 44. SYMOFFSET=0. ADTON=ON. SITESYNCZONE=0. ISSPTBSCAISS=YES. INNCELLIDX=0.8 Synchronizing BTSs. SRCCELLIDX=0.

----End Example An example script of verifying an inter-BSC soft-synchronized network task is as follows: /*Query the information about the soft-synchronized network task*/ LST AISSCFG. /*Query the offset information about the synchronization of the BSC*/ DSP BSCSYNCINFO: TASKIDX=1. run the DSP AISSRUNSTATE command to query the information about the intra-BSC soft-synchronized network task and check whether the status of synchronization between the BTSs is normal. At the initial stage of the task of creating the soft-synchronized network. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. BTSIDX=0. NOTE l The status of this BSC is queried if the entered Adjacent BSC DPC is the DPC of the controlling BSC of this BSC.44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 44. The collected offset information provides a basis for adjusting the BTS clock. Enter the Adjacent BSC DPC of the collaborating BSC to query the status of the collaborating BSC. At the initial stage of the task of creating the soft-synchronized network. 44-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. BTS Status should be Waiting for Initial Collection. run the DSP BSCSYNCINFO command to query the offset information about the synchronization between two BSCs. run the DSP BTSSYNCINFO command to query the offset information about the BTS.7 Collecting the Offset Information Between BTSs This describes how to collect the offset information between BTSs on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Prerequisite The inter-BSC or intra-BSC soft-synchronized network task is created successfully. Collecting the offset information between BTSs consists of collecting the intra-BSC and inter-BSC offset information between BTSs. IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. /*Query the offset information about the synchronization of the BTS*/ DSP BTSSYNCINFO: TASKIDX=1. Ensure that Support BSC AISS is set to Yes on the controlling BSC and that the Controlling BSC DPC on the collaborating BSC is the DPC of the controlling BSC. /*Query the information about the inter-BSC soft-synchronized network task*/ DSP AISSRUNSTATE: TASKIDX=1. run the LST AISSCFG command to query the information about the soft-synchronized network task. the BSC Sync State should be Waiting for Initial Collection. l The status of the collaborating BSC is queried if the entered Adjacent BSC DPC is the DPC of the collaborating BSC of this BSC. BSCDPC=h'a17.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task Preparation Table 44-7 Example of the data negotiated and planned for collecting the intra-BSC offset information between BTSs Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source Offset informat ion collectio n TASKIDX Aiss Task Index 0 Network planning GATHON Offset Information Collection Switch ON(ON) Network planning ADTON Offset Time Adjustment Switch ON(ON) Network planning BASEBTSIDX Reference BTS Index 1 Network planning REINITTBL Reinitialize Neighboring Cell List NO(NO) Network planning ISSPTBSCAISS Support BSC AISS NO(NO) Network planning RESERVESTATE Reserve State YES(YES) Network planning TASKIDX Aiss Task Index 0 Network planning COLTYPE Collection Type BYSITE(By Site) Network planning CELLIDXTYPE Cell Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning SCELLIDX First BTS Index 0 Network planning MCELLIDX Second BTS Index 1 Network planning Frame offset and inframe bit offset collectio n Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. 44-13 . Ltd.

and the second BTS or cell must be the BTS to be collected or the cell under the BTS. The status of the first BTS or cell must be collected or synchronized. 2. RESERVESTATE=YES. REINITTBL=NO. GATHON=ON. run the COL SYNCINFO command to recollect Frame Offset [frame No. BASEBTSIDX=1. 1. BTSIDXTYPE=BYIDX.] and In Frame Bit Offset [1/8 bit] of the control BSC and collaborating BSC. l Collect the inter-BSC offset information. SBTSIDX=0. ADTON=ON.44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Table 44-8 Example of the data negotiated and planned for collecting the inter-BSC offset information between BTSs Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source Offset informat ion collectio n TASKIDX Aiss Task Index 0 Network planning DPC BSC DPC h'a3 Network planning Procedure l Collect the offset information about the BTSs in the BSC. An example script of collecting the inter-BSC offset information between BTSs is as follows: /*Start the tasks of collecting the BTS offset information and adjusting the BTS offset time*/ 44-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ISSPTBSCAISS=NO. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD AISSCFG command. run the MOD AISSCFG command. 1. Set Offset Time Adjustment Switch and Offset Information Collection Switch to ON(ON). NOTE The two BTSs or cells used in the command should be listed in the neighboring cell list. ISBASICBSC=NO.] and In Frame Bit Offset [1/8 bit] of two BTSs or cells under the BSC. 2. run the COL BSCSYNCINFO command and enter the DPC of the specified collaborating BSC to recollect Frame Offset [frame No. the BSC automatically starts to adjust the BTS time and collect the offset information. Then. Optional: If the information collected in step 1 differs greatly from the drive test result. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . MBTSIDX=1. the BSC automatically starts to adjust the BTS time and collect the offset information. ----End Example An example script of collecting the intra-BSC offset information between BTSs is as follows: /*Start the tasks of collecting the BTS offset information and adjusting the BTS offset time*/ MOD AISSCFG: TASKIDX=0. /*Recollect the frame offset and in frame bit offset in the intra-BSC softsynchronized network*/ COL SYNCINFO: TASKIDX=0. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd.. Optional: If the information collected in step 1 differs greatly from the drive test result. COLTYPE=BYSITE. Set Offset Time Adjustment Switch and Offset Information Collection Switch to ON(ON). Then.

adjust the frame number and offset of BTS2 according to the frame offset and in-frame bit offset of BTS2 relative to BTS1 to synchronize BTS2 with BTS1.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task MOD AISSCFG: TASKIDX=0.] 100 Network planning BITOFFSET In Frame Bit Offset [1/8 bit] 10 Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. RESERVESTATE=YES. Therefore. call drops may occur. Ltd. BASEBTSIDX=1. you can manually synchronize the BTSs on the Local Maintenance Terminal. DPC=h'a3. Frame Offset [frame No. REINITTBL=NO. ----End Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ISSPTBSCAISS=YES. 44. you are advised to synchronize the BTSs when the traffic volume is low. Impact During the BTS synchronization. ISBASICBSC=YES. /*Recollect the frame offset and in frame bit offset in the inter-BSC softsynchronized network*/ COL BSCSYNCINFO: TASKIDX=0. If the drive test result shows that the offset between the synchronized BTSs is great. run the MOD BTSEXCURSION command to manually synchronize the BTSs. Then.] and In Frame Bit Offset [1/8 bit] should correspond to the drive test result. 44-15 ..8 Synchronizing BTSs After a soft-synchronized network task is created. This operation is optional as required. ADTON=ON. Preparation Table 44-9 Example of the data negotiated and planned for synchronizing the BTSs Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source TASKIDX Aiss Task Index 0 Network planning IDXTYPE Index type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning BTSIDX BTS index 1 Network planning ADJMODE Adjustment Mode BYMANUAL(By Manual) Network planning FRAMEOFFSET Frame Offset [frame No. NOTE Take BTS1 as the reference BTS and keep the frame number and offset of BTS1 unchanged. the BTS offset information is collected and the offset time is adjusted automatically to synchronize the BTSs. GATHON=ON.

BITOFFSET=10. BTSIDX=1. Ltd. Step 2 To delete an inter-BSC soft-synchronized network task. 44-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ----End Example An example script of deleting a soft-synchronized network task is as follows: RMV AISSCFG: TASKIDX=1. /*Delete the pair of inter-BSC neighboring cells and the inter-BSC softsynchronized network task*/ RMV EXTNCELL: INDEX=0. Preparation Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ADJMODE=BYMANUAL. 44..44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Example An example script of adjusting the frame offset and in-frame bit offset is as follows: MOD BTSEXCURSION: TASKIDX=0. IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . Prerequisite A soft-synchronized network task is created through the ADD AISSCFG command. you should also delete the pair of interBSC neighboring cells through the RMV EXTNCELL command on the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the RMV AISSCFG command to delete a softsynchronized network task. FRAMEOFFSET=100.9 Deleting a Soft-Synchronized Network Task This describes how to delete a soft-synchronized network task on the Local Maintenance Terminal.

Prerequisite l The configuration of entire network is not restricted by the license. Preparation Configure the DGPS in the BTS3012 or configure the USCU in the 3900 series base station or 3036 series base station to support the GPS entire network synchronization. Ltd. and improve the gain of the radio-related KPIs. 0 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 0 Network planning SN Slot No. Table 45-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the USCU Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning BTSIDX BTS Index 5 Network planning SRN Subrack No.. l The communication between the BSC and the BTS is normal. Take configuration of the USCU in the BTS3900 GSM as an example. BTS. expand the network capacity.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 45 45 Configuring Entire Network Synchronization Configuring Entire Network Synchronization This describes how to configure the DGPS in the BTS3012 or configure the USCU in the 3900 series base station or 3036 series base station to support the GPS function so that the entire network is synchronized. l The BTS3012 should be configured with the DGPS. and BSC. 45-1 .The BTS3900/BTS3900A/DBS3900 should be configured with the Universal Satellite card and Clock Unit (USCU). Scenario To synchronize the entire network through hardware configuration Impact The conversion from an asynchronous network to a synchronous network can effectively reduce the interference on the entire network. NEs Involved MS.

NOTE GPS or Glonass is set according to the type of the GPS satellite card. /*Configure the system clock source*/ MOD BTSCLK: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Antenna Power Supply Switch is set to NOPOWER(No Power) only in the co-antenna scenario. CNT=BTS3900_GSM. /*Configure the USCU to support the GPS function*/ MOD USCUBP: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. ClkType=TRCGPS_CLK. GPS Antenna Delay to 800. BT=USCU. and Antenna Power Supply Switch to NOPOWER(No Power). BTSIDX=5. SRN=0.45 Configuring Entire Network Synchronization HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source CNT Cabinet Type BTS3900_GSM Network planning BT Board Type USCU(USCU) Network planning GPSORGLONASS GPS or Glonass GPS(GPS) Network planning ANTENNALONG GPS Antenna Delay 800 Network planning ANTENNAPOWER SWITCH Antenna Power Supply Switch NOPOWER(No Power) Network planning Table 45-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the system clock source Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning BTSIDX BTS Index 5 Network planning CLKTYPE Clock Type TRCGPS_CLK (Trace GPS Clock) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd. BTSIDX=5. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . ----End Example An example script is as follows: /*Add a USCU*/ ADD BTSBRD: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. BTSIDX=5. run the ADD BTSBRD command to add the USCU. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ANTENNALONG=800. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. SN=0. run the MOD BTSCLK command to set Clock Type to TRCGPS_CLK(Trace GPS Clock). 45-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ANTENNAPOWERSWITCH=NOPOWER. GPSORGLONASS=GPS. SN=0. GPS Antenna Delay is set according to the feeder length. SRN=0. run the MOD USCUBP command to set GPS or Glonass to GPS(GPS).

run the LST BTSCLK command to check the setting of Clock Type of the BTS. it indicates that the function of entire network synchronization is deactivated. 45-3 . If the parameter is set to TRCGPS_CLK(Trace GPS Clock). l Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Deactivating entire network synchronization 1.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 45 Configuring Entire Network Synchronization Postrequisite l Verifying entire network synchronization – On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD BTSCLK command to set Clock Type to a value other than TRCGPS_CLK(Trace GPS Clock). 2. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Check the setting of Clock Type of the BTS. If the parameter is set to a value other than TRCGPS_CLK(Trace GPS Clock). it indicates that the function of entire network synchronization is activated. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. run the LST BTSCLK command.

.

46. different networking modes can be used on each interface in the BSS as required. 46. 46-1 ..3 Gb over IP Configuration Data This provides the configuration data of the IP transmission over the Gb interface.6 Configuring Gb over IP This describes how to configure Gb over IP on the Local Maintenance Terminal. the quality of IP transmission can be guaranteed by various QoS mechanisms.1 A over IP Configuration Data This provides the configuration data of the IP transmission over the A interface. Meanwhile.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission Configuring BSS IP Transmission About This Chapter This describes three types of IP transmission in the BSS: A over IP.4 Configuring A over IP This describes how to configure A over IP on the Local Maintenance Terminal. load sharing. and Gb over IP. 46. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. According to the network planning. 46.5 Configuring Abis over IP This describes how to configure Abis over IP on the Local Maintenance Terminal.2 Abis over IP Configuration Data This provides the configuration data of the IP transmission over the Abis interface. 46. Ltd. The networking reliability can be guaranteed by the active/standby mode. Context 46. and link detection. Abis over IP.

0 Network planning 1 Network planning GGCU_BACK (GGCU Backplane) Network planning GGCU_BACK (GGCU Face) Network planning REFCLK clock type Table 46-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the M3AU entity 46-2 Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source M3UA local entity OPC OPC Code h'a1 Network planning M3UA destination entity DPC DPC Code h'cc Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1 A over IP Configuration Data This provides the configuration data of the IP transmission over the A interface. Table 46-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring system clock Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source SRCTYPE Clock Reference Source Type 2M_ExternalClk0 (2M_ExternalClk0) Network planning 2M_ExternalClk1 (2M_ExternalClk1) Network planning Clock Reference Source Sub-type 2M_HZ Network planning 2M_Bps Network planning Clock Reference Source Priority 1 Network planning 2 Network planning SRCSUBTYPE PRIORITY Table 46-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring 8K reference clock for the GMPS and GEPS Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source SRN Subrack No.. Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission 46. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission Table 46-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the signaling point for the GMPS Parameter Example Source Subrack No.2.255. 0 Network planning AN Auto Neg ENABLE (ENABLE) Network planning MTU MTU 1000 Network planning Communicat ion type AIPTYPE A-interface Communicat ion IP type DEVIP (Device IP address) Network planning Device IP address IPADDR IP Address 2.. Ltd. 14 Network planning BT Board Type GFGUA Network planning PORTTYPE Port Type FE Network planning BACKTYP E Back Type OUTPEER (Active/ Standby Mode) Network planning PN Port No. 0 Network planning IP attributes Port IP address Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 0 BSC internal planning OPC Code h'a1 Network planning Table 46-5 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GFGUA Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source BSC attributes ServiceMod e Service Mode AIP(AIP) Network planning Board attributes SRN Subrack No. 0 Network planning SN Slot No.255.2.2 Network planning MASK Subnet Mask 255. 0 Network planning PORT Port No. 46-3 .

5.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission Data Type BSC route Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IPINDEX IP address index 0 Network planning IPADDR IP Address 3.3. 0 Network planning IPADDR2 Standby IP address 3. 4096 Network planning LOCIP1 First Local IP Address 2.3.255.3. Ltd.3.5.3 Network planning MASK Subnet Mask 255.2.4 Network planning IPADDR IP Address 5.1 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.255.255.5.1 Network planning Table 46-6 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the A interface link Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source SIGLKSIDX Signalling Link Set Index 0 Network planning DENO Adjacent Destination Entity No.2. 0 Network planning GATEWAY Gateway 3.2 Network planning PEERIP1 Peer Address 1 5.0 Network planning MASK Subnet Mask 255.5.3.3.3. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .5 Network planning Table 46-7 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BFD detection over the A interface 46-4 Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IPINDEX Local IP Index 0 Network planning PEERIP Peer IP 3. 4096 Network planning PEERPN Peer Port No.3.255.. 0 Network planning LOCPN Local Port No.

14 Network planning PN Port No. 0 Network planning SN Slot No.. 0 Network planning Traffic shaping and congestion management Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 0 Network planning SN Slot No.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source MINTXINTERVA L Minimum TX Interval[ms] 30 Network planning MINRXINTERVA L Minimum RX Interval[ms] 30 Network planning DETECTMULT DetectMult 3 Network planning Table 46-8 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the QoS mechanism over the A interface Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source Priority mapping SRN Subrack No. 14 Network planning ITFTYPE InterfaceType A(A Interface) Network planning TRMTYPE TRM Type IP(IP) Network planning SRVTYPE Service Type CSVOICE(CS Voice) Network planning VLANFLAG VLAN Flag ENABLE (Enable) Network planning VLANID VLAN ID 2 Network planning PHB PHB EF Network planning DSCP DSCP 0 Network planning VLANPRI PRI 7 Network planning SRN Subrack No. Ltd. 46-5 .

Table 46-9 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GFGUB 46-6 Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source Board attributes SRN Subrack No.. 0 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 17 Network planning BT Board Type GFGUB Network planning PORTTYPE Port Type FE Network planning BACKTYP E Back Type OUTPEER (Active/ Standby Mode) Network planning PN Port No. 0 Network planning SN Slot No. Ltd.2 Abis over IP Configuration Data This provides the configuration data of the IP transmission over the Abis interface. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source WQDT Queue Display Type PQ Network planning DRPTYPE Discarding Type REJECT (REJECT) Network planning UPTHP Upper Discarding Threshold 3 Network planning CGTHP Congestion Threshold 4 Network planning RSTHP Restore Threshold 4 Network planning SPENABLE Shaping Enable YES(Yes) Network planning SPBW Shaping Bandwidth [32K] 3200 Network planning 46.

8.255. 0 Network planning IPADDR2 Standby IP address 8.0 Network planning MASK Subnet mask 255.8.6.5.255..8.3 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.5. Ltd.255.8.6 Network planning MASK Subnet mask 255.6. 0 Network planning PORT Port No.8.255. 0 Network planning GATEWAY Gateway IP address 8.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type IP attributes 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source AN Auto Neg ENABLE (ENABLE) Network planning MTU MTU 1000 Network planning Communicat ion type ABISIPTYP E Abisinterface Communicat ion IP type DEVIP (Device IP address) Network planning Device IP address IPADDR IP address 6. 46-7 .8.1 Network planning Port IP address BSC route Table 46-10 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BFD link detection over the Abis interface Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source BSC IPINDEX Local IP Index 0 Network planning PEERIP Peer IP 8.255. 0 Network planning IPINDEX IP address index 0 Network planning IPADDR IP address 8.4 Network planning IPADDR IP address 5.255.3 Network planning MASK Subnet mask 255.8.8.

Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .9. 0 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1 Network planning SHPA ShakeHand period A[s] 3 Network planning SHPB ShakeHand period B[s] 3 Network planning SHPC ShakeHand period C[s] 3 Network planning SYNMODE Clock Synchronization Mode CONSYN (Consecutive Synchronizing) Network planning Table 46-12 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring QoS for the Abis interface 46-8 Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source Priority mapping on the BSC side SRN Subrack No..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission Data Type BTS Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source MINTXINTER VAL Minimum TX Interval[ms] 30 Network planning MINRXINTE RVAL Minimum RX Interval[ms] 30 Network planning DETECTMUL T Detect Multiple 3 Network planning BTSWTR BTSWTR 0 Network planning MINTXINTER VAL Minimum TX Interval[ms] 30 Network planning MINRXINTE RVAL Minimum RX Interval[ms] 30 Network planning DETECTMUL T Detect Multiple 3 Network planning Table 46-11 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring Clock over IP Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IPINDEX Clock server IP 9.9.

. 17 Network planning ITFTYPE Interface Type Abis(Abis Interface) Network planning TRMTYPE TRM Type IP(IP) Network planning SRVTYPE Service Type CSVOICE(CS Voice) Network planning VLANFLAG VLAN Flag ENABLE (Enable) Network planning VLANID VLAN ID 2 Network planning PHB PHB EF Network planning DSCP DSCP 0 Network planning VLANPRI PRI 7 Network planning IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning BTSIDX BTS Index 0 Network planning SERVICETYP E Service Type CSVOICE Network planning DSCP DSCP 0 Network planning VLANSWITC H VLANSwitch YES Network planning VLANID VLAN ID ENABLE (Enable) Network planning VLANPRI PRI 7 Network planning SRN Subrack No.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type Priority mapping on the BTS side Traffic shaping and congestion management Issue 02 (2010-09-20) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source SN Slot No. 46-9 . Ltd. 0 Network planning SN Slot No. 17 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

0 Network planning WQDT Queue Display Type PQ Network planning DRPTYPE Drop Type REJECT (REJECT) Network planning UPTHP Upper Limit 3 Network planning CGTHP Congestion Threshold 4 Network planning RSTHP Restore Threshold 4 Network planning SPENABLE Shaping Enable YES(Yes) Network planning SPBW Shaping Bandwidth [32K] 3200 Network planning Table 46-13 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring IP PATH for the Abis interface Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source Logical port PN Logical Port No.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source PN Port No. 0 Network planning GRPID Transport Resource Group No. Ltd.. 0 Network planning BANDWIDTH Bandwidth of the Logical Port [32kbps] 10 Network planning SRN Subrack No. 0 Network planning LPN Logical Port No. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . 0 Network planning ISFIRSTCLAS S Is First Class Transport Resource Group YES(Yes) Network planning Resource group 46-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type IP PATH LDR attributes 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source LOCTRMBAN D Local Class Transport Resource Bandwidth [kbps] 10 Network planning PATHID IP Path ID 1 Network planning INTTYPE Interface Type ABISINT(Abis Interface) Network planning BTSID BTS Index 0 Network planning PATHT IP Path Type CS(CS) Network planning TRMBAND Transport Resource Bandwidth [kbps] 10 Network planning CARRYFLAG Carry Flag LOGPORT (Logical Port) Network planning LPN Logical Port No. 46-11 . 0 Network planning LDRFST LDR First PSDOWN(PS Downspeeding) Network planning Table 46-14 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring ABIS MUX Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source BSC/BTS ABISMUXF LAG ABIS-MUX Global Enable Flag ENABLE(Enable) Network planning SRVTYPE Service Type CSVOICE(CS Voice) Network planning Table 46-15 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring LAPD Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source WINADJSWIT CH LAPD window adjust switch ALLOW(Allow) Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.

. Table 46-18 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GDPUP 46-12 Parameter Example Source PCU Type INNER(Inner PCU) BSC internal planning Subrack No.3 Gb over IP Configuration Data This provides the configuration data of the IP transmission over the Gb interface.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission Table 46-16 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring IP PM Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source BTSID BTS Index 0 BSC internal planning DIRECTION Direction DOWN (DOWN)/UP (UP) BSC internal planning SERVICETYPE Service Type CSVOICE (CS Voice) BSC internal planning PMPRD IPPM Packet Send Period[100ms] 1 BSC internal planning Table 46-17 Example of the data negotiated and planned for setting the BTS Ping Switch to Off Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source BTSPINGSWIT CH BTS Ping Switch OFF(Off) Network planning 46. 8 BSC internal planning Board Type GDPUP BSC internal planning Back Type NONE(Independent Mode) BSC internal planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . 0 BSC internal planning Slot No.

0 Network planning AN Auto Neg ENABLE (ENABLE) Network planning MTU MTU 1000 Network planning GBIPTYPE GBIPTYPE Gb-interface Communicat ion IP type DEVIP (Device IP address) Network planning Device IP address IPADDR IP address 12.13.12 Network planning MASK Subnet mask 255.13. 46-13 .4 Network planning IPADDR IP address 15.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission Table 46-19 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GFGUG Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source Board attributes SRN Subrack No.255..12. Ltd.255. 0 Network planning SN Slot No.13 Network planning MASK Subnet mask 255.13.15. 0 Network planning IPADDR2 Standby IP address 13. 0 Network planning IPINDEX IP address index 0 Network planning IPADDR IP address 13.15.255. 0 Network planning PORT Port No.12. 18 Network planning BT Board Type GFGUG Network planning PORTTYPE Port Type FE Network planning BACKTYP E Back Type OUTPEER (Active/ Standby Mode) Network planning PN Port No.13.255.0 Network planning IP attributes Port IP address BSC route Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

15 Negotiating with the peer end UDPPN UDP Port No. Ltd.1 Network planning Table 46-20 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the SGSN Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source SGSN node CNOPNAME Operator Name 46000 BSC internal planning CNID SGSN Node ID 1 Negotiating with the peer end NSEI NSE Identifier 1 Negotiating with the peer end SRN Agent Subrack No.13. 0 BSC internal planning PT Subnetwork Protocol Type GB_OVER_IP (Gb over IP) Negotiating with the peer end NSVLI Local NSVL Identifier 0 Negotiating with the peer end IP IP Address 12.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source MASK Subnet mask 255.13. 5000 Negotiating with the peer end SIGLW Signaling Load Weight 100 Negotiating with the peer end SRVLW Traffic Load Weight 100 Negotiating with the peer end NSVLI Remote NSVL Identifier 1 Negotiating with the peer end IP IP Address 15.15.12.12.255.15. 0 Network planning GATEWAY Gateway IP address 13.. 5555 Negotiating with the peer end SIGLW Signaling Load Weight 100 Negotiating with the peer end NSE Local NSVL Remote NSVL 46-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.12 Negotiating with the peer end UDPPN UDP Port No. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .255.

0 Network planning WQDT Queue Display Type PQ Network planning DRPTYPE Discarding Type REJECT(REJECT) Network planning UPTHP Upper Discarding Threshold 3 Network planning CGTHP Congestion Threshold 4 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type PTPBVC 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source Traffic Load Weight Traffic Load Weight 100 Negotiating with the peer end BVCI PTPBVC Identifier 2 BSC internal planning IDXTYPE Index Type BYCELLNAME (By Cell Name) BSC internal planning CELLNAME Cell Name CELL_1 BSC internal planning Table 46-21 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BFD link detection over the Gb interface Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IPINDEX Local IP Index 0 Network planning PEERIP Peer IP 13..1 Network planning MINTXINTERVA L Minimum TX Interval[ms] 30 Network planning MINRXINTERVA L Minimum RX Interval[ms] 30 Network planning DETECTMULT DetectMult 3 Network planning Table 46-22 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring traffic shaping over the Gb interface and congestion management Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source SRN Subrack No. 18 Network planning PN Port No.13.13. Ltd. 0 Network planning SN Slot No. 46-15 .

the static route is not required. BSC.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source RSTHP Restore Threshold 4 Network planning SPENABLE Shaping Enable YES(Yes) Network planning SPBW Shaping Bandwidth [32K] 3200 Network planning 46. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. When the BSC is directly connected to the MSC or MGW or the network is in Layer 2 topology. the BSC must be configured with the route to the MGW. l The BSC supports communication through the device IP address or port IP address. the BSC should be configured with the route to the peer device even if the IP address of the MSC or MGW is on the same network segment with the port IP address of the BSC. the peer device should be configured with the static route to the IP address of the BSC even if the BSC is directly connected to the peer device. Impact None. The compressed speech coding scheme is still used. Prerequisite l Configure the A over IP that is restricted by the license. the procedures for configuring the GFGUA and GOGUA are the same. MSC.4 Configuring A over IP This describes how to configure A over IP on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Preparation Except for different configuration parameters between the GFGUA and GOGUA. Ltd.. secondary speech coding/decoding can be avoided if the calling party and called party use the same speech coding scheme. MGW When the IP transmission is used over the A interface. l The A/Abis interface board can be configured with only one device IP address. When an MS calls another MS in the network. For details. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . l When the device IP address is used for communication. NEs Involved BTS. l When the A interface is directly connected to the BSC. the speech quality is enhanced and the resources are saved. Scenario The A over IP is used for signaling and CS signals transmission in the BSS system. The Gb interface board can be configured with up to five device IP addresses. The following procedure is an example 46-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Thus. l The Abis over IP supports only IPv4. When the port IP address is used for communication. the functions of the GTCS are implemented by the MGW and the BSC does not perform transcoding. and thus the transmission bandwidth is reduced on the A interface. see Activate BSC License.

1 A over IP Configuration Data. It is classified into the 2 MHz clock and 2 Mbit/s clock. 1. For the configuration data. 3. Run the SET ETHPORTPROP command and set Port Type to configure the port attribute of the GFGUA. Step 3 Configure the M3UA entities. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. go to Step 5. see 46. NOTE In A over IP mode. the transfer entity must be configured. l If the GE transmission is used. run the ADD SROPCMAP command to configure the subrack-OPC mapping. run the ADD BRD command to add the GFGUA. It has two input modes: BITS0 and BITS1. one GFGUA can be configured with two ports numbered zero and four. you need to set Using STP to YES (Yes). 2. Run the ADD M3DE to configure the destination entity. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. When configuring the destination entity. Run the MOD SCUCLK command and configure the 8 kHz reference clock for the GEPS. Run the MOD SCUCLK command and configure the 8 kHz reference clock for the GMPS.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission of configuring the GFGUAs in active/standby mode in the GMPS subrack. Ltd. Procedure Step 1 Configure BSC attributes. On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. run the MOD BSCBASIC command and set Service mode to AIP(AIP). 3. 2. The BSC obtains the BITS clock from the input port of synchronous clock signals on the GGCU to provide the reference clock for the GMPS/GEPS. run the ADD M3LE command to configure the local entity. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 2. Step 2 Configure the BSC clock. 1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Set Back Type to OUTSHARE(LoadShare Mode) or OUTPEER(Active/Standby Mode) to enhance the networking reliability. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Run the SET ITFIPTYPE command and set A-interface Communication IP type. 46-17 . run the ADD CLKSRC command to configure the system clock. 3. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. the clock source of the BSC can be only a BITS clock. Step 4 Configure subrack-OPC mapping. one GFGUA can be configured with eight ports numbered from zero to seven. one GOGUA can be configured with two ports numbered zero and one.5. l If the GE transmission is used. NOTE l If the FE transmission is used. Run the ADD M3STE command to configure the transfer entity. 1. NOTE If there is no direct physical link between the local entity and the destination entity. The BITS clock is obtained from the BITS device. Step 5 Configure the GFGUA/GOGUA. If the communication type is PORTIP(PORT IP).

Run the ADD IPRT command and configure the BSC route. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . 46-18 1. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Configure several IP address index. thus implementing the separation between signaling and traffic data on the bearer network. if the BSC performs communication through device IP addresses. l In active/standby mode. port IP addresses must be on different network segments. Step 6 Configure a link over the A interface.. NOTE The device IP address is the logical IP address used for communication. run the ADD M3LKS command to configure the M3UA link set. 5. Run the ADD DEVIP command to configure the device IP address. Run the ADD M3RT command to configure the M3UA route. that is. 6. add a BSC route after their port IP addresses are configured. Different IP addresses are mapped to different VPNs. The active and standby interface boards must be configured with the same IP address. Run the ADD M3LNK command and configure the M3UA link to achieve the configuration of the IP transmission over the A interface. 3. The principles of configuring the port IP address are as follows: l The IP address of the port and that of the device must be on different network segments. l Each port can be configured with six IP addresses and all IP addresses of each port must be configured on different network segments. The address is valid for all the ports on the board. In load sharing mode.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission 4. 2. the IP addresses of related ports must be configured on the same network segment. then the two boards for load sharing must use the same device IP address.. Run the ADD PHYPORTIP command to configure the port IP address. Regardless of whether device IP addresses or port IP addresses are used for communication. several IP addresses are configured to each port. l Gateway IP Address should be on the same network segment as the port IP address of the GFGUA. NOTE The principles of configuring the BSC route are as follows: l Destination IP Address should be set as the destination network address but not a single IP address. Ltd. l If the active and standby GFGUAs are configured. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. NOTE The following two methods implement the separation between signaling and traffic data over the A interface on the bearer network. l The signaling and traffic data are mapped to different VPNs through different ports to implement their separation on the bearer network.

1. The network device of layer three maps different DSCPs to different Per-Hop Behaviors (PHBs). The BFD (Bidirectional Forwarding Detection) and ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) are used for link detection. But if the SCTP multi-homing function is required. Configure the ARP detection on the BSC side. First Local IP Address is the device IP address of the interface board. 2. Besides. the M3UA link can be configured only when the device IP address is configured. 1.. Configure the traffic shaping for the physical port to restrict the burst flow in the network. Set Shaping Enable to YES(Yes) and set Shaping BandWidth[32K] to specify the data rate. Configure the priority mapping. In addition. NOTE If Back Type of the BSC is set to OUTPEER(Active/Standby Mode) and the standby board enables the BFD or ARP detection. the BFD and ARP function are not enabled because the board itself can automatically detect faults to guarantee the networking reliability. and Second Local IP Address is optional. Run the ADD BFD command to configure the BFD detection on the BSC side. Run the SET QOSPROP command. Ltd. For the configuration of the BFD detection over the A interface. the network device of layer two performs QoS scheduling based on the VLAN priority. Second Local IP Address must be set to the device IP address. and First Local IP Address and Second Local IP Address must be on different network segments. One physical port supports only one type of link detection. l Peer IP must be different from the device IP address and the port IP address. the BFD session is setup only when two ends of the link support the BFD and the parameters at two ends are consistent. Peer Standby Board IP need to be configured. But if the SCTP multihoming function is required. l When the port IP mode is used over the A interface. Second Local IP Address must be set to the port IP address. l Run the SET DSCPMAP command to configure the mapping between the DSCP and the VLAN priority. and Second Local IP Address is optional. In addition. the system must detect the fault when the link or the board is faulty to prevent the services from disruption. Configure the BFD or ARP according to the capability of the equipment at both ends and the requirement of networking reliability. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 8 Configure the QoS mechanism of the A interface. First Local IP Address can be selected from the list of port IP addresses of the interface boards. 2. Step 7 Configure the reliability mechanism of the A interface. NOTE The networking reliability can be guaranteed by configuring the back type over the A interface. The principles of configuring the BFD detection are as follows: l Port No. the M3UA link can be configured only when the device IP address is configured. NOTE The BSC maps the data onto different Differentiated Services Code Points (DSCPs) or different VLAN priorities and VLAN IDs. must be the number of the port that is configured with an IP address. and First Local IP Address and Second Local IP Address must be on different network segments. When one GFGUA or GOGUA board is configured in the BSC (independent mode). 46-19 . Run the ADD ARPDETECT command and configure the attributes of the ARP detection.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission NOTE l When the device IP mode is used over the A interface.

/*Add the M3UA link*/ ADD M3LNK: SIGLKSIDX=0. /*Add the Ethernet port IP address*/ ADD PHYPORTIP: SRN=0.255.1". Otherwise.3.3.5". DETECTMULT=3. /*Set the system clock*/ ADD CLKSRC: SRCTYPE=2M_ExternalClk0. You should configure the mapping between DSCP and VLAN priority to implement the mapping between the service priorities at the network layer and the service priorities at the data link layer. The Priority Queue (PQ) and Weighted Round Robin (WRR) techniques of queue scheduling can be used to solve the congestion problem.2. MINRXINTERVAL=30. / *Add the device IP address*/ ADD DEVIP: SRN=0. CNID=0. MTU=1000.255. SRN=0.2.255. PHB. /*Add subrack-OPC mapping*/ ADD SROPCMAP: SRN=0.5. RefClk=GGCU_FACE.5. the QoS scheduling is performed according to the DSCP. ----End Example Configure the IP transmission over the A interface. /*Add the M3UA link set*/ ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSIDX=0. LOCPN=4096. SN=14. PN=0. /*Add the M3UA local entity*/ ADD M3LE: NAME="m3le_1". Ltd. PT=FE.0".3. SN=14. DENO=0. DPC=h'cc. MASK="255. RefClk=GGCU_BACK. IPINDEX=0. /*Configure the QoS attributes of a port*/ /*Configure the traffic Shaping for a physical port*/ SET QOSPROP: SRN=0.5. PN=0. NAME="m3de_1". SN=14. /*Add the BFD*/ ADD BFD: SRN=0. RTCONTEXT=1. / *Set the 8 kHz reference clock for the GMPS*/ MOD SCUCLK: SRN=0. /*Set the service mode*/ MOD BSCBASIC: ServiceMode=AIP. PEERIP="3. the QoS scheduling is performed according to the VLAN priority. SN=14. GATEWAY="3.2. SRCSUBTYPE=2M_HZ. PORT=0. IPINDEX=0.3.. MINTXINTERVAL=30. /*Set the IP communication over the A interface*/ SET ITFIPTYPE: AIPTYPE=DEVIP.5. IPADDR="2. OPC=h'a1. RTCONTEXT=1. 3. IPADDR="5.2". IPADDR2="3.2.255. The Destination IP Address and the port IP address must be on the same network segment. Congestion occurs when the data arrive at the port at a higher rate than the data sending rate of the port.3. PEERIP1="5. SSN=254. SRCSUBTYPE=2M_Bps. ADD CLKSRC: SRCTYPE=2M_ExternalClk1.3. BT=GFGUA.2". OPC=h'a1.0". and DSCP related to the service type over the A interface to achieve their mapping. PortType=FE. /*Priority mapping*/ /*Configure the mapping between the DSCP and the VLAN 46-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. PRIORITY=2.255. Run the SET QOSPROP command and set Queue Display Type to REJECT or Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED) to manage the congestion. AN=ENABLE. MASK="255. If VLAN Flag is set to ENABLE(Enable). /*Add the GFGUA*/ ADD BRD: SRN=0. Congestion management. SN=14.3". SN=14.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission l Run the ADD IPVLANMAP command to configure the mapping between the IP and the VLAN. LOCIP1="2. PRIORITY=1. MASK="255. / *Set the attribute of an Ethernet port*/ SET ETHPORTPROP: SRN=0. SN=14.3.0". /*Add the M3UA destination entity*/ ADD M3DE: DENO=0. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . /*Add the M3UA route*/ ADD M3RT: DENO=0. /*Add a BSC route*/ ADD IPRT: SRN=0. / *Set the 8 kHz reference clock for the GEPS*/ MOD SCUCLK: SRN=1. SPENABLE=YES. PN=0.3. BT=GFGUA.255.0". NAME="m3linkset_1". IPADDR="3. The example script of configuring the GFGUA in active/standby mode and configuring the device communication type and the BFD detection. SPBW=3200.4". l Run the SET SRVVLANMAP command and set VLAN ID. SIGLKSIDX=0. PEERPN=4096. BackType=OUTPEER.1".

VLANID=2. TRMTYPE=IP. VLANID=2. NEs Involved BTS. Impact None. SRVTYPE=CSVOICE. see Verifying the Physical Links on the A Interface (A over IP) in the BSC Commissioning Guide. For details. It is not supported by 3900 series base stations. The Gb interface board can be configured with up to five device IP addresses. l The Abis over IP supports only IPv4. When the port IP address is used for communication. see Verifying the Control Plane on the A Interface (A over IP) in the BSC Commissioning Guide. It does not support the HubBTS and TDM/IP hybrid transport. VLANFLAG=ENABLE. DSCP.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission priority*/ SET DSCPMAP: SRN=0. Preparation Except for different configuration parameters between the GFGUB and GOGUB. the BSC and BTS directly start BFD to perform link detection. RSTHP=4. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. VLANPRI=7. l The BFD is supported by only 3012 series base stations. CGTHP=4. DSCP=0. BSC. PN=0. the procedures for configuring the GFGUB and GOGUB are the same. DSCP=0. For details. Ltd.3. Verify that the control plane on the A interface is normal. UPTHP=3. /*Configure the mapping between the IP address and the VLAN priority*/ ADD IPVLANMAP: SRN=0. l The Abis over IP supports only the built-in PCU and BTS star topology. the static route is not required. The following procedure is an example Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. MGW. the BTS cannot use the device IP address for communication. PHB=EF. MSC. SN=14. 2. SN=14. WQDT=PQ. Postrequisite l Verifying A over IP 1.5 Configuring Abis over IP This describes how to configure Abis over IP on the Local Maintenance Terminal. and SGSN Prerequisite l Configure the Abis over IP that is restricted by the license. Scenario The Abis over IP is used for signaling and CS signals transmission in the BSS system.5". /*Configure the mapping of the service type. DSTIPADDR="3. the peer device should be configured with the static route to the IP address of the BSC even if the BSC is directly connected to the peer device. 46. SN=14. and VLAN ID*/ SET SRVVLANMAP: ITFTYPE=A. l The BSC supports communication through the device IP address or port IP address. For details. l When the device IP address is used for communication. l The A/Abis interface board can be configured with only one device IP address. /*Perform the congestion management with priority queue (PQ)*/ SET QOSPROP: SRN=0. Verify that the physical links on the A interface is normal. 46-21 ..3. In this scenario. see Activate BSC License. DRPTYPE=REJECT. l For a layer 2 topology in Abis over IP.

Run the SET ETHPORTPROP command and set Port Type to configure the port attribute of the GFGUB. 4. NOTE l If the FE transmission is used. run the ADD BRD command to add the GFGUB. For the configuration data. The active and standby interface boards must be configured with the same IP address. one GFGUB can be configured with two ports numbered zero and four. 2. Set Back Type to OUTSHARE(LoadShare Mode) or OUTPEER(Active/Standby Mode) to enhance the networking reliability.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission of configuring two GFGUBs in the GMPS subrack.. NOTE The device IP address is the logical IP address used for communication. Run the ADD PHYPORTIP command to configure the port IP address. l If the GE transmission is used. 46-22 Run the ADD IPRT command and configure the BSC route. In load sharing mode.2 Abis over IP Configuration Data. Step 2 Configure the GFGUB/GOGUB. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. one GOGUB can be configured with two ports numbered zero and one. Run the SET ITFIPTYPE command and set Abis-interface Communication IP type. go to Step 2. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 6. if the BSC performs communication through device IP addresses. If the communication type is PORTIP(PORT IP). port IP addresses must be on different network segments. 1. l Each port can be configured with six IP addresses and all IP addresses of each port must be configured on different network segments. 3. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . the IP addresses of related ports must be configured on the same network segment. Run the ADD DEVIP command to configure the device IP address. then the two boards for load sharing must use the same device IP address. l In active/standby mode. l If the GE transmission is used. Procedure Step 1 Configure BSC attributes. run the SET ITFIPTYPE command to set Abisinterface Communication IP type. one GFGUB can be configured with eight ports numbered from zero to seven. see 46.5. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd. NOTE The principles of configuring the port IP address are as follows: l The IP address of the port and that of the device must be on different network segments. Regardless of whether device IP addresses or port IP addresses are used for communication. 5. The address is valid for all the ports on the board.

Step 4 Configure the Clock Over IP and configure the clock synchronization information of the IP transmission network. must be the number of the port that is configured with an IP address. the BFD session can be established. 1. and Interval Synchronization Start Time[Minute]. The IP Clock Server obtains the clock source from other devices and sends the clock synchronization messages to the BTS (IP Clock Client) through the IP network. Run the ADD BTSBFD command and configure the BFD link detection on the BTS side. Configure the ARP detection on the BSC side. Run the SET QOSPROP command. l Peer IP must be different from the device IP address and the port IP address. b.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission NOTE The principles of configuring the BSC route are as follows: l Destination IP Address should be set as the destination the network address but not a single IP address.. Interval Synchronization Start Time[Hour]. Step 3 Configure the reliability mechanism for the Abis interface. On the BTS side. Run the ADD ARPDETECT command and configure the attributes of the ARP link detection. l In intermittent synchronizing mode. Ltd. l In the case of active and standby boards. The principles of configuring the BFD link detection are as follows: l Port No. Configure the traffic shaping for the physical port to restrict the burst flow in the network. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 46-23 . Set Clock Synchronization Mode to CONSYN (Consecutive Synchronizing) or INTERSYN(Intermittent Synchronizing) to configure the synchronization mode between IP Clock Server and IP Clock Client. The BFD detection over the Abis interface requires the support of the BTS and BSC. NOTE The reliability of the Abis over IP networking is the same as that of the A over IP. l In consecutive synchronizing mode. set Peer Standby Board IP.4 Configuring A over IP. a. NOTE When the BSC enables the OUTPEER(Active/Standby Mode) networking mode and the BFD or ARP link detection is enabled on the standby board. the BTS works as the Client of Clock over IP to send datagram continuously for clock synchronization. For details. see the Configure the reliability mechanism for the A interface. 1. When the parameters of both sides are consistent. set parameters corresponding to the BSC. l Gateway IP Address should be on the same network segment as the port IP address of the GFGUB. 2. add a BSC route after their port IP addresses are configured. in the 46. Step 5 Configure the QoS mechanism of the Abis interface. Run the MOD IPCLKSRV command. Run the ADD BFD command and configure the BFD link detection on the BSC side. the BTS works as the Client of Clock over IP and keep the clock synchronization with the Server according to Interim Synchronization Period [Day]. Set Shaping Enable to YES(Yes) and set Shaping BandWidth[32K] to specify the data rate.

If VLAN Flag is set to ENABLE(Enable). l Run the MOD BTSVLAN command and perform the service schedule in the transmission network according to different DSCP. That is. the network device of layer two performs QoS scheduling based on the VLAN priority. 46-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Run the ADD IPVLANMAP command to configure the mapping between the IP and the VLAN. thus enhancing the security of the network. l When the IP PATH is carried on the logical port. The admission control for the MS is based on the following parameters: Local Class Transport Resource Bandwidth[kbps].. is configured for one BSC board and Physical Port No. Configure the congestion management. and DSCP related to the service type over the A interface to achieve their mapping.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission 2. logical port. l Run the SET SRVVLANMAP command and set VLAN ID. VLANPRI of different Service Type. Ltd. 1. run the ADD LOGICALPORT command to implement several logical ports with logical bandwidth on one physical port. Configure the priority mapping. The services and signaling can be logically separated according to VLANID. You should configure the mapping between DSCP and VLAN priority to implement the mapping between the service priorities at the network layer and the service priorities at the data link layer. Configure the logical port or resource group. The Destination IP Address and the port IP address must be on the same network segment. The network device of layer three maps different DSCPs to different Per-Hop Behaviors (PHBs). Congestion Bandwidth Threshold[%]. l Run the SET DSCPMAP command to configure the mapping between the DSCP and the VLAN priority. Otherwise. Step 6 Configure the IP PATH over the Abis interface. Several BTSs can share the port bandwidth on the physical port to guarantee proper bandwidth for each BTS. The parameters must be consistent with those on the BSC side. Run the SET QOSPROP command and set Queue Display Type to REJECT or Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED) to manage the congestion. l Set Reserved Bandwidth Threshold[%] > Congestion Bandwidth Threshold[%] > Congestion Clear Bandwidth Threshold[%] to implement two-level admission control. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . which is carried on the physical port. the QoS scheduling depends on the DSCP. specifies the physical port carried by the logical port. the services must be controlled when the services access through the IP PATH and logical port. The Priority Queue (PQ) and Weighted Round Robin (WRR) techniques of queue scheduling can be used to solve the congestion problem. NOTE The BSC maps the data onto different Differentiated Services Code Points (DSCPs) or different VLAN priorities and VLAN IDs. 3. Reserved Bandwidth Threshold[%]. NOTE The IP PATH is a logical link with virtual bandwidth. NOTE l One Logical Port No. the QoS scheduling depends on the VLAN priority. PHB. and Congestion Clear Bandwidth Threshold [%]. VLANID. or resource groups to achieve multi-level admission control. Congestion occurs when the data arrive at the port at a higher rate than the data sending rate of the port.

The packets with the same attributes can be multiplexed. 2. Set MUX Sub Frame Threshold.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission l If the bandwidth of the intermediate transmission network restricts the access of services. MUX Packet Length Threshold. each BTS can be configured with one CS IP path or one PS IP path. NOTE l The IP path ID must be unique in one BSC. each BTS can be configured with one QoS IP path. and QoS (carries both CS and PS). the services must be controlled when the services access through the IP PATH and logical port. destination IP address. Reserved Bandwidth Threshold[%]>Congestion Bandwidth Threshold[%]>Congestion Clear Bandwidth Threshold[%]. l IP PATH Type consists of CS. That is. NOTE The Abis MUX technology is used to multiplex several packets into one packet. only the packets that have the same source IP addresses. l Set Local Class Transport Resource Bandwidth[kbps] and set Reserved Bandwidth Threshold[%]>Congestion Bandwidth Threshold[%]>Congestion Clear Bandwidth Threshold[%] to configure the bandwidth and threshold of resource groups. Run the ADD IPPATH command to configure the IP PATH. you are advised to set the IP PATH to be carried on the resource groups. 3. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1ms] to configure the multiplexing mode. Configure the congestion management. l A maximum of five levels can be configured for the transport resource group. Upper Class Transport Resource Group No. If IP Path Type is set to QoS. must be identified to perform multi-level admission control. If IP Path Type is set to CS or PS. the IP BTS must connect the GFGUB/GOGUB in the BSC. Ltd. That is. The group number of the upper class transport resource must be different from that of the lower class transport resource. the physical port that corresponds to the logical port must be the port on the board on the BSC side. Each BTS can be configured with multiple IP paths for carrying various services. l The entered BTS Index must exist. Step 7 Configure the Abis MUX on the BSC and BTS. 46-25 . PS. destination IP address. and one IP path can correspond to only one logical port. l If Carry Flag is set to LOGPORT(Logical Port). NOTE l If Is First Class Transport Resource Group is set to NO(No). In addition. l When multi-level resource group is configured. Run the ADD BSCABISMUXFLOW command and set Service Type for the BTS. the upper-level transport resource bandwidth cannot be higher than the local-level transport resource bandwidth. Then. but one logical port can correspond to multiple IP paths. 1. and DSCP value can be multiplexed into one packet. Run the SET BSCABISMUXPARA command and set ABIS-MUX Global Enable Flag to ENABLE(Enable). To reduce the speed of the accessed services during the congestion control and bandwidth reserve can improve the system capacity. and service type can be multiplexed and the peer end can correctly demultiplex. 2. Run the ADD RSCGRP command to configure the resource groups. Then.. Then the packets with the same source IP addresses. l Set Transport Resource Bandwidth[kbps] to allocate the bandwidth. two-level admission control can be implemented. and Time Out[0. Run the SET LDR command and set from LDR First to LDR Fourth to achieve the dynamic TCHF-TCHH conversion of the CS services and the downspeeding of the PS services. the efficiency of the IP transmission over the Abis interface is improved.

SN=17. ----End Example Configure the IP transmission over the Abis interface. Set BTS Index to specify a BTS detected by the IP PM. perform the IP PM function from the BSC to the BTS. Run the MOD PTUPARA command. IPINDEX=0. MASK="255. SN=17. Ltd.255.6.5.8. 46-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 4. Then. This function requires the support of the BTS and BSC. the BTS discards all ping packets. IPADDR2="8.8. SN=17. This is called ping attack. the BTS responds to the ping requests. PN=0. /*Add the device IP address*/ ADD DEVIP: SRN=0. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .0". MASK="255. NOTE The IP PM monitors the transmission network by rapidly detecting the QoS of the intermediate network.5. If BTS Ping Switch is set to ON(On). PortType=FE. the network KPIs are improved. SN=17.1".255. /*Add the GFGUB*/ ADD BRD: SRN=0.. /*Add the Port IP address*/ ADD PHYPORTIP: SRN=0. Step 9 Configure the IP Performance Monitor (IP PM). BT=GFGUB. /*Set the IP communication type over the Abis interface*/ SET ITFIPTYPE: AIPTYPE=DEVIP.0". AN=ENABLE. the sending end sends the FM message periodically and then determines the packet loss based on the BR message received from the receiving end.255. the BTS receives all ping packets. which belongs to DOS attack.255. if the parameter is set to OFF(Off). DETECTMULT=3. The example script of configuring the GFGUB in active/standby mode and configuring the device communication type and the BFD detection. MASK="255. PN=0. /*Add the BFD*/ ADD BFD: SRN=0. BT=GFGUB. perform the IP PM function from the BTS to the BSC. IPADDR="8.6.3". Step 8 Configure the LAPD optimization. l Run the ADD IPPM command and set Direction to UP. NOTE The impacts of configuring the LAPD optimization are as follows: l The QoS tolerance of the LAPD link is enhanced and the call drop rate due to poor quality of the link is reduced.8. Run the MOD PTUPARA command and set ABIS-MUX Global Enable Flag to ENABLE(Enable). l The flow retransmission is decreased and the utilization of the bandwidth is improved. SN=17.4". GATEWAY="8.8. IPINDEX=0.255. Step 10 Set BTS Ping Switch to Off. Run the ADD BTSABISMUXFLOW command and configure the parameters corresponding to those on the BSC side. PEERIP="8. Run the SET OTHSOFTPARA command and set LAPD window adjust switch to ALLOW (Allow) to start the LAPD optimization.8. NOTE If the external device frequently pings the BTS.8.0". PORT=0. The BTS may break down if it is pinged a lot.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission 3.8. The length of the period is determined by IPPM Packet Send Period[100ms]. /*Add the BSC route*/ ADD IPRT: SRN=0. PT=FE. ADD BTSBFD: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. IPADDR="6.0". MTU=1000. Thus.255. l Run the ADD IPPM command and set Direction to DOWN.6". When an IP PM session is activated. MINRXINTERVAL=30. BackType=OUTPEER. / *Set the attribute of an Ethernet port*/ SET ETHPORTPROP: SRN=0. Then. SN=17. IPADDR="5. MINTXINTERVAL=30.3".8.

/*Configure the resource group*/ ADD RSCGRP: SRN=0. CARRYFLAG=LOGPORT. For details. SRVTYPE=CSVOICE. Scenario Issue 02 (2010-09-20) The Gb over IP is used for signaling and PS signals transmission in the BSS system. SERVICETYPE=CSVOICE. GRPID=0. MINRXINTERVAL=30. SN=17. VLANPRI=7. INTTYPE=ABISINT. BTSPINGSWITCH=OFF. DIRECTION=UP. and VLANID*/ MOD BTSVLAN: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. SN=17. For details. ISFIRSTCLASS=YES. ADD IPPM: BTSID=0. LPN=0. PN=0. /*Priority mapping*/ /*Configure the mapping between the DSCP and the VLAN priority*/ SET DSCPMAP: SRN=0. Postrequisite l Verifying Abis over IP 1. BTSIDX=0. see Verifying the Control Plane on the Abis Interface (Abis over IP) in the BSC Commissioning Guide. SERVICETYPE=CSVOICE. /*Configure the IP PM*/ ADD IPPM: BTSID=0. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.5". PMPRD=1. PATHT=CS. /*Configure the LAPD optimization*/ SET OTHSOFTPARA: WINADJSWITCH=ALLOW. DSCP=0.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission BTSIDX=0.8. SN=17. Verify that the control plane on the A interface is normal. UPTHP=3. /*Add the data record of the Abis MUX on the BTS side and set the service type to CS Voice*/ ADD BTSABISMUXFLOW: IDXTYPE=BYNAME.9. WQDT=PQ. ABISMUXFLAG=ENABLE. / *Configure the IP PATH*/ ADD IPPATH: PATHID=1. IDXTYPE=BYNAME. TRMTYPE=IP. VLANID=2. SN=17. SERVICETYPE=CSVOICE.9. SHPA=3. SN=17. DSCP=0. SLOTNO=17. MINTXINTERVAL=30. / *Add the data record of the Abis MUX on the BSC side and set the service type to CS Voice*/ ADD BSCABISMUXFLOW: SRN=0. SRVTYPE=CSVOICE. BTSNAME="BTS3012". PN=0. Ltd. SRVTYPE=CSVOICE. /*Perform the congestion management with priority queue (PQ)*/ SET QOSPROP: SRN=0. PMPRD=1. PHB=EF. BANDWIDTH=10. and VLANID*/ SET SRVVLANMAP: ITFTYPE=Abis. VLANID=2. VLANSWITCH=YES. SHPC=3.1". DRPTYPE=REJECT.8. BTSNAME="BTS3012". DETECTMULT=3. DSCP. VLANID=2. DSCP. PN=0.. CGTHP=4. BTSID=0. /*Configure the IP PATH over the Abis interface*/ /*Configure the logical port*/ ADD LOGICALPORT: SRN=0. LOCTRMBAND=10. /*Configure the QoS attribute of a port*/ /*Configure the traffic shaping for a physical port*/ SET QOSPROP: SRN=0. VLANFLAG=ENABLE. /*Configure the mapping of the service type on the BTS side. DSTIPADDR="8. 2. 46. SPBW=3200. /*Configure the Clock Over IP*/ MOD IPCLKSRV: CLOSERIP="9. TRMBAND=10. BTSWTR=0. DIRECTION=DOWN. BTSNAME="BTS3012". LPN=0. /*Configure BTS Ping Switch to Off*/ MOD PTUPARA: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. /*Configure the congestion management*/ SET LDR: LDRFST=PSDOWN. /*Configure the Abis MUX*/ /*Set ABIS-MUX Global Enable Flag of the interface board on the BSC side to Enable*/ SET BSCABISMUXPARA: SRN=0. SPENABLE=YES. 46-27 . SHPB=3. SYNMODE=CONSYN. /*Set ABIS-MUX Global Enable Flag of the interface board on the BTS side to Enable*/ MOD PTUPARA: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. SN=17. RSTHP=4.6 Configuring Gb over IP This describes how to configure Gb over IP on the Local Maintenance Terminal. VLANPRI=7. /*Configure the mapping between the IP address and the VLAN priority*/ ADD IPVLANMAP: SRN=0. Verify that the physical links on the Abis interface is normal. DSCP=0. see Verifying the Physical Links on the Abis Interface (Abis over IP) in the BSC Commissioning Guide. ABISMUXFLAG=ENABLE. BTSIDX=0. /*Configure the mapping of the service type.

Run the ADD BRD command to add a GDPUP. see Activate BSC License. l Configure the Gb over IP that is restricted by the license. l If the GE transmission is used. the peer device should be configured with the static route to the IP address of the BSC even if the BSC is directly connected to the peer device. run the SET PCUTYPE command to set PCU Type to INNER(Inner PCU). Run the ADD DEVIP to configure the device IP address. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . 2. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Preparation For the GFGUG configuration data. If the communication type is PORTIP(PORT IP). one GFGUG can be configured with eight ports numbered from zero to seven. 46-28 3.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission Impact None. one GFGUG can be configured with two ports numbered zero and four. Run the SET ETHPORTPROP command and set Port Type to configure the port attributes of the GFGUG. 1. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. 1. When the port IP address is used for communication. Procedure Step 1 Configure the GDPUP. NOTE l If the FE transmission is used. NEs Involved BTS.5. 2. see 46. l When the device IP address is used for communication. Set Back Type to OUTPEER(Active/Standby Mode) to enhance the networking reliability. run the ADD BRD command to add a GFGUG. l An empty slot for configuring the GFGUG is in the subrack. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. l The BSC supports communication through the device IP address or port IP address. It is not supported by 3900 series base stations.. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 4. For details. The Gb interface board can be configured with up to five device IP addresses. Step 2 Configure the GFGUG. l The BFD is supported by only 3012 series base stations. the static route is not required. BSC and SGSN Prerequisite l The built-in PCU is configured. l The A/Abis interface board can be configured with only one device IP address.3 Gb over IP Configuration Data. Run the SET ITFIPTYPE command and set Gb-interface Communication IP type. go to Step 2.

The address is valid for all the ports on the board. NOTE The Gb interface does not support the VLAN priority mapping. l In the case of active and standby boards. 5. run the ADD SGSNNODE command to configure the SGSN. BT=GDPUP. l Gateway IP Address must be on the same network segment as the port IP address of the GFGUG. 4. Step 4 The networking reliability configuration of Gb over IP is the same as that of A over IP. l Each port can be configured with six IP addresses and all IP addresses of each port must be configured on different network segments. BackType=NONE.. Run the ADD NSVLLOCAL command to configure local NSVL. add a BSC route after their port IP addresses are configured. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2. ----End Example Configure the IP transmission over the Gb interface. /*Configure the built-in PCU*/ SET PCUTYPE: TYPE=INNER. The example script of configuring the GFGUG in active/standby mode and configuring the device communication type and the BFD detection. in the 46. see the Configure the QoS mechanism of the A interface. Step 3 Configure Gb over IP. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 3. Run the ADD NSE command to configure the NSE. l In active/standby mode. 5. Run the ADD PTPBVC command to configure the PTPBVC.4 Configuring A over IP. in the 46. /*Configure the built-in PCU and the GDPUP*/ ADD BRD: SRN=0. see the Configure the reliability mechanism of the A interface. Run the ADD IPRT command and configure the BSC route. Run the ADD PHYPORTIP command to configure the port IP address. For details.4 Configuring A over IP. NOTE The principles of configuring the port IP address are as follows: l The IP address of the port and that of the device must be on different network segments. Run the ADD NSVLREMOTE command to configure remote NSVL. 46-29 .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission NOTE The device IP address is the logical IP address used for communication. NOTE The principles of configuring the BSC route are as follows: l Destination IP Address should be set as the destination the network address but not a single IP address. Step 5 The QoS mechanism configuration of the Gb interface is the same as that of the A interface. the IP addresses of related ports must be configured on the same network segment. 6. For details. SN=8. 1. Ltd..

For details. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. SRVLW=100. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . CELLNAME="CELL_1". ADD NSE: NSEI=1. RSTHP=4.12. IDXTYPE=BYCELLNAME.0". BackType=OUTPEER.0". PortType=FE. PN=0. MTU=1000. PN=0. SPBW=3200.0". WQDT=PQ. SIGLW=100. PEERIP="13. UDPPN=5000. IPADDR="13. SPENABLE=YES. GATEWAY="13. BVCI=2. For details. For details. see Verifying the IP Routes on the Gb Interface in the BSC Commissioning Guide.12. SN=18. /*Set the Ethernet port attribute*/ SET ETHPORTPROP: SRN=0. MINRXINTERVAL=30. CnOpName="46000". DRPTYPE=REJECT.255. SRVLW=100. DETECTMULT=3. PN=0.13". BT=GFGUG.15". PT=FE. /*Configure the QoS attribute of a port*/ /*Configure traffic shaping for a physical port*/ SET QOSPROP: SRN=0.15. CNId=1. Verify that the PTP BVCs are available. SIGLW=100. IPADDR2="13.13. see Verifying the PTPBVC in the BSC Commissioning Guide. /*Add the Port IP address*/ ADD PHYPORTIP: SRN=0. CNId=1. UDPPN=5555. MASK="255. ADD PTPBVC: NSEI=1. NSEI=1. IPINDEX=0. MINTXINTERVAL=30. /*Add the BSC route*/ ADD IPRT: SRN=0.1". IPADDR="12.255. ADD NSVLREMOTE: NSVLI=1.15. Ltd. UPTHP=3.12.12". 3.13.15. /*Add the BFD*/ ADD BFD: SRN=0. SN=18. Verify that the IP routes on the Gb interface are normal. see Verifying the SIGBVC in the BSC Commissioning Guide. IP="15.12". SN=18. PN=0. ISNCMODE=STATIC. SN=18. IP="12..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission /*Add the GFGUG*/ ADD BRD: SRN=0. SN=18.255. CGTHP=4. SN=18. MASK="255. PORT=0.15.0". SN=18. SRN=0. /*Configure Gb over IP*/ ADD SGSNNODE: CnOpName="46000". PT=GB_OVER_IP. ADD NSVLLOCAL: NSVLI=0.255. Verify that the SIG BVCs are available.13. Verify that the NSVLs are available. Postrequisite l 46-30 Verifying Gb over IP 1. SRN=0.13. /*Set the IP communication type over the Gb interface*/ SET ITFIPTYPE: GBIPTYPE=DEVIP.13. BT=GFGUG. IPINDEX=0. 4. SN=18.13.13. SN=18.12. 2.1". /*Perform congestion management with priority queue (PQ)*/ SET QOSPROP: SRN=0. NSEI=1. For details.255.4". AN=ENABLE.255. IPADDR="15. /*Add the device IP address*/ ADD DEVIP: SRN=0.13. see Verifying the NSVL in the BSC Commissioning Guide. MASK="255.

Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 47 47 Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization or HubBTS Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization or HubBTS The Abis Transmission Optimization feature introduces the HDLC frame and HDLC channel without changing the physical transmission mode. 47-1 . l The BSC supports the Abis transmission optimization or HubBTS in E1/T1 or STM-1 transmission mode. Prerequisite l The Abis Transmission Optimization or HubBTS function is license-controlled. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Preparation The difference between the HubBTS and the Abis transmission optimization lies in the transmission mode. NEs Involved BTS. signaling data. The HubBTS converges and forwards data. It statistically multiplexes the traffic data. l The GMPS/GEPS holding the GEHUB is configured with the GDPUX. and OM data on the HDLC channel to obtain a higher transmission gain through voice frame compression and multiplexing. l The Abis Transmission Optimization or HubBTS function cannot be enabled at the same time as the Flex Abis or BTS local switching function. l This feature should be supported by the BTS. The transmission mode of the HubBTS is HDLC_HubBTS. For details. BSC NOTE Based on the Abis transmission optimization. the DPTU must be configured in the BTS. Ltd. Scenario The utilization of the transmission resources are improved. Impact None. l The GEHUB is configured. see Activate BSC License. l In HubBTS mode. the HubBTS function can be implemented by installing a DPTU in the BTS. whereas the transmission mode of the Abis transmission optimization is HDLC..

26 Network planning PN Port No. 0 Network planning BTSDESC BTS Description BTS3012_Hub Network planning MPMODE Multiplexing Mode MODE4_1 Network planning FlexAbisMode Flex Abis Mode Fix Abis(Fix Abis) Network planning AbisByPassMode Abis By Pass Mode FALSE(Not Support) Network planning ServiceMode Service Type HDLC_HubBTS Network planning DCELLNAME Cell Name HDLC_HubBTS_CE LL Network planning DCTYPE Cell Type GSM900 Network planning DCMCC Cell MCC 460 Network planning DCMNC Cell MNC 01 Network planning DCLAC Cell LAC 8240 Network planning DCCI Cell CI 1 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..47 Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization or HubBTS HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) The following is an example of configuring HDLC_HubBTS service mode on the GEHUB of the GEPS subrack for BTS3012. 0 Network planning SN Slot No. Table 47-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring HDLC_HubBTS service mode for BTS3012 47-2 Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source BTSNAME BTS name BTS3012 Network planning TYPE BTS Type BTS3012 Network planning UPNODE Up Node Type BSC Network planning SRN Subrack No. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. SRN=0. BackType=NONE. DCELLNAME = "HDLC_HubBTS_CELL". while the HDLC does not support bypass and FLEX_ABIS. The service mode of the HubBTS is HDLC_HubBTS. DCMNC="01". Ltd. /*Add a GEHUB*/ ADD BRD: SRN=0. BackType = OUTPEER.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 47 Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization or HubBTS Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source CPLMode Separate Mode UNSUPPORT(Not Support) Network planning TRXBN TRX Board No. 0 Network planning FREQ TRX Freq. 47-3 . and FLEX_ABIS. ADD BRD: SRN=0. ADD BRD: SRN=0. /*Add Subrack-OPC Mapping*/ ADD SROPCMAP: SRN=0. GXPUT and a GDPUX*/ ADD BRD: SRN=0. BT=GDPUX. DPCGIDX=1. /*Add a DPC*/ ADD N7DPC: NAME="MSC001". BackType=NONE. SN=0. bypass. FREQ=988. OPC=h'aa. NETSTRUCT=BIT14. /*Add a GXPUM. run the ADD BTS command and set the Service Type to HDLC_HubBTS. TRXBN=0. BackType=NONE. /*Add a BTS3012 in HDLC_HubBTS service mode*/ ADD BTS: BTSNAME = "BTS3012". DCCI=1. MPMODE=MODE4_1. CNID=0. NOTE The HDLC_HubBTS does not support the ring topology. SN=2. DCLAC=8240. WorkMode=E1. NI=NATB. DPC=h'cc. DCTYPE = GSM900. 988 Network planning NOTE The HubBTS and the Abis transmission optimization are different in the configuration of the service mode. ----End Result Example An example script of configuring Abis transmission optimization or HubBTS is as follows: /*Add an OPC*/ ADD OPC: NAME="BSC001". FlexAbisMode = FIX_ABIS. BTSDESC = "BTS3012_Hub". CPLMode=UNSUPPORT. SN=26. AbisByPassMode = False. UPNODE = BSC. Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. BT=GEHUB. SN=8. SN=26. PN=0. DCMCC="460". BT=GXPUM. TYPE = BTS3012.. OPC=h'aa. ServiceMode = HDLC_HubBTS. BT=GXPUT. and that of Abis transmission optimization is HDLC.

Ltd. Check the setting of Service Type. If the parameter is set to HDLC_HubBTS.47 Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization or HubBTS HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Postrequisite l Verifying Abis transmission optimization or HubBTS – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Check the setting of Service Type. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . run the MOD BTSSRVMODE command to set Service Type to TDM or IP. If the parameter is set to TDM or IP. l 47-4 Deactivating Abis Transmission optimization or HubBTS 1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 2. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. it indicates that the function of Abis transmission optimization or HubBTS is activated. run the LST BTS command. it indicates that the function of Abis transmission optimization or HubBTS is deactivated. run the LST BTS command..

one BSC can be connected to multiple SGSNs at the same time. A cell named CELL_1 is served by two SGSNs and the telecom operator is named 46000. Scenario PS services are evenly distributed among SGSNs in the SGSN pool. NEs Involved BSC and SGSN Prerequisite l The communication between the BSC and the SGSN is normal. In addition.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 48 48 Configuring SGSN Pool Configuring SGSN Pool This feature enables a maximum of 32 SGSNs to form a resource pool to provide services for the subscribers belonging to one group of BSCs. l SGSN pool should be supported by the SGSN. the traffic on the BSC is evenly distributed to the SGSNs in the pool according to the network resource identifier (NRI) or load balancing principle. Impact None. Preparation This operation takes the minimum configuration of an SGSN pool as an example. 48-1 .. Ltd. Table 48-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring SGSN pool Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source SGSN pool switch CnOpName Operator Name 46000 Network planning POOLALLOW Allow SGSN Pool ALLOW(Allow) Network planning NRILEN NRI length 3 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. With this feature.

Issue 02 (2010-09-20) ..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 48 Configuring SGSN Pool Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source NULLNRI NullNRI Value 4 Network planning Table 48-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding the first SGSN Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source Attributes of SGSN 0 CnOpName Operator Name 46000 Network planning CNId SGSN Node ID 0 Network planning NRI NRI Value 3 Network planning CnOpName Operator Name 46000 Network planning CNId SGSN Node ID 0 Network planning NSEI NSE Identifier 10 Network planning SRN Agent Subrack No. Ltd. 0 Network planning PT Subnetwork Protocol Type GB_OVER_FR (Gb over FR) Network planning CnOpName Operator Name 46000 Network planning CNId SGSN Node ID 0 Network planning NSEI NSE Identifier 10 Network planning BVCI PTPBVC Identifier 2 Network planning IDXTYPE Index Type BYCELLNAME Network planning CELLNAME Cell Name CELL_1 Network planning Mapping between the NRI and SGSN 0 Mapping between the NSE and SGSN 0 Mapping between CELL_1 and SGSN 0 48-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

run the ADD SGSNNODE. 0 Network planning PT Subnetwork Protocol Type GB_OVER_FR (Gb over FR) Network planning CnOpName Operator Name 46000 Network planning CNId SGSN Node ID 1 Network planning NSEI NSE Identifier 23 Network planning BVCI PTPBVC Identifier 3 Network planning IDXTYPE Index Type BYCELLNAME Network planning CELLNAME Cell Name CELL_1 Network planning Mapping between the NRI and SGSN 1 Mapping between the NSE and SGSN 1 Mapping between CELL_1 and SGSN 1 Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 48 Configuring SGSN Pool Table 48-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding the second SGSN Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source Attributes of SGSN 1 CnOpName Operator Name 46000 Network planning CNId SGSN Node ID 1 Network planning NRI NRI Value 4 Network planning CnOpName Operator Name 46000 Network planning CNId SGSN Node ID 1 Network planning NSEI NSE Identifier 23 Network planning SRN Agent Subrack No. Set Operator Name and the SGSN node ID to add an SGSN. 48-3 . run the SET SGSNPOOL command.. Set Allow SGSN Pool to ALLOW(Allow). The values of NRI length and NullNRI Value should be the same as that on the SGSN through negotiation. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

IDXTYPE=BYCELLNAME. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . Set NSE Identifier to add the NSE to the new SGSN. CNId=1. BVCI=3. 48-4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. The configuration of the first SGSN that serves CELL_1 is complete. /*Add an SGSN with the SGSN node ID as 1*/ ADD SGSNNODE: CnOpName="46000".The settings of other parameters should be consistent with the settings on the SGSN. run the ADD PTPBVC command. it indicates that the SGSN pool function is normally enabled. The values of Operator Name and SGSN Node ID should be the same as those set for the SGSN added in step 2. CELLNAME="CELL_1". Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the ADD NRISGSNMAP command to configure the mapping between the NRI and the SGSN. /*Add a PTPBVC to configure the mapping between CELL_1 and SGSN 0*/ ADD PTPBVC: NSEI=10. ----End Example Example scripts of configuring SGSN pool are as follows: /*Enable the SGSN pool function*/ SET SGSNPOOL: CnOpName="46000". PT=GB_OVER_FR. Set the corresponding NSE identifier. run the ADD NSE command. NRILEN=3. NOTE The value of NRI Value should be the same as that on the SGSN through negotiation. CNId=1. run the SET SGSNPOOL command to set Allow SGSN Pool to DENY(deny). BVCI=2. CnOpName="46000". /*Add the NSE with the NSE identifier as 23 to SGSN 1*/ ADD NSE: NSEI=23. CnOpName="46000". CNId=0. CNId=0. /*Configure the mapping between the NRI and SGSN 1*/ ADD NRISGSNMAP: NRI=4. Step 6 Repeat steps 2 through 5 to add the second SGSN to complete the configuration of the second SGSN that serves CELL_1. Deactivating SGSN pool 1. Check whether the FLOW CONTROL messages on all the PTP BVCs in the normal state are sent from the BSC to the SGSN by referring to Tracing PTP Messages on the Gb Interface. PT=GB_OVER_FR.. SRN=0. 2. CELLNAME="CELL_1". NOTE Set SGSN Node ID to the value of that set for the SGSN added in step 2. Ltd. /*Add a PTPBVC to configure the mapping between CELL_1 and SGSN 1*/ ADD PTPBVC: NSEI=23. If so. CnOpName="46000". CnOpName="46000". CNId=1. Postrequisite l l Verifying SGSN pool 1. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. /*Configure the mapping between the NRI and SGSN 0*/ ADD NRISGSNMAP: NRI=3. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. /*Add an SGSN with the SGSN node ID as 0*/ ADD SGSNNODE: CnOpName="46000". POOLALLOW=ALLOW. NULLNRI=4. run the DSP PTPBVC command to view and record the PTP BVCs in the normal state. IDXTYPE=BYCELLNAME. /*Add the NSE with the NSE identifier as 10 to SGSN 0*/ ADD NSE: NSEI=10. SRN=0. CNId=0. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 48 Configuring SGSN Pool Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

Check the setting of Allow SGSN Pool. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) 48 Configuring SGSN Pool On the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 2. Ltd. 48-5 . If the parameter is set to DENY(deny). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. it indicates that the transmit diversity is deactivated. run the LST SGSNPOOL command.

.

transmission. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 49-1 . they must use the same transmission mode (TDM or IP) over the A interface.1 Configuring Operator Information This describes how to configure the operator information on the Local Maintenance Terminal. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal.5 Binding the SGSN and Operator This describes how to bind the SGSN and operator on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Prerequisite l The RAN sharing function is license-controlled. RAN Sharing enables multiple operators to share one GBSS network so that they can use the resources (including the BSC.3 Binding the Cell and the Operator This describes how to bind the cell and operator on the Local Maintenance Terminal. BM/TC combined. In addition. a maximum of four CBCs are supported. 49. RAN Sharing supports a maximum of four operators. The shared GBSS uses a uniform network management system. which implements comprehensive management of all the resources in the GBSS. Ltd. BTS. l The operators must use the same networking mode (BM/TC separated.. 49. l In RAN sharing mode.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 49 49 Configuring RAN Sharing Configuring RAN Sharing About This Chapter On the condition that independency of CNs of multiple operators is maintained. For details. and so on) in the GBSS network simultaneously. Each operator has an independent CN (MSC and SGSN). l In RAN sharing mode. a maximum of four operators (including a primary operator) are supported. or A over IP). see Activate BSC License. 49. antenna system. 49.4 Binding the MSC and Operator This describes how to bind the MSC and operator on the Local Maintenance Terminal. l The MSCs of different operators must use the same SS7 signaling link rate type. 49.2 Configuring BTS Sharing This describes how to configure BTS sharing on the Local Maintenance Terminal.

49 Configuring RAN Sharing HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 49. 49. 49-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .6 Binding the PCU and Operator This describes how to bind the PCU and operator on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 49. Ltd..8 Configuring the Distributed BTS TRX to Support RAN Sharing This describes how to configure the distributed BTS TRX to support the RAN sharing function on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 49.9 Verifying and Deactivating RAN Sharing This describes how to verify and deactivate RAN sharing on the Local Maintenance Terminal.7 Configuring RAN Sharing to Support Multiple CBCs This describes how to configure multiple CBCs on the Local Maintenance Terminal.

l In RAN sharing mode. Prerequisite l The BSC supports the RAN sharing function. l In RAN sharing mode. 49-3 . Ltd. Preparation Table 49-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the primary operator information Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source OPNAME Master Operator Name Master Network planning SPTRANSHARING Support Sharing YES(YES) Network planning HOBTWNOTHOP ALLOW Handover Between Operators Allow YES(YES) Network planning Table 49-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the secondary operator information Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source OPNAME Accessorial Operator Name coop1 Network planning MCC MCC 460 Network planning MNC MNC 14 Network planning SPPRTCB Support Cell Broadcast SPPRTSTANDARD (SupportStandard CB) Network planning HOBTWNOTHOP ALLOW Handover Between Operators Allow YES(YES) Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. a maximum of four operators (including a primary operator) are supported. the operators are classified into the following types: Primary operator and Secondary operator.1 Configuring Operator Information This describes how to configure the operator information on the Local Maintenance Terminal. There is only one primary operator. Others are secondary operators..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 49 Configuring RAN Sharing 49. l The GDPUC or GDPUX is already configured.

Support Sharing. run the ADD COOPBASIC command to configure the secondary operator information as required. Set Master Operator Name. l Handover Between Operators Allow can be changed from YES(YES) to NO(NO) only when no neighboring cell relations in this BSC are affected by this parameter. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . NOTE l The secondary operator can be added only when Support Sharing is set to YES(YES). HOBTWNOTHOPALLOW=YES. HoBtwnOthOpAllow=YES. MCC="460". Ltd.2 Configuring BTS Sharing This describes how to configure BTS sharing on the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the LST BSCBASIC command to check whether Support Sharing and Handover Between Operators Allow are set to YES(YES).. go to step 2. Prerequisite l Support Sharing is set to YES(YES). Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. MNC="14". and Handover Between Operators Allow as required. If they are set to No. SptRanSharing=YES. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 49 Configuring RAN Sharing Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. l The configured 3012 series base stations or 3900 series base stations support the RAN sharing function. 49. run the MOD BSCBASIC command to configure the primary operator information. SpprtCB=SPPRTSTANDARD. Preparation Table 49-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring BTS sharing 49-4 Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning BTSIDX BTS Index 0 Network planning SHARINGALLOW Sharing Allow YES(YES) Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. /*Add the secondary operator*/ ADD COOPBASIC: OPNAME="coop1". ----End Example An example script is as follows: /*Configure primary operator information*/ MOD BSCBASIC: OPNAME="Master".

go to the next step. If they are not. SHARINGALLOW=YES. l Sharing Allow is set to YES(YES). go to the next step. 49-5 . Ltd. If the value is NO(NO). BTSIDX=0. Prerequisite l Support Sharing is set to YES(YES). Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the SET OPCELL command to bind the cell and operator. NOTE Sharing Allow can be changed from YES(YES) to NO(NO) only when the cells under the BTS belong to the primary operator. run the MOD BTSSHARING command to set Sharing Allow to YES(YES). BTSIDX=0. 49. Preparation Table 49-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for binding the cell and operator Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Cell Index Type BYALL(By All) Network planning IDXTYPE Cell Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 1 Network planning OPNAME Operator Name coop1 Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 49 Configuring RAN Sharing Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. run the LST BTSSHARING command to check whether Sharing Allow is set to YES(YES).3 Binding the Cell and the Operator This describes how to bind the cell and operator on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ----End Example Take DBS3900 GSM as an example. run the LST OPCELL command to check whether the operator and cell are already bound. /*Configure the BTS sharing parameters*/ MOD BTSSHARING: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. The script for configuring the BTS sharing is as follows: /*Query the BTS sharing configuration*/ LST BTSSHARING: IDXTYPE=BYIDX.

CELLIDX=1.4 Binding the MSC and Operator This describes how to bind the MSC and operator on the Local Maintenance Terminal.. l If neighboring cell relations exist in the configured cell. l The BSC is shared by at least two operators. verify that the new operator allows neighboring cell relations. Prerequisite l Support Sharing is set to YES(YES). Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . l The operator is the primary operator by default when a new cell is added.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 49 Configuring RAN Sharing CAUTION l Handover Between Operators Allow is set to YES(YES). l If the PTPBVC is already configured. The parameter Handover Between Operators Allow is set to Yes for the secondary operator. l The cells configured with enhanced dual-band network must belong to the same operator. Preparation Table 49-5 Example of the data negotiated and planned for binding the MSC and operator Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYDPC(By DPC) Network planning DPC DPC Code h'cc Network planning OPNAME Operator Name coop1 Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. the NSE must correspond to the operator when you change the operator of a cell. l The SS7 signaling point or M3UA destination entity are correctly configured. 49-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. /*Bind the cell and operator*/ SET OPCELL:IDXTYPE=BYIDX. ----End Example An example script for binding the cell and operator is as follows: /*Query the relation between the operator and cell*/ LST OPCELL: IDXTYPE=BYALL. 49. OPNAME="coop1". run the SET OPMSC command to bind the DPC and operator.

Ltd. Preparation Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source CNOPNAME Operator Name coop1 Network planning CNID SGSN Node ID 0 Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. the DPC and M3UA are configured for the primary operator by default. run the ADD SGSNNODE command to bind the SGSN and operator. 49. Prerequisite l Support Sharing is set to YES(YES).HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 49 Configuring RAN Sharing NOTE l When you run the ADD N7DPC command to add the DPC or run the ADD M3DE command to add the M3UA entity. 49. ----End Example An example script is as follows: /*Bind the SGSN and operator*/ ADD SGSNNODE: CnOpName="coop1".6 Binding the PCU and Operator This describes how to bind the PCU and operator on the Local Maintenance Terminal. DPC=h'cc. you must run the SET OPMSC command. 49-7 . l The SET OPMSC command can bind only the destination entity with the subsystem numbered 254 rather than 143.. l PCU Type is set to Inner. ----End Example An example script is as follows: /*Bind the MSC and operator*/ SET OPMSC: IDXTYPE=BYDPC.5 Binding the SGSN and Operator This describes how to bind the SGSN and operator on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If you bind the MSC and secondary operator. OPNAME="coop1". CNId=0.

NAME="pcu1". Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 49 Configuring RAN Sharing Prerequisite l Support Sharing is set to YES(YES).7 Configuring RAN Sharing to Support Multiple CBCs This describes how to configure multiple CBCs on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 49. run the ADD SGSNNODE command to bind the PCU and operator.. OPNAME="coop1". An example script is as follows: /*Bind the PCU and operator*/ SET OPMSC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. l The operator supports the standard cell broadcast. Ltd. ----End Example Suppose the name of the secondary operator is "coop 1" and that of the external PCU is "pcu1". Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . l PCU Type is set to Outer. Prerequisite 49-8 l Support Sharing is set to YES(YES). l The BSC supports the standard cell broadcast. Preparation Table 49-6 Example of the data negotiated and planned for binding the PCU and operator Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME (By PCU Name) Network planning NAME PCU Name pcu1 Network planning OPNAME Operator Name coop1 Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

NOTE The BSC supports up to four standard CBCs. SpprtCB=SPPRTSTANDARD.5.. l If the operator is the secondary operator. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.5 Network planning CBCPRT CBC port 0 Network planning OPNAME Owned Operator coop1 Network planning Procedure Step 1 Set Support Cell Broadcast so that the operator supports the standard cell broadcast.5. /*Make the primary operator support the standard cell broadcast*/ MOD COOPBASIC: SpprtCB=SPPRTSTANDARD. /*Add CBC*/ ADD CBC: CBCNAME="cbc1". 49-9 . run the MOD BSCBASIC command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to set Support Cell Broadcast to SPPRTSTANDARD (SupportStandard CB). CBCIP="5. OPNAME="coop1".5". l If the operator is the primary operator.5. run the MOD COOPBASIC command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to set Support Cell Broadcast to SPPRTSTANDARD (SupportStandard CB).HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 49 Configuring RAN Sharing Preparation Table 49-7 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring RAN sharing to support multiple CBCs Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME (By Name) Network planning OPNAME Accessorial Operator Name coop1 Network planning SPPRTCB Support Cell Broadcast SPPRTSTANDARD (SupportStandard CB) Network planning CBCNAME CBC Name cbc1 Network planning CBCIP CBC IP 5. Ltd. OPNAME="coop1". run the ADD CBC command to add CBC. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.5. ----End Example Suppose the name of the secondary operator is "coop1". CBCPRT=0. One operator can use only one CBC whereas a CBC can belong to multiple operators. An example script is as follows: /*Make the secondary operator support the standard cell broadcast*/ MOD COOPBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 49 Configuring RAN Sharing 49. run the LST RXUBP command to check whether RanSharing Support is set to YES(YES). Prerequisite l Support Sharing is set to YES(YES). Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . If the value is NO(NO). The script is as follows: 49-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Preparation Table 49-8 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the distributed BTS TRX to support RAN sharing Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning BTSIDX BTS Index 0 Network planning RXUIDXTYPE RXU Index Type SRNSN(SRNSN) Network planning SRN Subrack No.. 3 Network planning RXUTYPE RXU Board Type MRRU Network planning SPTSHARING RanSharing Support YES(YES) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. l The BTS configured with the DRRU/DRFU/MRRU/GRRU/MRFU/GRFU/MBTU supports the RAN sharing function. run the MOD BTSSHARING command to set RanSharing Support to YES(YES). ----End Example Take the MRRU as an example. only the MRRU/DRRU/DRFU/MBTU supports the RAN sharing function. l Sharing Allow is set to YES(YES). go to the next step. 3 Network planning SN Slot No. l The BTS is a distributed BTS. NOTE In the distributed BTS.8 Configuring the Distributed BTS TRX to Support RAN Sharing This describes how to configure the distributed BTS TRX to support the RAN sharing function on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd.

RXUIDXTYPE=SRNSN. /*Modify the basic data of the BSC to support RAN sharing*/ SET RXUBP: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. SPTSHARING=YES. BTSIDX=0. run the SET OPCELL command to set the primary operator as the operator serving the cell. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 8. 49. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 6. 2. SN=3. run the MOD BSCBASIC command to change the value of Support Sharing to NO(NO). On the Local Maintenance Terminal. MS 1 belongs to the primary operator and MS 2 belongs to the secondary operator. assume that two operators share the GBSS network. RXUIDXTYPE=SRNSN. run the SET OPMSC command to delete the settings of the MSC of the secondary operator. Verify that the call is initiated successfully. run the RMV SGSNNODE command to delete the settings of the SGSN of the secondary operator. 7. In the coverage area enabled with the RAN sharing function. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 2. l Issue 02 (2010-09-20) 1.9 Verifying and Deactivating RAN Sharing This describes how to verify and deactivate RAN sharing on the Local Maintenance Terminal. RXUTYPE=MRRU. 49-11 . use MS 1 to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell belonging to the primary operator. 5. 4. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Then. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. BTSIDX=0. Procedure l Verifying RAN sharing NOTE In this section.. run the SET RXUBP command to set RanSharing Support of the TRX board of the BTS to NO(NO). Deactivating RAN sharing 1. 3. Ltd. use MS 2 to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell belonging to the secondary operator. SN=3. SRN=3. run the RMV COOPBASIC command to delete the information about the secondary operator. SRN=3. Prerequisite The RAN sharing function is configured. run the SET OPPCU command to delete the settings of the PCU of the secondary operator. run the MOD BTSSHARING command to set Sharing Allow of the BTS to NO(NO). On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the RMV CBC command to delete the settings of the CBC of the secondary operator. In the coverage area enabled with the RAN sharing function. On the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 49 Configuring RAN Sharing /*Query the parameters related to the RXU*/ LST RXUBP: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Verify that the call is initiated successfully.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Verifying deactivation of RAN sharing: In the original coverage area enabled with the RAN sharing function. use MS 2 to call a fixed-line phone in the original cell belonging to the secondary operator. ----End 49-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.49 Configuring RAN Sharing 9. Ltd. Verify that the call fails to be initiated.. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .

6 Deleting Binding Relations of Location Groups This describes how to delete binding relations of location groups on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 50. and enhance the user experience. 50. Ltd. 50.. A subsite refers to a certain area physically covered by multiple RRU/RFUs that belong to the same BBU. which is also called a cascading cell. 50. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. improve the coverage efficiency. 50-1 . 50. a cascading cell can reduce handovers. In the scenarios such as railway.4 Deleting a Location Group This describes how to delete a location group on the Local Maintenance Terminal.5 Setting Binding Relations of Location Groups This describes how to set binding relations of location groups on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 50.2 Configuring Parameters of Location Groups This describes how to configure parameters of location groups on the Local Maintenance Terminal.1 Adding a Location Group This describes how to add a location group on the Local Maintenance Terminal.3 Verifying Configuration Information About Location Group This describes how to verify the configuration information about the location group on the Local Maintenance Terminal. tunnel. or indoor coverage.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 50 50 Configuring Multi-site Cell Configuring Multi-site Cell About This Chapter This feature enables the subsites in different physical sites to be set to a logical cell.

0 Network planning LOCGRPNO Location Group No. Ltd. however. l A maximum of 18 location groups can be configured in one multi-site cell. The radio TRX number of number of radio TRXs between the primary location group and secondary location group. l One location group belongs to only one Multi-site Cell.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 50 Configuring Multi-site Cell 50. Preparation Table 50-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a location group 50-2 Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME (BY NAME) Network planning BTSNAME BTS name DBS3036 Network planning CELLNO Cell No. l The board types between the primary location group and secondary location group need not be consistent. In V300R008. l Currently. Scenario Signal coverage under the high-speed railway and indoor coverage can be achieved. l In a co-cell.1 Adding a Location Group This describes how to add a location group on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 0 Network planning RXUNO RXU No. only DBS3036 and DBS3900 GSM support multi-site cells. Impact None. a base station supports a maximum of six location groups. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . l A maximum of 24 logical TRXs can be configured in one location group. NEs Involved BSC and BTS NOTE l A maximum of 36 location groups can be configured under one base station. and a location group supports a maximum of six TRXs. 0 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. must be consistent. only a main location group can be configured. Prerequisite The BTS is configured..

this position is called main location group. Preparation Table 50-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring parameters of the BTS Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME (BY NAME) Network planning BTSNAME BTS Name DBS3036 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l The TRX board that is not bound to the TRX can be only added to the location group. run the ADD LOCGRP command. of the co-cell. 50-3 . BTSNAME="DBS3036". Ltd. and the RXU No. 50. l If the entered location group number does not exist. RXUNO=0. and location group number: 0) is as follows: ADD LOCGRP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. LOCGRPNO=0. the board can be added to the location group.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 50 Configuring Multi-site Cell Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. enter the information about of the target BTS. l The TRX board that is bound to the TRX can be added to the main location group. CELLNO=0. and Location Group No. ----End Example An example script of adding the board numbered 0 to the location group (BTS name: DBS3036. create a new location group with this location group number. Scenario Signal coverage under the high-speed railway and indoor coverage can be achieved.2 Configuring Parameters of Location Groups This describes how to configure parameters of location groups on the Local Maintenance Terminal. l If the entered location group number exists. Impact None. Then. cell number: 0. NEs Involved BSC and BTS Prerequisite Location groups are added to the BTS.. Cell No. NOTE l If the TRX board added in the first TRX board is bound to the TRX. in the location group.

and the default power of the DRRU over 1800 MHz or 1900 MHz is 15 W. In a multi-site cell. RACJACCLEV=-88. BTSNAME="DBS3036". run the MOD LOCGRP command to configure parameters of the location groups. 50. l The default power of the DRRU over 850 MHz or 900 MHz in the location group is 18 W. Scenario Verify the configuration information about the location group Impact None.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 50 Configuring Multi-site Cell Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source LOCGRPNO Location Group No.Access Level -88 Network planning OUTPUTPOWERUNI T Output Power Unit 0_1W (Output Power Unit is 0. ----End Example An example script of configuring parameters of location groups is as follows: MOD LOCGRP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME.. LOCGRPNO=0.Access Level must be configured under the location group. 0 Network planning RACJACCLEV RACH Min.3 Verifying Configuration Information About Location Group This describes how to verify the configuration information about the location group on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Output Power and RACH Min. OUTPUTPOWER=1210. Ltd. OUTPUTPOWERUNIT=0_1W. NOTE The default power of the location group is as follows: l The default power of the MRRU or GRRU in the location group is 15 W. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .1W) Network planning OUTPUTPOWER Output Power 1210 Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. NEs Involved BSC and BTS 50-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 50 Configuring Multi-site Cell Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the LST LOCGRP command to query whether parameters of Configuring Parameters of Location Groups are set successfully according to Index Type. NEs Involved BSC and BTS Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Scenario Network planning Impact None. If the deletion is required. cell number is 0. the binding relation should be lifted first. ----End Example An example script of the information about all the location groups in the cell (BTS index: 0.. the whole location group can be deleted. BTSNAME="DBS3036". LOCGRPNO=0. LOCGRPNO=1. l Location groups with binding relations are not allowed to be deleted. a board in the location group can be deleted. to be deleted. l If you enters only RXU No. CELLNO=0. 50-5 . BTSIDX=0. and the location group number is 0. cell number is 0. cell number: 0) is as follows: LST LOCGRP: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. and the location group number is 1*/ RMV LOCGRP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME.. NOTE l If you enters only location group number. 50. CELLNO=0. BTSNAME="DBS3036". 50.4 Deleting a Location Group This describes how to delete a location group on the Local Maintenance Terminal. CELLNO=0. see 50. and the RXU number is 2*/ RMV LOCGRP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. For details. and RXU No. /*Delete the board that the BTS name is DBS3036. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the RMV LOCGRP command to enter Location Group No.5 Setting Binding Relations of Location Groups This describes how to set binding relations of location groups on the Local Maintenance Terminal.6 Deleting Binding Relations of Location Groups. RXUNO=2. Ltd. ----End Example Example scripts of deleting the configuration information about location groups are as follows: /*Delete the location group that the BTS name is DBS3036.

Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . ----End 50-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 50 Configuring Multi-site Cell Scenario Signal coverage under the high-speed railway and indoor coverage can be achieved. Impact None. l The main location group and sub-location groups with binding relations can be configured in only a co-cell. l For the MRRU or GRRU. Preparation Table 50-3 Example of data negotiated and planned for setting binding relations of location groups Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning BTSIDX BTS Index 0 Network planning TRXNO Main Location Group Logical TRX No. 0 Network planning TRXBN Sub-Location Group TRX Board No. 0 Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. NOTE l The TRX on the TRX board in the main location group can be bound to all the channels in a sublocation group only once. the antenna channel number is required.. 4 Network planning TRXPN Sub-Location Group TRX Board Channel No. l The binding relation can be set only between the board of the main location group and that of the sublocation group. l Main location group and sub-location group are configured in the co-cell. the TRX board number and channel number of the TRX board in the sub-location group that is bound to the TRX in the main location group. NEs Involved BSC and BTS Prerequisite l The co-cell is configured in the BTS. l The TRX of each main location group must be bound to the sub-location group. and can be also bound to multiple sub-location groups. run the SET BINDLOCGRP command to set the logical TRX number of the TRX board in the main location group. Ltd.

Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 50 Configuring Multi-site Cell Example An example script of binding the TRX that the BTS index is 0 and the TRX number of the main location group is 0 with the idle board and channel that the TRX board number of the sub-location group is 4 and the channel number of the TRX board in the sub-location group is 0 is as follows: SET BINDLOCGRP: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. TRXNO=0. BTSIDX=0.6 Deleting Binding Relations of Location Groups This describes how to delete binding relations of location groups on the Local Maintenance Terminal. the information about location groups in the cell and binding relations of location groups can be deleted. the antenna channel number of the MRRU or DRRU is not required. ----End Example An example script of deleting binding relations between the main location group (BTS index: 0. 50. TRXBN=4. l In the co-cell. l When you run the RMV CELL command to delete the co-cell. TRXNO=0. BTSIDX=0. logical TRX number of the main location group: 0) and the sub-location group (TRX number: 4. TRXPN=0. there is binding relation between the TRX in the main location group and the channel of the board in the sub-location group. 50-7 . TRXBN=4. Ltd.. run the SET UNBINDLOCGRP command. Scenario Network planning Impact None. and then enter BTS Index or BTS Name. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. TRXPN=0. logical TRX number of the main location group. NOTE l When you delete binding relations between the main location group and the sub-location group. and the TRX board number of the sub-location group to delete binding relations of location groups. NEs Involved BSC and BTS Prerequisite l The co-cell is configured in the BTS. channel number of the TRX board of the sub-location group: 0) is as follows: SET UNBINDLOCGRP: IDXTYPE=BYIDX.

.

l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. In this network. Context Purpose IBCA is applied to the network in which frequency resources are insufficient and thus the same frequency is repeatedly used in neighboring cells. the severe inter-cell interference cannot be solved even if the frequency hopping is used. the GFGUB or GOGUB should be added to the BSC. To use the IBCA algorithm. In this situation.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 51 Configuring IBCA 51 Configuring IBCA About This Chapter IBCA algorithm is a channel assignment algorithm. For details. the GXPUI should be added to the BSC. see Activate BSC License. Prerequisite l IBCA is restricted by the license. there is no unfavorable influence on the established call after a new call is established. IBCA algorithm has a remarkable effect on improving the utilization of frequency resources and expanding the network capacity. The GFGUB or GOGUB is used to establish a communication link to transfer the related information about the IBCA algorithm between BSCs. Ltd.. 51-1 . In addition. the GPS synchronization requires the support from the hardware configuration. which has a remarkable effect on improving the utilization of frequency resources and expanding the network capacity. The GXPUI is used to estimate the interference experienced by each idle channel in every channel assignment procedure and the interference of a new call to established calls on the same timeslot in the IBCA neighboring cells. The channels that the C/I ratios meet the requirements of calls are assigned to the calls. In addition. the bottleneck that restricts the network capacity is not the interference (link quality) but the channel number. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. This channel assignment algorithm is called interference based channel assignment (IBCA). l To enable the inter-BSC IBCA algorithm. the C/I ratios of idle channels need to be estimated. the inter-site Um interface software synchronization or GPS synchronization should be enabled. l To enable the IBCA algorithm. In this case.

51.. The IBCA algorithm is compatible with the existing channel assignment mechanism. 51. In addition. 51.2 Data Negotiated and Planned for Configuring IBCA The following data involves the configuration of a 2G internal IBCA neighboring cell relation and a 2G external IBCA neighboring cell relation.3 Configuring IBCA This describes how to configure IBCA on the Local Maintenance Terminal. the load of CPU0 increases greatly and thus affects normal working of the BSC if this module is placed in CPU0.4 Configuring the IBCA Cell that Supports HWIII Power Control Algorithm This describes how to configure the IBCA cell that supports HWIII power control algorithm on the Local Maintenance Terminal. the IBCA requests that the interference of the assigned channel on the calls in the same timeslot should be minimized. which perform most calculations of the IBCA module. Hardware Configuration As the IBCA module involves many calculations. 51. Configuring IBCA involves configuring the GXPUI. If the two cells that exist the interference relations are distributed in two BSCs. In the synchronization and cyclic frequency hopping network. two GXPUIs are added in the BSC. the IBCA algorithm needs to calculate the intra-cell and inter-cell interference between channels in the same timeslot.1 Configuration Principles of IBCA This describes the configuration principles of the IBCA. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . the influence of the new call on the established call can be estimated. 51. the inter-BSC communication interface is required to send the information about the interference calculation of related cells to the corresponding BSC. Therefore. Ltd.7 Configuring the BTS Synchronization Mode This describes how to configure the BTS synchronization mode on the Local Maintenance Terminal. the C/I ratio of the new call established on the idle channel can be predicted. 51-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the optimal channel is selected on the basis of channel priorities. and configuring the cell that supports the IBCA algorithm.5 Configuring the Cell that Enables the IBCA Algorithm Switch This describes how to configure the cell that enables the IBCA algorithm switch on the Local Maintenance Terminal. either of synchronization modes can be adopted. the inter-site interference relations can be predicted. 51. In addition. HWIII power control algorithm must be enabled in the IBCA cell. The IBCA algorithm switch is a cell-level parameter. the MAIO and the idle channel that meets the requirements of the new call and has the least impact on the established call can be selected. Thus. 51. For cells that enable the IBCA algorithm.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 51 Configuring IBCA Working Principle Considering the inter-channel interference. That is. the interference of the calls in the same timeslot on the assigned channel should also be minimized.6 Configuring an IBCA Neighboring Cell This describes how to configure an IBCA neighboring cell on the Local Maintenance Terminal. configuring the TRX that supports the IBCA algorithm. The Um interface synchronization is required to use the IBCA algorithm. The Um interface synchronization involves the Um interface software synchronization and GPS synchronization. On this basis.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 51 Configuring IBCA 51. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 51. 51-3 .8 Configuring External Attributes of the BSC This describes how to add external attributes of the BSC on the Local Maintenance Terminal.9 Binding the external BSC and the External Cell This describes how to configure the binding relation between the external BSC and the external cell on the Local Maintenance Terminal.. Ltd. 51.10 Deactivating IBCA This describes how to deactivate IBCA on the Local Maintenance Terminal.

and if the parameter IBCA Dynamic Measure Neighbor Cell Allowed is set to YES (Yes). l If the cell with the IBCA enabled is already configured with the IBCA neighboring cell. IBCA uses its own power prediction algorithm to perform the initial power prediction. l The IBCA algorithm does not support the external PCU. Ltd. l The IBCA algorithm only applies to the assignment of channels on the TRXs involved in FH. the number of MA tables used in an IBCA cell group must not exceed three. use the MAIOs dynamically allocated by the IBCA. l In IBCA cell. if IBCA Dynamic Measure Neighbor Cell Allowed is set to YES(Yes). l The number of neighboring BSCs of a BSC on which the inter-BSC IBCA algorithm is enabled must not exceed 16. two MA groups can be configured (each frequency band for one MA group). For the SDCCHs dynamically converted from the TCHs. l For the BSC enabled with the IBCA algorithm. the static PDTCHs that are on the same TRX and use the same MA group must be configured with the same MAIO. l In IBCA cell. 51-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l In the IBCA cell.2 Data Negotiated and Planned for Configuring IBCA The following data involves the configuration of a 2G internal IBCA neighboring cell relation and a 2G external IBCA neighboring cell relation.. l In a cell where the IBCA algorithm is enabled. l Network planning should be performed in the cell where IBCA is to be implemented before the implementation of IBCA. In the Co-BCCH cell. IBCA Waiting Measurement Report Time must be smaller than Min Interval for Consecutive Hos and Min Interval for Emerg. preferentially use the fixed MAIOs in the frequency planning for the configured SDCCHs.51 Configuring IBCA HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 51. and number of different frequency bands to which the frequencies in the MA group belong should be planned for the cell. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . l The number of IBCA neighboring cells of a cell must not exceed 12. only one MA group can be configured in each timeslot and each frequency. MA group. – The number of IBCA neighboring cells should be planned for the cell. l In RF FH mode. l The active power control algorithm is not allowed to be enabled in the IBCA cell. the PDTCH and SDCCH that are on the same TRX and use the same MA group must be configured with the same MAIO. These MAIOs cannot be dynamically allocated to other MSs that use the same timeslots in the cell. l Neither Flex MAIO nor Flex TSC can be enabled in the IBCA cell. l The Huawei III power control algorithm must be enabled in the cell where the IBCA algorithm is to be enabled. the EMR function cannot be enabled in the cell simultaneously.Hos. – The MAIO.1 Configuration Principles of IBCA This describes the configuration principles of the IBCA. l The number of frequencies in the MA table for the cell where the IBCA algorithm is enabled must not exceed 12. 51.

0 Network planning MPMODE Multiplexing Mode MODE4_1 Network planning AST Activity State ACTIVATED (Activated) Network planning SERVICEMODE Service Type TDM Network planning CELLNAME Cell Name IBCA_01 Network planning MCC Cell MCC 460 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1 Network planning SN Slot No. 13 Network planning BT Board Type GXPUI Network planning BackType Back Type NONE(Independent Mode) Network planning Table 51-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GFGUB Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source SRN Subrack No. 15 Network planning BT Board Type GXPUI Network planning BackType Back Type NONE(Independent Mode) Network planning PORTTYPE Port Type GE Network planning Table 51-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring an FH cell Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source BTSNAME BTS Name BTS_IBCA Network planning TYPE BTS Type BTS3012 Network planning UPNODE Up Node Type BSC Network planning SRN Subrack No.. 1 Network planning SN Slot No. 2 Network planning PN Port No. 51-5 . 1 Network planning SN Slot No.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 51 Configuring IBCA Table 51-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GXPUI Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source SRN Subrack No. Ltd.

90 Network planning FHMODE Frequency hopping mode RF_FH(RF FH) Network planning HOPINDEX Hop Index 0 Network planning FREQ1-FREQ5 frequency 1frequency 5 50. 70. 0 Network planning TRXTP TRX Board Type QTRU Network planning TRXPN TRX Board Pass No. 1. 60. 80. 4 Network planning Table 51-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for enabling Huawei III power control algorithm in a cell 51-6 Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME(By Name) Network planning CELLNAME Cell Name IBCA_01 Network planning PWRCTRLSW Power Control Switch HW3(HW3 Power Control) Network planning PWRBCDALLOW D Power Forecast Allowed NO(NO) Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 3. 80. 70. Ltd. 0 Network planning TRXFREQ TRX Freq 40 Network planning FREQ Freq. 2. Band GSM900_DCS1800 Network planning CPLMODE Separate Mode SUPPORT(Support) Network planning TRXBN TRX Board No. 50. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .. 90 Network planning MAIO1-MAIO5 MAIO1-MAIO5 0.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 51 Configuring IBCA Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source MNC Cell MNC 11 Network planning LAC Cell LAC 10 Network planning CI Cell CI 1 Network planning CTYPE Freq. 60.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 51 Configuring IBCA Table 51-5 Example of the data negotiated and planned for enabling the IBCA algorithm in a cell Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME(By Name) Network planning CELLNAME Cell Name IBCA_01 Network planning IBCAALLOWED IBCA Allowed YES(Yes) Network planning IBCASOFTBLKSWITCH IBCA Soft Block Switch YES(Yes) Network planning IBCAICDMSWITCH IBCA ICDM Switch YES(YES) Network planning IBCADYNCMEASUR ENCELLALLOWED IBCA Dynamic Measure Neighbor Cell Allowed NO(NO) Network planning IBCAMAIOUSMTD IBCA MAIO Using Method 0(Max. Ltd. 51-7 . Optimized MAIO) Network planning Table 51-6 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring an internal IBCA neighboring cell Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME(By Name) Network planning SRCCELLNAME Source Cell Name IBCA_01 Network planning NBRCELLNAME Neighbor Cell Name IBCA_02 Network planning IBCANCELLFLAG IBCA Neighbor Cell Flag YES(YES) Network planning IBCADYNCMEASURENCELLALLOWED IBCA Dynamic Measure Neighbor Cell Flag YES(YES) Network planning Table 51-7 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BTS synchronization method Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning BTSIDX BTS Index 1 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..

Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Preparation The following procedure takes how to configure a 2G internal IBCA neighboring cell relation and a 2G external IBCA neighboring cell relation as examples. run the ADD BRD command to add a GXPUI and a GFGUB. 51-8 1. see 51.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 51 Configuring IBCA Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source SYNCMETHOD Site Synchronization Method AISS(Air Interface Software Sync) Network planning Table 51-8 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring an external IBCA neighboring cell Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IBSCNAME External BSC Name EXTBSC Network planning BSCDPC External BSC DPC 170 Network planning CELLNAME Cell Name EXTCELL_01 Network planning MCC Cell MCC 460 Network planning MNC Cell MNC 11 Network planning LAC Cell LAC 10 Network planning CI Cell CI 10 Network planning BCCH BCCH FD 15 Network planning NCC NCC 0 Network planning BCC BCC 0 Network planning BSCIDX External BSC Index 0 Network planning 51. Step 2 Add a BTS and a cell.3 Configuring IBCA This describes how to configure IBCA on the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the ADD BTS command to add a cell. run the ADD TRX command to add a TRX. 2. For details.2 Data Negotiated and Planned for Configuring IBCA. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. and configure this cell as an FH cell. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .

DCTYPE=GSM900_DCS1800. DCMCC="460". BackType=NONE.. SN=2. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. SN=13. FREQ=40. the IBCA algorithm must be enabled in the neighboring cells of the IBCA cell. run the ADD CELL2GNC command to configure 2G internal neighboring cell relations. TRXTP=QTRU. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. DCELLNAME="IBCA_01". run the MOD CELLCHMGAD command to set IBCA Allowed to YES(YES). SRN=1. /*Add a BTS and a cell*/ ADD BTS: BTSNAME="BTS_IBCA". 51 Configuring IBCA On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Thus. DCLAC=10. Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Step 6 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. and then bind this cell and the added external BSC specified in Step 7. DCMNC="11". run the MOD CELLHOPTP command to set the FH mode of the cell to RF FH. the IBCA algorithm is enabled in the configured cell. Step 10 Add an external cell and configure it as a 2G external neighboring cell. CPLMode=SUPPORT. 51-9 . TYPE=BTS3012. Step 8 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. and set the attribute parameters of the neighboring cell IBCA Neighbor Cell Flag and IBCA Dynamic Measure Neighbor Cell Flag to YES(YES). On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 3. Step 12 Repeat Step 8 to configure 2G external neighboring cell relations. UPNODE=BSC. run the ADD CELL2GEXTC command to add a 2G external cell. Step 11 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. /*Add a GFGUB*/ ADD BRD: SRN=1. MPMODE=MODE4_1. BT=GFGUB. run the MOD MAIOPLAN to configure the MAIO data. run the MOD CELLMAGRP to configure the FH group. PortType=GE. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1. The BTS synchronization method is configured as soft-synchronized network.run the SET OTHSOFTPARA command to set IBCA Information Report Period Within BSC to 200 and IBCA Information Report Period Between BSC to 8. Step 7 Repeat Step 2 through Step 6 to add another IBCA cell. Step 9 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. TRXBN=0. AST=ACTIVATED. Ltd. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. BackType=NONE. run the MOD CELLPWRBASIC command to set Power Control Switch to HW3(HW3 Power Control).HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 3. Huawei III power control algorithm is enabled in the configured cell. For details. NOTE For internal cells of the BSC. run the MOD BTSOTHPARA command to set Site Synchronization Method to AISS(Air Interface Software Sync).b. TRXPN=0. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the ADD EXTBSC command to configure the data of the signaling points in the external BSC. Thus. PN=0. see 8 Configuring Frequency Hopping. SN=15. BT=GXPUI. run the command LST EXTBSC to query the external BSC index. 2.a according to the external BSC index obtained from Step 7. ServiceMode=TDM. ----End Example /*Add a GXPUI*/ ADD BRD: SRN=1. DCCI=0.

IBCADYNCMEASURENCELLALLOWED=NO. /*Configure an FH cell*/ MOD CELLHOPTP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. MCC="460". MAIO5=4. HWIII power control algorithm must be enabled in the IBCA cell. /*Configure 2G internal neighboring cell relations*/ ADD CELL2GNC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. HOPINDEX=0. FREQ=80. IBCADYNCMEASURENCELLALLOWED=YES. FREQ=60. IBCADYNCMEASURENCELLALLOWED=YES. TRXPN2=4.4 Configuring the IBCA Cell that Supports HWIII Power Control Algorithm This describes how to configure the IBCA cell that supports HWIII power control algorithm on the Local Maintenance Terminal. TRXBN=0. ADD TRX: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. TRXTP=QTRU. /*Configure BSC parameters*/ SET OTHSOFTPARA: IBCAINBSCINFORPTPRD=200. SRCCELLNAME="IBCA_01". IBCANCELLFLAG=YES. CELLNAME="IBCA_01". CELLNAME="IBCA_01". /*Configure 2G external neighboring cell relations*/ ADD CELL2GNC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. /*Add a cell to the external BSC*/ ADD CELL2GEXTC: CELLNAME="EXTCELL_01". CELLNAME="IBCA_01". CELLNAME="IBCA_01". BCC=0. TRXPN2=1. 51. FREQ1=50. MAIO4=3. TRXTP=QTRU. SRCCELLNAME="IBCA_01". BSCDPC=170. FREQ2=60. 51-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ADD TRX: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. TRXBN=0. CI=10. /*Add an external BSC*/ ADD EXTBSC: BSCNAME="EXTBSC". HOPINDEX=0. IBCAALLOWED=YES. MAIO1=0. CELLNAME="IBCA_01". NBRCELLNAME="IBCA_02". FREQ5=90. NCC=0. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . CELLNAME="IBCA_01". NBRCELLNAME="EXTCELL_01". TRXPN2=5. BSCIDX=0. IBCAOUTBSCINFORPTPRD=8. /*Configure the MAIO data*/ MOD MAIOPLAN: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. /*Configure the synchronization method of the BTS*/ MOD BTSOTHPARA: IDXTYPE=BYNAME.51 Configuring IBCA HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) /*Add a TRX*/ ADD TRX: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. CELLNAME="IBCA_01". FHMODE=RF_FH. BCCH=15. MAIO2=1. FREQ3=70. CELLNAME="IBCA_01". IBCANCELLFLAG=YES. SYNCMETHOD=AISS. /*Enable the IBCA algorithm in a cell*/ MOD CELLCHMGAD: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. PWRBCDALLOWD=NO. TRXPN2=2. TRXPN2=3. IBCAMAIOUSMTD=0. Ltd. MNC="11". /*Enable Huawei III power control algorithm in a cell*/ MOD CELLPWRBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. FREQ=70. IBCASOFTBLKSWITCH=YES. TRXTP=QTRU. TRXBN=0. ADD TRX: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. PWRCTRLSW=HW3. TRXTP=QTRU. TRXTP=QTRU. CELLNAME="IBCA_01". TRXBN=0. BTSNAME="BTS_IBCA".. ADD TRX: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. FREQ4=80. MAIO3=2. /*Configure an FH group*/ MOD CELLMAGRP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. IBCAICDMSWITCH=YES. CELLNAME="IBCA_01". TRXBN=0. FREQ=90. FREQ=50. LAC=10.

Ltd. run the MOD CELLPWRBASIC command to set Power Control Algorithm Switch to HW3 (HW3 Power Control). IBCA Waiting Measurement Report Time must be less than Min Interval for Consecutive HOs and Min Interval for Emerg. NOTE Run commands LST CELLCHMGAD and LST CELLHOCTRL to query whether above parameters meet requirements. PWRCTRLSW=HW3. run the LST CELLPWRBASIC command to query whether the parameter of the target IBCA cell Power Control Algorithm Switch is set to HW3 (HW3 Power Control). Step 2 If HWIII power control algorithm is not enabled for the target cell.. 51-11 . Prerequisite l If IBCA algorithm is enabled and IBCA Dynamic Measure Neighbor Cell Allowed is set to Yes in the cell. CELLNAME="IBCA1_1".5 Configuring the Cell that Enables the IBCA Algorithm Switch This describes how to configure the cell that enables the IBCA algorithm switch on the Local Maintenance Terminal. run commands MOD CELLCHMGAD and MOD CELLHOCTRL to modify parameters. 51. That is.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 51 Configuring IBCA Preparation Table 51-9 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the cell that supports HWIII power control algorithm Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME (BY NAME) Network planning CELLNAME Cell Name IBCA1_1 Network planning PWRCTRLSW Power Control Algorithm Switch HW3 (HW3 Power Control) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ----End Example An example script of configuring the IBCA cell that supports HWIII power control algorithm is as follows: MOD CELLPWRBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. If parameters do not meet requirements.HOs. check whether HWIII power control algorithm of the target cell is enabled.

CELLNAME="IBCA1_1". 51-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ----End Example An example script of configuring the cell that enables the IBCA algorithm switch is as follows: MOD CELLCHMGAD: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. IBCAALLOWED=YES. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . Step 2 If this parameter is set to No.6 Configuring an IBCA Neighboring Cell This describes how to configure an IBCA neighboring cell on the Local Maintenance Terminal. cell A must enable the IBCA algorithm if cell A is an IBCA neighboring cell of cell B. run the LST CELLCHMGAD command to query whether the parameter IBCA Allowed of the target IBCA cell is set to Yes. Prerequisite At least two cells enable the IBCA algorithm switch. l The active power control algorithm is not allowed to be enabled in the cell where enables the IBCA algorithm. IBCA algorithm has power prediction algorithm to perform the initial power prediction. Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 51 Configuring IBCA l For internal cells of the BSC.. Preparation Table 51-10 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the cell that enables the IBCA algorithm switch Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME (BY NAME) Network planning CELLNAME Cell Name IBCA1_1 Network planning IBCAALLOWED IBCA Allowed YES(Yes) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 51. run the MOD CELLPWRBASIC command to set IBCA Allowed to Yes.

----End Example An example script of configuring an IBCA neighboring cell is as follows: ADD CELL2GNC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. SRCCELLIDX=0. configure the cell that enables the IBCA algorithm switch as an IBCA neighboring cell according to the network planning. run the ADD CELL2GNC command to add neighboring relations of 2G neighboring cells. NBRCELLIDX=2. IBCADYNCMEASURENCELLALLOWED=YES. Ltd.7 Configuring the BTS Synchronization Mode This describes how to configure the BTS synchronization mode on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. IBCANCELLFLAG=YES. Then. 51.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 51 Configuring IBCA Preparation Table 51-11 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring an IBCA neighboring cell Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning SRCCELLIDX Source Cell Index 0 Network planning NBRCELLIDX Neighbor Cell Index 2 Network planning HOCTRLSWITCH Current HO Control Algorithm in Source Cell HOALGORITH M2(HO Algorithm II) Network planning IBCANCELLFLAG IBCA Neighbor Cell Flag YES(Yes) Network planning IBCADYNCMEASURENCELLALLOWED IBCA Dynamic Measure Neighbor Cell Flag YES(Yes) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2. 51-13 .. Set IBCA Neighbor Cell Flag and IBCA Dynamic Measure Neighbor Cell Flag to Yes.

51-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the LST BTSOTHPARA command to query whether the parameter Site Synchronization Method is set to AISS (Air Interface Software Sync). synchronization mode*/ IDXTYPE=BYNAME.8 Configuring External Attributes of the BSC This describes how to add external attributes of the BSC on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Example Example scripts of configuring the Um interface software synchronization as BTS synchronization mode are as follows: /*Configure the mode*/ MOD BTSOTHPARA: /*Query the BTS LST BTSOTHPARA: Um interface software synchronization as BTS synchronization IDXTYPE=BYIDX.. see 44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . SYNCMETHOD=AISS. the BTS configuration mode is configured as the Um interface software synchronization. BTSIDX=1. run the MOD BTSOTHPARA command to set Site Synchronization Method to AISS (Air Interface Software Sync). Ltd. BTSNAME="IBCA1". For details. 51. The following takes how to configure the Um interface software synchronization as BTS synchronization mode as an example. ----End Result On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Then. Table 51-12 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BTS synchronization mode Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning BTSIDX BTS Index 1 Network planning SYNCMETHOD Site Synchronization Method AISS (Air Interface Software Sync) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 51 Configuring IBCA Preparation The BTS synchronization involves GPS synchronization and Um interface software synchronization.

Step 2 Configure the binding relation between the external BSC and the external cell on the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the ADD EXTBSC command to configure external signaling points of the BSC. Ltd. l To bind the added external cell and the external BSC.9 Binding the external BSC and the External Cell This describes how to configure the binding relation between the external BSC and the external cell on the Local Maintenance Terminal.8 Configuring External Attributes of the BSC configured External BSC Index. run the LST EXTBSC command to query whether external signaling points of the BSC are configured.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 51 Configuring IBCA Preparation Table 51-13 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding external attributes of the BSC Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IBSCNAME External BSC Name 201 Network planning BSCDPC External BSC DPC 170 Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. 51. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 51-15 . /*Query configurations of external signaling points of the BSC*/ LST EXTBSC:. do as follows: run the ADD CELL2GEXTC command to set BSC Index to the index number queried in step 1. run the LST EXTBSC command to query 51. Prerequisite External signaling points of the BSC are configured. Example Example scripts of adding external attributes of the BSC are as follows: /*Configure external signaling points of the BSC*/ ADD EXTBSC: BSCNAME="201". ----End Result On the Local Maintenance Terminal. BSCDPC=170.

do as follows: run the ADD CELL2GEXTC command to set BSC Index to the index number queried in step 1. BCC=0. CI=1. Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. MNC="00". Ltd. LAC=10..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 51 Configuring IBCA l To bind the original external cell and the external BSC. BSCIDX=0. ". 51. run the MOD CELLCHMGAD command to set IBCA Allowed to NO(NO) to deactivate the IBCA function. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . /*Bind the added external cell and the external BSC*/ ADD CELL2GEXTC: CELLNAME="IBCA2_2".10 Deactivating IBCA This describes how to deactivate IBCA on the Local Maintenance Terminal. CELLNAME="IBCA2_2". ----End Example Example scripts of configuring the binding relation between the external BSC and the external cell are as follows: /*Query configurations of external signaling points of the BSC*/ LST EXTBSC:. NCC=0. BCCH=988. Prerequisite The IBCA function is configured. ----End 51-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. MCC="460". BSCIDX=0. /*Modify attributes of the original external cell and bind the original external cell and the external BSC*/ MOD CELL2GEXTC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME.

Ltd. Configuring BTS in automatic planning mode includes Configuring a BTS3900B GSM in automatic planning mode and Configuring a BTS3900E GSM in automatic planning mode 52. 52.2 Adding the BTS3900E GSM This describes how to add a BTS3900E GSM in automatic planning mode on the Local Maintenance Terminal.1 Adding the BTS3900B GSM This describes how to add a BTS3900B GSM in automatic planning mode on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you need to preconfigure some parameters used by the algorithm on the M2000 client. You can also query the progress and result of the automatic planning of the BTS.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 52 52 Configuring BTS in automatic planning mode Configuring BTS in automatic planning mode About This Chapter Before the automatic planning of the BTS. analyze the data. see M2000 Operator Guide. For details. or locate the fault on the M2000 client. 52-1 ..

see Activate BSC License. Scenario The BTS3900B GSM is mainly used in the area where the macro BTS cannot cover. Impact The configuration of the BTS3900B GSM can increase the network coverage. – When the Abis interface uses port IP address in communication. Preparation Table 52-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding the BTS3900B GSM Parameter Site attribute s 52-2 Parameter Name Example Source BTSNAME BTS name pico Network planning TYPE BTS type BTS3900B_G SM Network planning UPNODE Up Node Type BSC Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l The GXPUM/GXPUT/GDPUX is configured in the GMPS or GEPS where the GFGUB/ GOGUB is located. do as follows: 1. l The license is obtained and activated. realize the automatic configuration of the cell parameters.1 Adding the BTS3900B GSM This describes how to add a BTS3900B GSM in automatic planning mode on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Mandatory/ Optional Optional. To obtain and activate a license. The value 1 indicates that this function is enabled. In BSC6000V900R008 Exceptional Commercial License Application Template. set Whether to activate PICO Solution Package under License control items to 1. the port IP address of the active and standby boards are already configured. NEs Involved BTS. the device IP address and port IP address of the active and standby boards are already configured. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. and reduce the maintenance cost and difficulty in network planning.. and M2000 Prerequisite l The GFGUB/GOGUB is already configured and works in active/standby mode. BSC. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . – When the Abis interface uses device IP address in communication. Ltd. 2. For details.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 52 Configuring BTS in automatic planning mode 52.

0 Network planning SVCMODE Service Type IP Network planning IP BTS IP 192. Freq. CGI and RAC Automatic Plan Arithmetic Switch.168. run the ADD AUTOPLANBTS command to add the BTS3900B GSM. and Capacity and Coverage Automatic Optimize Arithmetic Switch is set to ON(ON) by default. ----End Example An example script for adding the BTS3900B GSM is as follows: Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1. Run the MOD AUTOPLANCFG command to select the automatic planning algorithm. and BSIC Automatic Optimize Arithmetic Switch.1 Network planning IPMSK BTS IP Mask 255.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Parameter Cell attribute s 52 Configuring BTS in automatic planning mode Parameter Name Example Source SRN Subrack No. 52-3 . Service Type can be set to IP only. 0 Network planning SN Slot No.255.169.255. NOTE When you add the BTS3900B GSM.1. 26 Network planning PN Port No. Ltd.1 Network planning BARCODE BTS Interface Board Bar Code 111122222233 33333 Factory setting DCELLNAME Cell Name pico_cell0 Network planning DCTYPE Cell Type DCS1800 Network planning MAXFQNUM BTS Automatic Plan Maximum TRX Number 1 Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal..0 Network planning GWIP BTS SeGW IP Address 199.

TYPE=BTS3900B_GSM.52 Configuring BTS in automatic planning mode HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) ADD AUTOPLANBTS: BTSNAME="pico".1. BARCODE="11112222223333333". Scenario The BTS3900E GSM is mainly used for indoor coverage and public area coverage. To obtain and activate a license. Mandatory/ Optional Optional. GWIP="199.255. SVCMODE=IP. 52. MAXFQNUM=1. NEs Involved BTS. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . Ltd. Impact The configuration of the BTS3900E GSM realizes the automatic planning and optimization of the BTS and reduces the maintenance cost and difficulty in network planning. IPMSK="255. UPNODE=BSC.168.169.255.1. For details. SN=26. set Whether to activate Easy GSM Solution Package under License control items to 1. do as follows: 1. In BSC6000V900R008 Exceptional Commercial License Application Template. PN=0.. – There are idle ports on the GEHUB in the GMPS or GEPS. and M2000 Prerequisite l In TDM networking mode: – The GEIUB/GOIUB is already configured. – There are idle ports on the GEIUB/GOIUB in the GMPS or GEPS. The value 1 indicates that this function is enabled. – The GXPUM/GXPUT/GDPUX is configured in the GMPS or GEPS where the GFGUB/GOGUB is located. IP="192. DCTYPE=DCS1800. BSC.1".1".2 Adding the BTS3900E GSM This describes how to add a BTS3900E GSM in automatic planning mode on the Local Maintenance Terminal. – The GXPUM/GXPUT/GDPUX is configured in the GMPS or GEPS where the GFGUB/GOGUB is located. 2. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. the device IP addresses and port IP addresses should be configured for the active and standby GFGUBs/GOGUBs. DCELLNAME="pico_cell0".0". l In HDLC/HUB networking mode: – The GEHUB is already configured. l 52-4 The license is obtained and activated. If the GFGUB/GOGUB works in active/ standby mode. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. – The GXPUM is configured in the GMPS or GEPS where the GEIUB/GOIUB is located. l In IP networking mode: – The GFGUB/GOGUB is already configured. SRN=0. see Activate BSC License.

Ltd. 52-5 . 0 Network planning SVCMODE Service Type TDM Network planning DCELLNAME Cell Name shanghai_0 Network planning DCTYPE Cell Type DCS1800 Network planning MCC MCC 460 Network planning MNC MNC 01 Network planning LAC LAC 8240 Network planning CI CI 2 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 52 Configuring BTS in automatic planning mode Preparation Table 52-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding the BTS3900E GSM in TDM networking mode Parameter BTS attribute s Cell attribute s Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter Name Example Source BTSNAME BTS name shanghai Network planning TYPE BTS type BTS3900E_GS M Network planning UPNODE Up Node Type BSC Network planning SRN Subrack No. 26 Network planning PN Port No. 0 Network planning SN Slot No..

Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 52 Configuring BTS in automatic planning mode Table 52-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding the BTS3900E GSM in HDLC/HUB networking mode Parameter Site attribute s Cell attribute s Parameter Name Example Source BTSNAME BTS name shanghai Network planning TYPE BTS type BTS3900E_GS M Network planning UPNODE Up Node Type BSC Network planning SRN Subrack No. 26 Network planning PN Port No.. 0 Network planning SN Slot No. 0 Network planning SVCMODE Service Type HDLC Network planning DCELLNAME Cell Name shanghai_0 Network planning DCTYPE Cell Type DCS1800 Network planning MCC MCC 460 Network planning MNC MNC 01 Network planning LAC LAC 8240 Network planning CI CI 2 Network planning Table 52-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding the BTS3900E GSM in IP networking mode Parameter Site attribute s 52-6 BTSNAME Parameter Name Example Source BTS name shanghai Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

1. 0 Network planning SVCMODE Service Type IP Network planning IP BTS IP 192.1 Network planning IPMSK BTS IP Mask 255.0 Network planning GWIP BTS SeGW IP Address 199. 0 Network planning SN Slot No.1. Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Parameter Cell attribute s 52 Configuring BTS in automatic planning mode Parameter Name Example Source TYPE BTS type BTS3900E_GS M Network planning UPNODE Up Node Type BSC Network planning SRN Subrack No.255.169. run the ADD AUTOPLANBTS command to add a BTS3900E GSM.255. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1 Network planning BARCODE BTS Interface Board Bar Code 111122222233 33333 Unique identifier DCELLNAME Cell Name shanghai_0 Network planning DCTYPE Cell Type DCS1800 Network planning MCC MCC 460 Network planning MNC MNC 01 Network planning LAC LAC 8240 Network planning CI CI 2 Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal..168. 26 Network planning PN Port No. 52-7 .

TYPE=BTS3900E_GSM. DCTYPE=DCS1800. UPNODE=BSC. Ltd. HDLC. PN=0. MCC="460". and BSIC Automatic Plan Arithmetic Switch. LAC=8240. and BSIC Automatic Optimize Arithmetic Switch. SRN=0. Freq. Freq. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . SN=26. HDLC_HubBTS. CI=2.52 Configuring BTS in automatic planning mode HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) NOTE When adding a BTS3900E GSM. MNC="01". 52-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ----End Example An example script for adding the BTS3900E GSM in TDM networking mode is as follows: ADD AUTOPLANBTS: BTSNAME="shanghai". and Capacity and Coverage Automatic Optimize Arithmetic Switch is set to ON(ON) by default. DCELLNAME="shanghai_0". SVCMODE=TDM. you can set Service Type to TDM.. Run the MOD AUTOPLANCFG command to select the automatic planning algorithms and automatic optimization algorithms. or IP.

it is recommended that the early classmark sending control (ECSC) be set to Yes. MSC. That is. a subscriber can send photos or browse websites during a call. Impact – In DTM. In addition. l DTM is used in built-in PCU configuration mode rather than in external PCU configuration mode. MSC. concurrent CS services and PS services. This feature implements the simplified operation function of the class A mobile phone.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 53 Configure DTM 53 Configure DTM Dual Transfer Mode (DTM) is a 3GPP-defined standard function. MS. l DTM is not supported in a cell enabled with the queuing function. l DTM requires the support of the BSC. l In an extended cell. the MSC must support the COMMON ID message. subscribers can use the services that are similar to 3G services through the 2G network.. NC2 is not supported because GPRS measurement reports are not reported. With DTM. – If DTM is enabled in a cell and the parameter Network Operation Mode of the GPRS attributes is not set to Network Operation Mode I. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NEs Involved BSC. the subscribers in a GSM network can enjoy services similar to those provided in a 3G network. DTM is not supported due to the limitation of the MS multislot capability. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. MS. in areas with insufficient 3G coverage. and SGSN. BTS. 53-1 . For details. SGSN Prerequisite l The DTM function is license-controlled. a subscriber can provide PS service without disrupting the CS service. l After a cell is enabled with DTM. That is. that is. see Activate BSC License. Scenario supports concurrent CS service and PS service. In addition. the A Interface Collaboration Paging Switch should be set to Open so that the network can page the MSs in packet transfer mode successfully. DTM allows simultaneous transfer of CS service and PS service. The 3G network provides concurrent CS service and PS service. Ltd.

Step 2 Run the MOD CELLCCBASIC command to set ECSC to YES(YES).SupportEndTM to SUPPORT (Support). and BSS Paging Coordination must be set to Yes.. Support Class11 DTM. l If Network Operation Mode of the GPRS services is not set to Network Operation Mode II. For details. the Gs interface (the interface between the MSC/VLR and the SGSN) must be configured.SupportDTM to SUPPORT(Support). see 14 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination. You are advised not to enable these functions during configuration.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 53 Configure DTM l A Interface Collaboration Paging Switch must be set to Open. Ltd. ----End Example An example script of configuring the DTM is as follows: 53-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l The DTM feature does not support the following functions: – single timeslot mode – extended DTM multi-slot capability – enhanced CS establishment and release – DTM handover Preparation Table 53-1 Example of the negotiated and planned data for configuring the DTM Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME(By Name) Network planning CELLNAME Cell Name CELL01 Network planning GPRS GPRS SupportAsInnPcu (SupportAsInnPcu) Network planning EDGE EDGE YES(Yes) Network planning SUPPORTDTM SupportDTM SUPPORT(Support) Network planning SUPPORTENDTM SupportEndTM SUPPORT(Support) Network planning ECSC ECSC YES(YES) Network planning Procedure Step 1 Run the SET CELLGPRS command to set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu (SupportAsInnPcu). NOTE Support Enhanced DTM. configure the cell supports use early classmark sending. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . and Support HMC DTM cannot be set to Yes in BSC6000 V900R008C12. configure the cell supports the DTM.

verify that the web page can be browsed and the call is not affected. EDGE=YES. MOD CELLCCBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. CELLNAME="CELL01". run the SET CELLGPRS command to set SupportDTM to UNSUPPORT(Unsupport)..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 53 Configure DTM /*Configure the cell supports the DTM*/ SET CELLGPRS: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. SUPPORTENDTM=SUPPORT. Deactivating DTM 1. Ltd. Connect the MS to the dialing terminal to set up the dial-up connection. Postrequisite l l Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Verifying DTM 1. ECSC=YES. 2. GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 53-3 . Verifying the deactivation of DTM: The operations are the same as those for Verifying DTM. 3. CELLNAME="CELL01". Use an MS supporting the DTM to make a call to a fixed-line phone and maintain the call. Verify that the web page cannot be browsed when the call is in progress. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. SUPPORTDTM=SUPPORT. 2. After the connection is successful.

.

Impact None. BSC. When NCH Occupy Block Number is not 0..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 54 54 Configuring VGCS/VBS Configuring VGCS/VBS This describes how to configure the VGCS/VBS. such as the Voice Group Call Service (VGCS). The MS initiates a VGCS/VBS call after receiving the message indicating that the system supports the VGCS/VBS. the default value of NCH Occupy Block Number is 0. NEs Involved BTS. VBS. the GSM-R has new features. Scenario VGCS. Compared with the original GSM system. Ltd. that is. and eMLPP. and MSC Preparation The cell does not support the VGCS/VBS by default. 54-1 . The GSM-R can provide diversified voice dispatch services required in the private network. and enhanced Multi-Level Precedence and Pre-emption (eMLPP) service. Set NCH Occupy Block Number and NCH Start Block to configure the VGCS/VBS. the BSC initiates the NCH messages to the MS in system information type 1. Table 54-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the VGCS/VBS Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source VGCS/ VBS IDXTYPE Index Type BYNAME (By Name) Network planning CELLNAME Cell Name CELL_1 Network planning NCHOCBLOCKNU M NCH Occupy Block Number 1 Network planning NCHSTARTBLOCK NCH Start Block 0 Network planning EMLPPPRIORITY eMLPP Priority Priority4 (Priority 4) Network planning eMLPP Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Voice Broadcast Service (VBS).

run the MOD CELLGSMR command and set eMLPP Priorityin the VGCS/VBS. Then. VGCS/VBS Setup Ack. run the MOD CELLGSMR command. Postrequisite l VGCS – Verifying VGCS 54-2 1. If the paging message priority is higher than the value of eMLPP Priority set on the BSC side. After receiving the message. the VGCS or VBS is successfully configured in the cell. Ltd. VGCS/VBS Assignment Result. VGCS/VBS Assignment Request. Make MS 1 camp on the test cell. NCHSTARTBLOCK=0. Five seconds later. ----End Example The example script of configuring the VGCS/VBS is as follows: /*Configure the VGCS/VBS*/ /*Query the VGCS/VBS data configuration of CELL_1 and verify the number of blocks occupied by the NCH*/ LST CELLGSMR: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. 3. CNAME="CELL_1". The VGCS/VBS Setup. Query the initial configuration of the VGCS/VBS of the current cell according to the index type. /*Configure the eMLPP in the VGCS/VBS*/ MOD CELLGSMR: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. the BSC initiates a message to an MS. CELLNAME="CELL_1". 2. the TCH is released. /*If NCH Occupy Block Number is 0. Run the LST CELLGSMR command and ensure that NCH Occupy Block Number is not 0. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. and VGCS/VBS Talker Information messages are traced over the A interface. The number of NCH Occupy Block Number plus NCH Start Block must be smaller than or equal to the number of Number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH. EMLPPPRIORITY=Priority4. 3.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 54 Configuring VGCS/VBS Procedure Step 1 Configure the VGCS/VBS. NCHOCBLOCKNUM=1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. the current cell does not support the VGCS/VBS. CELLNAME="CELL_1". BTSNAME="BTS_1". 2. If NCH Occupy Block Number is set to 0. That is. NOTE NCH Occupy Block Number must not be 0. /*Ensure that CELL_1 supports the VGCS/VBS*/ LST CELLGSMR: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. run the LST CELLGSMR command. CNAME="CELL_1". Set NCH Occupy Block Number and NCH Start Block and run the command. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Observe the channel status of the test cell. Step 2 Configure the eMLPP in the VGCS/VBS. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . BTSNAME="BTS_1". the BTS preferentially schedules the paging messages. change NCH Occupy Block Number to 1 and NCH Start Block to 0*/ MOD CELLGSMR: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. 1. Then.. the MS initiates a VGCS or VBS call in the group where the MS belongs. use MS 1 to initiate a VGCS. The VGCS channel and a TCH are in the occupied state. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Run the LST CELLIDLEBASIC command to query the number of Number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH.

and VGCS/VBS Talker Information messages are traced over the A interface. VBS – Verifying VBS 1. 2. MS 2 alerts that the VGCS exists. observe the traced messages on the A interface and the information displayed on MS 1. The occupation of the uplink by MS 1 is refused. After MS 2 selects to join the VBS. 2. The VGCS/VBS Setup. At the same time. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the LST CELLGSMR command to check the setting of NCH Occupy Block Number. Then.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 54 Configuring VGCS/VBS 4. VGCS/VBS Assignment Request. Then. Uplink Request Confirmation. Hold on the PTT key on MS 2 to occupy the uplink. it indicates that the VGCS function is deactivated. hold on the PTT key on MS 1 to occupy the uplink. 6. The number of MS 2 is displayed on MS 1 and the voice from MS 2 can be heard. MS 2 selects to join the VGCS and displays the VGCS ID. Make MS 2 camp on the test cell. Ltd. If the parameter is set to 0. Hold on the PTT key on MS 2 to occupy the uplink. VGCS/VBS Setup Ack. and VGCS/VBS Assignment Result messages are traced over the A interface. – Deactivating VGCS l 1. Then. it indicates that the VBS function is deactivated. – Deactivating VBS Issue 02 (2010-09-20) 1. 3. run the LST CELLGSMR command to check the setting of NCH Occupy Block Number. Make MS 2 camp on the test cell. The VBS channel and a TCH are found to be in the occupied state. Uplink Request Ack. use MS 2 to initiate a VBS with the same ID. If the parameter is set to 0. The Uplink Request. 54-3 . On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD CELLGSMR command to set NCH Occupy Block Number to 0.. 2. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD CELLGSMR command to set NCH Occupy Block Number to 0. Then. MS 2 alerts that the VBS exists. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Observe the channel status of the test cell. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. use MS 2 to initiate a VGCS with the same ID. the number of MS 1 is displayed on MS 2 and the voice from MS 1 is heard. 5.

.

and MSC support the AMR function. Preparation Table 55-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring AMR Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source AMR basic parameter IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning AVer A Interface Tag GSM_PHASE_ 2Plus Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NEs Involved MS. BTS. see Activate BSC License. and carrier-to-interference (C/I) ratio. and MSC Prerequisite l The AMR function is license-controlled. 55-1 . Impact None.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 55 Configuring AMR 55 Configuring AMR The adaptive multi rate (AMR) is a speech encoding and decoding algorithm. and then adjust the voice encoding rate accordingly. BTS. Ltd. In this way. receive quality. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. both the antiinterference capability of the radio communications system and the voice quality are improved. With AMR. BSC. which can be adjusted between full-rate speech version 3 and half-rate speech version 3 specified by the protocol. the BTS and the MS can evaluate the interference on the radio network according to the measurements such as receive level. For details.. Scenario The AMR function is used to balance the voice quality and the system capacity. l The MS.

Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .. Compensation Allowed YES(YES) Network planning AMRULPRED LEND AMR UL MR.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 55 Configuring AMR Data Type AMR call processing parameter AMR intra-cell TCHH-TCHF handover parameter AMR power control parameter 55-2 Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source VOICEVER Speech Version Full_rate_Ver3 (Full-rate Ver 3) Network planning AFRSAMULF RM AFR SACCH Multi-Frames 48 Network planning AFRDSBLCNT AFR Radio Link Timeout 64 Network planning RATECTRLS W AMR rate control switch ALG1 (Algorithm I) Network planning AMRTFOSWI TCH AMR TFO Switch DISABLE (DISABLE) Network planning AMRUADTHA W AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed NO(NO) Network planning HOCTRLSWIT CH HO Control Switch HOALGORIT HM1(HO Algorithm I) Network planning INTRACELLF HHOEN Intracell F-H HO Allowed YES(YES) Network planning INFHHOSTAT Intracell F-H HO Stat Time[s] 5 Network planning INFHHOLAST Intracell F-H HO Last Time [s] 4 Network planning INHOF2HTH F2H HO threshold 25 Network planning INHOH2FTH H2F HO threshold 12 Network planning PWRCTRLSW Power Control Switch HW2(HW2 Power Control) Network planning AMRPCADJPE RIOD AMR PC Interval 3 Network planning AMRMRCOM PREG AMR MR. Ltd. Number Predicted 0 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

the settings of AMR ACS[F]and AMR ACS[H] must be consistent with the settings on the CN side. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2. If the cell supports the half-rate service. run the MOD CELLCCAMR command to set the parameters related to the AMR call control of the TCHH or TCHF. NOTE In A over IP mode. l When HO Control Switch is set to HOALGORITHM1(HO Algorithm I).HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type AMR channel management parameter 55 Configuring AMR Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source AMRDLPRED LEND AMR DL MR. and H2F HO threshold. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. AMR F-H Ho ATCB Threshold. AMR F-H Ho Qual. Ltd. set AHR SACCH MultiFrames and AHR AHR Radio Link Timeout simultaneously. run the MOD BSCBASIC command to set A Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set the parameters related to the AMR intra-cell TCHH-TCHF handover.. select Half_rate_Ver3(Half-rate Ver 3) simultaneously. run the MOD CELLCCBASIC command to set AFR SACCH Multi-Frames and AFR Radio Link Timeout according to the actual network conditions. if Speech Version is set to Full_rate_Ver3(Full-rate Ver 3) and Half_rate_Ver3 (Half-rate Ver 3). 1. Step 3 Set the parameters related to the AMR intra-cell TCHH-TCHF handover. Step 2 Configure the parameters related to the AMR call processing. and set the following parameters: AMR F-H Traffic Threshold. Threshold. Intracell F-H HO Last Time[s]. set AMR F-H Ho Allowed to YES (YES). set Intracell F-H HO Allowed to YES(YES). On the Local Maintenance Terminal. F2H HO threshold. Number Predicted 0 Network planning ALLOWAMR HALFRATEUS ERPERC Ratio of AMRHR 100 Network planning AMRTCHHPR IORALLOW AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed YES(YES) Network planning AMRTCHHPR IORLOAD AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold 55 Network planning Procedure Step 1 Set the AMR basic parameters. run the MOD CELLCCACCESS command to set Speech Version to Full_rate_Ver3(Full-rate Ver 3). the relevant settings are as follows: – In the case of the AMR TCHH-to-TCHF handover. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 1. and set Intracell F-H HO Stat Time[s]. If the cell supports the half-rate service. 55-3 . Otherwise. 2. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. calls cannot be set up. l When HO Control Switch is set to HOALGORITHM2(HO Algorithm II).

Step 5 Set the parameters related to the AMR channel management in a cell. AMRUADTHAW=NO. MOD CELLCCAMR: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. AMR H-F Ho ATCB Threshold. AMRTFOSWITCH=DISABLE. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. CELLIDX=0. AMRDLPREDLEND=0. set AMR H-F Qaul. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 2. INHOH2FTH=12. and set the following parameters: AMR H-F Ho Qual. PWRCTRLSW=HW2. AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Adjust Step.*/ MOD BSCBASIC: AbisVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus.. ALLOWAMRHALFRATEUSERPERC=100.*/ SET CELLCHMGBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. run the MOD CELLCHMGAD command to set AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed and AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold according to the actual network conditions. run the MOD CELLPWRHW3 command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to set the parameters related to Huawei III power control according to the actual network conditions.*/ MOD CELLPWRBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. MOD CELLPWRHW2: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. and AMR F-H Ho ATCB Adjust Step. and AMR H-F Ho Pathloss Threshold.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 55 Configuring AMR Threshold. AMR H-F Traffic Threshold. AMRTCHHPRIORALLOW=YES. CELLIDX=0. 1.*/ MOD CELLCCBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. l When Power Control Switch is set to HW3(HW3 Power Control). 55-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ho Allowed to YES (YES). run the MOD CELLPWRHW2 command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to set the parameters related to Huawei II power control according to the actual network conditions. RATECTRLSW=ALG1. AFRSAMULFRM=48. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . /*Configure the parameters related to the AMR channel management in a cell. /*Set the parameters related to the AMR intra-cell TCHF-TCHH handover. ----End Example An example script is as follows: /*Set the AMR basic parameters. AMRPCADJPERIOD=3. MOD CELLCCACCESS: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. INHOF2HTH=25. Threshold. MOD CELLCHMGAD: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. CELLIDX=0. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. INFHHOLAST=4. INTRACELLFHHOEN=YES. INFHHOSTAT=5.*/ SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. VOICEVER=Full_rate_Ver1-0&Full_rate_Ver2-0 &Full_rate_Ver3-1&Half_rate_Ver1-0&Half_rate_Ver2-0&Half_rate_Ver3-0. l When Power Control Switch is set to HW2(HW2 Power Control). Step 4 Configure the parameters related to the AMR power control in a cell. AMRULPREDLEND=0. Ltd. /*Set the parameters related to the AMR call control. In addition. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. CELLIDX=0. CELLIDX=0. AMRTCHHPRIORLOAD=55. set AMR SACCH Downlink Power Upgrade according to the actual network conditions. /*Set the parameters related to the AMR power control in a cell. run the SET CELLCHMGBASIC command to set Ratio of AMR-HR according to the actual network conditions. AFRDSBLCNT=64. CELLIDX=0. CELLIDX=0. – In the case of TCHF-to-TCHH handover. CELLIDX=0. AMRSADLUPGRADE=0. AMRMRCOMPREG=YES. run the MOD CELLPWRBASIC command to set Power Control Switch to HW2(HW2 Power Control) or HW3(HW3 Power Control).

– Method 2: Deselect Full-rate Ver 3 and Half_rate_Ver3. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) 1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 2. 55-5 . On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 1. In this case. Deactivating AMR – Method 1: Set A Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_1 or GSM_PHASE_2. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. only the current cell does not support AMR. none of the cells under the BSC supports AMR. On the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 55 Configuring AMR Postrequisite l l Verifying AMR 1. Two MSs supporting AMR make calls. 2. 2. run the MOD BSCBASIC command to set A Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_1 or GSM_PHASE_2. In this case. run the LST CELLCCACCESS command to verify that bit 3 and bit 6 from the right to the left of the Speech Version attribute are 0. run the LST BSCBASIC command to verify that A Interface Tag is set to GSM_PHASE_1 or GSM_PHASE_2. run the MOD CELLCCACCESS command to deselect Full_rate_Ver3(Full-rate Ver 3) and Half_rate_Ver3 (Half-rate Ver 3) in the Speech Version drop-down list.. run the DSP CALLRES command to verify that Service Type in the TC Resource Information is set to FAMR or HAMR. On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

.

NEs Involved BTS. the uplink rate of an EGPRS user can be dynamically adjusted according to the actual network status. Impact None. The BSC dynamically adjusts the codec scheme adopted by the PDCH according to the uplink measurement report reported by the BTS. BSC Prerequisite l The Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding function is not license-controlled. l The GPRS/EGPRS function is enabled. 56-1 . Scenario This feature increases the uplink rate of the EGPRS users. Preparation Table 56-1 Example of the configuring dynamically adjusting the uplink MCS coding Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYCELLIDX(By Cell Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning UPFIXMCS UpFixMcs UNFIXED (UNFIXED) Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the codec scheme of the PDCH changes with the radio environment where the MS locates.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 56 56 Configuring Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding Configuring Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding The BSS supports nine codec schemes: MCS-1 to MCS-9. and improves the network quality. enhances the user experience. thus improving the uplink throughput. In this manner. With the Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding function. Ltd..

Postrequisite l Verifying dynamically adjusting the uplink MCS coding – Start the trace of the messages on the Um interface in the PS domain. run the SET EGPRSPARA command to set UpFixMcs to one value between MCS1 and MCS9. Ltd. UPFIXMCS=UNFIXED. Verify that the coding scheme changes within Uplink Data Block (MCS-1) through Uplink Data Block (MCS-9) when uploading is performed on the PC connected to the EGPRS MS. Verify that the coding scheme shown in the trace window does not change. ----End Example An example script for configuring dynamically adjusting the uplink MCS coding SET EGPRSPARA: IDXTYPE=BYCELLIDX. run theSET EGPRSPARA command to setUpFixMcs to UNFIXED(UNFIXED). 2. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .. l 56-2 Deactivating dynamically adjusting the uplink MCS coding 1. Verifying deactivation of dynamically adjusting the uplink MCS coding: The operations are the same as those for Verifying dynamically adjusting the uplink MCS coding.56 Configuring Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. CELLIDX=0. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Different frequency reuse patterns can be applied to the overlaid and underlaid subcells. Band GSM900 Network planning AST Activity State ACTIVATED (Activated) Network planning MCC MCC 460 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Preparation Table 57-1 Example of the configuring concentric cell Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source Cell attributes IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning BTSIDX BTS Index 0 Network planning CELLNAME Cell Name cell Network planning CTYPE Freq. Therefore. NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite l The concentric cell function is not license-controlled. Ltd. Impact None. the system capacity is expanded without affecting the voice quality. 57-1 . Scenario The tight frequency reuse pattern is applied to the overlaid subcell.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 57 57 Configuring Concentric Cell Configuring Concentric Cell A concentric cell is divided into an overlaid subcell and an underlaid subcell.

57-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 57 Configuring Concentric Cell Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source MNC MNC 00 Network planning LAC LAC 1 Network planning CI CI 1 Network planning TRXBN TRX Board No. Ltd. 1 Network planning IUOTP Cell IUO Type Concentric_cell (Concentric cell) Network planning ENIUO Enhanced Concentric Allowed YES(Yes) Network planning TRX concentric attributes IUO HW_Concentric Attribute UNDERLAID (Underlaid Subcell) Network planning Cell handover basic parameters CONHOEN Concentric Circles HO Allowed YES(Yes) Network planning Cell concentric handover parameters HOCTRLSWITC H Current HO Control Algorithm HOALGORITH M1(HO Algorithm I) Network planning ULTOOLHOALL OW UL to OL HO Allowed NO(NO) Network planning OLTOULHOALL OW OL to UL HO Allowed YES(Yes) Network planning RECLEVUOHOA LLOW RX_LEV for UO HO Allowed YES(Yes) Network planning RECQUALUOHO ALLOW RX_QUAL for UO HO Allowed NO(NO) Network planning TAFORUOHOAL LOW TA for UO HO Allowed YES(Yes) Network planning Cell concentric attributes Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 0 Network planning TRXFREQ TRX Freq. run the ADD CELL command to add a cell.

MNC="00". CELLNAME="cell". perform the test and record the frequencies used by the MS. it indicates that the concentric cell function is deactivated. TAFORUOHOALLOW=YES. /*Configure the concentric attributes of the cell. BTSIDX=0. run the MOD TRXIUO command to set HW_Concentric Attribute of the TRX to OVERLAID(Overlaid Subcell) or UNDERLAID (Underlaid Subcell) according to the actual network conditions. LAC=1.. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Deactivating concentric cell 1.*/ MOD CELLIUO: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. 3. Ltd. IUO=UNDERLAID.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 57 Configuring Concentric Cell Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. If Cell IUO Type is set to Normal_cell(Normal cell) or EDB_cell(Enhanced double freq cell). OLTOULHOALLOW=YES. RECLEVUOHOALLOW=YES. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the SET CELLHOIUO command to set the parameters related to the concentric cell handover according to the actual network conditions. /*Configure the concentric attributes of the TRX. ----End Example An example script is as follows: /*Add a cell. 2. CELLIDX=0. ENIUO=YES.*/ MOD TRXIUO: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. TRXBN=0. and set Enhanced Concentric Allowed according to the actual network conditions. Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Verifying the deactivation of concentric cell 1. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set Concentric Circles HO Allowed to YES(Yes). /*Set the basic handover parameters of the cell. run the MOD CELLIUO command. RECQUALUOHOALLOW=NO. run the MOD CELLIUO command to set Cell IUO Type to Concentric_cell(Concentric cell). CELLIDX=0. /*Configure concentric handover parameters of the cell*/ SET CELLHOIUO: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Postrequisite l l l Verifying concentric cell 1. CELLIDX=0. Switch over the frequencies used by the MS to the frequencies used by the overlaid cell when the MS is near to the BTS.*/ ADD CELL: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. ULTOOLHOALLOW=NO. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. IUOTP=Concentric_cell. MCC="460". use the test MS to make a call to a fixedline phone. CI=1. 57-3 . CTYPE=GSM900. CELLIDX=0. 2. use the test MS to make a call to the fixed-line phone. TRXBN=0. At the fringe of the test cell far from the BTS. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. perform the test and record the frequencies used by the MS as the frequencies configured for the underlaid cell. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) At the fringe of the test cell far from the BTS. Hold on the call and move the MS from the fringe of the test cell towards the BTS. Then. run the MOD CELLIUO command to set Cell IUO Type to Normal_cell(Normal cell) or EDB_cell(Enhanced double freq cell).*/ SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. AST=ACTIVAED. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. TRXFREQ=1. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. Then. CONHOEN=YES.

Ltd. Hold on the call and move the MS from the fringe of the test cell towards the BTS. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..57 Configuring Concentric Cell 57-4 HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 2. Verify that the frequencies used by the MS do not change when the MS is near to the BTS. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . 3.

Impact None. l The extended cell function depends on the concentric cell function. NEs Involved BSC. seashores. islands. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 58 58 Configuring Extended Cell Configuring Extended Cell The application of extended cell breaks the coverage limit of 35 km of a GSM cell. For details. Scenario The extended cell function is applicable in less populated areas with low signal fading such as deserts. 58-1 . see Activate BSC License. Preparation Table 58-1 Example of the configuring extended cell Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source Cell attributes IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning BTSIDX BTS Index 0 Network planning CELLNAME Cell Name cell Network planning CTYPE Freq. BTS Prerequisite l The extended cell function is license-controlled. and water areas. Ltd. This helps operators to provide wider coverage in special areas.. Band GSM900 Network planning AST Activity State ACTIVATED (Activated) Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

. 0 Network planning TRXFREQ TRX Freq. 1 Network planning IUOTP Cell IUO Type Concentric_cell (Concentric cell) Network planning ENIUO Enhanced Concentric Allowed YES(Yes) Network planning Cell extension type EXTTP Cell Extension Type DaulTst_ExtCell (Double Timeslot Extension Cell) Network planning TRX concentric attributes IUO HW_Concentric Attribute UNDERLAID (Underlaid Subcell) Network planning Cell handover basic parameters CONHOEN Concentric Circles HO Allowed YES(Yes) Network planning Cell concentric handover parameters HOCTRLSWITC H Current HO Control Algorithm HOALGORITH M1(HO Algorithm I) Network planning ULTOOLHOALL OW UL to OL HO Allowed NO(NO) Network planning OLTOULHOALL OW OL to UL HO Allowed YES(Yes) Network planning RECLEVUOHOA LLOW RX_LEV for UO HO Allowed YES(Yes) Network planning RECQUALUOHO ALLOW RX_QUAL for UO HO Allowed NO(NO) Network planning Cell concentric attributes 58-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 58 Configuring Extended Cell Data Type Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source MCC MCC 460 Network planning MNC MNC 00 Network planning LAC LAC 1 Network planning CI CI 1 Network planning TRXBN TRX Board No. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .

TRXFREQ=1. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. /*Set the basic handover parameters of the cell. CELLIDX=0. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. OLTOULHOALLOW=YES. CELLIDX=0. CELLIDX=0.*/ MOD TRXIUO: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Start the monitoring of the channel status. CELLIDX=0. MNC="00". 58-3 . CI=1. ULTOOLHOALLOW=NO. RECLEVUOHOALLOW=YES. EXTTP=DaulTst_ExtCell.*/ SET CELLHOIUO: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. TAFORUOHOALLOW=YES. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.*/ SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type 58 Configuring Extended Cell Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source TAFORUOHOAL LOW TA for UO HO Allowed YES(Yes) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. see Monitoring Channel Status in the BSC LMT User Guide. /*Configure the concentric attributes of the cell. Ltd. LAC=1. run the ADD CELL command to add a cell. /*Configure the concentric attributes of the TRX. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set Concentric Circles HO Allowed to YES(Yes). RECQUALUOHOALLOW=NO. ----End Example An example script is as follows: /*Add a cell. AST=ACTIVAED. Step 6 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.*/ MOD CELLIUO: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. run the MOD TRXIUO command to set HW_Concentric Attribute of the TRX to OVERLAID(Overlaid Subcell) or UNDERLAID (Underlaid Subcell) according to the actual network conditions. /*Set the concentric handover parameters of the cell. run the MOD CELLIUO command to set Cell IUO Type to Concentric_cell(Concentric cell). run the SET CELLHOIUO command to set the parameters related to the concentric cell handover according to the actual network conditions. CELLNAME="cell". BTSIDX=0. /*Set the cell extension type. CTYPE=GSM900.*/ ADD CELL: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. For details. IUOTP=Concentric_cell. Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Postrequisite l Verifying extended cell 1. run the MOD CELLEXT command to set Cell Extension Type to DaulTst_ExtCell(Double Timeslot Extension Cell). TRXBN=0. CONHOEN=YES. CELLIDX=0. and set Enhanced Concentric Allowed according to the actual network conditions. IUO=UNDERLAID.*/ MOD CELLEXT: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. MCC="460". TRXBN=0.

3. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the TCHs turn into the idle state simultaneously. Verifying deactivation of extended cell: The operations are the same as those for Verifying extended cell. Ltd. When the call is terminated. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. In the monitoring interface. run the MOD CELLEXT command to set Cell IUO Type to Normal_cell(Normal cell).HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 58 Configuring Extended Cell l 58-4 2. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .. Deactivating extended cell 1. Verify that no two adjacent TCHs simultaneously change the state. 2. turn into the working state. Use an MS to call a fixed-line phone on the edge of the test cell. verify that two adjacent TCHs with the same TRX No.

3 Configuring PS Active Package Management With this feature. guaranteed bit rate (GBR). The higher-priority users enjoy more radio resources and higher radio bandwidth. and file transfer is improved. 59. 59. 59. The requirements for PS QoS are defined by QoS attributes. the packet performance is greatly improved when multiple services are processed simultaneously. the quality of GPRS/EGPRS services on radio access network.1 Configuring Streaming QoS(GBR) For the streaming class services. this feature supports the mapping between R97/98 QoS and R99 QoS. allocation/retention priority (ARP). To guarantee the service quality and real-time performance. thus avoiding IP packet loss and timeout of the IP packet transmission. 59-1 . the server at the application layer adjusts the transmit rate based on the bandwidth that can be provided by the radio links. Ltd. When the radio resources are insufficient. traffic handling priority (THP). 59. the subscribers with high priority can preempt the radio resources of the subscribers with low priority. In addition. To be compatible with R97/R98 QoS. including the traffic class.. and balanced uplink and downlink channel allocation.2 Configuring QoS ARP and THP After the QoS mechanism is introduced. transfer delay. Huawei GBSS provides the QoS means such as GBR. the BSC allocates radio resources to the users according to the allocation/retention priority (ARP) and traffic handle priority (THP) of the QoS. reduced data transmission delay. and reliability.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 59 PS QoS 59 PS QoS About This Chapter PS QoS refers to GPRS/EGPRS QoS. As a result. the BSC allocates radio resources according to the guaranteed bit rate (GBR) of the QoS to ensure the data transmission rate. the performance of the services such as large-sized email sending. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. webpage browsing. that is. maximum bit rate (MBR). after the QoS mechanism is introduced.4 Configuring PoC QoS The push to talk over cellular (PoC) service is a type of real-time packet service that has high bandwidth and delay requirements.

after the QoS mechanism is introduced. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . Impact None. NEs Involved BSC. the subscribers with high priority can preempt the radio resources of the subscribers with low priority. see Activate BSC License.. the BSC allocates radio resources according to the guaranteed bit rate (GBR) of the QoS to ensure the data transmission rate. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd. l The GPRS/EGPRS function is enabled. l The MS and SGSN support the packet flow management (PFM) procedure and the R99 QoS function. MS. Ensures preferentially the bandwidth requirement and service experience of the subscribers with high priority when radio resources are insufficient. For details.1 Configuring Streaming QoS(GBR) For the streaming class services. l The SGSN is configured. When the radio resources are insufficient.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 59 PS QoS 59. SGSN Prerequisite l The Streaming QoS(GBR) function is license-controlled. Scenario Ensures sufficient and stable bandwidth for the streaming services. Preparation Table 59-1 Example of the configuring streaming QoS(GBR) 59-2 Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYCELLIDX(By Cell Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning PFCSUP PFC Support YES(Support) Network planning GBRQOS Support Gbr QoS YES(Support) Network planning QOSOPT Support QoS Optimize YES(Support) Network planning STREAMSWH Occupy Switch of Streaming Resource YES(YES) Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

l Deactivating streaming QoS 1. ----End Example An example script of configuring streaming QoS(GBR) is as follows: /*Modify NSE*/ MOD NSE: NSEI=1. If the parameter is set to NO (No).. this feature supports the mapping between R97/98 QoS and R99 QoS. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Postrequisite l Verifying Streaming QoS – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD BSCBASIC command to set Occupy Switch of Streaming Resource to NO(No). run the LST BSCBASIC command to check the setting of Occupy Switch of Streaming Resource. it indicates that the function of streaming QoS is activated. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. GBRQOS=YES.2 Configuring QoS ARP and THP After the QoS mechanism is introduced. it indicates that the function of streaming QoS is deactivated. Ltd. – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the LST NSE command to verify that PFC Support is set to YES(Support). the BSC allocates radio resources to the users according to the allocation/retention priority (ARP) and traffic handle priority (THP) of the QoS. 59. /*Configure attributes of BSC*/ MOD BSCBASIC: STREAMSWH=YES. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. /*Configure parameters of GPRS cell*/ SET PSOTHERPARA: IDXTYPE=BYCELLIDX. and thus obtain better QoS. To be compatible with R97/R98 QoS. run theMOD NSE command to setPFC Support to YES(Support). Impact None. run theSET PSOTHERPARA command to setSupport Gbr QoS and Support QoS Optimize to YES(Support). The higher-priority users enjoy more radio resources and higher radio bandwidth. 2. run theMOD BSCBASIC command to setOccupy Switch of Streaming Resource to YES(YES). 59-3 . – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the LST PSOTHERPARA command to verify that Support Gbr QoS and Support QoS Optimize are set to YES(Support). Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. PFCSUP=YES. Scenario Ensuring the higher-priority user to obtain higher bandwidth. enjoy faster data rate. QOSOPT=YES. CELLIDX=0. run the LST BSCBASIC command to check the setting of Occupy Switch of Streaming Resource. If the parameter is set to Yes.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 59 PS QoS Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

l Set the following parameters to control the radio block budget weights of the BE service: BestEffort-ARP1 Priority Weight. THP2-ARP2 Priority Weight. THP2ARP3 Priority Weight. and BestEffortARP3 Priority Weight. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Preparation Table 59-2 Example of the configuring QoS ARP and THP Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYCELLIDX(By Cell Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning BKGARP1PRIWEIGH T Background-ARP1 Priority Weight 4 Network planning BKGARP2PRIWEIGH T Background-ARP2 Priority Weight 2 Network planning BKGARP3PRIWEIGH T Background-ARP3 Priority Weight 1 Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. l Set the following parameters to control the radio block budget weights of the interactive service: THP1-ARP1 Priority Weight. l Set the following parameters to control the radio block budget weights of the background service: Background-ARP1 Priority Weight. THP2-ARP1 Priority Weight. run theSET PSCHM command to set GPRS channel management parameters. Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 59 PS QoS NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite l The QoS ARP and THP function is license-controlled. BestEffort-ARP2 Priority Weight. For details. and Background-ARP3 Priority Weight. THP3-ARP1 Priority Weight.. and THP3-ARP3 Priority Weight. ----End Example An example script of configuring QoS ARP and THP is as follows: 59-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. see Activate BSC License. Background-ARP2 Priority Weight. THP1-ARP2 Priority Weight. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . THP1-ARP3 Priority Weight. l The GPRS/EGPRS function is enabled. THP3-ARP2 Priority Weight.

l The GPRS/EGPRS function is enabled. Preparation Table 59-3 Example of the configuring PS active package management Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source AqmMinTh Aqm MINth 256 Network planning AqmTarTh AAqm TarTh 384 Network planning AqmMaxTh Aqm MaxTh 1024 Network planning AqmSwitch Aqm Switch OPEN(Open) Network planning AqmNinit Aqm Ninit 20 Network planning AqmNLowerBound Aqm NLowerBound 10 Network planning AqmNUpBound Aqm NUpBound 20 Network planning AqmM Aqm M 20 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Impact None. 59. the performance of the services such as large-sized email sending..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 59 PS QoS SET PSCHM: IDXTYPE=BYCELLIDX. BKGARP1PRIWEIGHT=4. the packet performance is greatly improved when multiple services are processed simultaneously. CELLIDX=0. 59-5 . thus avoiding IP packet loss and timeout of the IP packet transmission. BKGARP2PRIWEIGHT=2. As a result. Ltd. and file transfer is improved. the server at the application layer adjusts the transmit rate based on the bandwidth that can be provided by the radio links. webpage browsing. Scenario The feature is applicable to scenarios where congestion may occur because of bandwidth limitation. BKGARP3PRIWEIGHT=1. In addition.3 Configuring PS Active Package Management With this feature. NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite l The PS Active Package Management function is not license-controlled.

If the parameter is set to CLOSE(Close). NEs Involved BSC. AqmNinit=20. Aqm Ninit. Ltd. Impact None. AqmM=20.4 Configuring PoC QoS The push to talk over cellular (PoC) service is a type of real-time packet service that has high bandwidth and delay requirements. Postrequisite l Verifying PS active package management – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. If the parameter is set to OPEN(Open). Aqm TarTh. AqmNUpBound=20. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. it indicates that PS active package management is deactivated. Aqm NLowerBound. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . 2. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. AqmSwitch=OPEN. run the LST PSSOFTPARA command to check the setting of Aqm Switch. ----End Example An example script of configuring PS active package management is as follows: SET PSSOFTPARA: AqmMinTh=256. improves the voice quality of the PoC service.. l The Streaming QoS(GBR) function is configured. l Deactivating PS active package management 1. it indicates that PS active package management is activated. run the LST PSSOFTPARA command to check the setting of Aqm Switch. l The GPRS/EGPRS function is enabled. and Aqm M. AqmNLowerBound=10. and balanced uplink and downlink channel allocation. run the SET PSSOFTPARA command to set Aqm Switch to CLOSE(Close). Then. Huawei GBSS provides the QoS means such as GBR. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Aqm NUpBound. 59. AqmTarTh=384. Scenario This feature guarantees the real-time performance of the PoC service.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 59 PS QoS Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. AqmMaxTh=1024. set the following parameters according to the network condition: Aqm MINth. reduced data transmission delay. run theSET PSSOFTPARA command to setAqm Switch to OPEN(Open). MS Prerequisite 59-6 l The PoC QoS function is not license-controlled. To guarantee the service quality and real-time performance. Aqm MaxTh.

GBR for POC Service 6 Network planning POCGBRMAX Max. run theSET PSOTHERPARA command to set the following parameters according to the network condition: Min. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. GBR for POC Service. and Transmission Delay of POC Service. POCGBRMAX=16. CELLIDX=0. GBR for POC Service 16 Network planning POCDELAY Transmission Delay of POC Service 650 Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Max. ----End Example An example script of configuring PoC QoS is as follows: SET PSOTHERPARA: IDXTYPE=BYCELLIDX. POCGBRMIN=6. Ltd.. GBR for POC Service. POCDELAY=650. 59-7 .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 59 PS QoS Preparation Table 59-4 Example of the configuring PoC QoS Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYCELLIDX(By Cell Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning POCGBRMIN Min.

.

MS Prerequisite l The half-rate function is license-controlled. Preparation Table 60-1 Example of the configuring Half-Rate Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning BTSIDX BTS Index 0 Network planning MPMODE Multiplexing Mode MODE2_1 Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning VOICEVER Speech Version Half_rate_Ver1(Halfrate Ver 1) Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. a physical channel can carry the services of two half-rate MSs instead of the services of a full-rate MS. Scenario The feature applies to increase the network capacity and improve the frequency usage without increasing the hardware cost. NEs Involved BSC. Impact None. Ltd. 60-1 .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 60 60 Configuring Half-Rate Configuring Half-Rate Half-rate indicates that the voice coding rate decreases by half based on the new coding algorithm. see Activate BSC License. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. MSC.. In this way. For details.

TCHHs are assigned preferably. NOTE In channel assignment algorithms. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Then. Ltd. run theMOD CELLCCACCESS command to set Speech Version to Half_rate_Ver1(Half-rate Ver 1). the BSC determines to assign TCHHs or TCHFs based on the traffic volume of the network. If the channel seizure rate exceeds the TCH Traffic Busy Threshold. run theMOD CHAN command. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. set Channel Type according to the network condition. run theMOD CELLCHMGAD command to set TCH Traffic Busy Threshold to 50. TCH Rate Adjust Allow needs to be enabled to support the half-rate service. the channels on the TRXs that support the rate adjustment can be reserved for further use. 3 Network planning CHTYPE Channel Type TCHHR(TCH Half Rate) Network planning TCHAJFLAG TCH Rate Adjust Allow YES(YES) Network planning TCHBUSYTHRES TCH Traffic Busy Threshold 50 Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. the channel will be converted from the TCHF to the TCHH. l To configure a channel as a TCHF fixedly or configure a channel with dynamic conversion between the TCHF and TCHH. For a TRX whose TCH Rate Adjust Allow is not enabled. If the network is not busy. NOTE If a TRX does not have TCHHs and only has TCHFs. Therefore. 0 Network planning CHNO Channel No. The resources can be used maximally. Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.If the value of this parameter exceeds 50. set its Channel Type to TCH Half Rate. NOTE Adhere to the following principles when configuring the channel type: l To configure a channel as a TCHH fixedly. TCHFs are assigned preferably. run theMOD BTSMPMODE command to set Multiplexing Mode to MODE1_1 or MODE2_1. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . it indicates that the traffic volume of the current network is high. channels on the TRX are assigned preferably. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run theMOD TRXDEV command to set TCH Rate Adjust Allow to YES(YES). set its Channel Type to TCH Full Rate. If the network is busy. ----End 60-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 60 Configuring Half-Rate Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source TRXBN TRX Board No.

/*Enable the adjustment of the TCH rate*/ MOD TRXDEV: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. TCHBUSYTHRES=50.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 60 Configuring Half-Rate Example An example script of configuring Half-Rate is as follows: /*Change the multiplexing mode of the Abis interface*/ MOD BTSMPMODE: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. run the DSP CALLRES command to verify that Speech Version is not HR. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If Speech Version is HR. 2. /*Configure the half-rate speech version*/ MOD CELLCCACCESS: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. CELLIDX=0. TRXBN=0. /*Configure the channel type*/ MOD CHAN: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. TRXBN=0. CHNO=3. 2. Ltd. CELLIDX=0. BTSIDX=0. run the MOD CELLCCACCESS command to change Speech Version to a value other than Half_rate_Ver1 (Half-rate Ver 1). Deactivating half-rate 1. 60-3 . Then. CHTYPE=TCHHR. TCHAJFLAG=YES. Use the MS to call a fixed-line phone in the test cell. /*Configure the traffic busy threshold of the TCH*/ MOD CELLCHMGAD: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. CELLIDX=0. Postrequisite l l Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Verifying half-rate 1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. it indicates that the half-rate function is activated. CELLIDX=0. run the DSP CALLRES command to view the call resources of an MS. VOICEVER=Half_rate_Ver1-1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. MPMODE=MODE2_1. Verifying deactivation of half-rate: Use the MS to call a fixed-line phone in the test cell.

.

Scenario The uplink/downlink throughput of an MS is increased. NEs Involved BSC. run the SET PSSOFTPARA command to set Support High Multislot Class to SUPPORT(Support). MS Prerequisite l The function of MS high multislot classes is license-controlled. thus increasing the uplink/downlink throughput of an MS. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Impact None. Preparation Table 61-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring MS high multislot classes Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source SUPPORTDL5TS Support High Multislot Class SUPPORT(Support) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. l The MS must support this function. 61-1 . see Activate BSC License.. Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 61 61 Configuring MS High Multislot Classes Configuring MS High Multislot Classes The function of MS high multislot classes enables the allocation of a maximum of five uplink/ downlink timeslots to an MS. the function of extended dynamic allocation must be enabled. l If more than three timeslots are required on the uplink. For details. ----End Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Ltd. For details. run the SET PSSOFTPARA command to set Support High Multislot Class to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support). Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . 2. 2. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Verify that the number of 1s in the value of the IE in the corresponding binary bitmap reaches the maximum number of downlink timeslots in the high multislot capability. Postrequisite l l 61-2 Verifying MS high multislot classes 1. Start the tracing of the messages in the PS domain on the Um interface. Verifying the deactivation of MS high multislot classes: The operations are the same as those for Verifying MS high multislot classes. Deactivating MS high multislot classes 1.61 Configuring MS High Multislot Classes HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Example An example script for configuring the function of MS high multislot classes is as follows: /*Configure the function of MS high multislot classes*/ SET PSSOFTPARA: SUPPORTDL5TS=SUPPORT. Verify that the maximum number of 1s in the value of timeslot-allocation in the corresponding binary bitmap is four.. Use an MS supporting the function of MS high multislot classes to download data in the test cell. 3. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. see Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. and query the value of the timeslot-allocation information element (IE). Double-click the Packet Downlink Assignment message in the traced messages. which is smaller than the maximum number of downlink timeslots in the high multislot capability.

Scenario The uplink rate is increased. l The MS must support the EDA function. 62-1 .. Impact None. and services with high traffic volume are implemented on the uplink. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. ----End Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Preparation Table 62-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring EDA Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source SUPPORTEDA Support EDA SUPPORT(Support) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. NEs Involved BSC and MS Prerequisite l The EDA function is license-controlled. run the SET PSSOFTPARA command to set Support EDA to SUPPORT(Support). see Activate BSC License. thus increasing the uplink throughput. For details.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 62 62 Configuring Extended Dynamic Allocation(EDA) Configuring Extended Dynamic Allocation(EDA) The EDA function enables the allocation of more uplink timeslots to an MS. Ltd.

Use an MS supporting the EDA function to upload data.62 Configuring Extended Dynamic Allocation(EDA) HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Example An example script for configuring the EDA function is as follows: /*Configure the EDA function*/ SET PSSOFTPARA: SUPPORTEDA=SUPPORT. Verifying the deactivation of EDA: The operations are the same as those for Verifying EDA. Postrequisite l l 62-2 Verifying EDA 1. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2. see Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. and query the values of is-tn0 to is-tn7 in the timeslot-allocation-power-ctrl information element (IE). Double-click the Packet Uplink Assignment message in the traced messages. For details. Deactivating EDA 1. Start the tracing of the messages in the PS domain on the Um interface. Verify that the number of 1s in the values of is-tn0 to is-tn7 exceeds two. Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . 3.. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Verify that the maximum number of is-tn0 to is-tn7 with the value being one in the timeslot-allocation-power-ctrl message is two. 2. run the SET PSSOFTPARA command to set Support EDA to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).

and the performance of GPRS services is improved in the area where the EGPRS services are not put into operation. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 63 63 Configuring CS-3/CS-4 Configuring CS-3/CS-4 The CS-3/CS-4 function enables the BSC to automatically adjust the coding scheme to a higher one in the area with a low bit error rate based on the existing coding scheme of a GPRS MS and the transmission quality of the MS. Impact None. a higher throughput is provided. For details. In this manner. see Activate BSC License. Ltd. Scenario The rate of GPRS services is increased. NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite l The CS-3/CS-4 function is license-controlled.. 63-1 . Preparation Table 63-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring CS-3/CS-4 Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning UPFIXCS Uplink Fixed CS Type CS3(CS3) Network planning DNFIXCS Downlink Fixed CS Type CS3(CS3) Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

3. Postrequisite l l 63-2 Verifying CS-3/CS-4 1. run the SET CELLPSCS command to set Uplink Fixed CS Type and Downlink Fixed CS Type to CS3(CS3) or CS4(CS4). NOTE If Uplink Fixed CS Type and Downlink Fixed CS Type are set to UNFIXED(UNFIXED). UPFIXCS=CS3. Downlink Data Block (CS-4).. or Uplink Data Block (CS-4) message is not present. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . 2. verify that the Downlink Data Block (CS-3) or Downlink Data Block (CS-4) message is present. verify that the Uplink Data Block (CS-3) or Uplink Data Block (CS-4) message is present. Ltd. 2. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. DNFIXCS=CS4. When the uploading is performed on the PC connected to an MS performing GPRS services. see Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. Uplink Data Block (CS-3). run the SET CELLPSCS command to set Uplink Fixed CS Type and Downlink Fixed CS Type to CS1(CS1) or CS2(CS2).HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 63 Configuring CS-3/CS-4 Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ----End Example An example script for configuring the CS-3/CS-4 function is as follows: /*Configure the CS-3/CS-4 function*/ SET CELLPSCS: IDXTYPE=BYCELLIDX. CELLIDX=0. For details. Verify that the Downlink Data Block (CS-3). Deactivating CS-3/CS-4 1. Verifying the deactivation of CS-3/CS-4: The operations are the same as those for Verifying CS-3/CS-4. Start the tracing of the messages in the PS domain on the Um interface. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. it indicates that the used coding scheme is adjusted dynamically. When the Web browsing is performed on the PC connected to an MS performing GPRS services.

l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. see Activate BSC License. With the function of network operation mode I. the signaling traffic between the MS and the network is reduced. the GBSS equipment must support network operation mode I. For details.. Impact None. Preparation Table 64-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring network operation mode I Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning NMO Network Operation Mode NMOI(Network Operation Mode I) Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. thus saving and optimizing radio resources. or PACCHs on the network side. NEs Involved BSC and MSC Prerequisite l The function of network operation mode I is license-controlled. 64-1 . The MS monitors only one paging channel. Scenario To enable the paging co-ordination function.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 64 64 Configuring Network Operation Mode I Configuring Network Operation Mode I The function of network operation mode I enables the sending of the CS paging messages over PCCCHs. CCCHs. and the Gs interface (the interface between the MSC/ VLR and the SGSN) must exist. l The Gs interface is already configured. Ltd.

NMO=NMOI. Postrequisite l l 64-2 Verifying network operation mode I 1. Verify that the value of nmo in the gprscell-options information element (IE) is network-Mode-of-operation-I. 2. run the SET PSBASE command to set Network Operation Mode to NMOI(Network Operation Mode I). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Verify that the value of nmo in the gprs-cell-options IE is not network-Mode-of-operation-I.. Use an MS to perform PS services in the test cell. 2. 3. Deactivating network operation mode I 1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd. run the SET PSBASE command to set Network Operation Mode to NMOI(Network Operation Mode I). Verifying the deactivation of network operation mode I: The operations are the same as those for Verifying network operation mode I.64 Configuring Network Operation Mode I HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Start the tracing of the messages in the PS domain on the Um interface. For details. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . ----End Example An example script for configuring the function of network operation mode I is as follows: /*Configure the function of network operation mode I*/ SET PSBASE: IDXTYPE=BYCELLIDX. see Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. CELLIDX=0. Double-click the Packet PSI13 message.

Scenario The CPU load of the board for processing the signaling of the CS services is reduced. In this manner. Impact None. thus reducing the load of the BSC. Preparation Table 65-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the function of preprocessing of measurement report Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning BTSMESRPTPREPRO C MR. thus minimizing the risks of Abis transmission congestion. NEs Involved BSC and BTS Prerequisite l The function of pre-processing of measurement report is not license-controlled. 65-1 .Preprocessing YES(YES) Network planning PRIMMESPPT Transfer Original MR NO(NO) Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. l The BTS must support this function. and the signaling on the Abis interface is decreased.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 65 65 Configuring Pre-Processing of Measurement Report Configuring Pre-Processing of Measurement Report The function of pre-processing of measurement report enables the BTS to interpolate and filter measurement reports (MRs) and then report the results of the processed MRs to the BSC. the BSC does not need to process the MRs..

PRIMMESPPT=NO. Verifying the deactivation of pre-processing of measurement report: The operations are the same as those for Verifying pre-processing of measurement report. MRPREPROCFREQ=Once_ps. and Sent Freq.65 Configuring Pre-Processing of Measurement Report HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source BSMSPWRLEV Transfer BS/MS Power Clas YES(YES) Network planning MRPREPROCFREQ Sent Freq. Transfer BS/MS Power Class.Preprocessing to YES(Yes) and set Transfer Original MR. Verify that the Preprocessed Measurement Result message is present. run the MOD CELLHOCTRL command to set MR. 2.. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Deactivating measurement report preprocessing 1. ----End Example An example script for configuring the function of pre-processing of measurement report is as follows: /*Configure the function of pre-processing of measurement report*/ MOD CELLHOCTRL: IDXTYPE=BYIDX.of preprocessed MR as required.of preprocessed MR Once_ps(Once every second) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Verify that the Measurement Result message rather than the Preprocessed Measurement Result message is present. Start the tracing of RSL messages on the Abis interface.Preprocessing to NO(NO). For details. 3. Ltd. Postrequisite l l 65-2 Verifying pre-processing of measurement report 1. BSMSPWRLEV=YES. Use the MS to call a fixed-line phone in the test cell. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 2. run the MOD CELLHOCTRL command to set MR. BTSMESRPTPREPROC=YES. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . see Tracing RSL Messages on the Abis Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. CELLIDX=0.

Preparation Table 66-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring EMR Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning MEASURETYPE Report Type EnhMeasReport Network (Enhanced planning Measurement Report) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l The MS must support the EMR function.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 66 66 Configuring Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR) Configuring Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR) The EMR is the downlink measurement report (MR) of a new type introduced in R99. In this manner. Scenario The capability of monitoring the voice quality and the performance of the power control algorithm and handover algorithm are improved. 66-1 . Compared with the common MR.. more measurement objects such as bit error probability (BEP) and frame erase ratio (FER) are included. NEs Involved BSC and MS Prerequisite l The EMR is not license-controlled. the performance of the power control algorithm and handover algorithm is improved. Impact None. Ltd.

66 Configuring Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

Procedure
Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD CELLCCUTRANSYS command to set
Report Type to EnhMeasReport(Enhanced Measurement Report).
----End

Example
An example script for configuring EMR is as follows:
/*Configure EMR*/
MOD CELLCCUTRANSYS: IDXTYPE=BYIDX, CELLIDX=0, MEASURETYPE=EnhMeasReport;

Postrequisite
l

l

66-2

Verifying EMR
1.

Start the tracing of RSL messages on the Abis interface. For details, see Tracing RSL
Messages on the Abis Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide.

2.

Use an MS supporting the EMR function to call a fixed-line phone in the test cell.

3.

Double-click the measurement result message. Verify that the value of the pd-orenhanced-meas-msgtype information element (IE) is 0x10. Double-click the
SACCH Filling message. Verify that the value of report-type is enhancedmeasurement-report when the value of system-info-type is measurementinformation.

Deactivating EMR
1.

On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD CELLCCUTRANSYS
command to set Report Type to a value other than EnhMeasReport(Enhanced
Measurement Report).

2.

Verifying the deactivation of EMR: The operations are the same as those for Verifying
EMR. Double-click the SACCH Filling message. Verify that the value of reporttype is not enhanced-measurement-report when the value of system-info-type is
measurement-information.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

67

67 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction(AFC)

Configuring Automatic Frequency
Correction(AFC)

The automatic frequency correction (AFC) function uses a special balancing algorithm to
estimate the difference between the standard frequency and the frequency of the GMSK signal
sent from the fast-moving MS to the BTS. The AFC estimates the frequency offset between the
frequency of each received burst and the standard frequency in real time. Then, the estimated
frequency offset is used to correct the RX working frequency of the BTS.
Scenario

The stable and reliable connection between the MS and the BTS in the case of
high-speed mobile communications is ensured.

Impact

None.

NEs Involved BSC

Prerequisite
l

AFC is not license-controlled.

Preparation
Table 67-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring AFC

Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

Parameter ID

Parameter Name

Example

Source

IDXTYPE

Index Type

BYIDX(By Index)

Network
planning

CELLIDX

Cell Index

0

Network
planning

FREQADJ

Frequence Adjust
Switch

YES(YES)

Network
planning

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

67-1

67 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction(AFC)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

Procedure
Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD CELLOTHEXT command to set
Frequence adjust switch to YES(YES).
----End

Example
An example script for configuring AFC is as follows:
/*Configure AFC*/
MOD CELLOTHEXT: IDXTYPE=BYIDX, CELLIDX=0, FREQADJ=YES;

Postrequisite
l

l

67-2

Verifying AFC
1.

Start the tracing of RSL messages on the Abis interface. For details, see Tracing RSL
Messages on the Abis Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide.

2.

Use the MS to call a fixed-line phone in the test cell, and hold on the call.

3.

Double-click the measurement result message. Verify that the frequency-shiftupmeasure information element (IE) is included in the message.

Deactivating AFC
1.

On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD CELLOTHEXT command to
set Frequence adjust switch to NO(NO).

2.

Verifying the deactivation of AFC: The operations are the same as those for Verifying
AFC. Verify that the frequency-shift-upmeasure IE is not included in the
measurement result message.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

68

68 Configuring Handover

Configuring Handover

About This Chapter
The service area of the GSM is composed of the cells with continuous coverage. To enable the
subscribers to communicate without interruption and to optimize the network performance, the
handover technique is introduced to the GSM system.
68.1 Configuring Basic Handover
The basic handover is classified into edge handover, TA handover, Bad Quality (BQ) handover,
and interference handover.
68.2 Configuring PBGT Handover
A PBGT handover is performed in a neighboring cell with the lowest path loss in a period. In
this manner, the user always receives services in a better serving cell, thus improving the voice
quality.
68.3 Configuring Signal Level Rapid Fall Handover
The algorithm of signal level rapid fall handover is more sensitive to level changes, thus
preventing call drops due to a quick decrease in the level.
68.4 Configuring Load Handover
The load handover enables the load balance between different cells. Specifically, the traffic of
a heavy-loaded cell is transferred to an adjacent light-loaded cell in time.
68.5 Configuring Layered and Hierarchical Handover
In the layered and hierarchical network, the layered and hierarchical handover enables the
handover between different layers and hierarchies, thus evenly distributing the traffic on each
frequency band.
68.6 Configuring Speed-Sensitive Handover
The speed-sensitive handover function enables a fast-moving MS in a micro cell to be handed
over to a macro cell, thus reducing the number of handovers and call drops and improving user
experience and network KPIs.
68.7 Configuring Directed Retry
Directed retry is a special handover. During the assignment process, the BSC initiates the
directed retry procedure if no TCH is available in the serving cell or the load of the serving cell
is heavy. In this way, the MS is handed over to a neighboring cell.
68.8 Configuring Chain Cell Handover
Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

68-1

68 Configuring Handover

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

The chain cell handover function enables a fast-moving MS to be preferentially handed over to
a chain neighboring cell.
68.9 Configuring Better Cell Handover
Evolving from the inter-layer handover and PBGT handover in handover algorithm I, the better
cell handover is the specific handover decision in handover algorithm II.

68-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

68 Configuring Handover

68.1 Configuring Basic Handover
The basic handover is classified into edge handover, TA handover, Bad Quality (BQ) handover,
and interference handover.
Scenario

The continuity of a call is ensured.

Impact

None.

NEs Involved BSC

Prerequisite
l

The basic handover function is not license-controlled.

Preparation
Table 68-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring basic handover

Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

Parameter ID

Parameter Name

Example

Source

IDXTYPE

Index Type

BYIDX(By Index)

Network
planning

CELLIDX

Cell Index

0

Network
planning

HOCTRLSWITCH

HO Control Switch

HOALGORITHM1
(HO Algorithm I)

Network
planning

FRINGEHOEN

Edge Handover Allowed

YES(YES)

Network
planning

ULEDGETHRES

Edge HO UL RX_LEV
Threshold

10

Network
planning

DLEDGETHRES

Edge HO DL RX_LEV
Threshold

20

Network
planning

TAHOEN

TA HO Allowed

YES(YES)

Network
planning

BQHOEN

BQ HO Allowed

YES(YES)

Network
planning

INTERFHOEN

Interference HO
Allowed

YES(YES)

Network
planning

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

68-3

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

68 Configuring Handover
NOTE

l Edge handover: The edge handover is the handover based on level for avoiding call drops. When an
edge handover is triggered, the level of the target cell must be higher than the level of the serving cell
and the inter-cell handover hysterisis. The edge handover is triggered when the receive level of the
serving cell is lower than the edge handover threshold, and when the P/N criterion is satisfied during
a certain statistical period. In this manner, the communication quality of the MS is maintained to some
extent.
l TA handover: TA can be used as a standard of restricting the size of a cell. When the BSC determines
that the TA of an MS exceeds the specified maximum TA threshold, a TA handover is triggered. If a
serving cell meets the requirement for a TA handover, the serving cell is punished after the handover
is complete. In this manner, the handover to the serving cell due to other causes is prevented. To meet
the special requirements of an extended cell, special processing is performed on the TA handover
algorithm.
l BQ handover: The bit error ratio (BER) reflects the transmission quality of radio links. The BSC
measures the transmission quality of radio links according to the quality level in the measurement
report. A poor quality level may be caused by low signal power or inter-channel interference. When
the receive quality of the serving cell is lower than the BQ handover threshold, the BQ handover
algorithm is enabled to maintain the communication quality of the MS. If a serving cell meets the
requirement for a BQ handover, the serving cell is punished after the handover is complete. In this
manner, the handover to the serving cell due to other causes is prevented.
l Interference handover: When the receive level of a serving cell is good but the receive quality
deteriorates, the interference handover algorithm is enabled to maintain the communication quality of
the MS.

Procedure
l

Configuring edge handover
1.

On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to
set Edge Handover Allowed to YES(YES) and set Edge HO UL RX_LEV
Threshold and Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold as required.
– When HO Control Switch is set to HOALGORITHM1(HO Algorithm I), set
Edge HO Watch Time[s], Edge HO Valid Time[s], Edge HO AdjCell Watch
Time[s], and Edge HO AdjCell Valid Time[s] as required.
– When HO Control Switch is set to HOALGORITHM2(HO Algorithm II), set
Edge HO Watch Time[0.5s], Edge HO Valid Time[0.5s], Edge HO AdjCell
Watch Time[0.5s], and Edge HO AdjCell Valid Time[0.5s] as required.

l

Configuring TA handover
1.

On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to
set TA HO Allowed to YES(YES).

2.

Then, set the following parameters as required:
– When HO Control Switch is set to HOALGORITHM2(HO Algorithm II), set
TA HO watch time[0.5 s] and TA HO valid time[0.5 s] by running the SET
CELLHOBASIC command on the Local Maintenance Terminal.
– On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD CELLHOIUO command
to set Emergency Handover TA Threshold.
– On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the SET CELLHOFITPEN command
to set Penalty Time after TA HO[s] and Penalty Level after TA HO.

l

68-4

Configuring BQ handover
1.

On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to
set BQ HO Allowed to YES(YES).

2.

Then, set the following parameters as required:
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller
BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

68 Configuring Handover

– When HO Control Switch is set to HOALGORITHM2(HO Algorithm II), set
BQ HO watch time[0.5 s] and BQ HO valid time[0.5 s] by running the SET
CELLHOBASIC command on the Local Maintenance Terminal.
– In the case of non-AMR calls, set UL Qual. Threshold and DL Qual.
Threshold by running the MOD CELLHOEMG command on the Local
Maintenance Terminal.
– In the case of AMR FR calls, set DLQuaLimitAMRFR and
ULQuaLimitAMRFR by running the SET CELLAMRQUL command on the
Local Maintenance Terminal.
– In the case of AMR HR calls, set DLQuaLimitAMRHR and
ULQuaLimitAMRHR by running the SET CELLAMRQUL command on the
Local Maintenance Terminal.
l

Configuring interference handover
1.

On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to
set Interference HO Allowed to YES(YES).

2.

Then, set the following parameters as required:
– When HO Control Switch is set to HOALGORITHM2(HO Algorithm II), set
Interfere HO static time[0.5 s] and Interfere HO valid time[0.5 s] by running
SET CELLHOBASIC command and set Penalty time on interfere HO[s] by
running the SET CELLHOFITPEN command on the Local Maintenance
Terminal.
– In the case of non-AMR-FR calls, set RXQUAL1 to RXQUAL12 by running the
SET CELLAMRQUL command on the Local Maintenance Terminal.
– In the case of AMR FR calls, set RXLEVOff and RXQUAL1 to RXQUAL12 by
running the SET CELLAMRQUL command on the Local Maintenance
Terminal.

----End

Example
An example script for configuring the basic handover function is as follows:
/*Configure edge handover*/
SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX, CELLIDX=0,
FRINGEHOEN=YES,
ULEDGETHRES=10, DLEDGETHRES=20;
/*Configure TA handover*/
SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX, CELLIDX=0,
/*Configure BQ handover*/
SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX, CELLIDX=0,
/*Configuring interference handover*/
SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX, CELLIDX=0,
INTERFHOEN=YES;

HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,

HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, TAHOEN=YES;
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, BQHOEN=YES;
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,

Postrequisite
l

Verifying basic handover
– Verifying edge handover

Issue 02 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

68-5

Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . 2. After the A interface tracing window is displayed. – Deactivating TA handover 1. Verify that the value of the cause information element in the Handover Performed or Handover Required message is not ecv_norm_a_distance. Start the tracing of the BSSAP messages on the A interface. 2. After the A interface tracing window is displayed. Start the tracing of the BSSAP messages on the A interface. see Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. 2. Start the tracing of the BSSAP messages on the A interface. verify that the values of certain cause information elements in the Handover Performed message (intra-BSC handover) or Handover Required message (inter-BSC handover) are ecv_norm_a_uplink_strenth or ecv_norm_a_downlink_strenth. 2. see Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. 2.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 68 Configuring Handover 1. – Verifying interference handover l 1. After the A interface tracing window is displayed. – Deactivating BQ handover 1. Verify that the value of the cause information element in the Handover Performed or Handover Required message is not ecv_norm_a_uplink_strenth or ecv_norm_a_downlink_strenth. Ltd. For details. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set Edge HO Allowed to NO(NO). Start the tracing of the BSSAP messages on the A interface. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. After the A interface tracing window is displayed. Verifying the deactivation of TA handover: The operations are the same as those for Verifying TA handover. see Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set BQ HO Allowed to NO(NO). verify that the values of certain cause information elements in the Handover Performed message (intra-BSC handover) or Handover Required message (inter-BSC handover) are ecv_norm_a_uplink_quality or ecv_norm_a_downlink_quality. 2. – Verifying TA handover 1. verify that the values of certain cause information elements in the Handover Performed message (intra-BSC handover) or Handover Required message (inter-BSC handover) are ecv_norm_a_uplink_interfere or ecv_norm_a_downlink_interfere. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set TA HO Allowed to NO(NO). verify that the values of certain cause information elements in the Handover Performed message (intra-BSC handover) or Handover Required message (inter-BSC handover) are ecv_norm_a_distance. Deactivating basic handover – Deactivating edge handover 1. For details. For details. Verifying the deactivation of edge handover: The operations are the same as those for Verifying edge handover.. 68-6 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. see Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. – Verifying BQ handover 1. For details. On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

2 Configuring PBGT Handover A PBGT handover is performed in a neighboring cell with the lowest path loss in a period.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 2. thus enjoying better voice quality. Ltd. the user can camp on a better cell. Verify that the value of the cause information element in the Handover Performed or Handover Required message is not ecv_norm_a_uplink_quality or ecv_norm_a_downlink_quality. l The PBGT handover function is effective only when HO algorithm I is enabled. 68-7 . Scenario With this function. the user always receives services in a better serving cell.. NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite l The PBGT handover function is not license-controlled. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set Interference HO Allowed to NO(NO). 2. 68. Impact None. – Deactivating interference handover 1. In this manner. Verifying the deactivation of interference handover: The operations are the same as those for Verifying interference handover. Preparation Table 68-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring PBGT handover Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning HOCTRLSWITCH HO Control Switch HOALGORITHM1 (HO Algorithm I) Network planning PBGTHOEN PBGT HO Allowed YES(YES) Network planning PBGTSTAT PBGT Watch Time [s] 3 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 68 Configuring Handover Verifying the deactivation of BQ handover: The operations are the same as those for Verifying BQ handover. Verify that the value of the cause information element in the Handover Performed or Handover Required message is not ecv_norm_a_uplink_interfere or ecv_norm_a_downlink_interfere. thus improving the voice quality.

Postrequisite l l Verifying PGBT handover 1. PBGTSTAT=3. CELLIDX=0. After the A interface tracing window is displayed. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 68. verify that certain cause information elements in the Handover Performed message (intra-BSC handover) or Handover Required message (inter-BSC handover) are ecv_norm_a_better_cell. ----End Example An example script for configuring the PBGT handover function is as follows: /*Configure PBGT handover*/ SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 68 Configuring Handover Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source PBGTLAST PBGT Valid Time[s] 2 Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. thus preventing call drops due to a quick decrease in the level. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set PBGT HO Allowed to YES(YES) and set PBGT Watch Time [s] and PBGT Valid Time[s] as required. Deactivating PBGT handover 1. PBGTHOEN=YES.. NEs Involved BSC 68-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set PBGT HO Allowed to NO(NO). a handover is performed to prevent call drops. Scenario With this function. PBGTLAST=2. Ltd. Start the tracing of the BSSAP messages on the A interface. For details. 2.3 Configuring Signal Level Rapid Fall Handover The algorithm of signal level rapid fall handover is more sensitive to level changes. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. see Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. Impact None. if the level of a user quickly decreases during a call because the call is made in a corner or a concave ground or because the components of the BTS component become ineffective.

Ltd. Deactivating signal level rapid fall handover Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. After the A interface tracing window is displayed. see Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed to YES(YES).HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 68 Configuring Handover Prerequisite l The function of signal level rapid fall handover is not license-controlled. CELLIDX=0. ----End Example An example script for configuring the function of signal level rapid fall handover is as follows: /*Configure signal level rapid fall handover*/ SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. For details. Postrequisite l l Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Verifying signal level rapid fall handover 1.. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. verify that the values of certain cause information elements (IEs) in the Handover Performed message (intra-BSC handover) or Handover Required message (inter-BSC handover) are ecv_norm_a_uplink_strenth. l The function of signal level rapid fall handover is effective only when HO algorithm I is enabled. RXQCKFALLHOEN=YES. Preparation Table 68-3 Example of data negotiated and planned for configuring signal level rapid fall handover Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning HOCTRLSWITCH HO Control Switch HOALGORITHM1 (HO Algorithm I) Network planning RXQCKFALLHOEN Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed YES(YES) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 2. 68-9 . Start the tracing of the BSSAP messages on the A interface.

the traffic of a heavy-loaded cell is transferred to an adjacent light-loaded cell in time.. On the Local Maintenance Terminal.4 Configuring Load Handover The load handover enables the load balance between different cells. Specifically.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 68 Configuring Handover 1. In hot spots.on Candidate Cell 85 Network planning LOADOFFSET Load HO Bandwidth 25 Network planning PERIOD Load HO Step Period 10 Network planning STEP Load HO Step Level 5 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Preparation Table 68-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring load handover 68-10 Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning HOCTRLSWITCH HO Control Switch HOALGORITHM1 (HO Algorithm I) Network planning LOADHOEN Load HO Allowed YES(YES) Network planning SYSFLOWLEV System Flux Threshold for Load HO 10 Network planning TRIGTHRES Load HO Threshold 90 Network planning ACCTHRES Load Req. Impact None. Ltd. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed to NO(NO). NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite l The load handover function is not license-controlled. congestion can be effectively reduced. 68. Scenario The load between cells is shared. thus alleviating congestion. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .

2. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set Load HO Allowed to NO(NO). TRIGTHRES=90.5 Configuring Layered and Hierarchical Handover In the layered and hierarchical network. LOADHOEN=YES. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. PERIOD=10. Verifying deactivation of load handover: The operations are the same as those for Verifying load handover. Impact None. In a GSM900/DCS1800 multi-band network. ----End Example An example script for configuring the load handover function is as follows: /*Configure load handover*/ SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set Load HO Allowed to YES(YES). Ltd.. Load HO Step Period. 68. Load HO Threshold. Load Req. verify that certain cause information elements in the Handover Performed message (intra-BSC handover) or Handover Required message (inter-BSC handover) are ecv_norm_a_traffic. see Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. the layered and hierarchical handover enables the handover between different layers and hierarchies. For details. 68-11 . Scenario In a layered and hierarchical network. CELLIDX=0. thus solving the problem of insufficient frequency resources. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. run the SET CELLHOAD command to set the following parameters as required: System Flux Threshold for Load HO. SET CELLHOAD: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. LOADOFFSET=25. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Postrequisite l l Verifying load handover 1.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 68 Configuring Handover Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. CELLIDX=0. Deactivating load handover 1. this function enables the even distribution of traffic between different frequency bands.on Candidate Cell. thus meeting the requirements of different networking modes. Verify that the cause information element in the Handover Performed or Handover Required message is not ecv_norm_a_traffic. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. thus evenly distributing the traffic on each frequency band. STEP=5. and Load HO Step Level. 2. Start the tracing of the BSSAP messages on the A interface. this function implements the even distribution of traffic. ACCTHRES=85. After the A interface tracing window is displayed. Load HO Bandwidth. SYSFLOWLEV=10.

and Inter-layer HO Hysteresis. l The function of layered and hierarchical handover is effective only when HO algorithm I is enabled. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set Level HO Allowed to YES(YES) and set the following parameters as required: Layer HO Watch Time[s]. Inter-layer HO Threshold. Ltd. Layer HO Valid Time[s]. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . ----End Example An example script for configuring the function of layered and hierarchical handover is as follows: /*Configure layered and hierarchical handover*/ 68-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 68 Configuring Handover NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite l The function of layered and hierarchical handover is not license-controlled. Preparation Table 68-5 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring layered and hierarchical handover Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning HOCTRLSWITCH HO Control Switch HOALGORITHM1 (HO Algorithm I) Network planning LEVHOEN Level HO Allowed YES(YES) Network planning LEVSTAT Layer HO Watch Time [s] 3 Network planning LEVLAST Layer HO Valid Time[s] 2 Network planning INLAYHOTH Inter-layer HO Threshold 25 Network planning LEVHOHYST Inter-layer HO Hysteresis 2 Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

Preparation Table 68-6 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring speed-sensitive handover Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning HOCTRLSWITCH HO Control Switch HOALGORITHM1 (HO Algorithm I) Network planning QCKMVHOEN MS Fast Moving HO Allowed YES(YES) Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. thus reducing the number of handovers and call drops and improving user experience and network KPIs. Ltd. For details. CELLIDX=0.. Postrequisite l l Verifying layered and hierarchical handover 1. LEVSTAT=3. After the A interface tracing window is displayed. 68-13 . Impact None. verify that certain cause information elements in the Handover Performed message (intra-BSC handover) or Handover Required message (inter-BSC handover) are ecv_norm_a_better_cell. Scenario It is recommended that the speed-sensitive handover function be applied only in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. LEVHOEN=YES. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set Level HO Allowed to NO(NO). On the Local Maintenance Terminal. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. LEVHOHYST=2. Start the tracing of the BSSAP messages on the A interface. 68.6 Configuring Speed-Sensitive Handover The speed-sensitive handover function enables a fast-moving MS in a micro cell to be handed over to a macro cell. INLAYHOTH=25. 2. see Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. Deactivating layered and hierarchical handover 1. NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite l The speed-sensitive handover function is not license-controlled. LEVLAST=2.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 68 Configuring Handover SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX.

l ----End Example An example script for configuring the speed-sensitive handover function is as follows: /*Configure speed-sensitive handover*/ SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Impact None.7 Configuring Directed Retry Directed retry is a special handover. Scenario The number of call access failures due to TCH congestion in the serving cell is reduced. After the A interface tracing window is displayed. In addition. NEs Involved BSC 68-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the MS is handed over to a neighboring cell. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set MS Fast Moving HO Allowed to YES(YES). run the SET CELLHOAD command to set the following parameters: MS Fast-moving Watch Cells. l On the Local Maintenance Terminal. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. and Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO[s]. MS Fast-moving Time Threshold[s]. and the call setup success rate is increased. Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 68 Configuring Handover Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. In this way. Step 2 Then. Deactivating speed-sensitive handover 1. thus preventing the load imbalance. CELLIDX=0. set the following parameters as required: l When HO Control Switch is set to HOALGORITHM2(HO Algorithm II). QCKMVHOEN=YES. set HCS HO watch time[0. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set MS Fast Moving HO Allowed to NO(NO). see Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. Start the tracing of the BSSAP messages on the A interface.5 s] and HCS HO valid time[0. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . MS Fast-moving Valid Cells. 68. verify that certain cause information elements in the Handover Performed message (intra-BSC handover) or Handover Required message (inter-BSC handover) are ecv_norm_a_better_cell. 2. the traffic load in each cell is balanced. the BSC initiates the directed retry procedure if no TCH is available in the serving cell or the load of the serving cell is heavy. Ltd.5 s] by running the SET CELLHOBASIC command on the Local Maintenance Terminal. For details. Postrequisite l l Verifying speed-sensitive handover 1.. During the assignment process.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 68 Configuring Handover Prerequisite l The directed retry function is not license-controlled. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. 68. the hando_det message is displayed. DIRECTRYEN=YES. For details. Verifying deactivation of directed retry: The operations are the same as those for Verifying directed retry. 68-15 . run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set Directed Retry to NO(NO). Ltd. 2. Start the tracing of RSL messages on the Abis interface. run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set Directed Retry to YES(YES). see Tracing RSL Messages on the Abis Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide.8 Configuring Chain Cell Handover The chain cell handover function enables a fast-moving MS to be preferentially handed over to a chain neighboring cell. Preparation Table 68-7 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring directed retry Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning DIRECTRYEN Direct Retry YES(YES) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Postrequisite l l Verifying directed retry 1. ----End Example An example script for configuring the directed retry function is as follows: /*Configure directed retry*/ MOD CELLBASICPARA: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Verify that the hando_det message is not displayed. After the Abis interface tracing window is displayed. CELLIDX=0. 2. Deactivating directed retry 1.

NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite l The chain cell handover function is not license-controlled.5s] 3 Network planning TIMEPUNISH Quick Handover Punish Time[s] 10 Network planning HOPUNISHVALUE Quick Handover Punish Value[dB] 63 Network planning HOOFFSET Quick Handover Offset [dB] 68 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Preparation Table 68-8 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring chain cell handover 68-16 Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning HOCTRLSWITCH HO Control Switch HOALGORITHM1 (HO Algorithm I) Network planning QUICKHOEN Quick Handover Enable YES(YES) Network planning HOUPTRIGE Quick Handover Up Triger Level[dB] 50 Network planning HODOWNTRIGE Quick Handover Down Triger Level[dB] 50 Network planning MOVESPEEDTHRES Quick Move Speed Thres[m/s] 35 Network planning HOSTATICTIME Quick Handover Static Time[0. selected routes. Impact None. and the call continuity and low call drop rate are ensured. Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 68 Configuring Handover Scenario With this function. which is controlled by the setting of Chain Neighbor Cell.. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . This function applies to the urban backbone roads. l The target cell must be a chain neighboring cell of the serving cell.5s] 4 Network planning HOLASTTIME Quick Handover Last Time [0. the handover success rate of a fast-moving MS is increased. and high-speed railroads.

Quick Handover Last Time [0. 68-17 . 68. CELLIDX=0. HOUPTRIGE=50. ----End Example An example script for configuring the chain cell handover function is as follows: /*Configure chain cell handover*/ SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Postrequisite l l Verifying chain cell handover 1. CELLIDX=0. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. 2. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set Quick Handover Enable to YES(YES) and set PBGT Watch Time [s] and PBGT Valid Time[s] as required. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Quick Handover Punish Value[dB]. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set Quick Handover Enable to NO(NO). Scenario None. and Quick Handover Offset[dB].HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 68 Configuring Handover Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Quick Handover Static Time[0. HOPUNISHVALUE=63. verify that the values of certain cause information elements (IEs) in the Handover Performed message (intra-BSC handover) or Handover Required message (inter-BSC handover) are ecv_norm_a_better_cell. QUICKHOEN=YES.9 Configuring Better Cell Handover Evolving from the inter-layer handover and PBGT handover in handover algorithm I. TIMEPUNISH=10.. Ltd. HOSTATICTIME=4. HOLASTTIME=3. HOOFFSET=68. Quick Move Speed Thres[m/s]. NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite l Issue 02 (2010-09-20) The better cell handover function is not license-controlled. the better cell handover is the specific handover decision in handover algorithm II. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. HODOWNTRIGE=50. MOVESPEEDTHRES=35. For details. run the MOD CELLHOFAST command to set the parameters including Quick Handover Up Triger Level[dB]. Quick Handover Punish Time[s]. Quick Handover Down Triger Level[dB]. After the A interface tracing window is displayed. Start the tracing of the BSSAP messages on the A interface.5s].5s]. see Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. Impact None. MOD CELLHOFAST: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Deactivating chain cell handover 1.

----End Example An example script for configuring the better cell handover function is as follows: /*Configure better cell handover*/ SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Postrequisite l l 68-18 Verifying better cell handover 1. Start the tracing of the BSSAP messages on the A interface. For details. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set Better Cell Handover Enable to YES(YES) and set Better Cell HO Watch Time[s] and Better Cell HO Valid Time[s] as required. 2. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2. see Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. Preparation Table 68-9 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring better cell handover Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning HOCTRLSWITCH HO Control Switch HOALGORITHM2 (HO Algorithm II) Network planning BETTERCELLHOEN Better Cell Handover Enable YES(YES) Network planning BETTERCELLSTATTIME Better Cell HO Watch Time[s] 3 Network planning BETTERCELLLASTTIME Better Cell HO Valid Time[s] 2 Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. verify that the values of certain cause information elements (IEs) in the Handover Performed message (intra-BSC handover) or Handover Required message (inter-BSC handover) are ecv_norm_a_better_cell. Ltd. Deactivating better cell handover Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. CELLIDX=0. BETTERCELLLASTTIME=2.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 68 Configuring Handover l The better cell handover function is effective only when HO algorithm II is enabled. BETTERCELLSTATTIME=3.. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . After the A interface tracing window is displayed. BETTERCELLHOEN=YES.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 1. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) 68 Configuring Handover On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. Ltd. 68-19 . run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set Better Cell Handover Enable to NO(NO).

.

. the 8 kbit/s Ater resources are allocated. NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite l The Flex Ater function is not license-controlled. Scenario When the TC subrack is configured remotely. If full-rate channels are used over the Um interface. Ltd. 69-1 . the Ater resources are allocated according to the service type during a call connection. If half-rate channels are used over the Um interface. Impact None. run the SET OTHSOFTPARA command to set Switch of 8K On Ater to YES. Preparation Table 69-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring Flex Ater Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source ATER8KSW Switch of 8K On Ater YES Network planning ATERCONGSTRATIO Congestion Ratio on Ater Resource[%] 85 Network planning ATERCONGHRFLAG HR Allocation Flag while Ater Resource Congested Open Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 69 69 Configuring Flex Ater Configuring Flex Ater With the Flex Ater function. the expenditure on transmission on the Ater interface is effectively reduced. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the 16 kbit/s Ater resources are allocated.

Deactivating Flex Ater 1. and hold on the call. In the displayed querying results. In this manner. 3. 69-2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. start the querying of the Ater resources.. and the processing capability of the system is improved. AterCongHRFlag=Open. see Maintaining Ater Interface Resources in the BSC LMT User Guide.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 69 Configuring Flex Ater When the Ater resources are insufficient. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . 2. run the SET OTHSOFTPARA command to set Switch of 8K On Ater to NO. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ----End Example An example script for configuring the Flex Ater function is as follows: /*Configure Flex Ater*/ SET OTHSOFTPARA: Ater8KSw=YES. In a cell using half-rate channels. make a call using an MS supporting half-rate channels. Postrequisite l l Verifying Flex Ater 1. For details. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the congestion of Ater resources is alleviated. AterCongstRatio=85. If you detect that any half-rate channel is occupied. verify that part of the occupied Ater resources is 8 kbit/s Ater resources. run the DSP CHNSTAT command to monitor the channel status. the half-rate Ater resources are preferentially allocated through the settings of Congestion Ratio on Ater Resource(%) and HR Allocation Flag while Ater Resource Congested. Ltd.

Preparation Table 70-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring Abis transmission backup Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning BTSIDX BTS Index 0 Network planning TRANSMODE Transmission Mode TER_AND_SAT_T RANS(Terrestrial and Satellite Transmission) Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 70 70 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup Configuring Abis Transmission Backup When the active SDH transmission link is faulty due to a natural disaster. see Activate BSC License. thus maintaining the normal operation of the network.. Scenario This feature is applicable in the case of Abis over TDM and not applicable in the case of Abis over IP. Ltd. l Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. For details. NEs Involved BSC and BTS Prerequisite l The Abis transmission backup function is license-controlled. Impact None. l This function is applied only in the case of Abis over TDM. 70-1 . the GBSS automatically switches the terrestrial TDM transmission link on the Abis interface to a backup satellite transmission link.

Ltd. Postrequisite l Deactivating Abis transmission backup 1. BTSIDX=0. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the MOD BTSTRANS command to set Transmission Mode to TER_AND_SAT_TRANS(Terrestrial and Satellite Transmission). TransMode=TER_AND_SAT_TRANS. ----End Example An example script for configuring the Abis transmission backup function is as follows: /*Configure Abis transmission backup*/ MOD BTSTRANS: IDXTYPE=BYIDX.. 70-2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.70 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . run the MOD BTSTRANS command to set Transmission Mode to a value other than TER_AND_SAT_TRANS(Terrestrial and Satellite Transmission).

HLR.. NEs Involved BSC. 71-1 . Ltd. and MSC/VLR Prerequisite l The function of end-to-end MS signaling tracing is not license-controlled. Preparation Table 71-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring end-to-end MS signaling tracing Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source END2ENDTRACESTATE Support end-to-end user tracing function YES(YES) Network planning AINTERMSGTRACE Trace A interface messages[end-to-end user tracing] YES(YES) Network planning HOCTRLSWITCH Support BSS INVOKE TRACE message report [end-to-end user tracing] YES(YES) Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 71 71 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing The function of end-to-end MS signaling tracing enables the tracing of faults of an NE based on the collected information about specified users with only a small number of resources occupied. thus facilitating fault rectification. Scenario The information about the whole procedure related to a faulty user is collected. Impact None.

Verify that at least one single-user tracing task that is initiated at the network side is present. see Maintaining Ater Interface Resources in the BSC LMT User Guide. Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) . SendBssInvokeTrace=YES. Postrequisite l l Verifying end-to-end MS signaling tracing 1. AInterMsgTrace=YES. and Support BSS INVOKE TRACE message report[end-to-end user tracing] to YES(YES). Start the tracing task management on the Abis interface.71 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the SET OTHSOFTPARA command to set Support end-to-end user tracing function. Use the test MS to initiate a call. Trace A interface messages[end-to-end user tracing]. Deactivating end-to-end MS signaling tracing 1.. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2. run the SET OTHSOFTPARA command to set Support end-to-end user tracing function to NO(NO). 3. For details. ----End Example An example script for configuring the function of end-to-end MS signaling tracing is as follows: /*Configure end-to-end MS signaling tracing*/ SET OTHSOFTPARA: End2EndTraceState=YES. 71-2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

Impact None. NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite l The PDCH dynamic adjustment function is not license-controlled. the impact of GPRS services on the original GSM voice services is minimized. 72-1 . maintenance and configuration workloads are reduced. Preparation Table 72-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring PDCH dynamic adjustment Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning TRXBN TRX Board No.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 72 72 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment The function of PDCH dynamic adjustment enables the automatic conversion between TCHs and PDCHs as required instead of configuring fixed PDCHs. l The GPRS/EGPRS services are configured. 0 Network planning CHNO Channel No. and the channel utilization and network capacity are improved. l An external PCU is configured. Scenario With this function.. 0 Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.

CHTYPE=DPDCH. 72-2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 72 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source CHTYPE Channel Type DPDCH(Dynamic PDCH) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Postrequisite l Deactivating PDCH dynamic adjustment 1.. CELLIDX=0. run the MOD CHAN command to set Channel Type to DPDCH(Dynamic PDCH). TRXBN=0. Ltd. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. CHNO=0. ----End Example An example script for configuring the function of PDCH dynamic adjustment is as follows: /*Configure PDCH dynamic adjustment*/ MOD CHAN: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. run the MOD CHAN command to set Channel Type to DPDCH(Dynamic PDCH).

l The IWF is configured in the MSC.4 Kbps circuit switched data Issue 02 (2010-09-20) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example Source IDXTYPE Index Type BYIDX(By Index) Network planning CELLIDX Cell Index 0 Network planning DATATRAFFSET Data service Allowed T14_4K(4) Network planning Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.4 kbps CSD services. NEs Involved BSC and MSC Prerequisite l The function of 14.4 Kbps Circuit Switched Data Configuring 14.4 Kbps Circuit Switched Data Huawei GBSS supports the use of a single CS channel for transmitting PS services. Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 73 73 Configuring 14. Preparation Table 73-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring 14. 73-1 . including the 14. Scenario Compared with ordinary circuit PS services.4 kbps circuit switched data is not license-controlled.. this function provides circuit PS services with a higher bandwidth. l The MS must support the PS services. Impact None. l The PS services are enabled in the HLR for the corresponding users.

4 Kbps Circuit Switched Data HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. DATATRAFFSET=T14_4K-1.4 Kbps circuit switched data is as follows: /*Configure 14.73 Configuring 14. 73-2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ----End Example An example script for configuring the function of 14. run the MOD CELLOTHEXT command to clear T14_4K(4) in the Data service allowed drop-down list. Ltd. run the MOD CELLOTHEXT command to set Data service allowed to T14_4K(4).4 Kbps circuit switched data*/ MOD CELLOTHEXT: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Postrequisite l Deactivating 14. Issue 02 (2010-09-20) .4 Kbps circuit switched data 1. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. CELLIDX=0.